Relion® 670 series

Transformer protection RET670 2.0 ANSI

Application Manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 504 138-UUS
Issued: May 2014
Revision: -
Product version: 2.0

© Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................25
This manual............................................................................................25
Intended audience..................................................................................25
Product documentation...........................................................................26
Product documentation set................................................................26
Document revision history.................................................................27
Related documents............................................................................28
Document symbols and conventions......................................................28
Symbols.............................................................................................28
Document conventions......................................................................29
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.............................................30

Section 2 Application...........................................................................39
General IED application..........................................................................39
Main protection functions........................................................................40
Back-up protection functions..................................................................42
Control and monitoring functions............................................................44
Communication.......................................................................................47
Basic IED functions.................................................................................49

Section 3 Configuration.......................................................................53
Introduction.............................................................................................53
Description of configuration RET670......................................................54
Introduction........................................................................................54
Description of configuration A30...................................................54
Description of configuration B30...................................................56
Description of configuration A40...................................................58
Description of configuration B40A................................................60
Description of configuration B40...................................................62
Description of configuration A10...................................................64
Description of configuration A25...................................................66

Section 4 Analog inputs.......................................................................69

Analog inputs..........................................................................................69
Introduction........................................................................................69
Setting guidelines..............................................................................69
Setting of the phase reference channel........................................69

1
Application Manual
Table of contents

Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................99

Display..................................................................................................100
LEDs.....................................................................................................102
Keypad..................................................................................................102
Local HMI functionality..........................................................................104
Protection and alarm indication.......................................................104
Parameter management .................................................................105
Front communication.......................................................................106

Section 6 Differential protection........................................................107

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T) and T3WPDIF
(87T).....................................................................................................107
Identification....................................................................................107
Application.......................................................................................107
Setting guidelines............................................................................108
Restrained and unrestrained differential protection....................108
Elimination of zero sequence currents.......................................112
Inrush restraint methods.............................................................112
Overexcitation restraint method..................................................112
Cross-blocking between phases.................................................113
External/Internal fault discriminator............................................113
On-line compensation for on-load tap-changer position.............115
Differential current alarm............................................................116
Open CT detection.....................................................................116
Switch onto fault feature.............................................................117
Setting example...............................................................................117
Introduction.................................................................................117
Typical main CT connections for transformer differential
protection....................................................................................118
Application Examples.................................................................119
Summary and conclusions.........................................................128
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87).....................130
Identification....................................................................................130
Application.......................................................................................131
The basics of the high impedance principle...............................131
Connection examples for high impedance differential
protection.........................................................................................137
Connections for three-phase high impedance differential
protection....................................................................................137

2
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF (87)...............................................................................138
Setting guidelines............................................................................139
Configuration..............................................................................140
Settings of protection function....................................................140
T-feeder protection.....................................................................140
Autotransformer differential protection.......................................143
Tertiary reactor protection..........................................................147
Restricted earth fault protection (87N)........................................150
Alarm level operation..................................................................152
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N).........153
Identification....................................................................................153
Application.......................................................................................153
Transformer winding, solidly grounded.......................................154
Transformer winding, grounded through Zig-Zag grounding
transformer.................................................................................155
Autotransformer winding, solidly grounded................................156
Reactor winding, solidly grounded..............................................157
Multi-breaker applications...........................................................158
CT grounding direction...............................................................159
Setting guidelines............................................................................159
Setting and configuration............................................................159
Settings.......................................................................................160
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11).........161
Identification....................................................................................161
Application.......................................................................................161
Setting guidelines............................................................................163

Section 7 Impedance protection........................................................165

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR
(21D).....................................................................................................165
Identification....................................................................................165
Application.......................................................................................165
Introduction.................................................................................165
System grounding.......................................................................166
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................168
Load encroachment....................................................................169
Long transmission line application..............................................170
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................171
Tapped line application...............................................................179

3
Application Manual
Table of contents

Series compensation in power systems.....................................181

Challenges in protection of series compensated and
adjacent power lines...................................................................190
Impact of series compensation on protective IED of
adjacent lines..............................................................................203
Distance protection.....................................................................204
Setting guidelines............................................................................212
General.......................................................................................212
Setting of zone1..........................................................................213
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................213
Setting of reverse zone...............................................................214
Series compensated and adjacent lines.....................................215
Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................220
Setting of reach in resistive direction..........................................222
Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment
function.......................................................................................222
Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function
activated.....................................................................................224
Setting of minimum operating currents.......................................225
Setting of timers for distance protection zones...........................225
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................226
Identification....................................................................................226
Identification...............................................................................226
Application.......................................................................................226
Setting guidelines............................................................................226
Load encroachment characteristics............................................227
Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic..............232
Minimum operate currents..........................................................233
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS
(21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)..................................................234
Identification....................................................................................234
Application.......................................................................................234
System grounding.......................................................................234
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................238
Load encroachment....................................................................239
Short line application..................................................................240
Long transmission line application..............................................241
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................242
Tapped line application...............................................................250
Setting guidelines............................................................................252

4
Application Manual
 Table of contents

General.......................................................................................252
Setting of zone 1.........................................................................253
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................253
Setting of reverse zone...............................................................254
Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................255
Setting of reach in resistive direction..........................................256
Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment
function.......................................................................................257
Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
activated ....................................................................................259
Setting of minimum operating currents.......................................259
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics.............................................................................259
Setting of timers for distance protection zones...........................262
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
(21).......................................................................................................262
Identification....................................................................................262
Application.......................................................................................262
Generator underimpedance protection application.....................262
Setting guidelines............................................................................262
Configuration..............................................................................262
Settings.......................................................................................263
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21).........................................................267
Identification....................................................................................267
Application.......................................................................................267
Introduction.................................................................................267
System grounding.......................................................................267
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................271
Load encroachment....................................................................272
Short line application..................................................................273
Long transmission line application..............................................274
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................274
Tapped line application...............................................................280
Setting guidelines............................................................................283
General.......................................................................................283
Setting of zone1..........................................................................283
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................283
Setting of reverse zone...............................................................284
Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................285

5
Application Manual
Table of contents

Setting of reach in resistive direction..........................................286

Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment
function.......................................................................................287
Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function
activated.....................................................................................289
Setting of minimum operating currents.......................................289
Setting of timers for distance protection zones...........................289
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults
ZDARDIR..............................................................................................289
Identification....................................................................................290
Application.......................................................................................290
Setting guidelines............................................................................290
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC......................................292
Identification....................................................................................292
Application.......................................................................................292
Setting guidelines............................................................................293
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS
(21).......................................................................................................294
Identification....................................................................................294
Application.......................................................................................294
Setting guidelines............................................................................295
Load encroachment....................................................................296
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D).............297
Identification....................................................................................298
Application.......................................................................................298
System grounding.......................................................................298
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................302
Load encroachment....................................................................303
Short line application..................................................................304
Long transmission line application..............................................305
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................305
Tapped line application...............................................................312
Setting guidelines............................................................................314
General.......................................................................................314
Setting of zone 1.........................................................................315
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................315
Setting of reverse zone...............................................................316
Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................317
Setting of reach in resistive direction..........................................318

6
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment

function.......................................................................................319
Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
activated ....................................................................................321
Setting of minimum operating currents.......................................322
Setting of timers for distance protection zones...........................322
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
FRPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................322
Identification....................................................................................322
Application.......................................................................................323
Load encroachment characteristics.................................................328
Phase-to-ground fault in forward direction..................................329
Phase-to-ground fault in reverse direction..................................331
Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction...................................332
Setting guidelines............................................................................334
Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic..............335
Minimum operate currents..........................................................336
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................336
Identification....................................................................................336
Identification...............................................................................336
Application.......................................................................................336
Setting guidelines............................................................................337
Load encroachment characteristics............................................337
Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic..............343
Minimum operate currents..........................................................344
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS (21)....................................344
Identification....................................................................................344
Application.......................................................................................345
System grounding.......................................................................345
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................348
Load encroachment....................................................................349
Short line application..................................................................350
Long transmission line application..............................................351
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................352
Tapped line application...............................................................359
Setting guidelines............................................................................361
General.......................................................................................361
Setting of zone 1.........................................................................362
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................362

7
Application Manual
Table of contents

Setting of reverse zone...............................................................363

Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................364
Setting the reach with respect to load........................................365
Zone reach setting lower than minimum load impedance..........366
Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.........368
Other settings.............................................................................369
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS (21)..................................372
Identification....................................................................................373
Application.......................................................................................373
System grounding.......................................................................373
Fault infeed from remote end.....................................................376
Load encroachment....................................................................377
Short line application..................................................................378
Long transmission line application..............................................378
Parallel line application with mutual coupling.............................379
Tapped line application...............................................................387
Series compensation in power systems..........................................389
Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage
collapse limit...............................................................................390
Increase in power transfer..........................................................391
Voltage and current inversion.....................................................392
Impact of series compensation on protective IED of
adjacent lines..............................................................................401
Distance protection.....................................................................402
Underreaching and overreaching schemes................................403
Setting guidelines............................................................................410
General.......................................................................................410
Setting of zone 1.........................................................................411
Setting of overreaching zone......................................................411
Setting of reverse zone...............................................................412
Series compensated and adjacent lines.....................................412
Setting of zones for parallel line application...............................417
Setting of reach in resistive direction..........................................419
Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment
function.......................................................................................420
Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.........421
Parameter setting guidelines......................................................422
Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)..................................................425
Identification....................................................................................425
Application.......................................................................................425

8
Application Manual
 Table of contents

General.......................................................................................425
Basic characteristics...................................................................426
Setting guidelines............................................................................426
Power swing logic PSLPSCH ..............................................................434
Identification....................................................................................434
Application.......................................................................................434
Setting guidelines............................................................................436
Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring
during power swinging over the protected line...........................436
Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings................441
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)......................................................442
Identification....................................................................................442
Application.......................................................................................443
Setting guidelines............................................................................445
Setting example for line application............................................447
Setting example for generator application..................................452
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)................................................457
Identification....................................................................................457
Application.......................................................................................457
Setting guidelines............................................................................460
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ.........................................................464
Identification....................................................................................464
Application.......................................................................................464
Setting guidelines............................................................................467
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGVPDIS..............................................................................................469
Identification....................................................................................469
Application.......................................................................................469
Operating zones.........................................................................471
Zone 1 operation........................................................................473
Zone 2 operation........................................................................473
Zone 3 operation........................................................................474
CT and VT positions...................................................................475
Undervoltage seal-in function.....................................................475
Load encroachment for zone 2 and zone 3................................475
External block signals.................................................................476
Setting Guidelines...........................................................................477
General.......................................................................................477
Load encroachment....................................................................478
Under voltage seal-in..................................................................479

9
Application Manual
Table of contents

Section 8 Current protection..............................................................481

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC (50).........................................................................................481
Identification....................................................................................481
Application.......................................................................................481
Setting guidelines............................................................................482
Meshed network without parallel line..........................................482
Meshed network with parallel line...............................................484
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC
(51/67)..................................................................................................486
Identification....................................................................................486
Application.......................................................................................486
Setting guidelines............................................................................487
Settings for each step.................................................................489
2nd harmonic restrain.................................................................492
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N).............498
Identification....................................................................................498
Application.......................................................................................498
Setting guidelines............................................................................498
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC (51N/67N)......................502
Identification....................................................................................502
Application.......................................................................................502
Setting guidelines............................................................................504
Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)...................................504
Common settings for all steps....................................................507
2nd harmonic restrain.................................................................508
Parallel transformer inrush current logic.....................................509
Switch onto fault logic.................................................................510
Transformer application example...............................................511
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................515
Identification....................................................................................515
Application.......................................................................................515
Setting guidelines............................................................................517
Settings for each step ................................................................517
Common settings for all steps....................................................520
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................521
Identification....................................................................................521

10
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Application.......................................................................................521
Setting guidelines............................................................................523
Thermal overload protection, one time constant Fahrenheit/
Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26).............................................................532
Identification....................................................................................532
Application.......................................................................................532
Setting guideline..............................................................................533
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........534
Identification....................................................................................534
Application.......................................................................................534
Setting guideline..............................................................................535
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF
(50BF)...................................................................................................538
Identification....................................................................................538
Application.......................................................................................538
Setting guidelines............................................................................538
Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD)......................................542
Identification....................................................................................542
Application.......................................................................................542
Setting guidelines............................................................................543
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................543
Identification....................................................................................544
Application.......................................................................................544
Setting guidelines............................................................................546
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................550
Identification....................................................................................550
Application.......................................................................................550
Setting guidelines............................................................................552
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46).............................................556
Identification....................................................................................556
Application.......................................................................................556
Setting guidelines............................................................................557
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC..................................................557
Identification....................................................................................557
Application.......................................................................................557
SCB protection...........................................................................559
Setting guidelines............................................................................561
Restrike detection.......................................................................564
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC (46I2)..................................................................................564

11
Application Manual
Table of contents

Identification....................................................................................565
Application.......................................................................................565
Features.....................................................................................566
Generator continuous unbalance current capability...................566
Setting guidelines............................................................................568
Operate time characteristic.........................................................569
Pickup sensitivity........................................................................570
Alarm function.............................................................................570
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V)...........571
Identification....................................................................................571
Application.......................................................................................571
Base quantities...........................................................................572
Application possibilities...............................................................572
Undervoltage seal-in...................................................................572
Setting guidelines............................................................................573
Explanation of the setting parameters........................................573
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and
step-up transformer....................................................................574
Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.......................575

Section 9 Voltage protection.............................................................577

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................577
Identification....................................................................................577
Application.......................................................................................577
Setting guidelines............................................................................578
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........578
Disconnected equipment detection............................................578
Power supply quality ..................................................................578
Voltage instability mitigation.......................................................579
Backup protection for power system faults.................................579
Settings for Two step undervoltage protection...........................579
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).................................581
Identification....................................................................................581
Application.......................................................................................581
Setting guidelines............................................................................582
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformers..........................................................583
Equipment protection, capacitors...............................................583
Power supply quality...................................................................583
High impedance grounded systems...........................................583

12
Application Manual
 Table of contents

The following settings can be done for the two step

overvoltage protection................................................................583
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............586
Identification....................................................................................586
Application.......................................................................................586
Setting guidelines............................................................................586
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformers..........................................................587
Equipment protection, capacitors...............................................587
Power supply quality...................................................................587
High impedance grounded systems...........................................587
Direct grounded system..............................................................589
Settings for Two step residual overvoltage protection................589
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)............................................591
Identification....................................................................................591
Application.......................................................................................591
Setting guidelines............................................................................594
Recommendations for input and output signals.........................594
Settings.......................................................................................594
Service value report....................................................................595
Setting example..........................................................................596
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60).....................................597
Identification....................................................................................597
Application.......................................................................................597
Setting guidelines............................................................................599
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)..................................................601
Identification....................................................................................601
Application.......................................................................................601
Setting guidelines............................................................................601
Advanced users settings............................................................601

Section 10 Frequency protection.........................................................603

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................603
Identification....................................................................................603
Application.......................................................................................603
Setting guidelines............................................................................604
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........604
Power system protection, by load shedding...............................605
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................605
Identification....................................................................................605

13
Application Manual
Table of contents

Application.......................................................................................605
Setting guidelines............................................................................606
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........606
Power system protection, by generator shedding......................606
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................607
Identification....................................................................................607
Application.......................................................................................607
Setting guidelines............................................................................607

Section 11 Multipurpose protection.....................................................609

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................609
Identification....................................................................................609
Application.......................................................................................609
Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function..................610
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................613
Application possibilities...............................................................613
Inadvertent generator energization.............................................614
Setting guidelines............................................................................615
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection...............615
Negative sequence overcurrent protection.................................617
Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC
or ANSI standards......................................................................620
Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators
and circuit breaker head flashover protection for generators.....622
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and
step-up transformer....................................................................623
Loss of excitation protection for a generator..............................623

Section 12 System protection and control...........................................627

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC..............................................................627
Identification....................................................................................627
Application.......................................................................................627
Setting guidelines............................................................................629
Setting example..........................................................................629

Section 13 Secondary system supervision..........................................633

Current circuit supervision (87).............................................................633
Identification....................................................................................633
Application.......................................................................................633
Setting guidelines............................................................................634
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC......................................................634

14
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Identification....................................................................................634
Application.......................................................................................634
Setting guidelines............................................................................635
General.......................................................................................635
Setting of common parameters..................................................636
Negative sequence based..........................................................636
Zero sequence based.................................................................637
Delta V and delta I .....................................................................638
Dead line detection.....................................................................639
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................639
Identification....................................................................................639
Application.......................................................................................639
Setting guidelines............................................................................640

Section 14 Control...............................................................................643
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25).....................................................................................643
Identification....................................................................................643
Application.......................................................................................643
Synchronizing.............................................................................643
Synchronism check....................................................................644
Energizing check........................................................................646
Voltage selection........................................................................647
External fuse failure....................................................................648
Application examples.......................................................................649
Single circuit breaker with single busbar....................................650
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage
selection.....................................................................................651
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage
selection.....................................................................................652
Double circuit breaker.................................................................653
Breaker-and-a-half......................................................................654
Setting guidelines............................................................................657
Apparatus control APC.........................................................................662
Application.......................................................................................662
Bay control (QCBAY)..................................................................666
Switch controller (SCSWI)..........................................................667
Switches (SXCBR/SXSWI).........................................................667
Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN)................................668
Interaction between modules...........................................................670
Setting guidelines............................................................................672

15
Application Manual
Table of contents

Bay control (QCBAY)..................................................................673

Switch controller (SCSWI)..........................................................673
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI).............................................................674
Bay Reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................675
Reservation input (RESIN).........................................................675
Voltage control......................................................................................675
Identification....................................................................................675
Application.......................................................................................676
Setting guidelines............................................................................711
TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC general settings...................................711
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) Setting group .......................712
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) general settings.........................721
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGAPC...............................................................................................722
Identification....................................................................................722
Application.......................................................................................722
Setting guidelines............................................................................723
Selector mini switch VSGAPC..............................................................723
Identification....................................................................................723
Application.......................................................................................724
Setting guidelines............................................................................724
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC...............................................................................................725
Identification....................................................................................725
Application.......................................................................................725
Setting guidelines............................................................................725
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...............................725
Identification....................................................................................725
Application.......................................................................................726
Setting guidelines............................................................................726
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................726
Identification....................................................................................726
Application.......................................................................................727
Setting guidelines............................................................................727
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD..........................................727
Identification....................................................................................727
Application.......................................................................................727
Setting guidelines............................................................................730
Interlocking (3)......................................................................................730
Configuration guidelines..................................................................731

16
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................732

Application..................................................................................732
Signals from bypass busbar.......................................................732
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................733
Configuration setting...................................................................737
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)..................................738
Application..................................................................................738
Configuration..............................................................................738
Signals from all feeders..............................................................738
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................741
Configuration setting...................................................................742
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................743
Application..................................................................................743
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................744
Configuration setting...................................................................745
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................746
Application..................................................................................746
Signals from all feeders..............................................................746
Configuration setting...................................................................749
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)..................750
Application..................................................................................750
Signals in single breaker arrangement.......................................750
Signals in double-breaker arrangement.....................................753
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement................................756
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3).......................757
Application..................................................................................757
Signals in single breaker arrangement.......................................758
Signals in double-breaker arrangement.....................................763
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement.................................764
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3).............................................764
Application..................................................................................764
Configuration setting...................................................................765
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................766
Application..................................................................................766
Configuration setting...................................................................767
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV..........................................................................768

Section 15 Scheme communication....................................................769

17
Application Manual
Table of contents

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection

ECPSCH (85).......................................................................................769
Identification....................................................................................769
Application.......................................................................................769
Setting guidelines............................................................................770
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85).............................................770
Identification....................................................................................770
Application.......................................................................................771
Fault current reversal logic.........................................................771
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................772
Setting guidelines............................................................................772
Current reversal..........................................................................772
Weak-end infeed........................................................................774

Section 16 Logic..................................................................................775
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94).......................775
Identification....................................................................................775
Application.......................................................................................775
Three-pole tripping ....................................................................776
Single- and/or three-pole tripping...............................................777
Single-, two- or three-pole tripping.............................................779
Lock-out......................................................................................779
Blocking of the function block.....................................................779
Setting guidelines............................................................................779
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................780
Identification....................................................................................780
Application.......................................................................................780
Setting guidelines............................................................................780
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................781
Identification....................................................................................781
Application.......................................................................................781
Setting guidelines............................................................................781
Logic for group alarm WRNCALH.........................................................781
Identification....................................................................................781
Application..................................................................................782
Setting guidelines.......................................................................782
Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................782
Identification....................................................................................782
Application..................................................................................782

18
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Setting guidelines.......................................................................782
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................782
Application.......................................................................................782
Configuration..............................................................................783
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN...................................................784
Identification....................................................................................784
Application.......................................................................................784
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................785
Identification....................................................................................785
Application.......................................................................................785
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
BTIGAPC..............................................................................................786
Identification....................................................................................787
Application.......................................................................................787
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16.................................................788
Identification....................................................................................788
Application.......................................................................................788
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
ITBGAPC..............................................................................................789
Identification....................................................................................789
Application.......................................................................................790
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...........................................................................791
Identification....................................................................................791
Application.......................................................................................791
Setting guidelines............................................................................791

Section 17 Monitoring..........................................................................793
Measurement........................................................................................793
Identification....................................................................................793
Application.......................................................................................794
Zero clamping..................................................................................795
Setting guidelines............................................................................796
Setting examples........................................................................799
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)..................................................806
Identification....................................................................................806
Application.......................................................................................806
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)................................................807
Identification....................................................................................807
Application.......................................................................................807
Breaker monitoring SSCBR..................................................................807

19
Application Manual
Table of contents

Identification....................................................................................807
Application.......................................................................................807
Setting guidelines............................................................................811
Setting procedure on the IED.....................................................811
Event function EVENT..........................................................................812
Identification....................................................................................812
Application.......................................................................................812
Setting guidelines............................................................................813
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.............................................................813
Identification....................................................................................813
Application.......................................................................................814
Setting guidelines............................................................................815
Recording times..........................................................................817
Binary input signals....................................................................818
Analog input signals...................................................................819
Sub-function parameters............................................................819
Consideration.............................................................................820
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP...........................................821
Identification....................................................................................821
Application.......................................................................................821
Setting guidelines............................................................................822
Limit counter L4UFCNT........................................................................822
Identification....................................................................................822
Application.......................................................................................822
Setting guidelines.......................................................................822

Section 18 Metering............................................................................823
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT................................................................823
Identification....................................................................................823
Application.......................................................................................823
Setting guidelines............................................................................823
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR......824
Identification....................................................................................824
Application.......................................................................................824
Setting guidelines............................................................................825

Section 19 Station communication......................................................827

670 series protocols..............................................................................827
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol...............................................827
Application IEC 61850-8-1...............................................................827

20
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV..........................................................................829
Setting guidelines............................................................................829
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.....................................................................829
Application..................................................................................830
Setting guidelines.......................................................................830
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC.........................................................................................830
Application..................................................................................830
Setting guidelines.......................................................................830
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication....................830
Identification...............................................................................830
Application..................................................................................831
Setting guidelines.......................................................................833
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol...........................................834
Introduction......................................................................................834
Setting guidelines............................................................................837
Specific settings related to the IEC 61850-9-2LE
communication...........................................................................837
Loss of communication...............................................................838
Setting examples for IEC 61850-9-2LE and time
synchronization...........................................................................842
LON communication protocol...............................................................847
Application.......................................................................................847
SPA communication protocol................................................................849
Application.......................................................................................849
Setting guidelines............................................................................850
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...........................................851
Application.......................................................................................851
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND.................................................859
Identification....................................................................................859
Application.......................................................................................859
Setting guidelines............................................................................859
Settings.......................................................................................859

Section 20 Remote communication.....................................................861

Binary signal transfer............................................................................861
Identification....................................................................................861
Application.......................................................................................861
Communication hardware solutions...........................................861

21
Application Manual
Table of contents

Setting guidelines............................................................................863

Section 21 Basic IED functions...........................................................867

Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................867
Application.......................................................................................867
Change lock CHNGLCK.......................................................................867
Application.......................................................................................867
Denial of service DOS..........................................................................868
Application.......................................................................................868
Setting guidelines............................................................................869
IED identifiers.......................................................................................869
Application.......................................................................................869
Product information...............................................................................869
Application.......................................................................................869
Factory defined settings..................................................................869
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP......................................870
Identification....................................................................................870
Application.......................................................................................870
Setting guidelines............................................................................871
Parameter setting groups.....................................................................871
Application.......................................................................................871
Setting guidelines............................................................................871
Rated system frequency PRIMVAL......................................................872
Identification....................................................................................872
Application.......................................................................................872
Setting guidelines............................................................................872
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM....................................................872
Application.......................................................................................872
Setting guidelines............................................................................873
Global base values GBASVAL.............................................................873
Identification....................................................................................873
Application.......................................................................................873
Setting guidelines............................................................................874
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.....................................................874
Application.......................................................................................874
Setting guidelines............................................................................874
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................874
Application.......................................................................................874
Setting guidelines............................................................................875
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI........................................................875

22
Application Manual
 Table of contents

Application.......................................................................................875
Setting guidelines............................................................................875
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................875
Application.......................................................................................875
Frequency values............................................................................875
Setting guidelines............................................................................877
Test mode functionality TEST...............................................................882
Application.......................................................................................882
IEC 61850 protocol test mode....................................................882
Setting guidelines............................................................................883
Self supervision with internal event list.................................................883
Application.......................................................................................883
Time synchronization............................................................................884
Application.......................................................................................884
Setting guidelines............................................................................885
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization.........................886

Section 22 Requirements....................................................................887
Current transformer requirements........................................................887
Current transformer classification....................................................887
Conditions........................................................................................888
Fault current.....................................................................................889
Secondary wire resistance and additional load...............................889
General current transformer requirements......................................890
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements............................890
Transformer differential protection..............................................890
Distance protection.....................................................................891
Restricted ground fault protection (low impedance
differential)..................................................................................893
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards.........................................................................................895
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2,
class P, PR.................................................................................896
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX,
PXR (and old IEC 60044-6, class TPS
and old British Standard, class X)..............................................896
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE...........................896
Voltage transformer requirements........................................................897
SNTP server requirements...................................................................898
IEC 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements ......................................898

23
Application Manual
Table of contents

Section 23 Glossary............................................................................901

24
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning, pre-
engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power

engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes and
communication principles.

25
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions
on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The
manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control
functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

26
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported

by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/May 2014 First release

27
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to RET670 Identify number
Application manual 1MRK 504 138-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 504 140-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 504 141-BUS
Technical manual 1MRK 504 139-UUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 504 141-TUS

670 series manuals Identify number

Operation manual 1MRK 500 118-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 308-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 019-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 301-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 303-UUS
Edition 2
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

28
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to

the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a
hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
must be connected to another function block in the application configuration
to achieve a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.

29
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -
int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.

1.4.3 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL SECLLN0 AGSAL
AGSAL
ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM ALTIM
ALTMS ALTMS
ALTRK ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BBSPLLN0 LLN0
BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

30
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BBTPLLN0 LLN0
BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 LLN0
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTUC
PH3PTUC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
Table continues on next page

31
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 LLN0
COUVPTOV COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 LLN0
GF2MMXN GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF LLN0
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP LLN0
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR LLN0
GRPTTR
GRPTUC
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP LLN0
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
Table continues on next page

32
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF LLN0
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF LLN0
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LLN0
LAPPPDUP LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LLN0
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD LPHD
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LLN0
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
Table continues on next page

33
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LLN0
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 LLN0
NS2PTOC NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM LLN0
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
OV2PTOV OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC OCNDLLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM LLN0
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ LLN0
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV ROV2PTOV
Table continues on next page

34
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE LLN0
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 LLN0
AUT1RSYN AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF LLN0
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF LLN0
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
Table continues on next page

35
Application Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV PH1PTUV
VRPVOC VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL LLN0
ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
Table continues on next page

36
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

37
Application Manual
38
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

Section 2 Application

2.1 General IED application

RET670 provides fast and selective protection, monitoring and control for two- and three-
winding transformers, autotransformers, step-up transformers and generator-
transformer block units, phase shifting transformers, special railway transformers and
shunt reactors. The IED is designed to operate correctly over a wide frequency range in
order to accommodate power system frequency variations during disturbances and
generator start-up and shut-down.

RET670 has a fast, low-impedance differential protection function with very low
requirements on the CTs. It is suitable for differential applications with multi-breaker
arrangements with up to six restraint CT inputs. The differential protection function is
provided with a 2nd harmonic and waveform-block restraint feature to avoid tripping
for CT saturation and transformer inrush current, and 5th harmonic restraint to avoid
tripping for transformer overexcitation.

The differential function offers a high sensitivity for low-level internal faults by using
a sensitive differential protection feature based on an amplitude measurement and
directional comparison of the negative sequence components.

Multiple low impedance restricted ground-fault protection functions are available as a

sensitive and fast main protection against winding ground faults. This function
includes a internal/external fault discriminator for additional security.

Additionally, a high impedance differential protection function is available. It can be

used for different applications including restricted ground fault protection as winding
protection, autotransformer differential protection, shunt reactor protection, T-feeder
protection, busbar protection and generator differential protection.

Tripping and alarm signals from pressure relief, Buchholz and temperature devices can
be sent directly to RET670 via binary input channels for alarm and back-up purposes.
The binary inputs are highly stabilized against disturbances to prevent incorrect
operation due to, for example, DC system capacitive discharges or DC ground faults.

Distance protection functionality is available as back-up protection for faults within the
transformer and in the connected power system.

39
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

Positive, negative and zero sequence overcurrent functions, which can optionally be
made directional and/or voltage controlled, provide further alternative backup
protection. Thermal overload, overexcitation, over/under voltage and over/under
frequency protection functions are also available.

Breaker failure protection for each transformer breaker allows high speed back-up
tripping of surrounding breakers.

A built-in disturbance and event recorder provides valuable data to the user about
status and operation for post-fault disturbance analysis.

RET670 can optionally be provided with full control and interlocking functionality
including a synchrocheck function to allow integration of the main or local back-up
control functionality.

A pole slip protection function is also available in RET670 to detect, evaluate, and take
the required action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical
system parts swinging to each other can be separated with the line(s) closest to the
centre of the power swing, allowing the two systems to be stable when separated.

RET670 can be used in applications with the IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to
four merging units (MU) depending on the other functionality included in the IED.

Logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced logic capability allows allows
for special applications such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker
arrangements, closing of breaker rings and load transfer logic. Logic can be monitored
and debugged online in real time for testing and commissioning.

Communication via optical connections ensures immunity against disturbances.

2.2 Main protection functions

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3- = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
A03

40
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer differential protection, two winding 1-2
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer differential protection, three winding 1-2 1
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance differential protection 0-6
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0-3 2
LDRGFC 11RE Additional security logic for differential protection 0-1
L
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5
ZMQAPDIS
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2
ZMCAPDIS 21 Additional distance measuring zone, quadrilateral
characteristic
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5
ZMCAPDIS for series compensated lines
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series 0-2
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed 0-2
angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic 0-5
ZMMPDIS, 21 Fullscheme distance protection, quadrilateral for 0-5
ZMMAPDIS ground faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho characteristic 0-2
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional function for 0-1
ground faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment 0-2
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, 0-5
ZMRAPDIS separate settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed 0-2
angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0–1
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series compensated 0–1
lines
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1
Table continues on next page

41
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip/out-of-step protection 0-1

OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0–1
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
ZGVPDIS 21 Underimpedance for generators and transformers 0–1

2.3 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0-8 3
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrent protection 0-8 3

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0-8 3

EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual overcurrent protection 0-8 3
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence 0-8 1
overcurrent protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power 0-3
protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–2
Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0–2
Fahrenheit
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constant 0-6 3
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-6 6
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1
Table continues on next page

42
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-6

NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for 0-2
machines
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 0-3

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-3 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-3 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-3 1
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-2 1
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 4
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 4
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0-6 4

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-9 6

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

43
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

2.4 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transfor

mer

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 0-6 1
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, max 30 apparatuses 0-1 1
(6CBs) incl. interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1+5/APC30 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1+5/
APC3
0
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control 0-4 1
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control 0-4
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs 0-4 1
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs 0-4 1
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI 15 15
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point indication 16 16
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 3 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4
VCTRSEND Horizontal communication via GOOSE for VCTR 1 1
GOOSEVCTRR Horizontal communication via GOOSE for VCTR 7 7
CV
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 50 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
Secondary system supervision
Table continues on next page

44
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transfor

mer

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-5 3

FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-4 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 0-4
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 1-6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5
AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic blocks 40-280 40-28
PULSETIMER, 0
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0–1
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQ
T,
RSMEMORYQ
T,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQ
T, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQ
T,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic package 0–1
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node 16 16
representation
Table continues on next page

45
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transfor

mer

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18

ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node 16 16
representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and 12 12
overflow supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU,
CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for service value presentation of secondary 1 1
analog inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1
A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 64 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 16 16
16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for Measured Value 24 24
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-6 18-
M16
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3 3
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
Table continues on next page

46
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transfor

mer

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1

I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defiend signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20 20
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6 6

2.5 Communication

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC 1 1
60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol 1
CHSERRS48 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
5
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH2TCP,
CH3TCP,
CH4TCP
Table continues on next page

47
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1 1

protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1
communication protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1 1
GOOSEINTLK Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 59
RCV
GOOSEBINR Goose binary receive 16 16
CV
GOOSEDPRC GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64 64
V
GOOSEINTR GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32 32
CV
GOOSEMVR GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60 60
CV
GOOSESPRC GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64 64
V
GOOSEVCTR GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive 1
CONF
VCTRSEND Horizontal communication via GOOSE for VCTR 1
GOOSEVCTR Horizontal communication via GOOSE for VCTR 7
RCV
MULTICMDR Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10
CV,
MULTICMDS
ND
FRONT, Ethernet configuration of links 1 1
LANABI,
LANAB,
LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of link one 1 1
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1
Table continues on next page

48
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Transformer Transform

er

RET670 (B40A)
RET670

SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1

LPHD Physical device information 1 1
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols 1 1
such as DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over 1 1
ethernet communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1 1
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1 1

Process bus communication IEC 61850-9-2 1)

PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P03

Remote communication
Binary signal transfer receive/transmit 6/36 6/36
Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1
Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3 6/3/3
Scheme communication
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent 0-1
protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for 0-1
residual overcurrent protection

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

2.6 Basic IED functions

Table 2: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
Table continues on next page

49
Application Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Application

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
SYNCHBIN, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
ALTRK Service tracking
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication
Table continues on next page

50
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON
LONSPA SPA communication protocol
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

51
Application Manual
52
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

Section 3 Configuration

3.1 Introduction

There are four different software alternatives with which the IED can be ordered. The
intention is that these configurations shall suit most applications with minor or no
changes. The few changes required on binary input and outputs can be done from the
signal matrix tool in the PCM600 engineering platform.

The main protection functions are switched Disabled at delivery. Back-up functions
that are not generally used are also set toDisabled.

The configurations are:

• Two-winding transformer. Single-breaker arrangement.

• Two-winding transformer. Multi-breaker arrangement.
• Three-winding transformer. Single-breaker arrangement.
• Three-winding transformer. Multi-breaker arrangement.

The Multi-breaker arrangement includes breaker-and-a-half and ring-breaker

arrangements.

The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen to be

required in the multi-breaker arrangement.

All IEDs can be reconfigured with the help of the ACT configuration tool in the
PCM600 engineering platform. The IED can be adapted to special applications and
special logic can be developed, such as logic for automatic opening of disconnectors
and closing of ring bays, automatic load transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on.

On request, ABB is available to support the re-configuration work, either directly or to

do the design checking.

Optional functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. It should
be noted that the standard only includes one binary input and one binary output module
and only the key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs. The required
total IO must be calculated and specified at ordering.

Hardware modules are configured with the hardware configuration tool in the PCM600
engineering platform.

53
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

The application configuration tool, which is part of the PCM600 engineering platform,
will further to the four arrangements above include also alternatives for each of them
with all of the software options configured. These can then be used directly or as
assistance of how to configure the options. As the number of options can vary all
alternatives possible cannot be handled.

The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with application comments
to explain why the signals have been connected in the special way. This is of course for
the special application features created, not “standard” functionality.

3.2 Description of configuration RET670

3.2.1 Introduction

The RET 670 comes preconfigured for several applications.

ANSI RET670 Configurations Description

RET670-A30 Single breaker, two winding transformer
RET670-b30 Double breaker, two winding transformer
RET670-B40 Double breaker, three winding transformer

Each of these configurations will be described below.

3.2.1.1 Description of configuration A30

This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers with single or
double busbars but with a single breaker arrangement on both sides. The protection
scheme includes a 3–phase tripping scheme with a synchronism check function for
manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to
always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker.

The differential protection is the main protection function. It provides fast and sensitive
tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and
overexcitation are standard features.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, V, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of additional analog inputs
allows connection of separate metering cores and a calibration parameter on the
measurement function allows calibration at site to very high accuracy.

54
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

WA1
WA2

W1_QB1 W1_QB2

RET670 A30 – 2 Winding Transformer in single

breaker arrangement 12AI (9I+3U)
W1_QA1 94 1→0 DFR/SER DR
SMP PTRC DRP RDRE
W1_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 4(3I>) 50 3I>> 50N IN>>
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC

84 ↑↓ MET I MET Isqi

TCM YLTC C MMXU C MSQI
W1_NCT
51N 4(IN>)
W1
EF4 PTOC
87N IdN/I
REF PDIF
87T 3Id/I>
W2_NCT
T2W PDIF
W2
87N IdN/I
REF PDIF

W2_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 3I> 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI

W2_VT
MET Usqi MET U 51N_67N 4(IN>) U>/I< MET P/Q
V MSQI V MMXU EF4 PTOC FUF SPVC CV MMXN

94 1→0 59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U< MET W/Varh

W2_QA1 SMP PTRC OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV ETP MMTR

MET UN
WA1
VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

84 ↑↓ 46 Iub> 60 Ud> 85 85 87 INd/I 3 Control 63 71
TCL YLTC BRC PTOC VDC PTOV EC PSCH ECRW PSCH CCS SPVC Q CBAY S SIMG S SIML

52PD PD
CC PDSC

Optional Functions
87 Id> 21 Z< 21 Z< 68 Zpsb 46I2 4(I2>) 67N IN> 37 P< 32 P> 24 U/f>
HZ PDIF ZMQ PDIS ZMH PDIS ZM RPSB NS4 PTOC SDE PSDE GUP PDUP GOP PDOP OEX PVPH

81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt <> 2(I>/U<) 90 ↑↓ 90 ↑↓ 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC CV GAPC TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud> 21 21 21 Z<_> 21D Z<_> 21D Z<_>

S XCBR Q CRSV S SCBR VD SPVC FDPS PDIS FMPS PDIS ZDA RDIR ZDM RDIR ZD RDIR

21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z<

ZGV PDIS ZMM PDIS ZMMA PDIS ZMQA PDIS ZSM GAPC

IEC05000848-3-en.vsd

IEC05000848 V4 EN

Figure 2: Configuration diagram for configuration A30

55
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

3.2.1.2 Description of configuration B30

This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers in multi-

breaker arrangement on one or both sides. The protection scheme includes a 3–phase
tripping scheme with a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low
voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the
transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. High voltage circuit
breaker synchronism check function is optional for system where synchronism check is
required to close the bays/rings.

The differential protection is the main protection function. It provides fast and sensitive
tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and
overexcitation are standard features. The function is provided with six stabilized inputs
which allows all CT sets possible with multi-breaker arrangements on several of the
windings to be possible.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, V, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of additional analog inputs
allows connection of separate metering cores and a calibration parameter on the
measurement function allows calibration at site to very high accuracy.

56
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

WA1 WA2
RET670 B30 - 2 Winding Transformer in multi
breaker arrangement 24AI (9I+3U, 9I+3U)
W1_QB1 94 1→0 DFR/DER DR
W1_QB2 SMP PTRC DRP RDRE
W1_CT2
50BF 3I> BF 52PD PD
CC RBRF CC PDSC
W1_QA1
94 1→0
W1_QA2 SMP PTRC
W1_CT1
50BF 3I> BF 52PD PD
CC RBRF CC PDSC

50N IN>> 51 4(3I>) 50 3I>>

QB61 QB62 EF PIOC OC4 PTOC PH PIOC

84 ↑↓ MET I MET Isqi

TCM YLTC C MMXU C MSQI
QB9
W1_NCT
51N 4(IN>)
W1 EF4 PTOC

87N IdN/I
87T 3Id/I>
W2_NCT REF PDIF
T2W PDIF
W2
87N IdN/I
REF PDIF

W2_CT
50BF 3I> BF 51 4(3I>) 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI
W2_VT
MET Usqi MET U 51N_67N 4(IN>) U>/I< MET P/Q
V MSQI V MMXU EF4 PTOC FUF SPVC CV MMXN

94 1→0 59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U< MET W/Varh

SMP PTRC OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV ETP MMTR
W2_WA1_VT
W2_QA1
MET UN 25 SC/VC MET UN
VN MMXU SES RSYN VN MMXU

WA1

Other Functions available from the function library

84 ↑↓ 46 Iub> 60 Ud> 85 85 87 INd/I 3 Control 63 71
TCL YLTC BRC PTOC VDC PTOV EC PSCH ECRW PSCH CCS SPVC Q CBAY S SIMG S SIML

Optional Functions
87 Id> 21 Z< 21 Z< 68 Zpsb 46I2 4(I2>) 67N IN> 37 P< 32 P> 24 U/f>
HZ PDIF ZMQ PDIS ZMH PDIS ZM RPSB NS4 PTOC SDE PSDE GUP PDUP GOP PDOP OEX PVPH

81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt <> 2(I>/U<) 90 ↑↓ 90 ↑↓ 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC CV GAPC TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud> 21 21 21 Z<_> 21D Z<_> 21D Z<_>

S XCBR Q CRSV S SCBR VD SPVC FDPS PDIS FMPS PDIS ZDA RDIR ZDM RDIR ZD RDIR

21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z<

ZGV PDIS ZMM PDIS ZMMA PDIS ZMQA PDIS ZSM GAPC

IEC05000849-3-en.vsd

IEC05000849 V4 EN

Figure 4: Configuration diagram for configuration B30

57
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

3.2.1.3 Description of configuration A40

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 6.

This configuration is used in applications with three-winding transformers with single

or double busbars but with a single-breaker arrangement on both sides. The protection
scheme includes a 3–phase tripping scheme with a synchronism check function for
manual closing of the low voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to
always energize the transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side and tertiary
breaker.

The differential protection is the main protection function. It provides fast and sensitive
tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and
overexcitation are standard features. The function is provided with three stabilized
inputs to involve all windings.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, V, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of additional analog inputs
allows connection of separate metering cores and a calibration parameter on the
measurement function allows calibration at site to very high accuracy.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic IED delivery. In many cases this is sufficient, in other
cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are
required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use two binary input
modules and two binary output modules. For systems without substation automation a
second binary output board might be required.

58
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

WA1
WA2

W1_QB1 W1_QB2

RET670 A40 – 3 Winding Transformer in single

breaker arrangement 24AI (9I+3U, 9I+3U)
W1_QA1 94 1→0 DFR/SER DR
SMP PTRC DRP RDRE
W1_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 4(3I>) 50 3I>> 50N IN>>
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC

84 ↑↓ MET I MET Isqi

TCM YLTC C MMXU C MSQI
W1_NCT
51N 4(IN>)
W1
EF4 PTOC
87N IdN/I
W3
REF PDIF
W2_NCT 87T 3Id/I>
T3W PDIF
W2
87N IdN/I
REF PDIF

W3_VT_3U0 94 1→0 59N 2(U0>) MET UN 51N_67N 4(IN>)

SMP PTRC ROV2 PTOV VN MMXU EF4 PTOC
W3_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 4(3I>) 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI
W2_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 3I> 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI

W3_QA1 W2_VT MET Usqi MET U 51N_67N 4(IN>) U>/I< MET P/Q
V MSQI V MMXU EF4 PTOC FUF SPVC CV MMXN

WA1 94 1→0 59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U< MET W/Varh

W2_WA1_VT
SMP PTRC OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV ETP MMTR

W2_QA1
MET UN 25 SC/VC MET UN
VN MMXU SES RSYN VN MMXU
WA1

Other Functions available from the function library

84 ↑↓ 46 Iub> 60 Ud> 85 85 87 INd/I 3 Control 63 71
TCL YLTC BRC PTOC VDC PTOV EC PSCH ECRW PSCH CCS SPVC Q CBAY S SIMG S SIML

52PD PD
CC PDSC

Optional Functions
87 Id> 21 Z< 21 Z< 68 Zpsb 46I2 4(I2>) 67N IN> 37 P< 32 P> 24 U/f>
HZ PDIF ZMQ PDIS ZMH PDIS ZM RPSB NS4 PTOC SDE PSDE GUP PDUP GOP PDOP OEX PVPH

81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt <> 2(I>/U<) 90 ↑↓ 90 ↑↓ 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC CV GAPC TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud> 21 21 21 Z<_> 21D Z<_> 21D Z<_>

S XCBR Q CRSV S SCBR VD SPVC FDPS PDIS FMPS PDIS ZDA RDIR ZDM RDIR ZD RDIR

21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z<

ZGV PDIS ZMM PDIS ZMMA PDIS ZMQA PDIS ZSM GAPC

IEC05000850-3-en.vsd

IEC05000850 V4 EN

Figure 6: Configuration diagram for configuration A40

59
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

3.2.1.4 Description of configuration B40A

This configuration gives complete protection for a three winding transformer with two
breakers on each winding as used on ring bus, or breaker and ½ arrangements. The
protection scheme includes a 3–phase tripping scheme. A provision for synch check is
also provided.

The main protection for the transformer is differential protection. Both the traditional
ampere turn differential, and differential protection based on Kirchoff’s Law are
available. Complementing the transformer differential protection is 87N, restricted
ground fault protection, and 87B bus bar protection.

Instantaneous and time-delayed overcurrent protection for phase and ground are
provided for each winding.

The following protection is also included:

• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage
• Overexcitation
• 4 step over frequency
• 4 step under frequency
• Breaker failure protection for each breaker
• Provisions for synch check

In addition, load tap changer control is included.

The necessary auxiliary functions such as fuse failure supervision are also included.

The necessary trip logic is provided to trip the circuit breakers.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, V, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of additional analog inputs
allows connection of separate metering cores and a calibration parameter on the
measurement function allows calibration at site to very high accuracy.

60
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

RET670 B40A - 3 Winding transformer in multi breaker arrangement 24AI (9I+3U, 9I+3U)

W1_VT MET UN MET U MET Usqi

VN MMXU V MMXU V MSQI

94 1→0 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control DFR/SER DR

BKR1
SMP PTRC S XCBR S CSWI Q CBAY DRP RDRE
W1_CT1
50BF 3I> BF MET I
CC RBRF C MMXU

94 1→0 3 Control 3 Control

BKR2 SMP PTRC S XCBR S CSWI
W1_CT2
50BF 3I> BF MET I
CC RBRF C MMXU

49 θ> U>/I< 51_67 4(3I>) 2(I>/U<) MET P/Q

TR PTTR FUF SPVC OC4 PTOC CV GAPC CV MMXN

W1 84 ↑↓ MET Isqi MET I

90 ↑↓
TCM YLTC C MSQI C MMXU
51N_67N 4(IN>)
TR1 ATCC 1
EF4 PTOC
W3 W1_CT_IG
51N_67N 4(IN>) 87N IdN/I
87T 3Id/I
EF4 PTOC REF PDIF
T3W PDIF
W2_CT_IG
W2 94 1→0 3 Control 3 Control
SMP PTRC S XCBR S CSWI

50BF 3I> BF MET I 51_67 4(3I>) 2(I>/U<)

CC RBRF C MMXU OC4 PTOC CV GAPC

W3_CT
BKR5 24 U/f> 2(I>/U<) U>/I< MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>)
OEX PVPH CV GAPC FUF SPVC CV MMXN OC4 PTOC
W2_CT1
50BF 3I> BF MET I
CC RBRF C MMXU

94 1→0 3 Control 3 Control

BKR3 SMP PTRC S XCBR S CSWI
1
W2_CT2
50BF 3I>BF MET I
CC RBRF C MMXU

94 1→0 3 Control 3 Control MET Isqi MET I

BKR4 W2_VT SMP PTRC S XCBR S CSWI C MSQI C MMXU

27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>) 59N 2(U0>) MET U MET Usqi MET UN

UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV ROV2 PTOV V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

46I2 4(I2>) 46 Iub> 27 3U< 81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt<> 25 SC/VC 84 ↑↓
NS4 PTOC BRC PTOC LOV PTUV SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC SES RSYN TCL YLTC

87 INd/I MET W/Varh 21 Z<

CCS SPVC ETP MMTR ZGV PDIS
Optional Functions

S SCBR

ANSI10000089 V4 EN

Figure 7: RET670 B40A – 3 Winding transformer in multibreaker arrangement

24AI

61
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

The following tables illustrate the external connections for the analog inputs, binary
inputs, and binary outputs for each of the configurations.

3.2.1.5 Description of configuration B40

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 8.

This configuration is used in applications with two winding transformers in multi-

breaker arrangement on one or both sides. The protection scheme includes a 3–phase
tripping scheme with a synchronism check function for manual closing of the low
voltage side breaker. The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the
transformer and be interlocked with an open LV side breaker. High voltage circuit
breaker synchronism check function is optional for system where synchronism check is
required to close the bays/rings.

The differential protection is the main protection function. It provides fast and sensitive
tripping for internal faults. Stabilization against through faults, inrush and
overexcitation are standard features. The function is provided with six stabilized inputs
which allows all CT sets possible with multi-breaker arrangements on several of the
windings to be possible.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, V, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation. The availability of additional analog inputs
allows connection of separate metering cores and a calibration parameter on the
measurement function allows calibration at site to very high accuracy.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic IED delivery. In many cases this is sufficient, in other
cases, for example with full control of all apparatuses included more IO cards are
required. Our proposal for a full version with control is to use three binary input
modules and two binary output modules. For systems without substation automation a
second binary output board might be required.

62
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

WA1 WA2
RET670 B40 - 3 Winding Transformer in multi
breaker arrangement 24AI (9I+3U, 9I+3U)
W1_QB1 94 1→0 DFR/DER DR
W1_QB2 SMP PTRC DRP RDRE
W1_CT2
50BF 3I> BF 52PD PD
CC RBRF CC PDSC
W1_QA1
94 1→0
W1_QA2 SMP PTRC
W1_CT1
50BF 3I> BF 52PD PD
CC RBRF CC PDSC

50N IN>> 51 4(3I>) 50 3I>>

QB61 QB62 EF PIOC OC4 PTOC PH PIOC

84 ↑↓ MET I MET Isqi

TCM YLTC C MMXU C MSQI
QB9
W1_NCT
51N 4(IN>)
W1 EF4 PTOC

W3
87N IdN/I
W2_NCT REF PDIF 87T 3Id/I>
T3W PDIF
W2
87N IdN/I
REF PDIF

W3_VT_3U0 94 1→0 59N 2(U0>) MET UN 51N_67N 4(IN>)

SMP PTRC ROV2 PTOV VN MMXU EF4 PTOC
W3_CT
50BF 3I> BF 51 4(3I>) 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI
W2_CT
50BF 3I> BF 51 4(3I>) 49 θ> MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC TR PTTR C MMXU C MSQI
W3_QA1 W2_VT
MET Usqi MET U 51N_67N 4(IN>) U>/I< MET P/Q
V MSQI V MMXU EF4 PTOC FUF SPVC CV MMXN
WA1
W2_WA1_VT 94 1→0 59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U< MET W/Varh
W2_QA1 SMP PTRC OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV ETP MMTR

MET UN 25 SC/VC MET UN

WA1 VN MMXU SES RSYN VN MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

84 ↑↓ 46 Iub> 60 Ud> 85 85 87 INd/I 3 Control 63 71
TCL YLTC BRC PTOC VDC PTOV EC PSCH ECRW PSCH CCS SPVC Q CBAY S SIMG S SIML

Optional Functions
87 Id> 21 Z< 21 Z< 68 Zpsb 46I2 4(I2>) 67N IN> 37 P< 32 P> 24 U/f>
HZ PDIF ZMQ PDIS ZMH PDIS ZM RPSB NS4 PTOC SDE PSDE GUP PDUP GOP PDOP OEX PVPH

81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt <> 2(I>/U<) 90 ↑↓ 90 ↑↓ 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC CV GAPC TR1 ATCC TR8 ATCC S CILO S CSWI S XSWI

3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud> 21 21 21 Z<_> 21D Z<_> 21D Z<_>

S XCBR Q CRSV S SCBR VD SPVC FDPS PDIS FMPS PDIS ZDA RDIR ZDM RDIR ZD RDIR

21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z< 21 Z<

ZGV PDIS ZMM PDIS ZMMA PDIS ZMQA PDIS ZSM GAPC

IEC05000851-3-en.vsd

IEC05000851 V4 EN

Figure 8: Configuration diagram for configuration B 40

63
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

3.2.1.6 Description of configuration A10

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 8.

This configuration is used in applications with two- or three- winding transformers

with single or double busbars and with a single or multi-breaker arrangements. The
protection scheme includes a 3–phase tripping scheme with a synchronism check
function for manual closing of the low voltage side breaker.

The high voltage breaker is foreseen to always energize the transformer and be
interlocked with an open LV side breaker.

The tripping from transformer auxiliaries such as buchholtz, temperature devices are
linked through the binary inputs which are stabilized against unnecessary operations
due to capacitive discharges. It can be done in this back-up IED to have it independent
from the main protection IED where differential functions are provided.

Back-up protection for faults inside the transformer but mainly for system faults are
provided by the phase and ground overcurrent functions provided for each of the
windings. If only a two winding transformer exists the neutral currents can be
connected to the ground fault functions instead of the default bay residual currents.

Measuring functions for S, P, Q, I, U, PF, f are available for local presentation on the
local HMI and/or remote presentation.

The following should be noted. The configuration is made with the binary input and
binary output boards in the basic IED delivery, and one 9I + 3U input transformer
module. It is possible to add IO as required to, for example have neutral currents
connected to ground fault functions. The configuration alternative can often be used for
two winding transformers and the neutral currents can then be connected instead of the
third winding inputs.

64
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

WA1
WA2

W1_QB1 W1_QB2

RET670 A10 – Transformer backup protection

12AI (9I+3U)
W1_QA1 94 1→0 DFR/SER DR
SMP PTRC DRP RDRE
W1_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 4(3I>) 50 3I>> 50N IN>> 51N 4(IN>)
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

MET I MET Isqi

C MMXU C MSQI

W1
W3

W2

94 1→0
SMP PTRC
W3_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 4(3I>) 51N 4(IN>) MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC EF4 PTOC C MMXU C MSQI
W2_CT
50BF 3I>BF 51 3I> 51N 4(IN>) MET I MET Isqi
CC RBRF OC4 PTOC EF4 PTOC C MMXU C MSQI

94 1→0 49 θ>
W3_QA1
W2_VT SMP PTRC TR PTTR

WA1 W2_WA1_VT MET UN 25 SC/VC MET UN

VN MMXU SES RSYN VN MMXU

W2_QA1

WA1

Other Functions available from the function library

87 Id> 87N IdN/I 46 Iub> 67N IN> 27 3U< 60 Ud> MET W/Varh MET U
HZ PDIF REF PDIF BRC PTOC SDE PSDE LOV PTUV VDC PTOV ETP MMTR V MMXU

MET UN MET P/Q 63 71 3 Control

V MSQI CV MMXN S SIMG S SIML Q CBAY

Optional Functions

46I2 4(I2>) 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>) 59N 2(U0>) 81 f< 81 f> 81 df/dt<> 60 Ud>
NS4 PTOC UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV ROV2 PTOV SA PTUF SA PTOF SA PFRC VD SPVC

S SCBR

IEC07000191-3-en.vsd

IEC07000191 V4 EN

Figure 9: Configuration diagram for configuration A10

65
Application Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Configuration

3.2.1.7 Description of configuration A25

The configuration of the IED is shown in Figure 8.

This configuration is used when RET670 is used as a separate tap changer control IED.
It can be used for single or parallel service where the communication between up to
eight control function blocks are either internal or over IEC 61850-8-1.

Both automatic and manual tap changer control are provided in the configuration. If the
manual control is required to be separate from the automatic control, it can be done in
any other IED670 where the local HMI interfaces to show position. Switching Auto-
Manual, Raise and Lower commands, and so on can be provided.

66
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 3
Configuration

RET670 A25 – Voltage Control 12AI (6I+6U)

84 ↑↓ DFR/SER DR 84 ↑↓
TCM YLTC DRP RDRE TCM YLTC

W1 MET UN MET Usqi MET U W1

VN MMXU V MSQI V MMXU

TRF1 TRF2

W2 W2
MET U MET Usqi MET UN
V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

TRF1_W2_VT
MET I MET Isqi MET P/Q 90 ↑↓
C MMXU C MSQI CV MMXN TR8 ATCC
TRF1_W2_CT

TRF2_W2_VT
90 ↑↓ MET P/Q MET Isqi MET I
TR8 ATCC CV MMXN C MSQI C MMXU

TRF2_W2_CT

TRF1_W2_QA1 TRF2_W2_QA1

QA11

Other Functions available from the function library

84 ↑↓ 90 ↑↓ 87 INd/I 46 Iub> 27 3U< 60 Ud> 94 1→0 MET W/Varh

TCL YLTC TR1 ATCC CCS SPVC BRC PTOC LOV PTUV VDC PTOV SMP PTRC ETP MMTR

63 71 3 Control
S SIMG S SIML Q CBAY

Optional Functions

50 3I>> 51_67 4(3I>) 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>) 46I2 4(I2>) 67N IN> 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)
PH PIOC OC4 PTOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC NS4 PTOC SDE PSDE UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

59N 2(U0>) 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud>

ROV2 PTOV S CILO S CSWI S XSWI S XCBR Q CRSV VD SPVC

IEC07000192 V3 EN

Figure 10: Configuration diagram for configuration A25

67
Application Manual
68
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Section 4 Analog inputs

4.1 Analog inputs

4.1.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in
the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms
in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as
well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input

module (TRM) type.

4.1.2 Setting guidelines

The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending

on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

4.1.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate

analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference.

69
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Example
The setting PhaseAngleRef=10 shall be used if a phase-to-ground voltage (usually the
A phase-to-ground voltage connected to VT channel number 10 of the analog card) is
selected to be the phase reference.

Setting of current channels

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be Wye (star) connected and can be
connected with the grounding point to the object or from the object. This information
must be set in the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A
positive value of current, power, and so on means that the quantity has the direction
into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For
directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the
direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See figure 11

A positive value of current, power, and so on (forward) means that the quantity has a
direction towards the object. - A negative value of current, power, and so on (reverse)
means a direction away from the object. See figure 11.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN

Figure 11: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CT_WyePoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction
defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. The following examples
show the principle.

Example 1
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

70
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Line

Transformer
Ip Ip Ip
Line

Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for

directional functions
Transformer
Is protection Is
Line protection

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000753_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000753 V1 EN

Figure 12: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

The figure 12 shows the normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The
settings for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line the
direction of the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This
means that the protection is looking towards the line.

Example 2
Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.

Figure 13: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

This example is similar to example 1, but here the transformer is feeding just one line
and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT
direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same
current from the same CT that is feeding the two IEDs. With these settings the
directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the
line.

Example 3
One IED used to protect two objects.

71
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Transformer
Line

Forward Reverse

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

en05000461_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000461 V1 EN

Figure 14: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

In this example one IED includes both transformer and line protection and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input
channels the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means
that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look
towards the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be
set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is
the transformer in this case.

When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction it shall
be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach in
forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria that
can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind and
check if it is acceptable for the application in question.

If the IED has a sufficient number of analog current inputs an alternative solution is
shown in figure 15. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the

72
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT
direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference
object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to
protect the line.

Transformer

Line

Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input

for line functions:
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with
Line as
Setting of current input Setting of current input reference object.
for transformer functions: for transformer functions: Correct setting is
Set parameter Set parameter "FromObject"
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"
en05000462_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000462 V1 EN

Figure 15: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

73
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Busbar

2
Busbar
Protection

2 1

en06000196_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000196 V1 EN

Figure 16: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

For busbar protection it is possible to set the CT_WyePoint parameters in two ways.

The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in figure 16, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in figure 16, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject.

The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case
for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 16, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject, and for
all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 16, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject.

74
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Regardless which one of the above two options is selected busbar differential
protection will behave correctly.

The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec
and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/5 A CT the following setting shall be
used:
• CTprim = 1000 (value in A)
• CTsec =5 (value in A).

Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most

commonly used CT connections
Figure 17 defines the marking of current transformer terminals commonly used around
the world:

In the SMAI function block, you have to set if the SMAI block is
measuring current or voltage. This is done with the parameter:
AnalogInputType: Current/voltage. The ConnectionType: phase -phase/
phase-earth and GlobalBaseSel.

P1 P2
IPri

ISec (H1) (H2)

S1 (X1) S2 (X2)
x S2 (X2) x S1 (X1)

P2 P1
(H2) (H1)

a) b) c)

en06000641.vsd
IEC06000641 V1 EN

Figure 17: Commonly used markings of CT terminals

Where:
a) is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive) polarity
b) and c) are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that
for these two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!

75
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices, the rated
secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values:

• 1A
• 5A

However in some cases the following rated secondary currents are used as well:

• 2A
• 10A

The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

It is recommended to:
• use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
1A and 2A secondary rating
• use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
5A and 10A secondary rating

Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase CT set to the

IED
Figure 18 gives an example about the wiring of a wye connected three-phase CT set to
the IED. It gives also an overview of the actions which are needed to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

76
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
1 2 4

I_C
I_B
I_A

3
SMAI_20
I_A
CT 600/5
I_B
Star Connected
I_C

ANSI3000002-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI13000002 V2 EN

Figure 18: Wye connected three-phase CT set with wye point towards the protected object

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-
phase CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) The current inputs are located in the TRM. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered for the example shown in Figure18.
'

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=ToObject

Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter
(CTStarPoint=ToObject) as set in this example causes no change on the measured currents. In
other words, currents are already measured towards the protected object.
Table continues on next page

77
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

3) These three connections are the links between the three current inputs and the three input
channels of the preprocessing function block 4). Depending on the type of functions, which
need this current information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in
parallel to the same three physical CT inputs.
4) The preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in power plants), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.
Section SMAI in this manual provides information on adaptive frequency tracking for the signal
matrix for analogue inputs (SMAI).
5) AI3P in the SMAI function block is a grouped signal which contains all the data about the
phases L1, L2, L3 and neutral quantity; in particular the data about fundamental frequency
phasors, harmonic content and positive sequence, negative and zero sequence quantities are
available.
AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4 are the output signals from the SMAI function block which contain the
fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the corresponding input channels
of the preprocessing function block.
AIN is the signal which contains the fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content
of the neutral quantity; this data is calculated by the preprocessing function block on the basis
of the inputs GRPL1, GRPL2 and GRPL3.

Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in the
figure below:

78
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED

IC
IB
IA

3 4
1

SMAI_20_2
IC BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IB ^GRP2L1 5 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
CT 800/1 IA ^GRP2N AIN
Star Connected

ANSI11000026-4-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000026 V4 EN

Figure 19: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its star point away from the protected object

In the example in figure 19 case everything is done in a similar way as in the above
described example (figure 18). The only difference is the setting of the parameter
CTStarPoint of the used current inputs on the TRM (item 2 in the figure):

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTWyePoint=FromObject

Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as
set in this example will negate the measured currents in order to ensure that the
currents are measured towards the protected object within the IED.

A third alternative is to have the residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set
connected to the IED as shown in the figure below.

79
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
6
IA

IB

IC
3

IN 1 4 SMAI2
1 BLOCK AI3P
2 AI 01 (I) ^GRP2_A AI1

IC ^GRP2_B AI2
3
^GRP2_C AI3
4 AI 02 (I)
^GRP2N AI4
IB 5 TYPE AIN
6 AI 03 (I)
CT 800/1
IA 7
Wye Connected
8 AI 04 (I)
5
9
2 10 AI 05 (I)
11
12 AI 06 (I)

Protected Object

ANSI06000644-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000644 V2 EN

Figure 20: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its star point away from the protected object and the residual/
neutral current connected to the IED

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-
phase CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth inputs
in the IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this
current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
3) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.

• CTprim=800A
• CTsec=1A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-N

Inside the IED only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set in
this example will have no influence on the measured currents (that is, currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
4) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels on the
preprocessing function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
CT inputs.
Table continues on next page

80
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

5) is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the
preprocessing function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/
neutral current is not connected to the IED. In that case the pre-processing block will calculate it
by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
6) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED

Figure 21 gives an example how to connect a delta connected three-phase CT set to the
IED. It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions in the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

81
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

A B C IED
2

1 4

IC
IB
IA

SMAI_20
3
IA-IB
DAB Connected

IB-IC
CT 600/5
in Delta

IC-IA

ANSI11000027-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000027 V2 EN

Figure 21: Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

82
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a delta connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs of the IED.
2) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing
function block 4). Depending on the type of functions which need this current information, more
then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 22:

83
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

A B C IED

2
4

IC
IB
IA

3 SMAI_20

IA-IC
DCA Connected

IB-IA
CT 800/1
in Delta

IC-IB

ANSI11000028-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000028 V2 EN

Figure 22: Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set

In this case, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example,
except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters
shall be entered:

CTprim=800A

CTsec=1A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

It is important to notice the references in SMAI. As inputs at Ph-Ph are expected to be

A-B, B-Crespectively C-A we need to tilt 180º by setting ToObject.

Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED

Figure 23 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It gives an
overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

84
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

IED
Protected Object

A B C

SMAI_20_2
1 BLOCK AI3P
(+) REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
INS
CT 1000/1

^GRP2_B AI3
a) (+) ^GRP2_C AI4
(-) ^GRP2_N AIN
(+)
b) (-)
INS
3
(-)
ANSI11000029-3-en.vsd
INP

ANSI11000029 V3 EN

Figure 23: Connections for single-phase CT input

85
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED.
2) is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
For connection (a) shown in figure 23:
CTprim = 1000 A
CTsec = 1A
CTWyePoint=ToObject

For connection (b) shown in figure 23:

CTprim = 1000 A
CTsec = 1A
CTWyePoint=FromObject
3) shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input
channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate values. The calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and
control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the power plants) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

Setting of voltage channels

As the IED uses primary system quantities the main VT ratios must be known to the
IED. This is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage
channel. The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a
phase-to-ground voltage from the VT.

Example
Consider a VT with the following data:

132kV 120V
3 3
EQUATION1937 V1 EN (Equation 1)

The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=120 (value in
V)

Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most

commonly used VT connections
Figure 24 defines the marking of voltage transformer terminals commonly used around
the world.

86
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

+ + A a A da A a
(H1) (X1) (H1) (X1) (H1) (X1)
VPri VSec

N n N dn B b
(H2) (X2) (H2) (X2) (H2) (X2)
a) b) c) d)

ANSI11000175_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000175 V1 EN

Figure 24: Commonly used markings of VT terminals

Where:
a) is the symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicate the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (positive) polarity
b) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-
ground connected VTs
c) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VTs
d) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VTs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices the rated
secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:

• 100 V
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 230 V

The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the
following examples.

Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground connected VT to

the IED
Figure 25 gives an example on how to connect the three phase-to-ground connected
VT to the IED. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to
make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within
the IED.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

87
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

A
B IED
C 2
5
3
66 kV
1 13
3
110V 14 AI 07 (I) SMAI2

3 15 BLOCK AI3P

16 AI 08 (V) ^GRP2_A AI1

17 ^GRP2_B AI2
18 AI 09 (V) ^GRP2_C AI3
66 kV 19 #Not used ^GRP2N AI4

3 20 AI 10 (V) TYPE AIN

110V 21
3 22 AI 11 (V)
4
23
24 AI 12 (V)

66 kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000599-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000599 V2 EN

Figure 25: A Three phase-to-ground connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-ground voltages to three VT inputs on the
IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. For these three voltage inputs, the
following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =66 kV
VTsec = 110 V
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.

66
66 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1903 V1 EN (Equation 2)

Table continues on next page

88
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the
type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block
might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs.
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing
block is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate
3Vo inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first
three input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel
can be connected to open delta VT input, as shown in figure 27.
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for
sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED

Figure 26 gives an example how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED.
It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well. It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels
(that is, rated primary voltage below 40 kV).

89
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

B
C
13.8kV 13.8kV IED
120V 120V

2
5
3
1 13
14 AI 07(I)
SMAI2
15 BLOCK AI3P
16 AI 08(V) ^GRP2_A (A-B) AI1

17 ^GRP2_B (B-C) AI2

AI 09(V) ^GRP2_C (C-A) AI3
18
#Not Used ^GRP2N AI4
19
TYPE AIN
20 AI 10(V)
21
22 AI 11(V) 4
23
24 AI 12(V)

ANSI06000600-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000600 V3 EN

Figure 26: A Two phase-to-phase connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of a phase-to-phase VT to the VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three
voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
Table continues on next page

90
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

3) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the
preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
VT inputs
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT. Note. If the paameters VA, VB, VC, VN should be used the open delta
must be connected here.
5) Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However
the following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high

impedance grounded or ungrounded netwoeks
Figure 27 gives an example about the wiring of an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of
VT connection presents a secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will
be equal to:

3Vo = 3 × VPh - Ph = 3 × VPh - Gnd

EQUATION1922-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 3)

The primary rated voltage of an open Delta VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Three series
connected VT secondary windings gives a secondary voltage equal to three times the
individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of open delta
VTs quite often have a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-
phase VT secondary voltage (110/3V in this particular example).

Figure 27 gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

91
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

B IED

C
2

6.6kV
13
3 AI 07 (I) 5
110V 14
3 15
16 AI 08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI 09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
6.6kV 19 3 ^GRP2_A AI1
1 # Not Used
20 AI 10 (V)
3 # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
110V 21 # Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 AI 11 (V)
+3Vo 22 ^GRP2N AI4
23 TYPE AIN
24 AI 12 (V)
4
6.6kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000601-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000601 V2 EN

Figure 27: Open delta connected VT in high impedance grounded power system

92
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of the open delta VT to one VT input on the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED

2) is the TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the
following setting values shall be entered:

VTprim = 3 × 6.6 = 11.43kV

EQUATION1923 V1 EN (Equation 4)

110
VT sec = 3 × = 110V
3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN (Equation 5)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.

6.6
3 × 6.6 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1925 V1 EN (Equation 6)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing
function block 5).
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog input and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations ) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall
be set accordingly.

93
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low
impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems
Figure 28 gives an example about the connection of an open delta VT to the IED for
low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this
type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will
be equal to:

VPh - Ph
3Vo = = VPh - Gnd
3
EQUATION1927-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 7)

The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Therefore, three
series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to
one individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such
open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase
VT secondary voltage, that is, 115V or 115/√3V as in this particular example. Figure
28 gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

94
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

B IED
C
2

138kV
13 5
3 14 AI07 (I)
115V
15
3
16 AI08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
138kV 1 19 3
# Not Used ^GRP2_A AI1
3 20 AI10 (V) # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
115V 21
# Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 +3Vo 22 AI11 (V)
^GRP2N AI4
23
AI12 (V) TYPE AIN
24
4
138kV
3
115V
3
ANSI06000602-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000602 V2 EN

Figure 28: Open delta connected VT in low impedance or solidly grounded power system

95
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED.

2) is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:

138
VTprim = 3× = 138kV
3
EQUATION1928 V1 EN (Equation 8)

115
VT sec = 3× = 115V
3
EQUATION1929 V1 EN (Equation 9)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that
the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open
delta VT.

138
138 3
=
115 115
3
EQUATION1930 V1 EN (Equation 10)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is
not connected in SMT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage
input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
5) preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in
the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be
left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required
only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters
DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

96
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 4
Analog inputs

Example on how to connect a neutral point VT to the IED

Figure 29 gives an example on how to connect a neutral point VT to the IED. This type
of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault in high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems the
primary value of V0 voltage will be equal to:

Vph - ph
V0 = = Vph - Gnd
3
EQUATION1932 V2 EN (Equation 11)

Figure 29 gives an overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

IED
Protected Object
2

5
13
14 AI07 (I)

A B C 15
16 AI08 (I)
SMAI2
17 BLOCK AI3P
18 AI09 (I)
# Not Used ^GRP2_A AI1
19 3
# Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
20 AI10 (V)
# Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
1 21 ^GRP2N AI4
22 AI11 (V)
TYPE AIN
23
R
Vo 24 AI12 (V)

6.6kV
3
100V
ANSI06000603-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000603 V2 EN

Figure 29: Neutral point connected VT

97
Application Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of neutral point VT to one VT input in the IED.

V0 shall be connected to the IED.

2) is the TRM or AIM where this voltage input is located. For this voltage input the following
setting values shall be entered:

6.6
VTprim = = 3.81kV
3
EQUATION1933 V1 EN (Equation 12)

VT sec = 100V
EQUATION1934 V1 EN (Equation 13)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of
the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of the neutral point VT.
3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block
5).
5) is a preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

98
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 5
Local HMI

Section 5 Local HMI

ANSI13000239-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V1 EN

Figure 30: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display (LCD)
• Buttons
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

99
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Local HMI

5.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 IEC13000063-2-en.vsd
4
IEC13000063 V2 EN

Figure 31: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required
signal with PCM600.

100
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 5
Local HMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 32: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three
alarm LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 33: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

101
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Local HMI

5.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red
being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one page there is an
indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another page there is an
indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The
LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with
the LHMI or PCM600.

Information pages for the alarm LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is
indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up / Down arrow
buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the
ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any page is lit.
If there are un-acknowledged alarm LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description
of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and .
They represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

102
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 5
Local HMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ANSI13000249-1-en.vsd
GUID-C0B7E9D3-0FEB-4447-B3EB-218D3528B874 V1 EN

Figure 34: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu

103
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Local HMI

20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable alarm LEDs
24 Protection status LEDs

5.4 Local HMI functionality

5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication

Protection indicators
The protection indicator LEDs are Normal, Pickup and Trip.

Table 14: Normal LED (green)

LED state Description
Off Auxiliary supply voltage is disconnected.
On Normal operation.
Flashing Internal fault has occurred.

Table 15: PickUp LED (yellow)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has picked up and an indication message is displayed.
The pick up indication is latching and must be reset via communication,
LHMI or binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu
on the LHMI, press .

Flashing The IED is in test mode and protection functions are blocked, or the
IEC61850 protocol is blocking one or more functions.
The indication disappears when the IED is no longer in test mode and
blocking is removed. The blocking of functions through the IEC61850
protocol can be reset in Main menu/Test/Reset IEC61850 Mod. The yellow
LED changes to either On or Off state depending on the state of operation.

104
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 5
Local HMI

Table 16: Trip LED (red)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has tripped. An indication message is displayed if the
auto-indication feature is enabled in the local HMI.
The trip indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the
LHMI, press .

Alarm indicators
The 15 programmable three-color LEDs are used for alarm indication. An individual
alarm/status signal, connected to any of the LED function blocks, can be assigned to
one of the three LED colors when configuring the IED.

Table 17: Alarm indications

LED state Description
Off Normal operation. All activation signals are off.
On • Follow-S sequence: The activation signal is on.
• LatchedColl-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedReset-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.

Flashing • Follow-F sequence: The activation signal is on.

• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.

5.4.2 Parameter management

The LHMI is used to access the IED parameters. Three types of parameters can be read
and written.
• Numerical values
• String values
• Enumerated values

105
Application Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Local HMI

Numerical values are presented either in integer or in decimal format with minimum
and maximum values. Character strings can be edited character by character.
Enumerated values have a predefined set of selectable values.

5.4.3 Front communication

The RJ-45 port in the LHMI enables front communication.

• The green uplink LED on the left is lit when the cable is successfully connected to
the port.
• The yellow LED is not used; it is always off.

IEC13000280-1-en.vsd
GUID-94AF2358-6905-4782-B37B-ACD3DCBF7F9C V1 EN

Figure 35: RJ-45 communication port and green indicator LED

1 RJ-45 connector
2 Green indicator LED

The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding
subnetwork mask is 255.255.255.0. It can be set through the local HMI path Main
menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT:1.

Do not connect the IED front port to a LAN. Connect only a single
local PC with PCM600 to the front port. It is only intended for
temporary use, such as commissioning and testing.

106
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T)

and T3WPDIF (87T)

6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection, two- T2WPDIF 87T
winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

Transformer differential protection, T3WPDIF 87T

three-winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

6.1.2 Application
The transformer differential protection is a unit protection. It serves as the main
protection of transformers in case of winding failure. The protective zone of a
differential protection includes the transformer itself, the bus-work or cables between
the current transformers and the power transformer. When bushing current
transformers are used for the differential IED, the protective zone does not include the
bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer.

In some substations there is a current differential protection relay for the busbar. Such
a busbar protection will include the bus-work or cables between the circuit breaker and
the power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and will cause
immediate damage. Short circuits and ground faults in windings and terminals will
normally be detected by the differential protection. Interturn faults are flashovers
between conductors within the same physical winding. It is possible to detect interturn
faults if sufficient number of turns are short-circuited. Interturn faults are the most
difficult transformer winding fault to detect with electrical protections. A small
interturn fault including just a few turns will result in an undetectable amount of

107
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

current until it develops into an ground or phase fault. For this reason it is important
that the differential protection has a high level of sensitivity and that it is possible to
use a sensitive setting without causing unwanted operations during external faults.

It is important that the faulty transformer be disconnected as fast as possible. As the

differential protection is a unit protection it can be designed for fast tripping, thus
providing selective disconnection of the faulty transformer. The differential protection
should never operate on faults outside the protective zone.

A transformer differential protection compares the current flowing into the transformer
with the current leaving the transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by the
differential protection must take into consideration changes due to the voltage, current
and phase angle caused by the protected transformer. Traditional transformer
differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for correction of the
phase shift and ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm as
implemented in the IED compensates for both the turn-ratio and the phase shift
internally in the software. No auxiliary current transformers are necessary.

The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external
faults if the turn-ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. However, there
are several different phenomena other than internal faults that will cause unwanted and
false differential currents. The main reasons for unwanted differential currents may be:

• mismatch due to varying tap changer positions

• different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current transformers
• zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer
• normal magnetizing currents
• magnetizing inrush currents
• overexcitation magnetizing currents

6.1.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the Transformer differential protection function are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

6.1.3.1 Restrained and unrestrained differential protection

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential

protections have been developed and are now adopted as the general practice in the
protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a
proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage
differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the
protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good
basic sensitivity. The bias current can be defined in many different ways. One classical

108
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

way of defining the bias current has been Ibias = (I1 + I2) / 2, where I1 is the
magnitude of the power transformer primary current, and I2 the magnitude of the
power transformer secondary current. However, it has been found that if the bias
current is defined as the highest power transformer current this will reflect the
difficulties met by the current transformers much better. The differential protection
function uses the highest current of all restrain inputs as bias current. For applications
where the power transformer rated current and the CT primary rated current can differ
considerably, (applications with T-connections), measured currents in the T
connections are converted to pu value using the rated primary current of the CT, but
one additional "measuring" point is introduced as sum of this two T currents. This
summed current is converted to pu value using the power transformer winding rated
currents. After that the highest pu value is taken as bias current in pu. In this way the
best possible combination between sensitivity and security for differential protection
function with T connection is obtained. The main philosophy behind the principle with
the operate bias characteristic is to increase the pickup level when the current
transformers have difficult operating conditions. This bias quantity gives the best
stability against an unwanted operation during external faults.

The usual practice for transformer protection is to set the bias characteristic to a value
of at least twice the value of the expected spill current under through faults conditions.
These criteria can vary considerably from application to application and are often a
matter of judgment. The second slope is increased to ensure stability under heavy
through fault conditions which could lead to increased differential current due to
saturation of current transformers. Default settings for the operating characteristic with
IdMin = 0.3pu of the power transformer rated current can be recommended as a default
setting in normal applications. If the conditions are known more in detail, higher or
lower sensitivity can be chosen. The selection of suitable characteristic should in such
cases be based on the knowledge of the class of the current transformers, availability of
information on the load tap changer position, short circuit power of the systems, and so
on.

The second section of the restrain characteristic has an increased slope in order to deal
with increased differential current due to additional power transformer losses during
heavy loading of the transformer and external fault currents. The third section of the
restrain characteristic decreases the sensitivity of the restrained differential function
further in order to cope with CT saturation and transformer losses during heavy
through faults. A default setting for the operating characteristic with IdMin = 0.3 *
IBase is recommended in normal applications. If the conditions are known in more
detail, higher or lower sensitivity can be chosen. The selection of suitable characteristic
should in such cases be based on the knowledge of the class of the current
transformers, availability of information on the tap changer position, short circuit
power of the systems, and so on.

Transformers can be connected to buses in such ways that the current transformers
used for the differential protection will be either in series with the power transformer

109
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

windings or the current transformers will be in breakers that are part of the bus, such as
a breaker-and-a-half or a ring bus scheme. For current transformers with primaries in
series with the power transformer winding, the current transformer primary current for
external faults will be limited by the transformer impedance. When the current
transformers are part of the bus scheme, as in the breaker-and-a-half or the ring bus
scheme, the current transformer primary current is not limited by the power
transformer impedance. High primary currents may be expected. In either case, any
deficiency of current output caused by saturation of one current transformer that is not
matched by a similar deficiency of another current transformer will cause a false
differential current to appear. Differential protection can overcome this problem if the
bias is obtained separately from each set of current transformer circuits. It is therefore
important to avoid paralleling of two or more current transformers for connection to a
single restraint input. Each current connected to the IED is available for biasing the
differential protection function.

The unrestrained operation level has a default value of IdUnre = 10pu, which is
typically acceptable for most of the standard power transformer applications. In the
following case, this setting need to be changed accordingly:

• When CT from "T-connection" are connected to IED, as in the breaker-and-a-half

or the ring bus scheme, special care shall be taken in order to prevent unwanted
operation of transformer differential IED for through-faults due to different CT
saturation of "T-connected" CTs. Thus if such uneven saturation is a possibility it
is typically required to increase unrestrained operational level to IdUnre = 20-25pu
• For differential applications on HV shunt reactors, due to the fact that there is no
heavy through-fault condition, the unrestrained differential operation level can be
set to IdUnre = 1.75pu

The overall operating characteristic of the transformer differential protection is shown

in figure 36.

110
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate
3
conditionally

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]

en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN

Figure 36: Representation of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN (Equation 14)
and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings:
1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

111
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

6.1.3.2 Elimination of zero sequence currents

A differential protection may operate undesirably due to external ground-faults in cases

where the zero sequence current can flow on only one side of the power transformer,
but not on the other side. This is the case when zero sequence current cannot be
properly transformed to the other side of the power transformer. Power transformer
connection groups of the Wye/Delta or Delta/Wye type cannot transform zero
sequence current. If a delta winding of a power transformer is grounded via a
grounding transformer inside the zone protected by the differential protection there will
be an unwanted differential current in case of an external ground-fault. The same is
true for an grounded star winding. Even if both the wye and delta winding are earthed,
the zero sequence current is usually limited by the grounding transformer on the delta
side of the power transformer, which may result in differential current as well. To
make the overall differential protection insensitive to external gound-faults in these
situations the zero sequence currents must be eliminated from the power transformer
IED currents on the grounded windings, so that they do not appear as differential
currents. This had once been achieved by means of interposing auxiliary current
transformers. The elimination of zero sequence current is done numerically by setting
ZSCurrSubtrWx=Disabled or Enabled and doesn't require any auxiliary transformers or
zero sequence traps. Instead it is necessary to eliminate the zero sequence current from
every individual winding by proper setting of setting parameters
ZSCurrSubtrWx=Disabled or Enabled

6.1.3.3 Inrush restraint methods

With a combination of the second harmonic restraint and the waveform restraint
methods it is possible to get a protection with high security and stability against inrush
effects and at the same time maintain high performance in case of heavy internal faults
even if the current transformers are saturated. Both these restraint methods are used by
the IED. The second harmonic restraint function has a settable level. If the ratio of the
second harmonic to the fundamental in the differential current is above the settable
limit, the operation of the differential protection is restrained. It is recommended to set
parameter I2/I1Ratio = 15% as default value in case no special reasons exist to choose
another value.

6.1.3.4 Overexcitation restraint method

In case of an overexcited transformer, the winding currents contain odd harmonic

components because the currents waveform are symmetrical relative to the time axis.
As the third harmonic currents cannot flow into a delta winding, the fifth harmonic is
the lowest harmonic which can serve as a criterion for overexcitation. The differential
protection function is provided with a fifth harmonic restraint to prevent the protection
from operation during an overexcitation condition of a power transformer. If the ratio
of the fifth harmonic to the fundamental in the differential current is above a settable

112
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

limit the operation is restrained. It is recommended to use I5/I1Ratio = 25% as default

value in case no special reasons exist to choose another setting.

Transformers likely to be exposed to overvoltage or underfrequency conditions (that is,

generator step-up transformers in power stations) should be provided with a dedicated
overexcitation protection based on V/Hz to achieve a trip before the core thermal limit
is reached.

6.1.3.5 Cross-blocking between phases

Basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the
differential current in that phase (waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In the
algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via the setting
parameter CrossBlockEn. When parameter CrossBlockEn is set to Enabled, cross
blocking between phases will be introduced. There are no time related settings
involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set bias characteristic will be
able to cross-block the other two phases if it is self-blocked by any of the previously
explained restrained criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the
set bias characteristic cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-
blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. In should be noted that this is the default
(recommended) setting value for this parameter. When parameter CrossBlockEn is set
to Disabled, any cross blocking between phases will be disabled.

6.1.3.6 External/Internal fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator operation is based on the relative position of

the two phasors (in case of a two-winding transformer) representing the W1 and W2
negative sequence current contributions, defined by matrix expression see the technical
reference manual. It practically performs a directional comparison between these two
phasors.

In order to perform a directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must
be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand,
in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the
value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value
(IMinNegSeq) is settable in the range from 1% to 20% of the differential protections
IBasecurrent, which is in our case the power transformer HV side rated current. The
default value is 4%. Only if the magnitude of both negative sequence current
contributions are above the set limit, the relative position between these two phasors is
checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions, which should be
compared, is too small (less than the set value for IMinNegSeq), no directional
comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision.

113
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

This magnitude check, guarantees stability of the algorithm when the power
transformer is energized. In cases where the protected transformer can be energized
with a load connected on the LV side (e.g. a step-up transformer in a power station
with directly connected auxiliary transformer on its LV side) the value for this setting
shall be increased to at least 12%. This is necessary in order to prevent unwanted
operation due to LV side currents during the transformer inrush.

The setting NegSeqROA represents the so-called Relay Operate Angle, which
determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be
selected in the range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 1 degree. The
default value is 60 degrees. The default setting 60 degrees somewhat favors security in
comparison to dependability. If the user has no well-justified reason for another value,
60 degrees shall be applied.

If the above conditions concerning magnitudes are fulfilled, the internal/external fault
discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current
contributions from the HV side and LV side of the power transformer using the
following two rules :

• If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are in phase
or at least in the internal fault region, the fault is internal.
• If the negative sequence currents contributions from HV and LV sides are 180
degrees out of phase or at least in the external fault region, the fault is external.

Under external fault condition and with no current transformer saturation, the relative
angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees. During internal fault and with no current
transformer saturation, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible
different negative sequence source impedance angles on HV and LV side of power
transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value.

The internal/external fault discriminator has proved to be very reliable. If a fault is

detected, that is, PICKUP signals set by ordinary differential protection, and at the
same time the internal/external fault discriminator characterizes this fault as an
internal, any eventual blocking signals produced by either the harmonic or the
waveform restraints are ignored.

If the bias current is more than 110% of IBase, the negative sequence threshold
(IMinNegSeq) is increased internally.. This assures response times of the differential
protection below one power system cycle (below 16.66mS for 60 Hz system) for all
more severe internal faults. Even for heavy internal faults with severely saturated
current transformers this differential protection operates well below one cycle, since
the harmonic distortions in the differential currents do not slow down the differential
protection operation. Practically, an unrestrained operation is achieved for all internal
faults.

114
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

External faults happen ten to hundred times more often than internal ones as far as the
power transformers are concerned. If a disturbance is detected and the internal/external
fault discriminator characterizes this fault as an external fault, the conventional
additional criteria are posed on the differential algorithm before its trip is allowed. This
assures high algorithm stability during external faults. However, at the same time the
differential function is still capable of tripping quickly for evolving faults.

The principle of the internal/external fault discriminator can be extended to

autotransformers and transformers with three windings. If all three windings are
connected to their respective networks then three directional comparisons are made,
but only two comparisons are necessary in order to positively determine the position of
the fault with respect to the protected zone. The directional comparisons which are
possible, are: W1 - W2, W1 - W3, and W2 - W3. The rule applied by the internal/
external fault discriminator in case of three-winding power transformers is:

• If all comparisons indicate an internal fault, then it is an internal fault.

• If any comparison indicates an external fault, then it is an external fault

If one of the windings is not connected, the algorithm automatically reduces to the two-
winding version. Nevertheless, the whole power transformer is protected, including the
non-connected winding.

6.1.3.7 On-line compensation for on-load tap-changer position

The Transformer differential (TW2PDIF for two winding and TW3PDIF for three
winding) (87T) function in the IED has a built-in facility to on-line compensate for on-
load tap-changer operation. The following parameters which are set under general
settings are related to this compensation feature:

• Parameter LocationOLTC1 defines the winding where first OLTC (OLTC1) is

physically located. The following options are available: Not Used / Winding 1 /
Winding 2 / Winding 3. When value Not Used is selected the differential function
will assume that OLTC1 does not exist and it will disregard all other parameters
related to first OLTC
• Parameter LowTapPosOLTC1 defines the minimum end tap position for OLTC1
(typically position 1)
• Parameter RatedTapOLTC1 defines the rated (for example, mid) position for
OLTC1 (for example, 11 for OLTC with 21 positions) This tap position shall
correspond to the values for rated current and voltage set for that winding

115
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

• Parameter HighTapPsOLTC1 defines the maximum end tap position for OLTC1
(for example, 21 for OLTC with 21 positions)
• Parameter TapHighVoltTC1 defines the end position for OLTC1 where highest no-
load voltage for that winding is obtained (for example, position with maximum
number of turns)
• Parameter StepSizeOLTC1 defines the voltage change per OLTC1 step (for
example, 1.5%)

The above parameters are defined for OLTC1. Similar parameters shall be set for
second on-load tap-changer designated with OLTC2 in the parameter names, for three–
winding differential protection.

6.1.3.8 Differential current alarm

Differential protection continuously monitors the level of the fundamental frequency

differential currents and gives an alarm if the pre-set value is simultaneously exceeded
in all three phases. This feature can be used to monitor the integrity of on-load tap-
changer compensation within the differential function. The threshold for the alarm
pickup level is defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm. This threshold should be
typically set in such way to obtain operation when on-load tap-changer measured value
within differential function differs for more than two steps from the actual on-load tap-
changer position. To obtain such operation set parameter IDiffAlarm equal to two times
the on-load tap-changer step size (For example, typical setting value is 5% to 10% of
base current). Set the time delay defined by parameter tAlarmDelay two times longer
than the on-load tap-changer mechanical operating time (For example, typical setting
value 10s).

6.1.3.9 Open CT detection

The Transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced open CT detection

feature. This feature can block the unexpected operation created by the Transformer
differential function in case of open CT secondary circuit under normal load condition.
An alarm signal can also be issued to station operational personnel to make remedy
action once the open CT condition is detected.

The following setting parameters are related to this feature:

• Setting parameter OpenCTEnable enables/disables this feature

• Setting parameter tOCTAlarmDelay defines the time delay after which the alarm
signal will be given
• Setting parameter tOCTReset defines the time delay after which the open CT
condition will reset once the defective CT circuits have been rectified
• Once the open CT condition has been detected, then all the differential protection
functions are blocked except the unrestraint (instantaneous) differential protection

116
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

The outputs of open CT condition related parameters are listed below:

• OpenCT: Open CT detected

• OpenCTAlarm: Alarm issued after the setting delay
• OpenCTIN: Open CT in CT group inputs (1 for input 1 and 2 for input 2)
• OpenCTPH: Open CT with phase information (1 for phase A, 2 for phase B, 3 for
phase C)

6.1.3.10 Switch onto fault feature

The Transformer differential (TW2PDIF for two winding and TW3PDIF for three
winding) (87T) function in the IED has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault feature.
This feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode. When
SOTFMode = Enabled this feature is enabled. It shall be noted that when this feature is
enabled it is not possible to test the 2nd harmonic blocking feature by simply injecting
one current with superimposed second harmonic. In that case the switch on to fault
feature will operate and the differential protection will trip. However for a real inrush
case the differential protection function will properly restrain from operation.

For more information about the operating principles of the switch onto fault feature
please read the technical reference manual.

6.1.4 Setting example

6.1.4.1 Introduction

Differential protection for power transformers has been used for decades. In order to
correctly apply transformer differential protection proper compensation is needed for:

• power transformer phase shift (vector group compensation)

• CT secondary currents magnitude difference on different sides of the protected
transformer (ratio compensation)
• zero sequence current elimination (zero sequence current reduction) shall be done.
In the past this was performed with help of interposing CTs or special connection
of main CTs (delta connected CTs). With numerical technology all these
compensations are done in IED software.

The Differential transformer protection is capable to provide differential protection for

all standard three-phase power transformers without any interposing CTs. It has been
designed with assumption that all main CTs will be wye connected. For such
applications it is then only necessary to enter directly CT rated data and power
transformer data as they are given on the power transformer nameplate and differential
protection will automatically balance itself.

117
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

These are internal compensations within the differential function. The

protected power transformer data are always entered as they are given
on the nameplate. Differential function will by itself correlate
nameplate data and properly select the reference windings.

However the IED can also be used in applications where some of the main CTs are
connected in delta. In such cases the ratio for the main CT connected in delta shall be
intentionally set for √(3)=1.732 times smaller than actual ratio of individual phase CTs
(for example, instead of 800/5 set 462/5) In case the ratio is 800/2.88A, often designed
for such typical delta connections, set the ratio as 800/5 in the IED. At the same time
the power transformer vector group shall be set as Yy0 because the IED shall not
internally provide any phase angle shift compensation. The necessary phase angle shift
compensation will be provided externally by delta connected main CT. All other
settings should have the same values irrespective of main CT connections. It shall be
noted that irrespective of the main CT connections (wye or delta) on-line reading and
automatic compensation for actual load tap changer position can be used in the IED.

6.1.4.2 Typical main CT connections for transformer differential protection

Three most typical main CT connections used for transformer differential protection
are shown in figure 37. It is assumed that the primary phase sequence is A-B-C.

IA
A

Protected IB
Transformer B
Winding

IC
C
IC-IB

IA-IC

IC-IA

IB-IC
IB-IA

IA-IB
IC

IB

IA

CT Wye CT in Delta CT in Delta

Connected DAC Connected DAB Connected
en06000549_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000549 V1 EN

Figure 37: Commonly used main CT connections for Transformer differential protection.

118
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

For wye connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• are directly proportional to the measured primary currents

• are in phase with the measured primary currents
• contain all sequence components including zero sequence current component

For wye connected main CTs, the main CT ratio shall be set as it is in actual
application. The “WyePoint” parameter, for the particular wye connection shown in
figure 37, shall be set ToObject. If wye connected main CTs have their wye point away
from the protected transformer this parameter should be set FromObject.

For delta DAC connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• are increased √3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with wye connected CTs
• lag by 30° the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by
30° in clockwise direction)
• do not contain zero sequence current component

For DAC delta connected main CTs, ratio shall be set for √3 times smaller than the
actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The “WyePoint” parameter, for this particular
connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAC connected main CTs
must be connected exactly as shown in figure 37.

For delta DAB connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• are increased √3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with wye connected CTs
• lead by 30° the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by
30° in anti-clockwise direction)
• do not contain zero sequence current component

For DAB delta connected main CT ratio shall be set for √3 times smaller in RET 670
then the actual ratio of individual phase CTs. The “WyePoint” parameter, for this
particular connection shall be set ToObject. It shall be noted that delta DAB connected
main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in figure 37.

For more detailed info regarding CT data settings please refer to the three application
examples presented in section "Application Examples".

6.1.4.3 Application Examples

Three application examples will be given here. For each example two differential
protection solutions will be presented:

119
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

• First solution will be with all main CTs wye connected.

• Second solution will be with delta connected main CT on Y (that is, wye)
connected sides of the protected power transformer.

For each differential protection solution the following settings will be given:

1. Input CT channels on the transformer input modules.

2. General settings for the transformer differential protection where specific data
about protected power transformer shall be entered.

Finally the setting for the differential protection characteristic will be given for all
presented applications.

Example 1: Wye-delta connected power transformer without on-load tap-

changer
Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with
all relevant application data are given in figure 38.

120
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

CT 300/5
CT 300/5 in Delta
Wye (DAC)

20.9 MVA 20.9 MVA

69/12.5 kV 69/12.5 kV
YNd1 YNd1
(YDAC)
(YDAC)

CT 800/5 CT 800/5
Wye Wye

en06000554_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000554 V1 EN

Figure 38: Two differential protection solutions for wye-delta connected power
transformer

For this particular power transformer the 69 kV side phase-to-ground no-load voltages
lead by 30 degrees the 12.5 kV side phase-to- ground no-load voltages. Thus when
external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main HV CTs in delta,
as shown in the right-hand side in figure 38, it must be ensured that the HV currents
are rotated by 30° in clockwise direction. Thus the DAC delta CT connection must be
used for 69 kV CTs in order to put 69 kV & 12.5 kV currents in phase.

To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do
the following:

1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. For second solution make sure that HV delta connected CTs are DAC connected.

3. For wye connected CTs make sure how they are stared (that is, grounded) to/from
protected transformer.

121
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs
see table 18.

Table 18: CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for both solutions
CTprim 800
CTsec 5
CT_WyePoint ToObject

5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side
CTs, see table 19.

Table 19: CT input channels used for the HV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for solution 1 (wye Selected value for solution 2 (delta
connected CT) connected CT)
CTprim 300
300
= 173
3
EQUATION1888 V1 EN (Equation 15)

CTsec 5 5
CT_WyePoint From Object ToObject

To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 15.

6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the Transformer differential
protection function, see table 20.

Table 20: General settings of the differential protection function

Setting parameter Select value for solution 1 (wye Selected value for solution 2 (delta
connected CT) connected CT)
RatedVoltageW1 69 kV 69 kV
RatedVoltageW2 12.5 kV 12.5 kV
RatedCurrentW1 175 A 175 A
RatedCurrentW2 965 A 965 A
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2 delta=d wye=y 1)
ClockNumberW2 1 [30 deg lag] 0 [0 deg] 1)
ZSCurrSubtrW1 On Off 2)
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off Off
Table continues on next page

122
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Setting parameter Select value for solution 1 (wye Selected value for solution 2 (delta
connected CT) connected CT)
TconfigForW1 No No

TconfigForW2 No No
LocationOLTC1 Not used Not used
Other Parameters Not relevant for this application. Not relevant for this application.
Use default value. Use default value.
1) To compensate for delta connected CTs
2) Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta

Delta-wye connected power transformer without tap charger

Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with
all relevant application data are given in figure 39.

CT 400/5 CT 400/5
Wye Wye

60 MVA 60 MVA
115/24.9 kV 115/24.9 kV
Dyn1 Dyn1
(DABY) (DABY)

CT 1500/5
CT 1500/5 in Delta
Wye (DAB)

en06000555_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000555 V1 EN

Figure 39: Two differential protection solutions for delta-wye connected power
transformer

For this particular power transformer the 115 kV side phase-to-ground no-load
voltages lead by 30° the 24.9 kV side phase-to-ground no-load voltages. Thus when
external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main 24.9 kV CTs in

123
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

delta, as shown in the right-hand side in figure 39, it must be ensured that the 24.9 kV
currents are rotated by 30° in anti-clockwise direction. Thus, the DAB CT delta
connection (see figure 39) must be used for 24.9 kV CTs in order to put 115 kV &
24.9 kV currents in phase.

To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do
the following:

1. Check that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. For second solution make sure that LV delta connected CTs are DAB connected.

3. For wye connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (that is, grounded) to/from
protected transformer.

4. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side
CTs, see table 21.

Table 21: CT input channels used for the HV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for both solutions
CTprim 400
CTsec 5
CT_WyePoint ToObject

5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side
CTs, see table "CT input channels used for the LV side CTs".

CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for Solution 1 (wye Selected value for Solution 2 (delta
connected CT) connected CT)
CTprim 1500
1500
= 866
3
EQUATION1889 V1 EN (Equation 16)

CTsec 5 5
CT_WyePoint ToObject ToObject

To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 16.

6. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection
function, see table22.

124
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Table 22: General settings of the differential protection

Setting parameter selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2
(wye conected CT) (delta connected CT)
RatedVoltageW1 115 kV 115 kV
Rated VoltageW2 24.9 kV 24.9 kV
RatedCurrentW1 301 A 301 A
RatedCurrentW2 1391 A 1391 A
ConnectTypeW1 Delta (D) WYE (Y) 1)
ConnectTypeW2 wye=y wye=y
ClockNumberW2 1 [30 deg lag] 0 [0 deg] 1)
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2 On On 2)
TconfigForW1 No No
TconfigForW2 No No
LocationOLTC1 Not Used Not Used
Other parameters Not relevant for this application. Not relevant for this application.
Use default value. Use default value.
1) To compensate for delta connected CTs.
2) Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.

Wye-wye connected power transformer with load tap changer and

tertiary not loaded delta winding
Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with
all relevant application data are given in figure 40. It shall be noted that this example is
applicable for protection of autotransformer with not loaded tertiary delta winding as
well.

125
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

CT 200/1
CT 200/1
in Delta
Wye
(DAB)

31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA 31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA

110±11×1.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV 110±11×1.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV
YNyn0(d5) YNyn0(d5)

CT 500/5
CT 500/5 in Delta
Wye (DAB)

en06000558_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000558 V1 EN

Figure 40: Two differential protection solutions for wye-wye connected transformer.

For this particular power transformer the 110 kV side phase-to-ground no-load
voltages are exactly in phase with the 36.75 kV side phase-to-ground no-load voltages.
Thus, when external phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main CTs
in delta, both set of CTs must be identically connected (that is, either both DAC or
both DAB as shown in the right-hand side in figure 40) in order to put 110 kV & 36.75
kV currents in phase.

To ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer it is necessary to do
the following:

1. Check that HV CTs are connected to 1 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. Check that LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.

3. When delta connected CTs are used make sure that both CT sets are identically
connected (that is, either both DAC or both DAB).

4. For wye connected CTs make sure how they are 'star'red (that is, grounded) towards
or away from the protected transformer.

5. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side
CTs, see table 23.

126
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Table 23: CT input channels used for the HV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for both solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2
(wye connected CTs) (delta connected CTs)
CTprim 200
200
= 115
3
EQUATION1891 V1 EN (Equation 17)

CTsec 1 1
CT_WyePoint FromObject ToObject

To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 17.

6. Enter the following settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Table 24: CT input channels used for the LV side CTs

Setting parameter Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2
(wye connected) (delta connected)
CTprim 500
500
= 289
3
EQUATION1892 V1 EN (Equation 18)

CTsec 5 5
CT_WyePoint ToObject ToObject

To compensate for delta connected CTs, see equation 18.

7. Enter the following values for the general settings of the differential protection
function, see table 25

Table 25: General settings of the differential protection function

Setting parameter Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2
(wye connected) (delta connected)
RatedVoltageW1 110 kV 110 kV
RatedVoltageW2 36.75 kV 36.75 kV
RatedCurrentW1 165 A 165 A
RatedCurrentW2 495 A 495 A
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2 wye=y wye=y
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] 0 [0 deg]
Table continues on next page

127
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Setting parameter Selected value for both Solution 1 Selected value for both Solution 2
(wye connected) (delta connected)
ZSCurrSubtrW1 On Off 1)
ZSCurrSubtrW2 On Off 1)
TconfigForW1 No No
TconfigForW2 No No
LocationOLT1 Winding 1 (W1) Winding 1 (W1)
LowTapPosOLTC1 1 1
RatedTapOLTC1 12 12
HighTapPsOLTC1 23 23
TapHighVoltTC1 23 23
StepSizeOLTC1 1.5% 1.5%
Other parameters Not relevant for this application. Not relevant for this application.
Use default value. Use default value.
1) Zero-sequence current is already removed by connecting main CTs in delta.

6.1.4.4 Summary and conclusions

The IED can be used for differential protection of three-phase power transformers with
main CTs either wye or delta connected. However the IED has been designed with the
assumption that all main CTS are wye connected. The IED can be used in applications
where the main CTs are delta connected. For such applications the following shall be
kept in mind:

1. The ratio for delta connected CTs shall be set √(3)=1.732 times smaller than the
actual individual phase CT ratio.
2. The power transformer phase-shift shall typically be set as Yy0 because the
compensation for power transformer the actual phase shift is provided by the
external delta CT connection.
3. The zero sequence current is eliminated by the main CT delta connections. Thus
on sides where CTs are connected in delta the zero sequence current elimination
shall be set to Off in the IED.

The following table summarizes the most commonly used wye-delta phase-shift
around the world and provides information about the required type of main CT delta
connection on the wye side of the protected transformer.

128
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

IEC vector group ANSI designation Positive sequence no-load Required delta CT connection
voltage phasor diagram type on wye side of the
protected power transformer
and internal vector group
setting in the IED
YNd1 YDAC DAC/Yy0
Y

IEC06000559 V1 EN

Dyn1 DABY DAB/Yy0

Y

IEC06000560 V1 EN

YNd11 YDAB DAB/Yy0

Y

IEC06000561 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

129
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

IEC vector group ANSI designation Positive sequence no-load Required delta CT connection
voltage phasor diagram type on wye side of the
protected power transformer
and internal vector group
setting in the IED
Dyn11 DACY DAC/Yy0

IEC06000562 V1 EN

YNd5 YD150 DAB/Yy6

Y

IEC06000563 V1 EN

Dyn5 DY150 DAC/Yy6

Y
IEC06000564 V1 EN

6.2 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)

6.2.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

130
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.2 Application
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used as:

• Generator differential protection

• Reactor differential protection
• Busbar differential protection
• Autotransformer differential protection (for common and serial windings only)
• T-feeder differential protection
• Capacitor differential protection
• Restricted ground fault protection for transformer, generator and shunt reactor
windings
• Restricted ground fault protection

The application is dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of

breakers, available CT cores and so on.

52 52

3·87 52
21

3·87

21

ANSI05000738-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000738 V2 EN

Figure 41: Different applications of a 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF (87) function

6.2.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle

The high impedance differential protection principle has been used for many years and
is well documented in literature publicly available. Its operating principle provides
very good sensitivity and high speed operation. One main benefit offered by the
principle is an absolute stability (that is, no operation) for external faults even in the

131
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

presence of heavy CT saturation. The principle is based on the CT secondary current

circulating between involved current transformers and not through the IED due to high
impedance in the measuring branch. This stabilizing resistance is in the range of
hundreds of ohms and sometimes above one kilo Ohm. When an internal fault occurs
the current cannot circulate and is forced through the measuring branch causing relay
operation.

It should be remembered that the whole scheme, its built-in components and wiring
must be adequately maintained throughout the lifetime of the equipment in order to be
able to withstand the high voltage peaks (that is, pulses) which may appear during an
internal fault. Otherwise any flash-over in CT secondary circuits or any other part of
the scheme may prevent correct operation of the high impedance differential relay for
an actual internal fault.

87N

en05000164_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000164 V1 EN

Figure 42: Example for the high impedance restricted earth fault protection
application

For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will
feed current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the measuring branch.

132
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

The calculations are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating
voltage VR is calculated according to equation 19

VR > IF max × ( Rct + Rl )

EQUATION1531-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 19)

where:
IFmax is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side of the CT
Rct is the current transformer secondary winding resistance and
Rl is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.

The minimum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the IED function is
set higher than the highest achieved value (setting TripPickup). As the loop resistance
is the value to the connection point from each CT, it is advisable to do all the CT core
summations in the switchgear to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower
setting values and also a better balanced scheme. The connection in to the control room
can then be from the most central bay.

For an internal fault, all involved CTs will try to feed current through the measuring
branch. Depending on the size of current transformer, relatively high voltages will be
developed across the series resistor. Note that very high peak voltages can appear. To
prevent the risk of flashover in the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The
voltage limiter is a voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil).

The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800 ohms or 1800
ohms (depending on ordered alternative) with a sliding link to allow adjustment to the
required value. Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the VR voltage
calculated. A higher resistance value will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a
lower sensitivity of the relay.

The function has a recommended operating current range 40 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs
and 200 mA to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used
to calculate the required value of current at the set TripPickup and R series values.

The CT inputs used for 1Ph High impedance differential protection

HZPDIF (87) function, shall be set to have ratio 1:1. So the parameters
CTsecx and CTprimx of the relevant channel x of TRM and/or AIM shall
be set equal to 1 A by PST in PCM600; The parameter CTStarPointx
may be set to ToObject.

133
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

The tables 26, 27 below show, the operating currents for different settings of operating
voltages and selected resistances. Adjust as required based on tables 26, 27 or to values
in between as required for the application.

Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value

compared to the total value.

Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum
TripPickup with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by
adjusting the resistor to a higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for
reference.

Table 26: 1 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 20 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R current level resistor R current level resistor R current level
TripPickup ohms 1A ohms 1A ohms 1A
20 V 1000 0.020 A -- -- -- --
40 V 2000 0.020 A 1000 0.040 A -- --
60 V 3000 0.020 A 1500 0.040 A 600 0.100 A
80 V 4000 0.020 A 2000 0.040 A 800 0.100 A
100 V 5000 0.020 A 2500 0.040 A 1000 0.100 A
150 V 6000 0.020 A 3750 0.040 A 1500 0.100 A
200 V 6800 0.029 A 5000 0.040 A 2000 0.100 A

Table 27: 5 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level
TripPickup ohms 5A ohms 5A ohms 5A
20 V 200 0.100 A 100 0.200 A -- --
40 V 400 0.100 A 200 0.200 A 100 0.400
60 V 600 0.100 A 300 0.200 A 150 0.400 A
80 V 800 0.100 A 400 0.200 A 200 0.400 A
100 V 1000 0.100 A 500 0.200 A 250 0.400 A
150 V 1500 0.100 A 750 0.200 A 375 0.400 A
200 V 2000 0.100 A 1000 0.200 A 500 0.400 A

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least 2 ˣ TripPickup to have

sufficient operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of TripPickup.

134
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

When the R value has been selected and the TripPickup value has been set, the
sensitivity of the scheme IP can be calculated. The IED sensitivity is decided by the
total current in the circuit according to equation 20.

IP = n × ( IR + Ires + å lmag )
EQUATION1747 V1 EN (Equation 20)

where:
n is the CT ratio
IP primary current at IED pickup,
IR IED pickup current (U>Trip/SeriesResistor)
Ires is the current through the voltage limiter and
ΣImag is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (for example, 4 for
restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-5 for autotransformer
differential protection).

It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (IEDs,
Metrosil and resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement is insensitive to
DC component in fault current to allow the use of only the AC components of the fault
current in the above calculations.

The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in Figure 51.

Series resistor thermal capacity

The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Care shall be exercised while testing to
ensure that if current needs to be injected continuously or for a significant duration of
time, check that the heat dissipation Vxxx Series Resistance value does not exceed 200
W. Otherwise injection time shall be reduced to the minimum.

135
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Rl Rl

Rct VR Rct
R
Rres

I>

Protected Object

VR

a) Through load situation

VR

b) Through fault situation

VR

c) Internal faults
ANSI05000427-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000427 V2 EN

Figure 43: The high impedance principle for one phase with two current
transformer inputs

136
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. De-energize the primary object protected with this
equipment before connecting or disconnecting wiring or performing
any maintenance. The plate with resistors should be provided with a
protective cover, mounted in a separate box or in a locked cubicle.
National law and standards shall be followed.

6.2.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection

Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for three-

phase high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for three-phase
high impedance differential protection scheme are shown in figure 44.
L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)
7 SMAI2
1
AI01 BLOCK AI3P
CT 1200/1 2 (I) ^GRP2_A AI1
Star/Wye 3 ^GRP2_B AI2
AI02
Connected 4 (I)
^GRP2_C AI3
^GRP2_N AI4
5
AI03 TYPE AIN
6 (I)
7
AI04
8 (I)
9
1
AI05
0 (I)
1 1
1
1
AI06
2 (I)
Protected Object IED
N
L3 (C)
L2 (B)
L1 (A)

N 4
L3 (C)
L2 (B)

CT 1200/1 L1 (A) 5
Star/Wye
Connected X1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2

3
1

1
3

3
R4

R5

R6

R1

R2

R3
2 U

2 U

2 U

X X
2

L1 L2 L3 6
(A) (B) (C) 3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors
ANSI09000169_3_en.vsd

ANSI09000169 V3 EN

Figure 44: CT connections for high impedance differential protection

137
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one grounding point
exist in such scheme.

2 Three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils. Grounding (PE), protective ground is a
separate 4 mm screw terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for setting resistors.
6 The factory made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set.

Shall be removed for installations with 650 and 670 series IEDs. This star point
is required for RADHA schemes only.

7 How to connect three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in
the IED.

6.2.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)

Restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N) is a typical application for 1Ph High
impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87). Typical CT connections for high
impedance based REFPDIF (87N) protection scheme are shown in figure 45.

138
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)

CT 1500/5 2 AI01 (I)

Star/Wye 3
SMAI2
Connected 4 AI02 (I)
BLOCK AI3P
5 ^GRP2_A AI1
6 6 AI03 (I) ^GRP2_B AI2
^GRP2_C AI3
7
8 AI04 (I) ^GRP2_N AI4
TYPE AIN
9
10 AI05 (I)
11
Protected Object 12 AI06 (I)

L1 L2 L3
N
(A) (B) (C)

4
1
N
CT 1500/5

X1 4 5 1 2 3
2
3
5

1
3
R1

R2
2 V

4
2
1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor
ANSI09000170_4_en.vsd

ANSI09000170 V4 EN

Figure 45: CT connections for restricted earth fault protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme grounding point

Note that it is of outmost importance to insure that only one grounding point
exist in such scheme.

2 One-phase plate with stabilizing resistor and metrosil. Grounding (PE), protective ground is a
separate 4 mm screw terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for the metrosil.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for stabilizing resistor.
6 How to connect REFPDIF (87N) high impedance scheme to one CT input in IED.

6.2.4 Setting guidelines

The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different
application descriptions below.

139
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

6.2.4.1 Configuration

The configuration is done in the Application Configuration tool.

6.2.4.2 Settings of protection function

Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched
Enabled or Disabled.

AlarmPickup: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a certain
percentage of the selected Trip level. A typical setting is 10% of TripPickup. This
alarm stage can be used for scheme CT supervision.

tAlarm: Set the time delay for the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds.

TripPickup: Set the trip level according to the calculations (see examples below for a
guidance). The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to
achieve stability. Values can be within 20V - 400V range dependent on the application.

R series: Set the value of the used stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value
according to the examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible
to the calculated value. Measure the value achieved and set this value for this parameter.

The value shall always be high impedance. This means for example, for
1A circuits say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say
bigger than 100 ohms (2500 VA). This ensures that the current will
circulate and not go through the differential circuit at through faults.

That the settings of U>Alarm, U>Trip and SeriesResistor must be

chosen such that both U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/
SeriesResistor are >4% of IRated of the used current input. Normally
the settings shall also be such that U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/
SeriesResistor both gives a value <4*IRated of the used current input.
If not, the limitation in how long time the actual current is allowed to
persist not to overload the current input must be considered especially
during the secondary testing.

6.2.4.3 T-feeder protection

In many busbar arrangements such as breaker-and-a-half, ring breaker, mesh corner,

there will be a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current
transformers in the feeder circuit (for example, in the transformer bushings). It is often

140
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

required to separate the protection zones that the feeder is protected with one scheme
while the T-zone is protected with a separate differential protection scheme. The 1Ph
high impedance differential HZPDIF (87) function in the IED allows this to be done
efficiently, see Figure 46.

3·87

ANSI05000739-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000739 V2 EN

Figure 46: The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-
feeder

Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the used
CT primary rating so that a low ohmic value can be used for the series resistor.

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the secondary fault current, thereby reducing the
stability voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the
voltage developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear
resistor but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action,
voltages induced may be much higher than design limits.

141
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Setting example
Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 2000/5A
CT Class: C800 (At max tap of 2000/5A)
Secondary resistance: 0.5 Ohm (2000/5A tap)
Cable loop resistance: 2

Max fault current: Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA

Calculation:

40000
VR > × ( 0.5 + 0.4 ) = 90V
400
EQUATION1751-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 21)

Select a setting of TripPickup=100 V.

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least twice the set operating voltage TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > (0.5 + 8) × 100 * 0.7 = 595V

EQUATION1752-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 22)

that is, bigger than 2 ˣTripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. As this application requires to be so sensitive select R Series= 500 ohm,
which gives an IED operating current of 200 mA.

Calculate the primary sensitivity at operating voltage using the following equation.

2000
IP = ( 200 0° + 3 × 50 -60° ) ×10 -3 £ approx.100 A
5
EQUATION1887-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 23)

where
100 mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and
10 mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
20 mA is current drawn by metrosil at pickup

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current
transformer cores which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

142
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected
voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing
resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of
turns) are the most important factors.

6.2.4.4 Autotransformer differential protection

When Autotransformers are used it is possible to use the high impedance scheme
covering the Autotransformer windings, however such differential arraignment does
not typically cover the faults within the tertiary delta winding. The protection zone and
connection of the High impedance differential protection is shown in Figure 47.

3·87

ANSI05000173-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000173 V2 EN

Figure 47: Application of the 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
(87) function on an autotransformer

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage
limit. If a lower tap of the CT is used, the voltage developed across the
selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor, but in the unused taps,
due to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits
might be induced.

143
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Basic data:
Transformer rated current Irated 1150 A
(on low voltage tap):
Current transformer ratio: 1200/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: C800 (At max tap of 1200/5)
Secondary resistance: 0.3 Ohms
Cable loop resistance: <50 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the
farthest CT) to be limited to approx. 0.05 Ohms at 75° C gives
loop resistance 2 ˣ 0.05 = 0.1 Ohms
Max fault current: Use 15 ˣ Irated for power transformer.

Calculation:

1150
VR > 15 × × (0.3 + 0.1) = 28.75V
240
EQUATION1760-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 24)

Select a setting of TripPickup=40 V

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > ( 8 + 0.3 ) × 100 × 0.7 = 581 V

EQUATION1761-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 25)

that is, bigger than 2 · TripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. As this application requires to have good sensitivity, select R Series= 400
ohm which gives a total IED current of 100 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 26 which gives an

acceptable value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor.

1200
IP = × (100 0° + 3.40 -60° ) £ approx.52 A
5
EQUATION1763-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 26)

where:
40 mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit
20 mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
20 mA is current drawn by metrosil at pickup

144
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current
transformer cores which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected
voltage level so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing
resistor and the level of the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of
turns) are the most important factors.

For many auto-transformers there can be a tertiary system for local distribution and/or
shunt compensation. The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87)
function can be used to protect the tertiary busbar, normally having 10-33 kV level and
with relatively few feeders.

3·87

ANSI05000774-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000774 V3 EN

Figure 48: Application of the high impedance differential function on tertiary busbar

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage
limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed
across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the

145
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher

than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Current 2000/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
transformer ratio:
CT Class: C400 (At max tap of 2000/5)
C400 (At max tap of 2000/5)
Secondary 0.5 Ohms (At 2000/5 Tap)
resistance:

Cable loop <100 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the farthest
resistance: CT) gives loop resistance 2 ˣ 0.05 = 0.1 Ohms
Note! Only one way cable length is used as the power system
grounding in this example is limiting the ground-fault current to a low
level. If high ground-fault current exists use two way cable length.

One way as the power system earthing in this

example is limiting the earth-fault current. If the
neutral solidly grounded, then a high-earth-fault
current exists, and a two way cable length should
be considered for the loop resistance.

Max fault current: The maximum through fault current given by the transformer
reactance, for example, 28 kA.

Calculation:

28000
VR > × (0.5 + 0.1) = 42V
400
EQUATION1766-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 27)

Select a setting of
TripPickup=60 V.
The current transformer knee point voltage can roughly be calculated from the rated values,
considering knee point voltage to be about 70% of the accuracy limit voltage.
The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage
TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > (4 + 0.5) × 100 × 0.7 = 315V

EQUATION1767-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 28)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup.

146
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. Since this application it is not required to be so sensitive, select R
series=150 ohm, which gives an IED current of 400 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 29 which gives an

acceptable value; in fact in this example the sensitivity is about 13% of the nominal
current of the CT:

2000
IP = × ( 400 0° + 60 ) £ approx.140 A
5
EQUATION1886-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 29)

Where
IR= 100mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit
Imag = 15mA is the magnetizing current of the CT at the operating voltage TripPickup

Ires= 5 mA is the current drawn by the non-linear resistor at the operating voltageTripPickup

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current
transformer cores which should be available. The current value at TripPickup is taken.

6.2.4.5 Tertiary reactor protection

Reactive power equipment (for example shunt reactors and/or shunt capacitors) can be
connected to the tertiary winding of the power transformers. The 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect the tertiary reactor
for phase faults as well as ground faults if the power system of the tertiary winding is
direct or low impedance grounded.

147
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

3·87

ANSI05000176-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000176 V2 EN

Figure 49: Application of the1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function on a reactor

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the secondary fault, thereby reducing the stability
voltage limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage
developed across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor

148
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

but in the unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much

higher than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: C200
Secondary resistance: 0.1 Ohms (At 100/5 Tap)
Cable loop resistance: <100 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point and the farthest
CT) to be limited to approximately 0.1 Ohms at 75deg C
Note! Only one way as the tertiary power system grounding is limiting
the ground-fault current. If high ground-fault current exists use two way
cable length.
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor reactance
and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor for example, 800 A.

Calculation:

800
VR > × (0.1 + 0.1) = 8
20
EQUATION1768-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 30)

Select a setting of TripPickup=30 V.

The current transformer knee point voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage TripPickup.

VkneeANSI > ( 2 + 0.1) × 100 × 0.7 = 147 V

EQUATION1779-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 31)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup.

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. Since this application requires good sensitivity, select R Series = 100
ohm, which gives an IED current of 200 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 32, which gives an
acceptable value, ignoring the current drawn by the non-linear resistor. A little lower
sensitivity could be selected by using a lower resistance value.

100
IP = × (200 + 2 × 30) £ approx.5.2 A
5
EQUATION1769-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 32)

149
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn
by each CT just at pickup. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing
curve of the current transformer cores, which should be available. The current value at
TripPickup is taken.

6.2.4.6 Restricted earth fault protection (87N)

For solidly grounded systems a restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N) is
often provided as a complement to the normal transformer differential function. The
advantage with the restricted ground fault functions is the high sensitivity for internal
earth faults in the transformer winding. Sensitivities of 2-8% can be achieved whereas
the normal differential function will have sensitivities of 20-40%. The sensitivity for
high impedance restricted ground fault function is mostly dependent on the current
transformers magnetizing currents.

The connection of a restricted earth fault function is shown in Figure 50. It is

connected across each directly or low impedance grounded transformer winding.

87N

en05000177_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000177 V1 EN

Figure 50: Application of HZPDIF (87) function as a restricted earth fault

protection for a star connected winding of an YNd transformer

150
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever

high impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT
capability, minimize the current, thereby reducing the stability voltage
limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed
across the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the
unused taps, owing to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher
than design limits might be induced.

Basic data:
Transformer rated current on HV winding: 250 A
Current transformer ratio: 600-300/5A A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: C200
Secondary resistance: 0.66 ohms
Cable loop resistance: <50 ft AWG10 (one way between the junction point
and the farthest CT) to be limited to approx. 0.05
Ohms at 75° C gives loop resistance 2 ˣ 0.05 = 0.1 Ohms
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by the
transformer reactance, use 15 ˣ rated current of the
transformer

Calculation:

250
VR > 15 × × ( 0.1 + 0.1) = 6.25V
600 / 5
EQUATION1775-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 33)

Select a setting of TripPickup=40 V.

The current transformerknee point voltage can roughly be calculated from the rated values.
Considering knee point voltage to be about 70% of the accuracy limit voltage.

VkneeANSI > (0.1 + 2) × 100 = 210V

EQUATION1770-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 34)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ TripPickup

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor
value to use. Since this application requires high sensitivity, select R series= 100 ohm
which gives a current of 200 mA.

151
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 35 which is

acceptable as it gives around 10% minimum operating current, ignoring the current
drawn by the non-linear resistor.

600
IP = × ( 200 0° + 4 × 20 -60° ) £ approx.5.4 A
5
EQUATION1885-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 35)

Where 200mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and 50mA is the current drawn
by each CT just at pickup. The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing
curve for the current transformer cores which should be available. The current value at
TripPickup is taken.

6.2.4.7 Alarm level operation

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) function has a separate
alarm level, which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current
transformer circuit. The setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the
operating voltage TripPickup.

As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of HZPDIF (87) function is
normally high, which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short
circuits or open current transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor
can be selected to achieve sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or separate
criteria can be added to the operation, like a check zone. This can be either another
IED, with the same HZPDIF (87) function, or be a check about the fault condition,
which is performed by a ground overcurrent function or neutral point voltage function.

For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output
should be used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding
continuous high voltage in the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the
shorting and alarm are activated. Auxiliary relays with contacts that can withstand high
voltage shall be used, like RXMVB types.

The metrosil operating characteristic is given in the following figure.

152
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

IEC05000749 V1 EN

Figure 51: Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the average
range of current is: 0.01–10 mA

6.3 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF (87N)

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Restricted earth-fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN

6.3.2 Application
A breakdown of the insulation between a transformer winding and the core or the tank
may result in a large fault current which causes severe damage to the windings and the
transformer core. A high gas pressure may develop, damaging the transformer tank.

153
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Fast and sensitive detection of ground faults in a power transformer winding can be
obtained in solidly grounded or low impedance grounded networks by the restricted earth-
fault protection. The only requirement is that the power transformer winding is
connected to ground in the star point (in case of wye-connected windings) or through a
separate grounding transformer (in case of delta-connected windings).

The low impedance restricted ground fault protection REFPDIF (87N) is a winding
protection function. It protects the power transformer winding against faults involving
ground. Observe that single phase-to-ground faults are the most common fault types in
transformers. A sensitive ground fault protection is therefore desirable.

A restricted ground fault protection is the fastest and the most sensitive protection, a
power transformer winding can have and will detect faults such as:

• ground faults in the transformer winding when the network is grounded through an
impedance
• ground faults in the transformer winding in solidly grounded network when the
point of the fault is close to the winding star point.

The restricted ground fault protection is not affected, as a differential protection, with
the following power transformer related phenomena:

• magnetizing inrush currents

• overexcitation magnetizing currents
• load tap changer
• external and internal phase faults which do not involve ground
• symmetrical overload conditions

Due to its features, REFPDIF (87N) is often used as a main protection of the
transformer winding for all faults involving ground.

6.3.2.1 Transformer winding, solidly grounded

The most common application is on a solidly grounded transformer winding. The

connection is shown in figure 52.

154
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

I3PW1CT1

REFPDIF (87N)

I3P

ANSI05000210_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000210 V3 EN

Figure 52: Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth-fault function

REFPDIF (87N) for a directly (solidly) grounded transformer winding

6.3.2.2 Transformer winding, grounded through Zig-Zag grounding transformer

A common application is for low reactance grounded transformer where the

grounding is through separate Zig-Zag grounding transformers. The fault current is
then limited to typical 800 to 2000 A for each transformer. The connection for this
application is shown in figure 53.

155
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

ANSI05000211_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000211 V3 EN

Figure 53: Connection of the low impedance Restricted earth-fault function

REFPDIF for a zig-zag grounding transformer

6.3.2.3 Autotransformer winding, solidly grounded

Autotransformers can be protected with the low impedance restricted ground fault
protection function REFPDIF. The complete transformer will then be protected

156
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

including the HV side, the neutral connection and the LV side. The connection of
REFPDIF (87N) for this application is shown in figure 54.

I3PW1CT1

REFPDIF (87N)

I3PW2CT1
I3P

ANSI05000212-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000212 V4 EN

Figure 54: Connection of restricted ground fault, low impedance function

REFPDIF (87N) for an autotransformer, solidly grounded

6.3.2.4 Reactor winding, solidly grounded

Reactors can be protected with restricted ground fault protection, low impedance
function REFPDIF (87N). The connection of REFPDIF (87N) for this application is
shown in figure 55.

157
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

ANSI05000213_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000213 V3 EN

Figure 55: Connection of restricted earth-fault, low impedance function REFPDIF

(87N) for a solidly grounded reactor

6.3.2.5 Multi-breaker applications

Multi-breaker arrangements including ring, one breaker-and-a-half, double breaker

and mesh corner arrangements have two sets of current transformers on the phase side.
The restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function REFPDIF (87N) has
inputs to allow two current inputs from each side of the transformer. The second
winding set is only applicable for autotransformers.

A typical connection for a star-delta transformer is shown in figure 56.

158
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

A 52 52

B 52 52

C 52 52

REFPDIF (87N)

I3PW1CT1

I3PW1CT2

I3P

ANSI05000214-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000214 V2 EN

Figure 56: Connection of Restricted earth fault, low impedance function REFPDIF
(87N) in multi-breaker arrangements

6.3.2.6 CT grounding direction

To make the restricted earth-fault protection REFPDIF (87N)operate correctly, the

main CTs are always supposed to be wye-connected. The main CT's neutral (star)
formation can be positioned in either way, ToObject or FromObject. However,
internally REFPDIF (87N) always uses reference directions towards the protected
transformers, as shown in Figure 56. Thus the IED always measures the primary
currents on all sides and in the neutral of the power transformer with the same
reference direction towards the power transformer windings.

The grounding can be freely selected for each of the involved current transformers.

6.3.3 Setting guidelines

6.3.3.1 Setting and configuration

Recommendation for analog inputs

I3P: Neutral point current ( All analog inputs connected as 3Ph groups in ACT).

159
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

I3PW1CT1: Phase currents for winding 1 first current transformer set.

I3PW1CT2: Phase currents for winding1 second current transformer set for multi-
breaker arrangements. When not required configure input to "GRP-OFF".

I3PW2CT1: Phase currents for winding 2 first current transformer set. Used for
autotransformers.

I3PW2CT2: Phase currents for winding 2 second current transformer set for multi-
breaker arrangements. Used when protecting an autotransformer. When not required,
configure input to "GRP-OFF".

Recommendation for Binary input signals

Refer to the pre-configured configurations for details.

BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the function. Can be used, for example,
to block for a limited time the operation during special service conditions.

Recommendation for output signals

Refer to pre-configured configurations for details.

PICKUP: The pickup output indicates that Idiff is in the operate region of the
characteristic.

TRIP: The trip output is activated when all operating criteria are fulfilled.

DIR_INT: The output is activated when the directional criteria has been fulfilled.

BLK2H: The output is activated when the function is blocked due to a too high level of
second harmonic.

6.3.3.2 Settings

The parameters for the restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function
REFPDIF (87N) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: The operation of REFPDIF (87N) can be switched Enabled/Disabled.

IdMin: The setting gives the minimum operation value. The setting is in percent of the
IBase value of the chosen GlobalBaseSel. The neutral current must always be larger
than half of this value. A normal setting is 30% of power transformer-winding rated
current for a solidly grounded winding.

160
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

CTFactorPri1: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement

where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer
winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be
required. The setting is normally 1.0 but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall
be CT primary rating/IBase.

CTFactorPri2: A factor to allow a sensitive function also at multi-breaker arrangement

where the rating in the bay is much higher than the rated current of the transformer
winding. The stabilizing can then be high so an unnecessary high fault level can be
required. The setting is normally 1.0 but in multi-breaker arrangement the setting shall
be CT primary rating/IBase.

CTFactorSec1: See setting CTFactorPri1. Only difference is that CTFactorSec1 is

related to W2 side.

CTFactorSec2: See setting CTFactorPri2. Only difference is that CTFactorSec2 is

related to W2 side.

6.4 Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC (11)

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Additional security logic for differential LDRGFC - 11
protection

6.4.2 Application
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11) can help the security
of the protection especially when the communication system is in abnormal status or
for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It
reduces the probability for mal-operation of the protection. LDRGFC (11) is more
sensitive than the main protection logic to always release operation for all faults
detected by the differential function. LDRGFC (11) consists of four sub functions:

• Phase-to-phase current variation

• Zero sequence current criterion
• Low voltage criterion
• Low current criterion

161
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples (IL1–IL2, IL2–IL3, etc.) as
input and it calculates the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-
phase current variation function is major one to fulfil the objectives of the start up element.

Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases security
of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.

Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase to phase voltages as inputs. It
increases the security of protection when the three phase fault occurred on the weak
end side.

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.

The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line and
protection is not working correctly.

Features:

• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the protected
system
• Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
• Startup element detects the evolving faults, high impedance faults and three phase
fault on weak side
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time

The Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC (11) is connected as
a local criterion to release the tripping from line differential protection. LDRGFC is
connected with an AND gate to the trip signals from LDLPDIF function. Figure 57
shows a configuration for three phase tripping, but LDRGFC can be configured with
individual release to all phases trip. The BFI_3P signal can also, through one of the
available binary signal transfer channels, be sent to remote end and there connected to
input REMSTEP. Normally, the local criterion is sufficient.

162
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 6
Differential protection

Release of line
differential
LDLPSCH (87L) AND protection trip
CTFAIL TRIP INPUT1 OUT
OUTSERV TRL1 INPUT2 NOUT
BLOCK TRL2 INPUT3
TRL3 INPUT4N
TRLOCAL
TRLOCL1
TRLOCL2
TRLOCL3
TRREMOTE
DIFLBLKD

Start signal to
LDRGFC (11REL) remote side
I3P* START
U3P* STCVL1L2
BLOCK STCVL2L3
BLKCV STCVL3L1
BLKUC STUC
BLK3I0 ST3I0
Start signal from BLKUV STUV
REMSTUP
remote side ANSI11000232-3-en.vsd
ANSI11000232 V3 EN

Figure 57: Local release criterion configuration for line differential protection

6.4.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

tStUpReset: Reset delay of the startup signal. The default value is recommended.

Settings for phase-phase current variation subfunction are described below.

Enable CV: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled in most applications

Pick Up ICV: Level of fixed threshold given in % of IBase. This setting should be
based on fault calculations to find the current increase in case of a fault at the point on
the protected line giving the smallest fault current to the protection. The phase current
shall be calculated for different types of faults (single phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase
to ground, phase-to-phase and three phase short circuits) at different switching states in
the network. In case of switching of large objects (shunt capacitor banks, transformers,
and so on) large change in current can occur. The Pick Up ICV setting should ensure
that all multi-phase faults are detected.

Time Delay CV: Time delay of zero sequence overcurrent criterion. Default value
0.002 s is recommended

Settings for zero sequence current criterion subfunction are described below.

Enable 3I0: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled for detection of phase-to-ground faults

with high sensitivity

163
Application Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Differential protection

PU 3I0 : Level of high zero sequence current detection given in % of IBase. This
setting should be based on fault calculations to find the zero sequence current in case
of a fault at the point on the protected line giving the smallest fault current to the
protection. The zero sequence current shall be calculated for different types of faults
(single phase-to-groundand phase to phase to ground) at different switching states in
the network.

t3I0: Time delay of zero sequence overcurrent criterion. Default value 0.0 s is
recommended

Setting for low voltage criterion subfunction are described below.

OperationUV: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled for detection of faults by means of

low phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage

V_Ph-N: Level of low phase-ground voltage detection, given in % of VBase. This

setting should be based on fault calculations to find the phase-ground voltage decrease
in case of a fault at the most remote point where the differential protection shall be
active. The phase-ground voltages shall be calculated for different types of faults
(single phase-to-ground and phase to phase to ground) at different switching states in
the network. The setting must be higher than the lowest phase-ground voltage during non-
faulted operation.

V_Ph-Ph: Level of low phase-phase voltage detection, given in % of VBase. This

setting should be based on fault calculations to find the phase-phase voltage decrease
in case of a fault at the most remote point where the differential protection shall be
active. The phase-phase voltages shall be calculated for different types of faults (single
phase to ground and phase to phase to ground) at different switching states in the
network. The setting must be higher than the lowest phase-phase voltage during non-
faulted operation.

tUV: Time delay of undervoltage criterion. Default value 0.0 s is recommended

Settings for low current criterion subfunction are described below.

Operation37: Enabled/Disabled, is set Enabled when tripping is preferred at

energizing of the line if differential does not behave correctly.

PU_37: Level of low phase current detection given in % of IBase. This setting shall
detect open line ends and be below normal minimum load.

tUC: Time delay of undercurrent criterion. Default value is recommended to verify that
the line is open.

164
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Section 7 Impedance protection

7.1 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic

for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21),
ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR (21D)

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCPDIS 21
characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCAPDIS 21

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

7.1.2 Application

7.1.2.1 Introduction

Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more
complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of
very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more
stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged
or increased security level of the power system.

165
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The distance protection function is designed to meet basic requirements for application
on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid grounded systems) although it also
can be used on distribution levels.

7.1.2.2 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important roll when designing the protection
system. In the following sections, some hints with respect to distance protection are
highlighted.

Solid grounded networks

In solid grounded systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 58: Solidly grounded network

The ground fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance
has very limited influence on the ground fault current. The shunt admittance may,
however, have some marginal influence on the ground fault current in networks with
long transmission lines.

The ground fault current at single phase -to-ground in phase A can be calculated as
equation 36:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN (Equation 36)

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Table continues on next page

166
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive
ZN is the ground return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-
ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring technique to detect ground-fault. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground-fault factor is defined according to equation 37.

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 37)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are
valid, as shown in equation 38 and equation 39.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN (Equation 38)

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN (Equation 39)

The magnitude of the ground fault current in effectively grounded networks is high
enough for impedance measuring element to detect ground-fault. However, in the same
way as for solid grounded networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to

167
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be complemented with other
protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case.

7.1.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical
for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault
occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed may enlarge the fault impedance seen by
the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both
planning the protection system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 59, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left
side as:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 40)

If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 41)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN

Figure 59: Influence of fault infeed from remote end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors to
justify complementary protection to distance protection.

168
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.2.4 Load encroachment

Sometimes the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on
the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 60.
The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed and the way
to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings
that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load
impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection
that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right
figure 60. The load encroachment algorithm increases the possibility to detect high
fault resistances, especially for line to ground faults at remote end. For example, for a
given setting of the load angle LdAngle for the load encroachment function, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right in
figure 60 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation
due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So,
for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferable be switched off.

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection
with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS, 21) function.

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 60: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

169
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.1.2.5 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high
sensitivity for line to ground-fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy
loaded.

Definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can
generally be described as in table 28, long lines have SIR’s less than 0.5.

Table 28: Definition of long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and
zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the
possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved
(risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), as shown in figure 61.

170
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Zm

ZL

LdAngle LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle

RLdRev RLdFwd

en05000220_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000220 V1 EN

Figure 61: Characteristic for zone measurement for long line with load
encroachment activated

7.1.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage to experience
mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100
meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual
coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.
Those are:

171
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

• Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

• Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network
• Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated

One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line
can be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting
groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and
grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide
mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type
of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.

Parallel line applications

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common
operation modes:

• parallel line in service

• parallel line out of service and grounded
• parallel line out of service and not grounded

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

Here is the description of what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line, as
shown in figure 62.

172
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

From symmetrical components, it is possible to derive the impedance Z at the IED

point for normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 42.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 42)

Where:
Vph is phase-to-ground voltage at the IED point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is ground-fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN

Figure 62: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, as shown in figure 63.

173
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Z0 - Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN

Figure 63: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground-fault at the
remote busbar

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A is changed,
according to equation 43.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN (Equation 43)

By dividing equation 43 by equation 42 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the IED at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN (Equation 44)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the
line impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the
protected line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction
compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function overreaches. If the
currents have the same direction, the distance protection underreaches.

174
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Maximum overreach occurs if the fault infeed from remote end is weak. If we consider
a single phase-to-ground fault at "p" unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel
line for the case when the fault infeed from remote end is zero, we can draw the
voltage V in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 45.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN (Equation 45)

Notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN (Equation 46)

Simplification of equation 46, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into
equation 45 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3 I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN (Equation 47)

If we finally divide equation 47 with equation 42 we can draw the impedance present
to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
I
 ph + KN ⋅ 3 I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN (Equation 48)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of
the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach
reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is
proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not
significantly affect the operation of a permissive under-reach scheme.

175
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN

Figure 64: The parallel line is out of service and grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends on the bus bar side
of the line CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent
zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 64.

A I0 Z 0 Zm0

Zm0 I0
C

B Z 0 Zm0

99000039.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG7100 V1 EN

Figure 65: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends

Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 49.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 49)

The influence on the distance measurement can be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate
setting group for this operation condition, since it reduces the reach considerably when
the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They
assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They

176
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E
and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to equation 50 and equation 51 for each
particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 50)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 51)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN

Figure 66: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is
high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 66.

The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching
distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out
of operation and grounded at both ends.

177
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

I0 Z0 Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 Z0m
B
99000040.vsd
IEC99000040 V1 EN

Figure 67: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line

with one circuit disconnected and not grounded

The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 52.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) (
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN (Equation 52)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 53 and equation 54.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN (Equation 53)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN (Equation 54)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 55.

Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN (Equation 55)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 56.

178
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN (Equation 56)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient
amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

7.1.2.7 Tapped line application

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN

Figure 68: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault
infeed from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current
infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured
impedance at A and C is as follows:

179
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 57)

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × (
2
)
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN (Equation 58)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point.
IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.
V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to
the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault can be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side V1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example,
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (as shown in the dotted line in figure 68), given that the
distance protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other
zone1 settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three

180
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.

The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 59)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone
1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of
approximately 30 m/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground (RFPG) and phase-
to-phase (RFPP) must be as high as possible without interfering with the load
impedance to obtain reliable fault detection.

7.1.2.8 Series compensation in power systems

The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line
reactance in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of
transmission corridors. The principle is based on compensation of distributed line
reactance by insertion of series capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided
by the capacitor is continuously proportional to the square of the current flowing at the
same time through the compensated line and series capacitor. This means that the
series capacitor has a self-regulating effect. When the system loading increases, the
reactive power generated by series capacitors increases as well. The response of SCs is
automatic, instantaneous and continuous.

The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are:

• Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit

• Increase power transfer capability by raising the transient stability limit
• Improved reactive power balance
• Increase in power transfer capacity
• Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction
• Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new
power lines

Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit

A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance
in a transmission line, as shown in figure 69. During low loading, the system voltage

181
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

drop is lower and at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower.
When the loading increases and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the
series capacitor increases and therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can
be regulated.

Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the
reactance of the line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage
collapse. Figure 70 presents the voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in
figure 69) on line loading and compensation degree KC, which is defined according to
equation 60. The effect of series compensation is in this particular case obvious and
self explanatory.

XC
KC =
X Line
EQUATION1895 V1 EN (Equation 60)

A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance

Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN (Equation 61)

A B
Z SA1 Power line Load
EA ~
Seires
capacitor

en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN

Figure 69: A simple radial power system

500

V limit
400

300
V[kV]

200
P30

P50

P70
P0

100

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

P[MW]

en06000586_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000586 V1 EN

Figure 70: Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of
compensation

182
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Increased power transfer capability by raising the first swing stability limit
Consider the simple one-machine and infinite bus system shown in figure 71.
A B
System
-jXC
PMech ZSA1 +jXLine
EA ~

en06000587.vsd
IEC06000587 V1 EN

Figure 71: One machine and infinite bus system

The equal-areas criterion is used to show the effectiveness of a series capacitor for
improvement of first swing transient stability (as shown in figure 72).

In steady state, the mechanical input power to the generator (PMech) is equal to the
electrical output power from the generator (PE ) and the generator angle is d0. If a 3-
phase fault occurs at a point near the machine, the electrical output of the generator
reduces to zero. This means that the speed of the generator increases and the angle
difference between the generator and the infinite bus increases during the fault. At the
time of fault clearing, the angle difference has increased to δC. After reclosing of the
system, the transmitted power exceeds the mechanical input power and the generator
deaccelerates. The generator decelerates as long as equal area condition AACC=ADEC
has not been fulfilled. The critical condition for post-fault system stability is that the
angular displacement after fault clearing and during the deceleration does not exceed
its critical limit δCR, because if it does, the system cannot get back to equilibrium and
the synchronism is lost. The first swing stability and the stability margin can be
evaluated by studying the different areas in figure 72 for the same system, once
without SC and once with series compensation. The areas under the corresponding P –
δ curves correspond to energy and the system remains stable if the accelerating energy
that the generator picks up during the fault is lower than the decelerating energy that is
transferred across the transmission line during the first system swing upon fault clearing.
without SC with SC
P [ pu ]

P [ pu ]

A SM

A DEC

A DEC
PMech A SM P Mech

AACC AACC

0 C EA CR 0 C EA CR

en06000588.vsd
IEC06000588 V1 EN

Figure 72: Equal area criterion and first swing stability without and with series
compensation

183
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

This means that the system is stable if AACC ≤ (ADEC + ASM). The stability margin is
given by the difference between the available decelerating energy (area between the P
(δ) and PMech and the angular difference between δC and δCR ) and the accelerating
energy. It is represented in figure 72 by the area ASM. Notice that a substantial increase
in the stability margin is obtained by installing a series capacitor. The series
compensation can improve the situation in two ways, it can decrease the initial angle
difference δ0 corresponding to a certain power transfer and it also shifts the P – δ curve
upwards.

Improve reactive power balance

A series capacitor increases its output of reactive power instantaneously, continuously
and automatically with increasing line load. It is thus a self-regulating device, which
improves voltage regulation and reduces the need for other means of voltage control
for example, shunt compensation. The reactive power balance of a series compensated
line is shown in figure 73 as an example for 500 km long 500 kV transmission line
with 50% compensation degree.

Q
(Mvar) 600
(S.C.)
400
Capacitive
200
Power flow
(MW)
500 1000 1500
200
(T.L. + S.C.)
Inductive
400

600
Transmission 500 kV
800 Line 500 km (T.L.)
Series
1000 Compensation k = 50 %

en06000589.vsd
IEC06000589 V1 EN

Figure 73: Self-regulating effect of reactive power balance

Increase in power transfer

The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation
for a transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 74. The
power transfer on the transmission line is given by the equation 62:

184
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

VA × VB × sin ( d ) VA × VB × sin ( d )
P= =
X Line - X C X Line × (1 - K C )
EQUATION1994-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 62)

The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation 60

VA DV VB

PA A B PB
-jX C
+jXL
VA VB d
QA QB

en06000590_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000590 V1 EN

Figure 74: Transmission line with series capacitor

The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference (δ)
between the line ends is illustrated in figure 75. Practical compensation degree runs
from 20 to 70 percent. Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be
obtained in practice.
Multiple of power over
a non-compensated line
Powe r tra nsfe r with co ns ta nt a ng le diffe re nce
3.5

3
Inc re a se in powe r tra ns fe r

2.5

1.5

1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
D e gre e of se rie s c ompe nsa tio n [%] Degree of
compensation

en06000592.vsd
IEC06000592 V1 EN

Figure 75: Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on

degree of series compensation

Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction

A series capacitor can be used to control the distribution of active power between
parallel transmission circuits. The compensation of transmission lines with sufficient
thermal capacity can relieve the possible overloading of other parallel lines. This
distribution is governed by the reactance, while the losses are determined by the
resistance. A properly designed series compensation system can considerably reduce
the total transmission system losses, as shown in figure 76.

185
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

-jXC
jXL1 RL1

Line 1

jXL2 R L2

Line 2

en06000593.vsd
IEC06000593 V1 EN

Figure 76: Two parallel lines with series capacitor for optimized load sharing and
loss reduction

To minimize the losses, the series capacitor must be installed in the transmission line
with the lower resistance. The size of the series capacitor that minimizes the total
losses is given the following expression:

X L1 - X C RL1
=
X L2 RL 2
EQUATION1899 V1 EN (Equation 63)

Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment

costs for new power line
As shown in figure 75 the line loading can easily be increased 1.5-2 times by series
compensation. Thus, the required number of transmission lines needed for a certain
power transfer can be significantly reduced. The cost of series compensation is small
compared to the cost of a transmission line. When evaluating the cost of a transmission
system upgrade also the cost of secondary equipment such as eventual upgrading of
line protections on the compensated as well as, adjacent lines should be considered.
The main advantages of series compensation against the new transmission line within
the same corridor are:

• Significantly reduced investment costs; the same increase in power transmission

for up to 90% reduced costs
• In many cases, the only practical way to increase the transmission capacity of a
corridor
• Series compensation shortens the lead times
• Environmental impact

186
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

EA ~ Series compensation ~ EB

New transmission line

en06000594.vsd
IEC06000594 V1 EN

Figure 77: Series compensation is an important alternative to new transmission

lines

Advancements in series compensation using thyristor switching

technology
A thyristor switched series capacitor (TSSC) can be used for power flow control. This
is performed by changing the reactance of the transmission circuit in discrete steps, as
shown in figure 78. A TSSC typically consists of a few segments in series that can be
inserted independently of each other in order to achieve different total series capacitor
reactance.

-jXC -jX C -jXC

Fw Fw Fw

Rv Rv Rv

en06000595.vsd
IEC06000595 V1 EN

Figure 78: Thyristor switched series capacitor

187
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

-jXC
iL
+ -

VC
Fw

iV
jX L

Rv
en06000596_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000596 V1 EN

Figure 79: Thyristor controlled series capacitor

IL Line current

IV Current through the thyristor

UC Voltage over the series capacitor

XC Rated reactance of the series capacitor

A thyristor controlled series capacitor (TCSC) allows continuous control of the series
capacitor reactance. This is achieved by adding current through the capacitor via the
parallel thyristor valve path see figure 79. The main circuit of the TCSC consists of a
capacitor bank and a thyristor controlled inductive branch connected in parallel. The
capacitor bank may have a value of for example, 10...30 Ω/phase and a rated
continuous current of 1500...3000 A. The capacitor bank for each phase is mounted on
a platform providing full insulation towards ground. The thyristor valve contains a
string of series connected high power thyristors with a maximum total blocking voltage
in the range of hundreds of kV. The inductor is an air-core reactor with a few mH
inductance. The wave forms of a TCSC in capacitive boost mode are shown in figure
80.

188
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

IL 0

-2
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
5

IV 0

-5
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
50

UC 0

-50
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
0

XC -20

-40
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

en06000597.vsd

IEC06000597 V1 EN

Figure 80: TCSC wave forms presented in capacitive boost mode for a typical
50Hz system

The apparent impedance of the TCSC (the impedance seen by the power system) can
typically be increased to up to 3 times the physical impedance of the capacitor, see
figure 81. This high apparent reactance will mainly be used for damping of power
oscillations.

189
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Imperatriz TCSC, Operating range

3.2
B C D
3

2.8

2.6

2.4

2.2
Continuous 30 min 10s
2

1.8

1.6
Xtcsc/Xc (pu)

1.4
A
1.2

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2
Continuous
0 30 min. overload
-0.2 10s overload
E F G Bypass mode
-0.4
Series5
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Line current (Arms)

en06000598.vsd
IEC06000598 V1 EN

Figure 81: Operating range of a TCSC installed for damping of power oscillations
(example)

During continuous valve bypass the TCSC represents an inductive impedance of about
20% of the capacitor impedance. Both operation in capacitive boost mode and valve
bypass mode can be used for damping of power swings. The utilization of valve bypass
increases the dynamic range of the TCSC and improves the TCSC effectiveness in
power oscillation damping.

7.1.2.9 Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines

System planning does not consider any more possible protection issues and difficulties,
when deciding for a particular, non conventional solution of certain operation and
stability problems. It is supposed that modern communication and state of the art
computer technologies provides good basis for the required solution. This applies also
to protection issues in series compensated networks. Different physical phenomena,
which influence conventional principles of IED protection, like distance protection,
phase comparison protection, are well known and accordingly considered in IED
design. Some other issues, like influence of controlled thyristors in series capacitor
banks are getting increased importance, although not as high as they would deserve.

The most important challenges, which influence the operation of different protection
functions in the greatest extent, are described in this chapter.

190
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Voltage and current inversion

Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series
compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages
measured in different points of series compensated networks and this performances of
different protection functions, which have their operation based on properties of
measured voltage and current phasors.

Voltage inversion
Figure 82 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the
IED point and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement
is supposed to be on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED
point and fault on the protected line. Figure 83 presents the corresponding phasor
diagrams for the cases with bypassed and fully inserted series capacitor.

Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the
bus is linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in
scheme (as shown in figure 83). Voltage VM measured at the bus is equal to voltage
drop D VL on the faulty line and lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees.

The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point
and the fault position. The fault current IF (see figure 83) is increased due to the series
capacitor, generally decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The
reactive voltage drop D VL on XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees.
Voltage drop DVC on series capacitor lags the fault current by 90 degrees. Note that
line impedance XL1 could be divided into two parts: one between the IED point and the
capacitor and one between the capacitor and the fault position. The resulting voltage
VM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of voltage drops on partial
impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as presented by

VM = I F × j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1995-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 64)

191
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
Source voltage

Pre -fault voltage

V’ M Fault voltage

VM
V

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000605_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000605 V1 EN

Figure 82: Voltage inversion on series compensated line

VS
xVS

xVS
VS

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
x VL
V’M=xV L

IF IF
x VC

VM

en06000606_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000606 V1 EN

Figure 83: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and
inserted series capacitor during voltage inversion

It is obvious that voltage VM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This
situation corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line
without series capacitor. Voltage VM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case
when:

X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN (Equation 65)

Where
XS is the source impedance behind the IED

192
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its
dimension. It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its
consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks
depend on their operating principle. The most known effect has voltage inversion on
directional measurement of distance IEDs (see chapter "Distance protection" for more
details), which must for this reason comprise special measures against this phenomenon.

There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs
located on the bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does
not eliminate the phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of
IED point.

Current inversion
Figure 84 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent
voltage source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on non-
compensated lines from power source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series
capacitor may change the situation.
With inserted
capacitor
Source voltage v
VM

Pre -fault voltage

With bypassed
capacitor V’ M Fault voltage

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000607_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000607 V1 EN

Figure 84: Current inversion on series compensated line

The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage VS
depends in general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and
the fault position. Two possibilities appear:

X S - X C + X L1 > 0
X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN (Equation 66)

193
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases,
when the capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown
in phasor diagram in figure 85. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive
nature and the fault currents lags source voltage by 90 electrical degrees.

The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for
this reason lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive
current will flow from series compensated line to the system. The system conditions
are in such case presented by equation 67

X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN (Equation 67)

VS HVS
VS
HVS

VM
With bypassed With inserted

HVC
capacitor capacitor
V’M=HV L

IF IF
HVL

en06000608_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000608 V1 EN

Figure 85: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and
inserted series capacitor during current inversion

It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on

operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their
operating principle. The most known effect has current inversion on operation of
distance IEDs (as shown in section "Distance protection" for more details), which
cannot be used for the protection of series compensated lines with possible current
inversion. Equation 67 shows also big dependence of possible current inversion on
series compensated lines on location of series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for faults just behind
the capacitor when located at line IED and only the source impedance prevents current
inversion. Current inversion has been considered for many years only a theoretical
possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big power plants)
compared to the capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in modern
networks is increasing and must be studied carefully during system preparatory studies.

The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of
protection devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections,

194
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

based on residual (zero sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered
in studies as well. Current inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence
source impedance (a number of power transformers connected in parallel) must be
considered as practical possibility in many modern networks.

Low frequency transients

Series capacitors introduce in power systems oscillations in currents and voltages,
which are not common in non-compensated systems. These oscillations have
frequencies lower than the rated system frequency and may cause delayed increase of
fault currents, delayed operation of spark gaps as well as, delayed operation of
protective IEDs. The most obvious difference is generally seen in fault currents. Figure
86 presents a simplified picture of a series compensated network with basic line
parameters during fault conditions. We study the basic performances for the same
network with and without series capacitor. Possible effects of spark gap flashing or
MOV conducting are neglected. The time dependence of fault currents and the
difference between them are of interest.
-jXC
RL jXL
i L(t)

eG (t) ~
F

en06000609.vsd
IEC06000609 V1 EN

Figure 86: Simplified equivalent scheme of SC network during fault conditions

We consider the instantaneous value of generator voltage following the sine wave
according to equation 68

eG = EG × sin (w × t + l )
EQUATION1904 V1 EN (Equation 68)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 86 without series
capacitor is presented by equation 69

diL
LL × + RL × iL = EG × sin (w × t + l )
dt
EQUATION1905 V1 EN (Equation 69)

The solution over line current is presented by group of equations 70

195
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

R
E é E ù -t×
L

iL = G × sin (w × t + l - j ) + ê I L ( t = 0) - G × sin ( l - j ) ú × e LL
Z ë Z û
Z = RL 2 + (w × LL )
2

æ w × LL ö
j = atg ç ÷
è RL ø
EQUATION1906 V1 EN (Equation 70)

The line fault current consists of two components:

• The steady-state component which magnitude depends on generator voltage and

absolute value of impedance included in the circuit
• The transient DC component, which magnitude depends on the fault incident angle
decays with the circuit time constant

LL RL [ s ]
EQUATION1907 V1 EN (Equation 71)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 86 with series
capacitor is presented by equation 72.

d 2il di 1
LL × 2
+ RL × L + iL (t ) = EG × w × cos (w × t + l )
dt dt C L
EQUATION1908 V1 EN (Equation 72)

The solution over line current is in this case presented by group of equations 73. The
fault current consists also here from the steady-state part and the transient part. The
difference with non-compensated conditions is that

• The total loop impedance decreases for the negative reactance of the series
capacitor, which in fact increases the magnitude of the fault current
• The transient part consists of the damped oscillation, which has an angular
frequency b and is dying out with a time constant a

196
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

EG
iL = × sin (w × t + l - j ) + [ K1 × cos ( b × t ) + K 2 × sin ( b × t )] × e -a ×t
Z SC
2
æ 1 ö
Z SC = RL + ç w × LL -
2
÷
è w × CL ø
EG
K1 = I L ( t = 0) - × sin ( l - j )
Z SC
é RL EG × w × LL ù
ê E G
× sin ( l ) - VC ( t = 0)
- × I L ( t = 0)
- × cos ( l - j ) - ú
1 2 Z SC
K2 = ê ú
b × LL ê EG × RL ú
ê - 2 × Z × sin ( l - j ) ú
ë SC û
RL
a=
2 × LL

1 RL2
b = -
LL × C L 4 × L2L
EQUATION1996-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 73)

The transient part has an angular frequency b and is damped out with the time-constant
α.

The difference in performance of fault currents for a three-phase short circuit at the end
of a typical 500 km long 500 kV line is presented in figure 87.

The short circuit current on a non-compensated line is lower in magnitude, but

comprises at the beginning only a transient DC component, which diminishes
completely in approximately 120ms. The final magnitude of the fault current on
compensated line is higher due to the decreased apparent impedance of a line (60%
compensation degree has been considered for a particular case), but the low frequency
oscillation is also obvious. The increase of fault current immediately after the fault
incidence (on figure 87 at approximately 21ms) is much slower than on non-
compensated line. This occurs due to the energy stored in capacitor before the fault.

197
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

10

I[pu]
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

10

t[ms ]
en06000610.vsd

IEC06000610 V1 EN

Figure 87: Short circuit currents for the fault at the end of 500 km long 500 kV line
without and with SC

Location of instrument transformers

Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an
important role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection
scheme. It is on the other hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of
those protection schemes, which need for their operation information on voltage in IED
point.

Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement

only, like line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location.
Figure 88 shows schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers
related to the position of line-end series capacitor.

- jX C
CT 1 CT 2

VT1 VT 2
en06000611_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000611 V1 EN

Figure 88: Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series
capacitor

198
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Bus side instrument transformers

CT1 and VT1 on figure 88 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers.
The protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current
inversion for line faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this
may series capacitor cause negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected
and adjacent lines as well for close-in line faults (see also figure 90 LOC=0%), which
requires special design of distance measuring elements to cope with such phenomena.
The advantage of such installation is that the protection zone covers also the series
capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that line protection will detect and
cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor.

Line side instrument transformers

CT2 and VT2 on figure 88 represent the case with line side instrument transformers.
The protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults
on the protected line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1
may be active in most applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument
transformers are used.

Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults,
which decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied
seriously in case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs
for teleprotection schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments
transformers and the buses reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and
may cause voltage as well as current inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks
for line faults. It is for this reason absolutely necessary to study the possible effect on
operation of zero sequence directional ground-fault overcurrent protection before its
installation.

Dual side instrument transformers

Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common
are installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto
installations also in switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and breaker-and-a-
half arrangement. The advantage of such schemes is that the unit protections cover also
for shunt faults in series capacitors and at the same time the voltage inversion does not
appear for faults on the protected line.

Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument
transformers on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each
particular protection function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on
dependability and security. The line side VT can for example be used by the distance
protection and the bus side VT by the directional residual OC ground fault protection.

Apparent impedances and MOV influence

Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by
distance IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 89 presents typical locations of

199
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

capacitor banks on power lines together with corresponding compensation degrees.

Distance IED near the feeding bus will see in different cases fault on remote end bus
depending on type of overvoltage protection used on capacitor bank (spark gap or
MOV) and SC location on protected power line.

100 %
66%
50 %
33%
0%
EA ~ X
KC = 80% 33 % 50 % 33% 80 %
21

en06000612_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000612 V1 EN

Figure 89: Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line

Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture
relatively simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance
corresponds to the impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 90 case KC
= 0%.
KC = 80% KC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% KC = 80%
KC = 0% LOC = 0% LOC = 50% LOC = 33%, 66% LOC = 100%
jX
jX

jX

jX

jX

R R R R R

en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN

Figure 90: Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations
and spark gaps used for overvoltage protection

200
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

iM MOV

-jX C
iL iC

VC

MOV protected series capacitor

20 100

10 50

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

50
10

100
20
Line current as a function of time Capacitor voltage as a function of time

20 20

10 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

10
10

20
20

Capacitor current as a function of time MOV current as a function of time

en06000614_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000614 V1 EN

Figure 91: MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and
corresponding currents

The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of
capacitive reactance included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap
does not flash over, as presented for typical cases in figure 90. Here it is necessary to
distinguish between two typical cases:

• Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong
directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 90 for 50%
compensation at 50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and
66% of line length. The remote end compensation has the same effect.
• The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the
IED point and fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure
23, 80% compensation at local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and
the distance IED will see wrong direction towards the fault, if no special measures
have been introduced in its design.

The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor
overvoltage protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only
when the instantaneous voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the
protective voltage level in each half-cycle separately, see figure 91.

201
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L

“A Linearized Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors” Paper 86SM357–8 IEEE/
PES summer meeting in Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in construction of a non-
linear equivalent circuit with series connected capacitor and resistor. Their value
depends on complete line (fault) current and protection factor kp. The later is defined
by equation 74.

VMOV
kp =
U NC
EQUATION2001-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 74)

Where
UMOV is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the
MOV has conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by √2
UNC is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX

jX

jX

I I
£1 =2
Kp × In Kp × In

I
Kp × In
= 10

R R R

en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN

Figure 92: Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of

protection factor KP

Figure 92 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case
LOC=0% in figure 90).

• Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or
equal to its protective current level (I £ kp · INC). Line apparent impedance is in
this case reduced for the complete reactance of a series capacitor.

• 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to

approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times
the protective current level (I £ 2· kp· INC). This information has high importance
for setting of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to
ground fault measurement as well as for phase to phase measurement.

202
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line
current becomes higher than 10-times the protective current level (I £ 10· kp· INC).

7.1.2.10 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines

Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series
compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way
influences the selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of
lines adjacent to the series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the
network.
VA VD
ZSA IA
EA
~ ZLA
A
-jXC
IF
F
VB Z LF
ZSB IB
EB ~ ZLB
B
D

en06000616_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000616 V1 EN

Figure 93: Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current
infeed

Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 93) is calculated for the loss-less system
according to the equation below.

VB = VD + I B × jX LB = ( I A + I B ) × j ( X LF - X C ) + I B × jX LB
EQUATION1998-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 75)

Further development of equation 75 gives the following expressions:

é æ IA ö ù
VB = jI B × ê X LB + ç 1 + ÷ × ( X LF - X C ) ú
ë è IB ø û
EQUATION1999-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 76)

X LB
X C (VB = 0 ) = + X LF
IA
1+
IB
EQUATION2000-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 77)

Equation 76 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of
capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent
series capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that

203
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

equation 77 indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of
series compensation through the effect of voltage inversion.

It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in
great extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF
between D bus and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the
bus and the fault appears just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of
voltage inversion to be expanded very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on
one hand the compensated line is very long with high degree of compensation, and the
adjacent lines are, on the other hand, relatively short.

Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on

implementation and location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly
estimate their influence on performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is
possible that the costs for number of protective devices, which should be replaced by
more appropriate ones due to the effect of applied series compensation, influences the
future position of series capacitors in power network.

Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short
circuits with zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher
fault resistances, for which spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct
at all. At the same time this kind of investigation must consider also the maximum
sensitivity and possible resistive reach of distance protection devices, which on the
other hand simplifies the problem.

Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection

makes simple calculations often impossible. Different kinds of steady-state network
simulations are in such cases unavoidable.

7.1.2.11 Distance protection

Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle
on series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a
lot of challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional
measurement and transient overreach.

Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and
voltage. Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restraing quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing
quantity. Typically Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining
quantity is the system voltage Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different
way and is not discussed here.

Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance
and resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected
line and its protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong
picture of the protected line and all “solutions” related to distance protection of series

204
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

compensated and adjacent lines are concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which
may help eliminating the basic reason for wrong measurement. The most known of
them are decrease of the reach due to presence of series capacitor, which apparently
decreases the line reactance, and introduction of permanent memory voltage in
directional measurement.

Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a
transmission networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it
necessary to install distance protection in combination with telecommunication. The
most common is distance protection in Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode
(POTT).

Underreaching and overreaching schemes

It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no
circumstances overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone
should always, under all system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain
section selectivity, the first distance (underreaching) protection zone must be set to a
reach less than the reactance of the compensated line in accordance with figure 94.
Zone 2 A
A B
-j X
C
Zone 1 A
X 12

X 11
Zone 1 B
G
DA DB

Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN

Figure 94: Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series

compensated line

The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor,
as shown in the dashed line in figure 94. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way
cover bigger portion of the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin
the remote end bus. Distance protection Zone 1 is often set to

X Z 1 = K S × ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN (Equation 78)

Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 95, which covers for possible
overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted
separately that compensation degree KC in figure 95 relates to total system reactance,
inclusive line and source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless
MOV or spark gaps are used for capacitor overvoltage protection.

205
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Equation 78 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of
series capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed
in line side, but it is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS .

If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less
than 50% of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a
section, G in figure 94, of the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.

1.0
KS

0.8

0.6

0.4
0.2

0 20 40 60 80 100
KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN

Figure 95: Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system

compensation degree KC

For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main
protection. Permissive overreaching distance protection or some kind of directional or
unit protection must be used.

The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or

out of service. Figure 96 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can
be kept in the total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for
close up faults. The overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone.
When the capacitor is in operation the permissive zone will have a very high degree of
overreach which can be considered as a disadvantage from a security point of view.

A B
-jX C Permissive Zone A
X 12
X 11
Permissive Zone B
DA DB

en06000620_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000620 V1 EN

Figure 96: Permissive overreach distance protection scheme

Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion)

Assume in equation 79

206
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN (Equation 79)

and in figure 97

a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen
from the DB IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until
the spark gap has flashed.

Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 97 are influenced by this
negative impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is
taken into consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a protection
far away from the faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance
zone, if no precaution is taken. Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power
lines are presented by equations 80 to 83.

I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN (Equation 80)

IF
X DA1 = X A1 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A1
EQUATION1916 V2 EN (Equation 81)

IF
X DA2 = X A2 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A2
EQUATION1917 V2 EN (Equation 82)

IF
X DA3 = X A3 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A3
EQUATION1918 V2 EN (Equation 83)

207
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

A1 B
jX 1
IA1
A2
-jX C
jX 2 jX11
X
A3 IA2 F
IF
jX 3

DA1 IA3
DB
DA2

DA3

en06000621_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000621 V1 EN

Figure 97: Distance IED on adjacent

power lines are influenced by
the negative impedance

Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has
taken place. If the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be
added to the protection of all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection
system must be able to operate correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs.
Distance protection can be used, but careful studies must be made for each individual
case. The rationale described applies to both conventional spark gap and MOV
protected capacitors.

Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent

power lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the
reactance of a short adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor reactance and
voltage inversion phenomenon may occur also on remote end of adjacent lines.
Distance protection of such line must have built-in functionality which applies
normally to protection of series compensated lines.

It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault
current will be of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the
negative impedance will be sustained. If equation 84

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN (Equation 84)

in figure 98, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is
bypassed. So, the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is
negative and if the characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 98 the IED cannot
operate. However, if there is a memory circuit designed so it covers the negative
impedance, a three phase fault can be successfully cleared by the distance protection.
As soon as the spark gap has flashed the situation for protection will be as for an

208
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

ordinary fault. However, a good protection system should be able to operate correctly
before and after gap flashing occurs.

jX jX X12

X 12
R RV

X11

X FW
X 11

R R FW
ZS

X RV
XC
ZS

XC

en06000584_small.vsd
en06000625.vsd
IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN
IEC06000625 V1 EN

Figure 98: Cross-polarized Figure 99: Quadrilateral

quadrilateral characteristic with
characteristic separate impedance
and directional
measurement

If the distance protection is equipped with a ground-fault measuring unit, the negative
impedance occurs when

3 × X C > 2 × X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN (Equation 85)

Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic)

will normally handle ground-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs inside
the characteristic. The operating area for negative impedance depends upon the
magnitude of the source impedance and calculations must be made on a case by case
basis, as shown in figure 98. Distance IEDs with separate impedance and directional
measurement offer additional setting and operational flexibility when it comes to
measurement of negative apparent impedance (as shown in figure 99).

Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion)

If equation 86

X C > X S + X11
EQUATION2036 V2 EN (Equation 86)

209
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

in figure 84 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant reactance becomes
negative and the fault current will have an opposite direction compared with fault
current in a power line without a capacitor (current inversion). The negative direction
of the fault current will persist until the spark gap has flashed. Sometimes there will be
no flashover at all, because the fault current is less than the setting value of the spark
gap. The negative fault current will cause a high voltage on the network. The situation
will be the same even if a MOV is used. However, depending upon the setting of the
MOV, the fault current will have a resistive component.

The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase
fault, but the negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition
for a negative current in case of an ground fault can be written as follows:

3 × X C > 2 × X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 × X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN (Equation 87)

All designations relates to figure 84. A good protection system must be able to cope
with both positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can
occur. A distance protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional
element gives the wrong direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current
exists, distance protection is not a suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current
seldom occurs. In normal network configurations the gaps will flash in this case.

Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines

Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending
at the same busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 100) causes some challenges for
distance protection because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The
current reversal phenomenon also raises problems from the protection point of view,
particularly when the power lines are short and when permissive overreach schemes
are used.
A -jXC B
ZAC ZCB

Zm0AC Zm0CB
-jXC
ZAC ZCB

en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN

Figure 100: Double circuit, parallel operating line

Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of
distance protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions
related to settings of distance protection on series compensated line have been
considered. Influence of disconnected parallel circuit, which is grounded at both ends,
on operation of distance protection on operating circuit is known.

210
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual

impedance between two circuits, see figure 101. It presents a zero sequence equivalent
circuit for a fault at B bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and
grounded at both IEDs. The effect of zero sequence mutual impedance on possible
overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus is increased compared to non compensated
operation, because series capacitor does not compensate for this reactance. The reach
of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for phase-to-ground measuring loops must
further be decreased for such operating conditions.
A -jXC B
j(X0L -Xm0)

jXm0

-jXC
j(X0L -Xm0)

en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN

Figure 101: Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double

circuit line with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both IEDs

Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance
protection for external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected
in one phase and runs non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing
cycle. All such operating conditions must carefully be studied in advance and
simulated by dynamic simulations in order to fine tune settings of distance IEDs.

If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure
102, than also one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel,
healthy circuit will send a carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal
will be received as a carrier receive signal CRBB.
RAA IFC1 IFC1 RBA RAA IFC1 RBA
X X
F F

RAB IFC2 RBB RAB IFC2 RBB

CSAB CRBB CSAB CRBB

en06000629_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000629 V1 EN

Figure 102: Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits

It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to
fault, which will reverse the current direction in healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB
will suddenly detect fault in forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due
to long reset time of IED RAB and especially telecommunication equipment, trip its
related circuit breaker, since all conditions for POTT have been fulfilled. Zero
sequence mutual impedance will additionally influence this process, since it increases
the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after the opening of first circuit
breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause unwanted operation of

211
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

protection on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the complete system
stability.

To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance
protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily
blocks distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the
signals received at the healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates
tripping. The second mentioned method has an advantage in that not the whole
protection is blocked for the short period. The disadvantage is that a local
communication is needed between two protection devices in the neighboring bays of
the same substation.

Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to
cover the whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of
service. When the capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously
and the whole system will be very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current
reversal difficulties will be accentuated because the ratio of mutual impedance against
self-impedance will be much higher than for a non-compensated line.

If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based

on negative sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual
coupling. However, they can only be used for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
faults. For three-phase faults an additional protection must be provided.

7.1.3 Setting guidelines

7.1.3.1 General

The settings for the distance protection function are done in primary values. The
instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to
automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in
the distance protection function.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.

212
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

7.1.3.2 Setting of zone1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to
section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in your application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of service and
grounded in both ends. The setting of ground fault reach should be selected to be <85%
also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (worst case).

7.1.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected
line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same
way as for zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at
least 120% of the protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed
from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the
IED location.

The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

If the requirements in the bullet—listed paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than
120%, the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid
unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at
remote end is down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the
protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted with a simple example below.

213
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

If a fault occurs at point F (as shown in figure 103, also for the explanation of all
abbreviations used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:
VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 88)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 103:

7.1.3.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up
protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always
covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication
purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. Equation 89 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone
is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN (Equation 89)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction to obtain certain sensitivity.

214
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.3.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines

Directional control
The directional function (ZDSRDIR) which is able to cope with the condition at
voltage reversal, shall be used in all IEDs with conventional distance protection
(ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS, 21). This function is necessary in the protection on
compensated lines as well as all non-compensated lines connected to this busbar
(adjacent lines). All protections that can be exposed to voltage reversal must have the
special directional function, including the protections on busbar where the voltage can
be reversed by series compensated lines not terminated to this busbar.

The directional function is controlled by faulty phase criteria. These criteria must
identify all forward and reverse faults that can cause voltage reversal. Setting of the
corresponding reach of the impedance measuring elements is separate for reactive and
resistive reach and independent of each other for phase-to-ground and for phase-to-
phase measurement.

It is also necessary to consider the minimum load impedance limiting conditions:

Setting of zone 1
A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as
well as on the adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component,
this is however small and can mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy
adjacent line.

An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal
have to be set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can
move and pass the bus, the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further
out in the net must be set with respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus.

Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMCPDIS, 21) characteristic in forward
and reverse direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize
dependability and security for independent zone1.

Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault
conditions the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can
only be set with a percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 104

215
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

p
%
100

80

60

40

20

0 C
20 40 60 80 100 %

99000202.vsd

IEC99000202 V1 EN

Figure 104: Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at

different degrees of compensation

æX ö
c = degree of compensation çç c ÷÷
è Xl ø
EQUATION1894 V1 EN (Equation 90)

Xc is the reactance of the series capacitor

p is the maximum allowable reach for an under-reaching zone with respect to the sub-
harmonic swinging related to the resulting fundamental frequency reactance the zone is
not allowed to over-reach.

The degree of compensation C in figure 104 has to be interpreted as the relation

between series capacitor reactance XC and the total positive sequence reactance X1 to
the driving source to the fault. If only the line reactance is used the degree of
compensation will be too high and the zone 1 reach unnecessary reduced. The highest
degree of compensation will occur at three phase fault and therefore the calculation
need only to be performed for three phase faults.

The compensation degree in ground return path is different than in phases. It is for this
reason possible to calculate a compensation degree separately for the phase-to-phase
and three-phase faults on one side and for the single phase-to-ground fault loops on the
other side. Different settings of the reach for the ph-ph faults and ph-G loops makes it
possible to minimise the necessary decrease of the reach for different types of faults.

216
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Reactive Reach
Compensated lines with the capacitor into the zone 1 reach :

A XC B

XLLOC

XL

en07000063.vsd
IEC07000063 V1 EN

Figure 105: Simplified single line diagram of series capacitor located at XLLOC ohm
from A station

217
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

jX
Xline - XC

R RV

XLLOC

X1FW
XC
R

R FW
Z
ZSS

X1RV
XC

en06000584-2.vsd
IEC06000584 V2 EN

Figure 106: Measured impedance at voltage inversion

Forward direction:
Where
XLLoc equals line reactance up to the series capacitor(in the picture
approximate 33% of XLine)
X1 is set to (XLindex-XC) · p/100.
p is defined according to figure 104
1,2 is safety factor for fast operation of Zone 1
Compensated line with the series
capacitor not into the reach of zone 1.
The setting is thus:
X1 is set to (XLine-XC) · p/100.

218
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be
permanently blocked.

For protection on non compensated lines facing series capacitor on next line. The
setting is thus:

• X1 is set to (XLine-XC · K) · p/100.

• K equals side infeed factor at next busbar.

When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be
permanently blocked.

Fault resistance
The resistive reach is, for all affected applications, restricted by the set reactive reach
and the load impedance and same conditions apply as for a non-compensated network.

However, special notice has to be taken during settings calculations due to the ZnO
because 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which
corresponds to approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals
two times the protective current level. This information has high importance for setting
of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to ground- fault
measurement as well as, for phase-to-phase measurement.

Overreaching zone 2
In series compensated network where independent tripping zones will have reduced
reach due to the negative reactance in the capacitor and the sub-harmonic swinging the
tripping will to a high degree be achieved by the communication scheme.

With the reduced reach of the under-reaching zones not providing effective protection
for all faults along the length of the line, it becomes essential to provide over-reaching
schemes like permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) or blocking scheme can be used.

Thus it is of great importance that the zone 2 can detect faults on the whole line both
with the series capacitor in operation and when the capacitor is bridged (short
circuited). It is supposed also in this case that the reactive reach for phase-to-phase and
for phase-to-ground faults is the same. The X1Fw, for all lines affected by the series
capacito, are set to:

• X1 >= 1,5 · XLine

219
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The safety factor of 1.5 appears due to speed requirements and possible under reaching
caused by the sub harmonic oscillations.

The increased reach related to the one used in non compensated system is
recommended for all protections in the vicinity of series capacitors to compensate for
delay in the operation caused by the sub harmonic swinging.

Settings of the resistive reaches are limited according to the minimum load impedance.

Reverse zone
The reverse zone that is normally used in the communication schemes for functions
like fault current reversal logic, weak-in-feed logic or issuing carrier send in blocking
scheme must detect all faults in the reverse direction which is detected in the opposite
IED by the overreaching zone 2. The maximum reach for the protection in the opposite
IED can be achieved with the series capacitor in operation.

The reactive reach can be set according to the following formula:

X1=1.3·X12Rem-0.5(X1L-XC)

Settings of the resistive reaches are according to the minimum load impedance:

Optional higher distance protection zones

When some additional distance protection zones (zone 4, for example) are used they
must be set according to the influence of the series capacitor.

7.1.3.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone1

With reference to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling", the zone
reach can be set to 85% of protected line.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 63 in section "Parallel line in service".

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 91)

220
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 92)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 93)

If the denominator in equation 93 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 94)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 95)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground-faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-
sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 96)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 97)

221
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.1.3.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately for phase-to-phase
(R1PP), and phase-to-ground loop (R1PG) measurement.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults (R1PP) and for
the phase-to-ground faults (RFPG) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting
parameters independently of each other for each distance zone.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 98.

1
R= (2 × R1P G + R0P G) + RFP G
3
EQUATION1716 V1 EN (Equation 98)

é ù
j loop = arctan êê 22××X1PE + X0
ú
R1PE + R0 ú
ë û
EQUATION1457 V1 EN (Equation 99)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 must follow the following
condition:

RFP G £ 4.5 × X1P G

EQUATION1717 V1 EN (Equation 100)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the
fault resistance for phase-to-ground faults. Limit the setting of the zone1 reach in
resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:

RFPP £ 3 × X 1
EQUATION570 V2 EN (Equation 101)

7.1.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function

The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not
activated, which is done by setting the parameter Rld for the Phase Selector to its upper
limit. If the load encroachment function is to be used for all or some of the measuring
zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted.
Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a
sufficient setting margin between the IED boundary and the minimum load impedance.
The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

222
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

V2
Z loa d min =
S
EQUATION1718 V1 EN (Equation 102)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z loa d =
3 × Ima x
EQUATION1719 V1 EN (Equation 103)

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under

three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED
operation under combined heavy three-phase load and ground faults,
consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault operating
characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFP G £ 0.8 × Z loa d

EQUATION1720 V1 EN (Equation 104)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation
below:

223
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

é 2 × R1 + R 0 ù
RFPG £ 0.8 × Z load min × cos ¶ - × sin ¶
êë 2 × X1+ X 0 úû
EQUATION1721 V2 EN (Equation 105)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPP £ 1.6 × Zload

EQUATION579 V2 EN (Equation 106)

RFP
Equation 106 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-
phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 107.

R1PP
RFPP £ 1.6 × Z loadmin × cosJ – --------------- × sinJ
X1PP
EQUATION580 V1 EN (Equation 107)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element
is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in
cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the
description of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function.

7.1.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the
description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Setting
guidelines". If the characteristic for the impedance measurement is shaped with the
load encroachment algorithm, the parameter RLdFw and the corresponding load angle
ArgLd must be set according to the minimum load impedance.

224
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.3.10 Setting of minimum operating currents

The operation of the distance function can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents
is below the set value of the parameter IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG.

The default setting of IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG is 20% of IBase where IBase is the
chosen base current for the analog input channels. The value has been proven in
practice to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be
applications where it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum
operating current down to 10% of IED base current. This happens especially in cases,
when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long
transmission lines.

If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIR

that will block the phase-ground loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIR. The default setting of
IMinOpIR is 5% of the IED base current IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value,
if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

7.1.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of
each other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for
selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a
range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited
by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Disabled. Different time delays
are possible for the ph-E (tPG) and for the ph-ph (tPP) measuring loops in each
distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance
protection.

225
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.2 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed

angle FDPSPDIS (21)

7.2.1 Identification

7.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection with load FDPSPDIS 21
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.2.2 Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this
matter. Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) is designed
to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance measuring function depending
on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function
has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge
the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the
measuring zones without interfering with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.

The extensive output signals from FDPSPDIS (21) give also important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

7.2.3 Setting guidelines

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where
φloop and φline is greater than 60°.

226
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.2.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve
correct phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire
line. It is not necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at
least 10% is recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones , the phase
selection outputs PHSELZ or DLECND must be connected to input PHSEL on
ZMQPDIS (21), distance measuring block.

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-ground
fault is defined according to equation 108.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN (Equation 108)

In some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than
60°. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and
reverse direction, RFltFwdPG and RFltRevPG for phase-to-ground faults and
RFltRevPP and RFltRevPP for phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid that
FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone characteristic. The
necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be derived from
trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type.

Phase-to-ground fault in forward direction

With reference to figure 107, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) and index
Zm reference settings for Distance protection function (ZMQPDIS, 21).

227
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X
( W / loop)
3 4 5
1

6 6

60°

60° R
8 ( W / loop)

6 6

3 4 5
IEC09000043_1_en.vsd
IEC09000043 V1 EN

Figure 107: Relation between distance protection phase selection (FDPSPDIS)

(21) and impedance zone (ZMQPDIS) (21) for phase-to-ground fault
φloop>60° (setting parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(21) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)(21)
3 RFltRevPGPHS

4 (X1PHS+XN)/tan(60°)

5 RFltFwdPGPHS

6 RFPGZM

7 X1PHS+XN

8 φloop
9 X1ZM+XN

228
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring
zone used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 109 and
equation 110 gives the minimum recommended reactive reach.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN (Equation 109)

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN (Equation 110)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21), and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21)

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for
forward direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach

The resistive reach must cover RFPG for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly
zone 2. Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in
the application. Equation 111 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

RFltFwdPGmin ³ 1.1 × RFPGzm

EQUATION1724 V2 EN (Equation 111)

where:
RFPGZm is the setting RFPG for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21).

The security margin has to be increased to at least 1.2 in the case where φloop<60° to
avoid that FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone
measurement characteristic.

Phase-to-ground fault in reverse direction

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional
setting is required.

229
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Resistive reach
The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse
zones. In blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote
end that is used in the communication scheme. In equation 112 the index ZmRv
references the specific zone to be coordinated to.

RFltREvPG ³ 1.2 × RFPG ZmRv

EQUATION1726 V1 EN (Equation 112)

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

Reactive reach
The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-ground reach setting X1. No
extra setting is required.

Resistive reach
In the same way as for phase-to-ground fault, the reach is automatically calculated
based on setting X1. The reach will be X1/tan(60°) =X1/√(3).

Fault resistance reach

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFItFwdPP, must cover RFPPZm with
at least 25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault
for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21), see Figure 108.
The minimum recommended reach can be calculated according to equation 113.

RFltFwdPP ³ 1.25 × RFPPzm

EQUATION1318-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 113)

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by
FDPSPDIS (21).

Equation 113 modified is applicable also for the RFltRevPP as follows:

RFlt Re vPPmin ³ 1.25 × RFPPzmRv

EQUATION2264-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 114)

Equation 113 is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater
for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-
phase fault when FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90
degrees (rotated 30° anti-clock wise).

230
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase)

3 4 5
1

6 6

8 60°

60° 6 6
R (W / phase)
8

6 6

3 4 5

IEC09000257_1_en.vsd
IEC09000257 V1 EN

Figure 108: Relation between distance protection (ZMQPDIS) (21) and FDPSPDIS
(21) characteristic for phase-to-phase fault for φline>60° (setting
parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(21) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone) (21)
3 0.5 · RFltRevPP PHS

4 X1PHS
tan ( 60° )

5 0.5 · RFltFwdPP PHS

6 0.5 · RFPPZm

7 X1PHS

231
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

8 X1Zm

7.2.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically
to define the load angle LdAngle, the blinder RLdFwd in forward direction and blinder
RLdRev in reverse direction, as shown in figure 109.

RLdFwd

LdAngle LdAngle
R

LdAngle LdAngle
RLdRev

en05000226_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000226 V1 EN

Figure 109: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle LdAngle is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be
suitable to begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the
maximum possible load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must
be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFwd, can be calculated according to equation 115.

232
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

V 2 min
RLdFwd = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Vmin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFwd can be lesser than the calculated
minimal resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRev for load encroachment characteristic in reverse

direction can be calculated in the same way as RLdFwd, but use maximum importing
power that might occur instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Vmin
voltage for this condition.

7.2.3.3 Minimum operate currents

FDPSPDIS (21) has two current setting parameters which blocks the respective phase-
to-ground loop and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn)
and phase difference current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-ground (IMinPUPG) is set to
securely detect a single phase-to-ground fault at the furthest reach of the phase
selection. It is recommended to set IMinPUPP to double value of IMinPUPG.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-ground fault
(3I0Enable_PG) is set securely detect single line-to-ground fault at remote end on the
protected line. It is recommended to set 3I0BLK_PP to double value of 3I0Enable_PG.

233
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.3 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

ZMQPDIS (21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQPDIS 21
characteristic (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQAPDIS 21

characteristic (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 21D

Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN

7.3.2 Application
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more
complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of
very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more
stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged
or increased security level of the power system.

The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for
application on transmission and sub-transmission lines (solid grounded systems)
although it also can be used on distribution levels.

7.3.2.1 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important role when designing the protection
system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly grounded networks

In solidly grounded systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

234
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 110: Solidly grounded network

The ground-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance
has very limited influence on the ground-fault current. The shunt admittance may,
however, have some marginal influence on the ground-fault current in networks with
long transmission lines.

The ground-fault current at single phase-to-ground in phase A can be calculated as

equation 116:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN (Equation 116)

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase), is considered to be

equal to Z1

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the ground-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-
ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solidly grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect ground faults. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

235
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground-fault factor is defined according to equation 37.

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 117)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are
valid, see equation 118 and equation 119.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN (Equation 118)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN (Equation 119)

Where
R0 is the zero sequence source resistance

X0 is the zero sequence source reactance

R1 is the positive sequence source resistance

X1 is the positive sequence source reactance

The magnitude of the ground-fault current in effectively grounded networks is high

enough for impedance measuring elements to detect ground faults. However, in the
same way as for solidlygrounded networks, distance protection has limited possibilities
to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with
other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance grounded networks

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to
the ground through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

236
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating
meshed networks.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the ground-fault
current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy
phases will get a magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero
sequence voltage (3V0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the
network due to low voltage drop distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 120.

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN (Equation 120)

Where:
3I0 is the ground-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive ground-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position
where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN (Equation 121)

Ic Ic Ic

IR IL

en05000216_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000216 V1 EN

Figure 111: High impedance grounded network

The operation of high impedance grounded networks is different compared to solid

grounded networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high
impedance grounded networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-

237
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

ground faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case
of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the
two ground faults. To handle this type of phenomenon, a separate function called Phase
preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed in medium and subtransmission network.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection
and clearance of ground faults. The low magnitude of the ground-fault current might
not give pickup of the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be
too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive ground-fault
protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-to-ground fault.

7.3.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical
for this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault
occurs on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance
seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when
both planning the protection system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 112, the equation for the bus voltage VA at A side is:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 122)

If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 123)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

238
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN

Figure 112: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving
factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in
algorithm, which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end.
No settings are required for this function.

7.3.2.3 Load encroachment

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault
on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 113.
The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed
and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this
with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the
minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of
the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault
on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 113
and figure "". The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course
not allowed and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to
consider this with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance
zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the
sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right
figure of figure 113. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to

239
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote line end.
For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle for Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FDPSPDIS, 21), the resistive
blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the figure 113 given
higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load
encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for
short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be switched off. See
section "Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function".

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in FDPSPDIS (21)
function.

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 113: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic defined in Phase selection with load encroachment
function FDPSPDIS (21)

7.3.2.4 Short line application

Transmission line lengths for protection application purposes are classified as short,
medium and long. The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std
C37.113-1999. ). The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source
impedance at the protected line’s terminal to the protected line’s impedance (SIR).
SIR’s of about 4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with
SIR’s greater than 0.5 and less than 4

240
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be
recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as
voltage and source impedance, see table 29.

Table 29: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 0.75 -3.5mile 3-15 miles
Short line 4-7 miles 15-30 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 113.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the
voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for
overreaching. It is difficult, if not impossible, to apply distance protection for short
lines. It is possible to apply an overreaching pilot communication based POTT or
Blocking scheme protection for such lines to have fast tripping along the entire line.
Usually a unit protection, based on comparison of currents at the ends of the lines is
applied for such lines.

Load encroachment is normally no problem for short line applications.

7.3.2.5 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to
achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-ground fault at remote line end of long lines when
the line is heavy loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance
protection can generally be described as in table 30, long lines have Source impedance
ratio (SIR’s) less than 0.5.

Table 30: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

241
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for
unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see figure 114.

Zm

ZL

LdAngle LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle

RLdRev RLdFwd

en05000220_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000220 V1 EN

Figure 114: Characteristic for zone measurement for a long line

7.3.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to
experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated
by 100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence
impedance to the fault point but it does not normally cause voltage inversion.

242
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is a practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can
be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the
operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different
setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of
service and grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and grounded.
3. Parallel line out of service and not grounded.

243
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 115.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 124.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z 0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 124)

Where:
Vph is phase to ground voltage at the relay point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is ground fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN

Figure 115: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 116.

244
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN

Figure 116: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground fault at the
remote busbar

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed
according to equation 125.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN (Equation 125)

By dividing equation 125 by equation 124 and after some simplification we can write
the impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN (Equation 126)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the
line impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the
protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction
compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If
the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is
weak. If considering a single phase-to-ground fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A
to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end
is zero, the voltage VA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 127.

245
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN (Equation 127)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence
currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN (Equation 128)

Simplification of equation 128, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into
equation 127 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3 I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN (Equation 129)

If we finally divide equation 129 with equation 124 we can draw the impedance
present to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN (Equation 130)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of
the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This
reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line
end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction
does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and grounded

246
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN

Figure 117: The parallel line is out of service and grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both line ends on the bus bar
side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the
equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 118.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN

Figure 118: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in series with parallel
of (Z0-Z0m) and Z0m which is equal to equation 131.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 131)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero
sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence,
mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters
according to equation 132 and equation 133 for each particular line section and use
them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

247
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 132)

 X 0m 2 
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 133)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN

Figure 119: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is
high which limits the zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 119

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching
distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out
of operation and grounded at both ends.

248
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN

Figure 120: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line

with one circuit disconnected and not grounded

The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 134.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f )
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN (Equation 134)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 135 and equation 136.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN (Equation 135)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN (Equation 136)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 137.

Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN (Equation 137)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 138.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN (Equation 138)

249
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient
amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

7.3.2.7 Tapped line application

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN

Figure 121: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault
infeed from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current
infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured
impedance at A and C will be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 139)

250
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × (
2
)
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN (Equation 140)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to

the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side V1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example,
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 121), given that the distance
protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other
zone 1 settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three
parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.
The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

251
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 141)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone
1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and to give extra margin to
the influence of wind speed and temperature.
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground RFPE and phase-to-
phase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance
in order to obtain reliable fault detection. However for zone1 it is necessary to limit the
reach according to setting instructions in order to avoid overreach.

7.3.3 Setting guidelines

7.3.3.1 General

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS, 21)
are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the
analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input
signals to primary values used in ZMQPDIS (21).

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.The load transfer on the protected line
should be considered for resistive phase to ground faults
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

252
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.3.3.2 Setting of zone 1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to
section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the
cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of
service and grounded in both ends. The setting of ground-fault reach should be selected
to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (worst
case).

7.3.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole
protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in
the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching
zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the
fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end is considerable higher than the fault
current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current
infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above gives a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must
be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the
telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The
zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line
must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 122, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

253
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 142)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 122: Setting of overreaching zone

7.3.3.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up
protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always
covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication
purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. Equation 143 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the
zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN (Equation 143)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain
sensitivity.

254
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.3.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85%
of the protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 116 in section "Parallel line in service".

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 144)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 145)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 146)

If the denominator in equation 146 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 147)

255
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 148)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance)
equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
-÷
è 2 2
R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 149)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 150)

7.3.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach R1 independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the
phase-to-ground faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining
reach setting parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 151.

1
R= ( 2 × R1 + R0 ) + RFPE
3
IECEQUATION2303 V1 EN (Equation 151)

j loop = arctan
é 2 × X1 + X0 ù
êë 2 × R1 + R0 úû
EQUATION2304 V1 EN (Equation 152)

256
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition
to minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPE £ 4.5 × X1
IECEQUATION2305 V1 EN (Equation 153)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the
fault resistance for phase-to-ground faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit
the setting of the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop
measurement in the phase domain to:

RFPP ≤ 6 ⋅ X 1
IECEQUATION2306 V2 EN (Equation 154)

7.3.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function

The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21) is to be used. The setting of the
load resistance RLdFwd and RldRev in FDPSPDIS (21) must in this case be set to
max value (3000). If FDPSPDIS (21) is to be used for all or some of the measuring
zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted.
Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a
sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The
minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

V2
Z loa d min =
S
EQUATION1718 V1 EN (Equation 155)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z loa d =
3 × Ima x
EQUATION1719 V1 EN (Equation 156)

257
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation
under combined heavy three-phase load and ground faults, consider
both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFFwPG ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Z load

ANSI13000273 V1 EN (Equation 157)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three
times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to
equation 158.

 2 ⋅ R1 + R0 
RFFwPG ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Z load min ⋅ cos ∂ − ⋅ sin ∂ 
 2 ⋅ X1+ X 0 
ANSI13000274 V1 EN (Equation 158)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFFwPG ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Zload

ANSI13000275 V1 EN (Equation 159)

Equation 159 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-
phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 160.

 R1 
RFFwPP ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Zload min ⋅  cos ∂ − ⋅ sin ∂ 
 X1 
IEC13000276 V1 EN (Equation 160)

258
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Set the fault resistance coverage RFRwPP and RFRwPG to the same value as in
forward direction, if that suits the application. All this is applicable for all measuring
zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (78) is activated in the IED.
Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB (78)
function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB (78).

7.3.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load

encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated

The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the
description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic
function (FDPSPDIS, 21).

7.3.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents

The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS, 21)

can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter
IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG.

The default setting of IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG is 20% of IBase where IBase is the
chosen current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice
to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where
it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current
down to 10% of IBase. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a
remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines.

Setting IMinOpIR blocks the phase-to-ground loop if 3I0<IMinOpIR. The default

setting of IMinOpIR is 5% of IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value,
if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

7.3.3.10 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral

function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 161 and equation 162 are used to classify that the
fault is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 × V 1L1 + 0.2 × V 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1552 V2 EN (Equation 161)

259
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

0.8 × V 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 × V 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION1553 V2 EN (Equation 162)

where:
AngDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 123.
V1A is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A

V1AM is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA is phase current in phase A

V1AB is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

V1ABM is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

IAB is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 123). It should not be changed unless system studies
have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.

STDIR= FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048

260
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

AngNegRes

AngDir
R

en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN

Figure 123: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5%
of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

261
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.3.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of
each other . Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for
selectivity reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds.
The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the
corresponding Operation parameter to Disabled. Different time delays are possible for
the phase-to-ground tLG and for the phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each
distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance
protection.

7.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS (21)

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE
identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho ZMHPDIS 21
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN

7.4.2 Application

7.4.2.1 Generator underimpedance protection application

For generator protection schemes is often required to use under-impedance protection

in order to protect generator against sustained faults. The mho distance protection in
REG670 can be used for this purpose if the following guidelines are followed.
Configuration for every zone is identical.

7.4.3 Setting guidelines

7.4.3.1 Configuration

First of all it is required to configure the Mho function in the way shown in figure 124.
Note that a directional function block (that is ZDMPDIR) and a required number of

262
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

zones (that is ZMHPDIS) shall only be configured. In this figure, three

underimpedance zones are included.

ANSI10000101 V1 EN

Figure 124: Mho function example configuration for generator protection application

7.4.3.2 Settings

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21) used as an under-

impedance function shall be set for the application example shown in figure 125

263
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

HV Substation

HV CB

65MVA
Step-up
Transformer
123/13kV
xt=10%

Auxiliary
Transformer

Generator CB
REG670
Excitation
Transformer
Y
Y
@

VT: 13,5kV/110V
Field CB

70MVA
~ 13,2kV
3062A

CT: 4000/5 21 Z<

ZMH PDIS

IEC10000102 V1 EN

Figure 125: Application example for generator under-impedance function

The first under-impedance protection zone shall cover 100% of the step-up transformer
impedance with a time delay of 1.0s.

264
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Calculate the step-up transformer impedance, in primary ohms, from the 13kV side as
follows:

xt U r2 10 132
XT = × = × = 0, 26W
100 S 100 65
IEC-EQUATION2318 V1 EN

Then the reach in primary ohms shall be set to 100% of transformer impedance. Thus
the reach shall be set to 0,26Ω primary.

Set the first zone of Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
(21) to disable phase-to-ground loops and enable phase-to-phase loops:

• Generator rated phase current and phase-phase voltage quantities shall be set for
base voltage (VBase=13,2kV) and base current (IBase=3062A) settings.
• Parameter DirMode shall be set to Offset.
• Parameter OffsetMhoDir shall be set to Non-directional.
• The phase-to-ground measuring loops shall be disabled by setting
OpModePG=Disabled
• The phase-to-phase measuring loops shall be enabled and corresponding settings
in primary ohms for forward and reserve reach and time delay shall be entered
accordingly:
• Parameter ZPP shall be set to 0,260Ω.
• Parameter ZrevPP shall be set to 0,260Ω.
• Parameter tPP shall be set to 1,0000s.
• Parameter ZAngPP shall be set to default value 85 Deg.

Set the following for the directional element ZDMRDIR:

• Generator rated phase current and phase-phase voltage quantities shall be set for
base voltage (VBase=13,2kV) and base current (IBase=3062A) settings.
• Parameter DirEvalType shall be set to Imp/Comp.
• Other settings can be left on the default values.

By doing this offset mho characteristic for zone one will be achieved as shown in
figure 126. Note that for this particular example ZPP=ZRevPP=0,26Ω. Thus the
operating characteristic for this particular application will be a circle with a centre in
the impedance plane origo.

By following the same procedure other mho zones can be set.

265
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

}
P
ZP
PP
ZAngPP
ev }
ZR

IEC10000105-1-en.vsd

IEC10000105 V1 EN

Figure 126: Operating characteristic for phase-to-phase loops

266
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21)

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMPDIS 21
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMAPDIS 21

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

7.5.2 Application

7.5.2.1 Introduction

Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more
complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of
very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more
stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged
or increased security level of the power system.

The distance protection function in IED is designed to meet basic requirements for
application on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid grounded systems)
although it also can be used on distribution levels.

7.5.2.2 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important roll when designing the protection
system. In the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted.

Solid grounded networks

In solid grounded systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

267
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 127: Solidly grounded network

The ground fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the ground fault current. The shunt
admittance has very limited influence on the ground fault current. The shunt
admittance may, however, have some marginal influence on the ground fault current in
networks with long transmission lines.

The ground fault current at single phase-to-ground in phase L1 can be calculated as

equation163:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1782-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 163)

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive
ZN is the ground return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-
ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring technique to detect ground fault. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

268
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground fault factor is defined according to equation 37.

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 164)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are
valid, see equation 165 and equation 166.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN (Equation 165)

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN (Equation 166)

The magnitude of the ground fault current in effectively grounded networks is high
enough for impedance measuring element to detect fault. However, in the same way as
for solid grounded networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high
resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection
function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance grounded networks

In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the
ground through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating
meshed.

Typically, for this type of network is that the magnitude of the ground fault current is
very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will
get a magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence

269
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

voltage (3U0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to
low voltage drop distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to the formula below:

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN (Equation 167)

Where:
3I0 is the ground-fault current (A)
IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)
IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)
IC is the total capacitive ground-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position
where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN (Equation 168)

Ic Ic Ic

IR IL

en05000216.vsd
IEC05000216 V1 EN

Figure 128: High impedance grounding network

The operation of high impedance grounded networks is different compare to solid

grounded networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high
impedance grounded networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-
ground faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case
of cross country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the
two ground-faults. To handle this type phenomena a separate function called Phase

270
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in

transmission applications.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection
and clearance of ground-faults. The low magnitude of the ground-fault current might
not give start of the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too
low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive ground-fault protection is
necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-to-ground fault.

7.5.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical
for this type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault
occurs on the protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by
the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both
planning the protection system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 129, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left
side as:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 169)

If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 170)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

271
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN

Figure 129: Influence of fault infeed from remote end.

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for
justify complementary protection to distance protection.

7.5.2.4 Load encroachment

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault
on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 130.
The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of cause not allowed
and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this
with the settings that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the
minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of
the protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right
figure 4. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high
fault resistances, especially for line to ground faults at remote end. For example for a
given setting of the load angle LdAngle for the load encroachment function, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right in
figure 130 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation
due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. ZMMPDIS (21) function can also
preferably be used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines the major
concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a
major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferable be
switched off.

272
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection
with load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS,21).

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 130: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

7.5.2.5 Short line application

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be
recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as
voltage and source impedance, see table "Short line application".

Table 31: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 0.75-3.5 miles 3-15 miles
Short line
4-7 miles 15-30 miles

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and
zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the
possibility to detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see
figure 130.

For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that
the voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for
overreaching.

273
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications so the load
encroachment function could be switched off (OperationLdCmp = Off). This will
increase the possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.

7.5.2.6 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high
sensitivity for phase-to-ground fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is
heavy loaded.

The definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is
noted in table 32.

Table 32: Definition of long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200–250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

As mentioned in the previous chapter, the possibility in IED to set resistive and
reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual
fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault together with
load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at
the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated).

7.5.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to
experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated
by 100 meters or more. The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual
coupling is the zero sequence voltage inversion that occurs.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is practice to neglect them.

274
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.
Those are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line
can be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting
groups to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and
grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide
mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type
of line. The basic principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.

Parallel line applications

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common
operation modes:

1. parallel line in service.

2. parallel line out of service and grounded.
3. parallel line out of service and not grounded.

275
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

A simplified single line diagram is shown in figure 131.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 171)

Where:
Vph is phase-to-ground voltage at the IED point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is ground to fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< en05000221.vsd

IEC05000221 V1 EN

Figure 131: Class 1, parallel line in service.

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 132.

276
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Z0 - Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN

Figure 132: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground fault at the
remote busbar

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A will be changed.

If the current on the parallel line have negative sign compare to the current on the
protected line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compare
to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents
have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line
reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach
reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is
proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not
significantly affect the operation of a permissive under-reach scheme.

Parallel line out of service and grounded

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000222.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG867 V1 EN

Figure 133: The parallel line is out of service and grounded.

277
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends on the bus bar side
of the line CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent
zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 133.

A I0 Z 0 Zm0

Zm0 I0
C

B Z 0 Zm0

99000039.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG7100 V1 EN

Figure 134: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends.

Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 172.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 172)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings. It is a recommendation to use a
separate setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach
considerable when the line is in operation. All expressions below are proposed for
practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals
to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the
equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to equation 173 and
equation 174 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for
the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 173)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 174)

278
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000223.vsd
IEC05000223 V1 EN

Figure 135: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded.

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is
high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 135

The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching
distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out
of operation and grounded at both ends.

I0 Z0 Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 Z0m
B
99000040.vsd
IEC99000040 V1 EN

Figure 136: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line

with one circuit disconnected and not grounded.

The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 175.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) (
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN (Equation 175)

279
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 176 and equation 177.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN (Equation 176)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN (Equation 177)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 178.

Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN (Equation 178)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 179.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN (Equation 179)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient
amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

7.5.2.8 Tapped line application

280
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

A IA IB B
T

Z< IC Z<

-IB

Z<
C

en05000224.vsd
DOCUMENT11524-IMG869 V1 EN

Figure 137: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault
infeed from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current
infeed. For example for faults between the T point and B station the measured
impedance at A and C will be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 180)

æ I A + IC ö æ V 2 ö2
Z C = Z Trf + ç Z CT + × Z TB ÷ × ç ÷
è IC ø è V1 ø
EQUATION1783-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 181)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point.
IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.
V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to
the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).

281
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side U1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 137), given that the distance
protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other
zone1 settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three
parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.
The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 182)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone
1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of
approximately 50 km/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground (RFPE) and phase-to-
phase (RFPP) should be as high as possible without interfering with the load
impedance in order to obtain reliable fault detection.

282
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.3 Setting guidelines

7.5.3.1 General

The settings for the Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
(ZMMPDIS, 21) function are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio
that has been set for the analogue input card is used to automatically convert the
measured secondary input signals to primary values used in ZMMPDIS (21) function.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

7.5.3.2 Setting of zone1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according
tosection "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in your application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of service and
grounded in both ends. The setting of grounded fault reach should be selected to be
<95% also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (worst case).

7.5.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected
line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same
way as for zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at
least 120% of the protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed

283
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the
IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

If the requirements in the dotted paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%,
the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted
operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote
end is down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected
line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted wit a simple example below.

If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 11, also for the explanation of all abbreviations
used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:
VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 183)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 138:

7.5.3.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up
protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always

284
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication
purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. Equation 184 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the
zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN (Equation 184)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line

In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain
sensitivity.

7.5.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85%
of protected line.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 132 in section "Parallel line applications".

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 185)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 186)

285
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 187)

If the denominator in equation 187 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 188)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 189)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-
sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
-÷
è 2 2
R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 190)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R0 + X0 ø
EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 191)

7.5.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, for phase-to-ground loop (RIPE)
measurement.

286
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Set separately the expected fault resistance for the phase-to-ground faults (RFPE) for
each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for
each distance zone.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 192.

1
R = --- ( 2 × R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE
3
EQUATION567 V1 EN (Equation 192)

é ù
j loop = arctan êê 22××X1PE + X0
ú
R1PE + R0 ú
ë û
EQUATION1457 V1 EN (Equation 193)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 should follow the condition:

RFPE £ 4.5 × X 1
EQUATION569 V2 EN (Equation 194)

7.5.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function

The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not
activated (OperationLdCmp is set to Off). If the load encroachment function is to be
used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones
according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive
reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the IED
boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase)
is calculated as:

V2
Z load min =
S
EQUATION1780-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 195)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

287
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z load =
3 × I max
EQUATION1781-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 196)

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under

three-phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED
operation under combined heavy three-phase load and ground faults,
consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault operating
characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPE £ 0.8 × Z load

EQUATION792 V1 EN (Equation 197)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation
below:

é 2 × R1 + R 0 ù
RFPE £ 0.8 × Z load min × cos J - × sin J
êë 2 × X1 + X 0 úû
EQUATION578 V4 EN (Equation 198)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element
is in the protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in
cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the
description of the power swing detection (ZMRPSB, 78) function.

288
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.5.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the
description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Resistive
reach with load encroachment characteristic". If the characteristic for the impedance
measurement shall be shaped with the load encroachment algorithm, the parameter
OperationLdCmp in the phase selection has to be switched On.

7.5.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents

The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents
is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base
current for the analogue input channels. The value have been proven in practice to be
suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is
necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down
to 10% of the IED base current. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves
as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines.

If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIN

that will block the phase-ground loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of
IMinOpIN is 5% of the IED base current IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value,
if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

7.5.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of
each other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for
selectivity reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a
range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited
by setting the corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are
possible for the ph-E (tPE) measuring loops in each distance protection zone
separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

7.6 Additional distance protection directional function for

earth faults ZDARDIR

289
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Additional distance protection ZDARDIR -
directional function for earth faults

S00346 V1 EN

7.6.2 Application
The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).

7.6.3 Setting guidelines

AngleRCA and AngleOp: these settings define the operation characteristic. Setting
AngleRCA is used to turn the directional characteristic, if the expected fault current
angle does not coincide with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque.
The angle is positive, if operating quantity lags the polarizing quantity and negative if
it leads the polarizing quantity. The setting AngleOp (max. 180 degrees) defines the
wideness of the operating sector. The sector is mirror-symmetric along the MTA
(Maximum Torque Axis).

Directional elements for ground-faults must operate at fault current values below the
magnitude of load currents. As phase quantities are adversely affected by load, the use
of sequence quantities are preferred as polarizing quantities for the ground directional
elements. Optionally six modes are available:

• Zero-sequence voltage polarized (-V0)

• Negative-sequence voltage polarized (-V2)
• Zero-sequence current (I0)
• Dual polarization (-V0/I0)
• Zero-sequence voltage with zero-sequence current compensation (-V0Comp)
• Negative-sequence voltage with negative-sequence current compensation (-
V2Comp)

The zero-sequence voltage polarized ground directional unit compares the phase angles
of zero sequence current I0 with zero sequence voltage -V0 at the location of the
protection.

The negative-sequence voltage polarized ground directional unit compares

correspondingly I2 with -V2.

290
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

In general the zero sequence voltage is higher than the negative sequence voltage at the
fault, but decreases more rapidly the further away from the fault it is measured. This
makes the -V0 polarization preferable in short line applications, where no mutual
coupling problems exist.

Negative sequence polarization has the following advantages compared to zero

sequence polarization:

• on solidly grounded systems V2 may be larger than V0. If the bus behind the IED
location is a strong zero-sequence source, the negative sequence voltage available
at the IED location is higher than the zero-sequence voltage.
• negative sequence polarization is not affected by zero sequence mutual coupling
(zero sequence polarized directional elements may misoperate in parallel lines
with high zero-sequence mutual coupling and isolated zero sequence sources).
• negative sequence polarization is less affected by the effects of VT neutral shift
(possible caused by ungrounded or multiple grounds on the supplying VT neutral)
• no open-delta winding is needed in VTs as only 2 VTs are required (V2 = (VL12 - a
· VL23)/3)

The zero sequence current polarized ground directional unit compares zero sequence
current I0 of the line with some reference zero-sequence current, for example the
current in the neutral of a power transformer. The relay characteristic AngleRCA is
fixed and equals 0 degrees. Care must be taken to ensure that neutral current direction
remains unchanged during all network configurations and faults, and therefore all
transformer configurations/constructions are not suitable for polarization.

In dual polarization, zero sequence voltage polarization and zero sequence current
polarization elements function in a “one-out-of-two mode”. Typically when the zero
sequence current is high, then the zero sequence voltage is low and vice versa. Thus
combining a zero sequence voltage polarized and a zero sequence current polarized
(neutral current polarized) directional element into one element, the IED can benefit
from both elements as the two polarization measurements function in a “one-out-of-
two mode” complementing each other. In this mode, if IPOL is greater than IPOL>
setting, then only IPOL based direction is detected and UPOL based direction will be
blocked. Flexibility is also increased as zero sequence voltage polarization can be used,
if the zero sequence current polarizing source is switched out of service. When the zero
sequence polarizing current exceeds the set value for IPOL>, zero sequence current
polarizing is used. For values of zero sequence polarizing current less than the set
value for startPolCurrLevel, zero sequence voltage polarizing is used.

Zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation (-

V0Comp) compares the phase angles of zero sequence current I0 with zero-sequence
voltage added by a phase-shifted portion of zero-sequence current (see equation 199) at
the location of the protection. The factor k = setting Kmag. This type of polarization is

291
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

intended for use in applications where the zero sequence voltage can be too small to be
used as the polarizing quantity, and there is no zero sequence polarizing current
(transformer neutral current) available. The zero sequence voltage is “boosted” by a
portion of the measured line zero sequence current to form the polarizing quantity. This
method requires that a significant difference must exist in the magnitudes of the zero
sequence currents for close-up forward and reverse faults, that is, it is a requirement
that |V0| >> |k · I0| for reverse faults, otherwise there is a risk that reverse faults can be
seen as forward.

- V0 + k × I 0 × e
AngleRCA

EQUATION1638-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 199)

The negative-sequence voltage polarization with negative-sequence current

compensation (-U2Comp) compares correspondingly I2 with (see equation 200), and
similarly it must be ensured that |V2| >> |k · I2| for reverse faults.

- V2 + k × I 2 × e
AngleRCA

EQUATION1639-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 200)

7.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC - -

7.7.2 Application
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of
potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

One part of ZSMGAPC function identifies a loss of phase potential that is the result of
a long term (steady state) condition such as a blown fuse or an open voltage
transformer winding or connection. This will block all trips by the distance protection
since they are based on voltage measurement.

292
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

In the pilot channel blocking scheme a fault inception detected by a fast acting change
detector is used to send a block signal to the remote end in order to block an
overreaching zone. If the fault is later detected as a forward fault the earlier sent
blocking signal is stopped.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on
the protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less
secure than permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach
of the tripping function if the communication channel is out of service. Inadequate
speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate
security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults.

ZSMGAPC function also includes functionality for blocking the sample based distance
protection due to high SIR. SIR directly influences the fault voltage level for a given
voltage level, and this is the major factor that affects the severity of CVT transients.
Therefore, in cases where the SIR value is too high, further filtering of the measured
signals will be needed.

7.7.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

PilotMode: Set PilotMode to On when pilot scheme is to be used. In this mode fault
inception function will send a block signal to remote end to block the overreaching
zones, when operated.

DeltaI: The setting of DeltaI for fault inception detection is by default set to 10% of
IBase, which is suitable in most cases.

Delta3I0: The setting of the parameter Delta3I0 for fault inception detection is by
default set to 10% of VBase, which is suitable in most cases.

DeltaV: The setting of DeltaV for fault inception detection is by default set to 5% of
IBase, which is suitable in most cases.

Delta3V0: The setting of Delta3V0 for fault inception detection is by default set to 5%
of VBase, which is suitable in most cases.

Zreach: The setting of Zreach must be adopted to the specific application. The setting
is used in the SIR calculation for detection of high SIR.

SIRLevel: The setting of the parameter SIRLevel is by default set to 10. This is a
suitable setting for applications with CVT to avoid transient overreach due to the CVT
dynamics. If magnetic voltage transformers are used, set SIRLevel to 15 the highest level.

293
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

IMinOp: The minimum operate current for the SIR measurement is by default set to
20% of IBase.

7.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS (21)

7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Faulty phase identification with load FMPSPDIS 21
encroachment for mho

S00346 V1 EN

7.8.2 Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
the power system is reduced for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines.

The ability to accurately and reliably classifying different types of fault so that single
pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used which plays an important roll in this matter.

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function is
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the Distance protection function
dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, FMPSPDIS has
an built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring
zones without interfering with the load.

The load encroachment algorithm and the blinder functions are always activated in the
phase selector. The influence from these functions on the zone measurement
characteristic has to be activated by switching the setting parameter LoadEnchMode
for the respective measuring zone(s) to Enabled.

294
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.8.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

INRelPG: The setting of INRelPG for release of the phase-to-ground loop is by default
set to 20% of IBase. The default setting is suitable in most applications.

The setting must normally be set to at least 10% lower than the setting of
3I0BLK_PPto give priority to open phase-to-ground loop. INRelPG must be above the
normal un-balance current (3I0) that might exist due to un-transposed lines.

The setting must also be set higher than the 3I0 that occurs when one pole opens in
single pole trip applications.

3I0BLK_PP: The setting of 3I0BLK_PP is by default set to 40% of IBase, which is

suitable in most applications.

I1LowLevel: The setting of the positive current threshold I1LowLevel used in the
sequence based part of the phase selector for identifying three-phase fault, is by default
set to 10% of IBase.

The default setting is suitable in most cases, but must be checked against the minimum
three-phase current that occurs at remote end of the line with reasonable fault resistance.

IMaxLoad: The setting IMaxLoad must be set higher than the maximum load current
transfer during emergency conditions including a safety margin of at least 20%. The
setting is proposed to be according to equation 201:

IMaxLoad =1.2 ILoad

EQUATION1614 V2 EN (Equation 201)

where:
1.2 is the security margin against the load current and
ILoad is the maximal load current during emergency conditions.

The current ILoad can be defined according to equation 202.

295
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

S max
ILoad =
3 × VLmn
EQUATION1615-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 202)

where:
Smax is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions and
VLmn is the phase-to-phase voltage during the emergency conditions at the IED location.

7.8.3.1 Load encroachment

The load encroachment function has two setting parameters, RLd for the load
resistance and LdAngle for the inclination of the load sector (see figure 139).

RLdFw

LdAngle LdAngle
R

LdAngle LdAngle
RLdRv

ANSI10000192_1_en.vsd

ANSI10000192 V1 EN

Figure 139: Load encroachment characteristic

The calculation of the apparent load impedance Zload and minimum load impedance
Zloadmin can be done according to equations:

Vmin
Zload =
3 × I max
EQUATION1754-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 203)

296
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

V2
Zload min =
S
EQUATION1753-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 204)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load angle LdAngle can be derived according to equation 205:

æ P max ö
LdAngle = a cos ç ÷
è S max ø
EQUATION1623-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 205)

where:
Pmax is the maximal active power transfer during emergency conditions and
Smax is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions.

The RLd can be calculated according to equation 206:

RLd = ZLoad × cos( LdAngle)

EQUATION1624-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 206)

The setting of RLd and LdAngle is by default set to 80 ohm/phase and 20 degrees.
Those values must be adapted to the specific application.

7.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic,

separate settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21)
and ZDRDIR (21D)

297
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRPDIS 21
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRAPDIS 21

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

S00346 V1 EN

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D

7.9.2 Application
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more
complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of
very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more
stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged
or increased security level of the power system.

The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for
application on transmission and sub-transmission lines although it also can be used on
distribution levels.

7.9.2.1 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important role when designing the protection
system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solid grounded networks

In solidly grounded systems, the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

298
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 140: Solidly grounded network.

The ground-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance
has very limited influence on the ground-fault current. The shunt admittance may,
however, have some marginal influence on the ground-fault current in networks with
long transmission lines.

The ground-fault current at single phase-to- ground in phase A can be calculated as

equation 116:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN (Equation 207)

Where:
VA is the phase-to- ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the ground return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-
ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring technique to detect ground-fault. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

299
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground-fault factor is defined according to equation 37.

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 208)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network source impedances
are valid, see equation 118 and equation 119.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN (Equation 209)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN (Equation 210)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence source impedance

X0 is the reactive zero sequence source impedance

R1 is the resistive positive sequence source impedance

X1 is the reactive positive sequence source impedance

The magnitude of the ground-fault current in effectively grounded networks is high

enough for impedance measuring element to detect ground-fault. However, in the same
way as for solid grounded networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to
detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented with other
protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance grounded networks

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to
the ground through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

300
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating
meshed networks.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the ground fault
current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy
phases will get a magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero
sequence voltage (3V0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the
network due to low voltage drop distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 120.

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN (Equation 211)

Where:
3I0 is the ground-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive ground-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position
where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN (Equation 212)

Ic Ic Ic

IR IL

en05000216_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000216 V1 EN

Figure 141: High impedance grounded network.

The operation of high impedance grounded networks is different compared to solid

grounded networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high

301
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

impedance grounded networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-
ground faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case
of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the
two ground-faults. To handle this type phenomena, a separate function called Phase
preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in
transmission applications.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection
and clearance of ground-faults. The low magnitude of the ground-fault current might
not give pickup of the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be
too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive ground-fault
protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-to-ground fault.

7.9.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical
for this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault
occurs on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance
seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when
both planning the protection system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 112, the equation for the bus voltage VA at A side is:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 213)

If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 214)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

302
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN

Figure 142: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving
factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built in
algorithm which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end.
No settings are required for this function.

7.9.2.3 Load encroachment

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault
on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 143.
The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed
and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this
with the settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the
minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of
the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right
figure of figure 143. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to
detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote line end.
For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle for Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function (FRPSPDIS, 21), the resistive
blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the figure 143 given
higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load
encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be

303
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So,
for short lines, the load encroachment function could preferably be switched off. See
section "Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function".

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in (21), FRPSPDIS
(21) function.

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 143: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic defined in Phase selection and load encroachment
function (FRPSPDIS, 21)

7.9.2.4 Short line application

Transmission line lengths for protection application purposes are classified as short,
medium and long . The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std
C37.113-1999. ). The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source
impedance at the protected line’s terminal to the protected line’s impedance (SIR).
SIR’s of about 4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with
SIR’s greater than 0.5 and less than 4

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be
recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as
voltage and source impedance, see table 29.

Table 33: Typical length of short and very short line

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 0.75 -3.5mile 3-15 miles
Short line 4-7 miles 15-30 miles

304
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 113.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the
voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for
overreaching.It is difficult, if not impossible, to apply distance protection for short
lines. It is possible to apply a overreaching pilot communication based POTT or
Blocking scheme protection for such lines to have fast tripping along the entire line.
Usually a unit protection, based on comparison of currents at the ends of the lines is
applied for such lines.

Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications.

7.9.2.5 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to
achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-ground fault at remote line end of a long line
when the line is heavy loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance
protection can generally be described as in table 30, long lines have Source impedance
ratio (SIR’s) less than 0.5.

Table 34: Typical length of long and very long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for
unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see figure 113.

7.9.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary area for new lines.

305
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to
experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated
by 100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence
impedance to the fault point but it does not normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is a practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can
be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the
operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different
setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of
service and grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends.

306
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The three most common operation modes are:

1. parallel line in service.

2. parallel line out of service and grounded.
3. parallel line out of service and not grounded.

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 115.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 124.

U ph U ph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I × K
ph 0 N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION2311 V1 EN (Equation 215)

V ph V
ph

Z = =
Z -Z 0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 215)

Where:
Vph is phase to ground voltage at the relay point

Iph is phase current in the faulty phase

3I0 is ground fault current

Z1 is positive sequence impedance

Z0 is zero sequence impedance

307
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN

Figure 144: Class 1, parallel line in service.

The equivalent zero sequence circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 116.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN

Figure 145: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground fault at the
remote busbar.

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed
according to equation 125.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN (Equation 216)

By dividing equation 125 by equation 124 and after some simplification we can write
the impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN (Equation 217)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

308
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the
line impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the
protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction
compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If
the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is
weak. If considering a single phase-to-ground fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A
to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end
is zero, the voltage VA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 127.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN (Equation 218)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence
currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN (Equation 219)

Simplification of equation 128, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into
equation 127 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3 I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN (Equation 220)

If we finally divide equation 129 with equation 124 we can draw the impedance
present to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN (Equation 221)

309
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of
the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This
reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line
end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction
does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN

Figure 146: The parallel line is out of service and grounded.

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both line ends on the bus bar
side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the
equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 118.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN

Figure 147: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends.

Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 131.

310
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 222)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate
setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably
when the line is in operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero
sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence,
mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters
according to equation 132 and equation 133 for each particular line section and use
them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 223)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 224)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN

Figure 148: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded.

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is

311
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

high which limits the zero sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 119

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN

Figure 149: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line
with one circuit disconnected and not grounded.

7.9.2.7 Tapped line application

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN

Figure 150: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer.

312
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault
infeed from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current
infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured
impedance at A and C will be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 225)

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × (
2
)
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN (Equation 226)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to

the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side V1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example,
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 121), given that the distance
protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other

313
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

zone 1 settings, that is without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three
parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing
resistance.The resistance is also depending on the presence of ground shield conductor
at the top of the tower, connecting tower-footing resistance in parallel. The arc
resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 227)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone
1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of
approximately 30 m/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-groundRFPG and phase-to-
phase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance
in order to obtain reliable fault detection.

7.9.3 Setting guidelines

7.9.3.1 General

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ((ZMRPDIS,

21) are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for
the analogue input module is used to automatically convert the measured secondary
input signals to primary values used in (ZMRPDIS, 21).

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

314
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect from load transfer together with fault resistance may be considerable in
some extreme cases.
• Zero sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

7.9.3.2 Setting of zone 1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to
section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the
cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of
service and grounded in both ends. The setting of ground-fault reach should be selected
to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (worst
case).

7.9.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole
protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in
the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching
zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even longer if the
fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end are considerable higher than the fault
current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

315
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current
infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above indicates a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2
must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when
the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults.
The zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole
line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 122, the IED at point A senses the impedance:
VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 228)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 151: Setting of overreaching zone

7.9.3.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up
protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always
covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication
purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. Equation 143 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the
zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed etc.

316
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Z rev ³ 1.2 × Z2 rem - ZL

EQUATION2314 V1 EN (Equation 229)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance

Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain
sensitivity.

7.9.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85%
of protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 116 in section "Parallel line applications".

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 230)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 231)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

317
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 232)

If the denominator in equation 146 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 233)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 234)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance)
equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 235)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 236)

7.9.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the
phase-to-ground faults RFPG for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining
reach setting parameters independently of each other.

318
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 151.

1
R= ( 2 × R1 + R0 ) + RFPG
3
ANSIEQUATION2303 V1 EN (Equation 237)

j loop = arctan
é 2 × X1 + X0 ù
êë 2 × R1 + R0 úû
EQUATION2304 V1 EN (Equation 238)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition
to minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPG £ 4.5 × X1
ANSIEQUATION2305 V1 EN (Equation 239)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the
fault resistance for phase-to-ground faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit
the setting of the zone1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop
measurement in the phase domain to:

RFPP ≤ 6 ⋅ X 1
IECEQUATION2306 V2 EN (Equation 240)

7.9.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function

The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS (21) is not activated. To deactivate the
function, the setting of the load resistance RLdFwd and RLdRev in FRPSPDIS (21)
must be set to max value (3000). If FRPSPDIS (21) is to be used for all or some of the
measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be
omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that
there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load
impedance. The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

319
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

V2
Z loa d min =
S
EQUATION1718 V1 EN (Equation 241)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z loa d =
3 × Ima x
EQUATION1719 V1 EN (Equation 242)

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation
under combined heavy three-phase load and ground faults, consider
both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFP G £ 0.8 × Z loa d

EQUATION1720 V1 EN (Equation 243)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three
times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to
equation 158.

320
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

é 2 × R1 + R 0 ù
RFPG £ 0.8 × Z load min × cos ¶ - × sin ¶
êë 2 × X1+ X 0 úû
EQUATION1721 V2 EN (Equation 244)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPP £ 1.6 × Zload

EQUATION579 V2 EN (Equation 245)

RFP
Equation 159 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-
phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 160.

× éê cos J - × sin J ùú
R1
RFPP £ 1.6 × Z load min
ë X1 û
IECEQUATION2307 V1 EN (Equation 246)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function
ZMRPSB (78) is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of
approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB (78) function is activated in the IED,
refer to the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (78).

7.9.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load

encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated

The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the
description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic
function (FRPSPDIS ,21).

321
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.9.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents

The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS, 21)

can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter
IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG.

The default setting of IMinPUPP and IMinPUPG is 20% of IBase where IBase is the
chosen current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice
to be suitable in most of the applications. However, there might be applications where
it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current
down to 10% of IBase. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a
remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines.

Setting IMinOpIR blocks the phase-to-ground loop if 3I0<IMinOpIR. The default

setting of IMinOpIR is 5% of IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value,
if the distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

7.9.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of
each other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for
selectivity reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds.
The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the
corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the
phase-to-groundtPG and for the phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each distance
protection zone separately, to further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

7.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)

7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral FRPSPDIS 21
characteristic with settable angle
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

322
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.10.2 Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this
matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21)
is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance measuring function
depending on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function
has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge
the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the
measuring zones without interfering with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.

The extensive output signals from FRPSPDIS (21) give also important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 152. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.

323
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

RLdFwd
LdAngle LdAngle
R

LdAngle LdAngle
RLdRev

en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN

Figure 152: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of the FRPSPDIS (21) function. When output
signal PHSELZis selected, the characteristic for the FRPSPDIS (21) (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) can be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (as shown in figure 153).

324
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X X

R R

PHSELZ DLECND

ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000099 V1 EN

Figure 153: Operating characteristic when load encroachment is activated

When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone
the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 154. The figure
shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating
area of the zone together with the load encroachment area is highlighted in black.

325
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 154: Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment

is enabled

Figure 154 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
"quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 155. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30-
degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of
the original 70 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at
the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis.
Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment
characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

326
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)

Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone

Distance measuring zone

R (ohm/phase)

en05000674.vsd
IEC05000674 V1 EN

Figure 155: Operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for
three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 156. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time,
the characteristic "shrinks" by 2/√3, from the full RLdFw/RLdRv reach, which is valid
at load or three-phase fault.

327
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 156: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

This rotation may seem a bit awkward, but there is a gain in selectivity by using the
same measurement as for the quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase
loops will be fully affected by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better
fault resistive coverage in quadrant 1. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in
quadrant 4 should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

7.10.3 Load encroachment characteristics

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve
correct phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire
line. It is not necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at
least 10% is recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones, the phase
selection output PHSELZ or PHSELI must be connected to input PHSEL on distance
zones.

328
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-ground
fault defined according to equation 108.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN (Equation 247)

But in some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less
than the set angle. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in
forward and reverse direction, RFltFwdPG and RFltRevPG for phase-to-ground faults
and RFltRevPP and RFltRevPP for phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid
that the phase selection characteristic must cut off some part of the zone characteristic.
The necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be derived from
trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type.

The following setting guideline considers normal overhead lines applications and
provides two different setting alternatives:

A) A recommended characteristic angle of 60 degrees

for the phase selection
B) A characteristic angle of 90 and 70 degrees for
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase respectively,
like implemented in the REL500 series

The following figures illustrate alternative B).

7.10.3.1 Phase-to-ground fault in forward direction

With reference to figure 157, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function (FRPSPDIS, 21) and index
Zm reference settings for Distance protection function (ZMRPDIS).

329
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

R1PGPHS + RNPHS R 0 PGPHS - R1PGPHS

RNPHS =
(Minimum setting) 3
X
RFRevPGPHS RFFwdPGPHS
PHS
R1Zm+RN

RFPGZm RFPGZm
Zm

X1PHS+XNPHS

X1Zm+XNZm
90°

φloop
φloop

R
(Ohm/loop)

X1Zm+XNZm
X1PHS+XNPHS

RFPGZm RFPGZm

R1Zm+RN

ANSI08000435-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000435 V1 EN

Figure 157: Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS (21) characteristic

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring
zone used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 109 and
equation 110 gives the minimum recommended reactive reach.

These recommendations are valid for both 60 and 90 deg. characteristic angle.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN (Equation 248)

330
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN (Equation 249)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS (21), and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS (21)

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for
forward direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach

The resistive reach must cover RFPG for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly
zone 2. Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in
the application. Equation 250 and 251 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

A) 60 degrees

RFFwPG ³ 1.1 × RFPG Zm

ANSIEQUATION2223 V1 EN (Equation 250)

B) 90 degrees

1
RFFwPG > × ( 2 × R1PGZm + R 0 PGZm ) + RFPGZm
3
ANSIEQUATION2224 V1 EN (Equation 251)

The security margin has to be increased in the case where φloop<60° to avoid that
FRPSPDIS (21) characteristic cuts off some part of the zone measurement characteristic.

RFFwPP and RFFRvPP must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be
60 degrees (or alternatively the same or lower compared to the measuring zone that
must be covered). If the characteristic angle for IEDs in the 500 series of 90 degrees is
desired, RFFwPP and RFFRvPP must be set to minimum setting values.

7.10.3.2 Phase-to-ground fault in reverse direction

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional
setting is required.

331
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Resistive reach
The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse
zones. In blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote
end that is used in the communication scheme. In equation 112 the index ZmRv
references the specific zone to be coordinated to.

RFltREvPG ³ 1.2 × RFPG ZmRv

EQUATION1726 V1 EN (Equation 252)

7.10.3.3 Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

Reactive reach
The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-ground reach setting X1. No
extra setting is required.

Resistive reach
R1PE and R0PE must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be 60 deg
(this gives a characteristic angle of 90 deg. at three-phase faults). If the 500-series
characteristic angle of 70 deg. is desired, R1PE and R0PE must be set accordingly.

Fault resistance reach

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFItFwdPP, must cover RFPPZm with
at least 25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault
for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS (21), as shown in
figure 108. The minimum recommended reach can be calculated according to
equation 253 and 254.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function
FRPSPDIS (21)and index Zm reference settings for Distance protection
function ZMRPDIS.

A) 60°
RFltFwdPP ³ 1.25 × RFPPzm
EQUATION1318-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 253)

B) 70°

RFFwdPP > 1.82 × R1PPZm + 0.32 × X 1PPZm + 0.91 × RFPP Zm

ANSIEQUATION2226 V1 EN (Equation 254)

332
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by
FRPSPDIS (21).

Equation 253 and 254 are is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of
25% will cater for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might
occur at three-phase fault when FRPSPDIS (21)characteristic angle is changed from 60
degrees to 90 degrees or from 70 degrees to 100 degrees (rotated 30° anti-clock wise).

333
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase )
X 1PHS
R1PP= tan 70°

0.5 × RF Re vPP 0.5 × RFFwdPP

PHS 0.5*RFPPZm
0.5*RFPPPm
R1Zm

Zm
X1

X1Zm

70
j
R

j
70
( W / phase )
0.5*RFPPZm 0.5*RFPPZm
X1Zm

0.5*RFPPZM R1Zm 0.5*RFPPZm

0.5 × RF Re vPP
X 1PHS
R1PP= tan 70°
ANSI08000249-1-
en.vsd
ANSI08000249 V1 EN

Figure 158: Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS (21) characteristic
for phase-to-phase fault for φline>70° (setting parameters in italic)

7.10.4 Setting guidelines

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where
φloop and φline is greater than 60°.

334
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.10.4.1 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically
to define the load angle LdAngle, the blinder RLdFwd in forward direction and blinder
RLdRev in reverse direction, as shown in figure 109.

RLdFwd

LdAngle LdAngle
R

LdAngle LdAngle
RLdRev

en05000226_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000226 V1 EN

Figure 159: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle LdAngle is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be
suitable to begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the
maximum possible load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must
be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFwd, can be calculated according to equation 115.

V 2 min
RLdFwd = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Vmin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFwd can be lesser than the calculated
minimal resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRev for load encroachment characteristic in reverse

direction can be calculated in the same way as RLdFwd, but use maximum importing

335
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

power that might occur instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Vmin
voltage for this condition.

7.10.4.2 Minimum operate currents

FRPSPDIS (21) has two current setting parameters, which blocks the respective phase-
to-ground loop and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn)
and phase difference current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-ground (IMinPUPG) is set to
the default value or a level to securely detect a single line-to-ground fault at the
furthest reach of the phase selection. It is recommended to set IMinPUPP to double
value of IMinPUPG.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-ground fault
(3I0Enable_PG) is set securely detect single line-to-ground fault at remote end on the
protected line. It is recommended to set INBlockPP to double value of 3I0Enable_PG.

7.11 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed

angle FDPSPDIS (21)

7.11.1 Identification

7.11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase selection with load FDPSPDIS 21
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

7.11.2 Application
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this
matter. Phase selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) is designed
to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance measuring function depending
on the fault type.

336
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function
has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge
the resistive setting of both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the
measuring zones without interfering with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.

The extensive output signals from FDPSPDIS (21) give also important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

7.11.3 Setting guidelines

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where
φloop and φline is greater than 60°.

7.11.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve
correct phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire
line. It is not necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at
least 10% is recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones , the phase
selection outputs PHSELZ or DLECND must be connected to input PHSEL on
ZMQPDIS (21), distance measuring block.

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-ground
fault is defined according to equation 108.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN (Equation 257)

In some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than
60°. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and
reverse direction, RFltFwdPG and RFltRevPG for phase-to-ground faults and
RFltRevPP and RFltRevPP for phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid that
FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone characteristic. The
necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be derived from
trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type.

337
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Phase-to-ground fault in forward direction

With reference to figure 107, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) and index
Zm reference settings for Distance protection function (ZMQPDIS, 21).

338
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X
( W / loop)
3 4 5
1

6 6

60°

60° R
8 ( W / loop)

6 6

3 4 5
IEC09000043_1_en.vsd
IEC09000043 V1 EN

Figure 160: Relation between distance protection phase selection (FDPSPDIS)

(21) and impedance zone (ZMQPDIS) (21) for phase-to-ground fault
φloop>60° (setting parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(21) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)(21)
3 RFltRevPGPHS

4 (X1PHS+XN)/tan(60°)

5 RFltFwdPGPHS

6 RFPGZM

7 X1PHS+XN

8 φloop
9 X1ZM+XN

339
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring
zone used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 109 and
equation 110 gives the minimum recommended reactive reach.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN (Equation 258)

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN (Equation 259)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21), and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21)

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for
forward direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach

The resistive reach must cover RFPG for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly
zone 2. Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in
the application. Equation 111 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

RFltFwdPGmin ³ 1.1 × RFPGzm

EQUATION1724 V2 EN (Equation 260)

where:
RFPGZm is the setting RFPG for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21).

The security margin has to be increased to at least 1.2 in the case where φloop<60° to
avoid that FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone
measurement characteristic.

Phase-to-ground fault in reverse direction

Reactive reach
The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional
setting is required.

340
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Resistive reach
The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse
zones. In blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote
end that is used in the communication scheme. In equation 112 the index ZmRv
references the specific zone to be coordinated to.

RFltREvPG ³ 1.2 × RFPG ZmRv

EQUATION1726 V1 EN (Equation 261)

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

Reactive reach
The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-ground reach setting X1. No
extra setting is required.

Resistive reach
In the same way as for phase-to-ground fault, the reach is automatically calculated
based on setting X1. The reach will be X1/tan(60°) =X1/√(3).

Fault resistance reach

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFItFwdPP, must cover RFPPZm with
at least 25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault
for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS (21), see Figure 108.
The minimum recommended reach can be calculated according to equation 113.

RFltFwdPP ³ 1.25 × RFPPzm

EQUATION1318-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 262)

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by
FDPSPDIS (21).

Equation 113 modified is applicable also for the RFltRevPP as follows:

RFlt Re vPPmin ³ 1.25 × RFPPzmRv

EQUATION2264-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 263)

Equation 113 is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater
for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-
phase fault when FDPSPDIS (21) characteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90
degrees (rotated 30° anti-clock wise).

341
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase)

3 4 5
1

6 6

8 60°

60° 6 6
R (W / phase)
8

6 6

3 4 5

IEC09000257_1_en.vsd
IEC09000257 V1 EN

Figure 161: Relation between distance protection (ZMQPDIS) (21) and FDPSPDIS
(21) characteristic for phase-to-phase fault for φline>60° (setting
parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(21) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone) (21)
3 0.5 · RFltRevPP PHS

4 X1PHS
tan ( 60° )

5 0.5 · RFltFwdPP PHS

6 0.5 · RFPPZm

7 X1PHS

342
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

8 X1Zm

7.11.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically
to define the load angle LdAngle, the blinder RLdFwd in forward direction and blinder
RLdRev in reverse direction, as shown in figure 109.

RLdFwd

LdAngle LdAngle
R

LdAngle LdAngle
RLdRev

en05000226_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000226 V1 EN

Figure 162: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle LdAngle is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be
suitable to begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the
maximum possible load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must
be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFwd, can be calculated according to equation 115.

343
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

V 2 min
RLdFwd = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Vmin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFwd can be lesser than the calculated
minimal resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRev for load encroachment characteristic in reverse

direction can be calculated in the same way as RLdFwd, but use maximum importing
power that might occur instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Vmin
voltage for this condition.

7.11.3.3 Minimum operate currents

FDPSPDIS (21) has two current setting parameters which blocks the respective phase-
to-ground loop and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn)
and phase difference current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-ground (IMinPUPG) is set to
securely detect a single phase-to-ground fault at the furthest reach of the phase
selection. It is recommended to set IMinPUPP to double value of IMinPUPG.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-ground fault
(3I0Enable_PG) is set securely detect single line-to-ground fault at remote end on the
protected line. It is recommended to set 3I0BLK_PP to double value of 3I0Enable_PG.

7.12 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS (21)

7.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21
(zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN

344
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.12.2 Application
The fast distance protection function ZMFPDIS in the IED is designed to provide sub-
cycle, down to half-cycle, operating time for basic faults. At the same time, it is
specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions in high-voltage
transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and faults generating
heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with utmost security and
dependability, although sometimes with a reduced operating speed.

7.12.2.1 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important role when designing the protection
system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly grounded networks

In solidly grounded systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 163: Solidly grounded network

The ground-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance
has very limited influence on the ground-fault current. The shunt admittance may,
however, have some marginal influence on the ground-fault current in networks with
long transmission lines.

The ground-fault current at single phase-to-ground in phase A can be calculated as

equation 116:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN (Equation 265)

345
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the ground-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases during line to ground fault is generally lower than
140% of the nominal phase-to-ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the
nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solidly grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect ground faults. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground-fault factor is defined according to Equation 37.

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 266)

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are
valid, see Equation 118 and Equation 119.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN (Equation 267)

346
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN (Equation 268)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence of the source

X0 is the reactive zero sequence of the source

R1 is the resistive positive sequence of the source

X1 is the reactive positive sequence of the source

The magnitude of the ground-fault current in effectively grounded networks is high

enough for impedance measuring elements to detect ground faults. However, in the
same way as for solidly grounded networks, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
this case.

High impedance grounded networks

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to
the ground through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated radially, but can also be found operating
as a meshed network.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the ground-fault
current is very low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy
phases will get a magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero
sequence voltage (3V0) will have the same magnitude in different places in the
network due to low voltage drop distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to Equation .

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN (Equation 269)

Where:
3I0 is the ground-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive ground-fault current (A)

347
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position
where the reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN (Equation 270)

Ic Ic Ic

IR IL

en05000216_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000216 V1 EN

Figure 164: High impedance grounded network

The operation of high impedance grounded networks is different compared to solid

grounded networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high
impedance grounded networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-
ground faults immediately; they clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case
of cross-country faults, many network operators want to selectively clear one of the
two ground faults.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection
and clearance of ground faults. The low magnitude of the ground-fault current might
not give pickup of the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be
too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive ground-fault
protection is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-to-ground fault.

7.12.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical
for this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault
occurs on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance
seen by the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when
both planning the protection system and making the settings.

With reference to Figure 112, the equation for the bus voltage VA at A side is:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 271)

348
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 272)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN

Figure 165: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving
factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in
algorithm, which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end.
No settings are required for this feature.

7.12.2.3 Load encroachment

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment
and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is
transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the
left in Figure 166. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of
course not desirable and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is
to consider this with the resistive reach settings, that is, to have a security margin
between the distance zone characteristic and the minimum load impedance. Such a
solution has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the distance protection,
that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

349
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in Figure 166. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the
possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at
remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to Figure 166
affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to
load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder setting is available in forward and
reverse direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. See
section "Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function".

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 166: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

7.12.2.4 Short line application

Transmission line lengths for protection application purposes are classified as short,
medium and long. The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std
C37.113-1999. ). The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source
impedance at the protected line’s terminal to the protected line’s impedance (SIR).
SIR’s of about 4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with
SIR’s greater than 0.5 and less than 4

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage. Load encroachment is not so common problem. The line length that can be

350
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as
voltage and source impedance, see Table 29.

Table 35: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 0.75 -3.5mile 3-15 miles
Short line 4-7 miles 15-30 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see Figure 166.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the
voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for
overreaching. It is difficult, if not impossible, to apply distance protection for short
lines. It is possible to apply an overreaching pilot communication based POTT or
Blocking scheme protection for such lines to have fast tripping along the entire line.
Usually a unit protection, based on comparison of currents at the ends of the lines is
applied for such lines.

7.12.2.5 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to
achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-ground fault at remote line end of long lines when
the line is heavy loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance
protection can generally be described as in Table 30. Long lines have Source
impedance ratio (SIR’s) less than 0.5.

Table 36: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to

351
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for
unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see Figure 166.

7.12.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary land to build new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage level in order to
experience mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated
by 100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence
impedance to the fault point but it does not normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is a common practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can
be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 shall be different depending on the
operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different
setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of
service and grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

352
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and grounded.
3. Parallel line out of service and not grounded.

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 115.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 124.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z 0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 273)

Where:
Vph is phase to ground voltage at the relay point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is ground fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

353
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN

Figure 167: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 116.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN

Figure 168: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground fault at the
remote busbar

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed
according to equation 125.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN (Equation 274)

By dividing equation 125 by equation 124 and after some simplification we can write
the impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN (Equation 275)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

354
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the
line impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the
protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction
compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If
the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is
weak. If considering a single phase-to-ground fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A
to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end
is zero, the voltage VA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 127.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN (Equation 276)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence
currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN (Equation 277)

Simplification of equation 128, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into
equation 127 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3 I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN (Equation 278)

If we finally divide equation 129 with equation 124 we can draw the impedance
present to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN (Equation 279)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of
the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

355
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This
reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line
end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction
does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN

Figure 169: The parallel line is out of service and grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both line ends on the bus bar
side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the
equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 118.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN

Figure 170: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 131.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 280)

356
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate
setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably
when the line is in operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero
sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence,
mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters
according to equation 132 and equation 133 for each particular line section and use
them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 281)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 282)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN

Figure 171: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is
high which limits the zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 119

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching

357
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out
of operation and grounded at both ends.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN

Figure 172: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line

with one circuit disconnected and not grounded

The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 134.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f )
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN (Equation 283)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 135 and equation 136.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN (Equation 284)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN (Equation 285)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 137.

Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN (Equation 286)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 138.

358
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN (Equation 287)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient
amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

7.12.2.7 Tapped line application

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN

Figure 173: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section
"Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end" , that is increased measured
impedance due to fault current infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and
B station the measured impedance at A and C will be

359
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 288)

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × (
2
)
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN (Equation 289)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to

the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side V1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example,
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 121), given that the distance
protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other
zone 1 settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

360
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three
parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing
resistance.The resistance is also depending on the presence of ground shield conductor
at the top of the tower, connecting tower-footing resistance in parallel. The arc
resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 290)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone
1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of
approximately 30 m/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground RFPG and phase-to-
phase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance
in order to obtain reliable fault detection.

7.12.3 Setting guidelines

7.12.3.1 General

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMFPDIS) are
done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the
analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input
signals to primary values used in ZMFPDIS .

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.

361
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

7.12.3.2 Setting of zone 1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to
section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the
cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of
service and grounded in both ends. The setting of ground-fault reach should be selected
to be <95% also when parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (worst
case).

7.12.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole
protected line. Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in
the same way as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching
zone to at least 120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the
fault infeed from adjacent lines at remote end is considerable higher than the fault
current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current
infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above gives a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must
be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the
telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The

362
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line
must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 122, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 291)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 174: Setting of overreaching zone

7.12.3.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up
protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always
covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication
purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. Equation 143 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the
zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN (Equation 292)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

363
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain
sensitivity.

7.12.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85%
of the protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 116 in section Parallel line in service .

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 293)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 294)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 295)

If the denominator in equation 146 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 296)

364
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 297)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance)
equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
-÷
è 2 2
R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 298)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 299)

7.12.3.6 Setting the reach with respect to load

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the
phase-to-ground faults RFPG for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining
reach setting parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in the resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 151.

1
R= ( 2 × R1 + R0 ) + RFPG
3
ANSIEQUATION2303 V1 EN (Equation 300)

j loop = arctan
é 2 × X1 + X0 ù
êë 2 × R1 + R0 úû
EQUATION2304 V1 EN (Equation 301)

365
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition
to minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPG £ 4.5 × X1
ANSIEQUATION2305 V1 EN (Equation 302)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low compared to the
fault resistance for phase-to-ground faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit
the setting of the zone1 reach in the resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop
measurement based on the equation.

RFPP ≤ 6 ⋅ X 1
IECEQUATION2306 V2 EN (Equation 303)

The setting XLd is primarily there to define the border between what is considered a
fault and what is just normal operation. See Figure In this context, the main examples
of normal operation are reactive load from reactive power compensation equipment or
the capacitive charging of a long high-voltage power line. XLd needs to be set with
some margin towards normal apparent reactance; not more than 90% of the said
reactance or just as much as is needed from a zone reach point of view.

As with the settings RLdFwd and RldRev, XLd is representing a per-phase load
impedance of a symmetrical star-coupled representation. For a symmetrical load or three-
phase and phase-to-phase faults, this means per-phase, or positive-sequence,
impedance. During a phase-to-earth fault, it means the per-loop impedance, including
the earth return impedance.

7.12.3.7 Zone reach setting lower than minimum load impedance

Even if the resistive reach of all protection zones is set lower than the lowest expected
load impedance and there is no risk for load encroachment, it is still necessary to set
RLdFwd, RldRev and LdAngle according to the expected load situation, since these
settings are used internally in the function as reference points to improve the
performance of the phase selection.

The maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone must be checked to ensure that
there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load
impedance. The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated with the equation.

366
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

V2
Z loa d min =
S
EQUATION1718 V1 EN (Equation 304)

Where:
V the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z loa d =
3 × Ima x
EQUATION1719 V1 EN (Equation 305)

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin, it is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions. To guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation
under combined heavy three-phase load and ground faults both phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground fault operating characteristics should be
considered.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFP G £ 0.8 × Z loa d

EQUATION1720 V1 EN (Equation 306)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three
times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to
equation 158.

367
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

é 2 × R1 + R 0 ù
RFPG £ 0.8 × Z load min × cos ¶ - × sin ¶
êë 2 × X1+ X 0 úû
EQUATION1721 V2 EN (Equation 307)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPP £ 1.6 × Zload

EQUATION579 V2 EN (Equation 308)

RFP
Equation 159 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-
phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. For other cases a more accurate calculations are necessary according
to equation 160.

× éê cos J - × sin J ùú
R1
RFPP £ 1.6 × Z load min
ë X1 û
IECEQUATION2307 V1 EN (Equation 309)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function
ZMRPSB (78) is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of
approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB (78) function is activated in the IED,
refer to the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (78).

7.12.3.8 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance

The impedance zones are enabled as soon as the (symmetrical) load impedance crosses
the vertical boundaries defined by RLdFwd and RldRev or the lines defined by ArgLd.
So, it is necessary to consider some margin. It is recommended to set RLdFwd and
RldRev to 90% of the per-phase resistance that corresponds to maximum load.

368
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The absolute value of the margin to the closest LdAngle line should be of the same
order, that is, at least 0.1 • Zload min.

The load encroachment settings are related to a per-phase load impedance in a

symmetrical star-coupled representation. For symmetrical load or three-phase and phase-
to-phase faults, this corresponds to the per-phase, or positive-sequence, impedance. For
a phase-to-ground fault, it corresponds to the per-loop impedance, including the ground
return impedance.
X

RLdFwd RLdFwd
10%
90% LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle 10% LdAngle R R

LdAngle LdAngle Possible

LdAngle LdAngle
load RLdRev
RLdRev

ANSI12000176-1-en.vsd

ANSI12000176 V1 EN

Figure 175: Load impedance limitation with load encroachment

During the initial current change for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-ground faults,
operation may be allowed also when the apparent impedance of the load encroachment
element is located in the load area. This improves the dependability for fault at the
remote end of the line during high load. Although it is not associated to any standard
event, there is one potentially hazardous situation that should be considered. Should
one phase of a parallel circuit open a single pole, even though there is no fault, and the
load current of that phase increase, there is actually no way of distinguish this from a
real fault with similar characteristics. Should this accidental event be given precaution,
the phase-to-ground reach (RFPG) of all instantaneous zones has to be set below the
emergency load for the pole-open situation. Again, this is only for the application
where there is a risk that one breaker pole would open without a preceding fault. If this
never happens, for example when there is no parallel circuit, there is no need to change
any phase-to-ground reach according to the pole-open scenario.

7.12.3.9 Other settings

IMinOpPG and IMinOpPP

369
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The ability for a specific loop and zone to issue a start or a trip is inhibited if the
magnitude of the input current for this loop falls below the threshold value defined by
these settings. The output of a phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In < IminOpPG(Zx).
In is the RMS value of the fundamental current in phase n.

The output of a phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if Imn < IMinOpPP(Zx). Imn is the
RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents m and Ln.

Both current limits IMinOpPG and IMinOpPP are automatically reduced to 75% of
regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir
is set to Reverse.

OpModeZx

This setting allows control over the operation/non-operation of the individual distance
zones. Normally the option Enable Ph-G PhPh is active to allow the operation of both
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops. Operation in either phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground loops can be chosen by activating Enable PhPh or Enable Ph-G,
respectively. The zone can be completely disabled with the setting option Disable-Zone.

DirModeZx

This setting defines the operating direction for zones Z3, Z4 and Z5 (the directionality
of zones Z1, Z2 and ZRV is fixed). The options are Non-directional, Forward or
Reverse. The result from respective set value is illustrated in Figure 176, where the
positive impedance corresponds to the direction out on the protected line.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 176: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones 3 to 5

tPPZx, tPGZx, TimerModeZx, ZoneLinkPU and TimerLinksZx

370
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The logic for the linking of the timer settings can be described with a module diagram.
The following figure shows only the case when TimerModeZx is selected to Ph-Ph and
Ph-G.

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-G

PPZx AND
OR AND
AND tPPZx
0
TZx
PGZx AND OR
OR
AND tPPZx
0 AND

BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPG)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
PUPHS Phase Selection no links
1st pickup zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

ANSI12000139-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000139 V1 EN

Figure 177: Logic for linking of timers

CVTtype

If possible, the type of capacitive voltage transformer (CVT) used for measurement
should be identified. The alternatives are strongly related to the type of ferro-resonance
suppression circuit included in the CVT. There are two main choices:

Passive type For CVTs that use a nonlinear component, like a saturable inductor, to limit overvoltages
(caused by ferro-resonance). This component is practically idle during normal load and
fault conditions, hence the name "passive." CVTs that have a high resistive burden to
mitigate ferro-resonance also fall into this category.

371
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Any This option is primarily related to the so-called active type CVT, which uses a set of
reactive components to form a filter circuit that essentially attenuates frequencies other
than the nominal to restrain the ferro-resonance. The name "active" refers to this circuit
always being involved during transient conditions, regardless of the voltage level. This
option should also be used for the types that do not fall under the other two categories, for
example, CVTs with power electronic damping devices, or if the type cannot be identified
at all.
None This option should be selected if the voltage transformer is fully magnetic.
(Magnetic)

3I0Enable_PG

This setting opens up an opportunity to enable phase-to-ground measurement for phase-

to-phase-ground faults. It determines the level of residual current (3I0) above which
phase-to-ground measurement is activated (and phase-to-phase measurement is
blocked). The relations are defined by the following equation.

I 3I0Enable _ PG
3× I0 ³ × Iph max
100
EQUATION2548-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 310)

Where:
3I0Enable_PG the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to-
ground fault loops in %
Iphmax the maximum phase current in any of the three phases

By default, this setting is set excessively high to always enable phase-to-phase

measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults. This default setting value must be
maintained unless there are very specific reasons to enable phase-to-ground
measurement. Even with the default setting value, phase-to-ground measurement is
activated whenever appropriate, like in the case of simultaneous faults: two ground
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line.

7.13 High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS (21)

372
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)

S00346 V1 EN

7.13.2 Application
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more
complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of
very different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more
stringent demands on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged
or increased security level of the power system.

The high speed distance protection function (ZMFCPDIS) in the IED is designed to
provide sub-cycle, down to half-cycle, operate time for basic faults. At the same time,
it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions in high voltage
transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and faults generating
heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with outmost security and
dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating speed.

7.13.2.1 System grounding

The type of system grounding plays an important role when designing the protection
system. Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly grounded networks

In solidly grounded systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to ground
without any impedance between the transformer neutral and ground.

xx05000215_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000215 V1 EN

Figure 178: Solidly grounded network

373
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The ground-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The
series impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance
has very limited influence on the ground-fault current. The shunt admittance may,
however, have some marginal influence on the ground-fault current in networks with
long transmission lines.

The ground-fault current at single phase-to-ground in phase A can be calculated as

equation 116:

3 × VA VA
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1710 V2 EN (Equation 311)

Where:
VA is the phase-to-ground voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before fault.
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive.

ZN is the ground-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3.

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-
ground voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solidly grounded networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect ground faults. However, distance protection
has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
those cases.

Effectively grounded networks

A network is defined as effectively grounded if the ground-fault factor fe is less than
1.4. The ground-fault factor is defined according to equation 37:

Vmax
fe =
Vpn
ANSIEQUATION1268 V1 EN (Equation 312)

374
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Where:
Vmax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single phase-
to-ground fault.
Vpn is the phase-to-ground fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively grounded network is when the following

relationships between the symmetrical components of the network impedances are
valid, see equations 118 and 119:

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN (Equation 313)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN (Equation 314)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence of the source

X0 is the reactive zero sequence of the source

R1 is the resistive positive sequence of the source

X1 is the reactive positive sequence of the source

The magnitude of the ground-fault current in effectively grounded networks is high

enough for impedance measuring elements to detect ground faults. However, in the
same way as for solidly grounded networks, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in
this case.

High impedance grounded networks

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection
and clearance of ground faults. The low magnitude of the ground fault current might
not give pickup of the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be
too low for acceptance. For this reason a separate high sensitive ground fault protection
is necessary to carry out the fault clearance for single phase-to-ground fault.

ZMFCPDIS is not designed for high impedance earthed networks. We recommend

using the ZMQPDIS distance function instead, possibly together with the Phase
preference logic (PPLPHIZ).

375
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.13.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end

All transmission and most sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for
this type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs
on the protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by
the distance protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both
planning the protection system and making the settings.

The equation for the bus voltage VA at A side is:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN (Equation 315)

If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side:

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN (Equation 316)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in
source impedances at local and remote end.

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

21 21
Rf

en05000217_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000217 V1 EN

Figure 179: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end

The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving
factors for justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in
algorithm, which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1 at the exporting end
and reduces the underreach at the importing end. No settings are required for this function.

376
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.13.2.3 Load encroachment

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault
on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur
when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated in the left part of
figure 180. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed
and the previous way of handling this was to consider it with the settings, that is, with a
security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has
the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to
detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built-in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right
part of figure 180. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to
detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote line
end.For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle the resistive blinder for
the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right part of the figure 180,
given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load
encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get
sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem.
Nevertheless, always set RLdFwd, RldRev and LdAngleaccording to the expected
maximum load since these settings are used internally in the function as reference
points to improve the performance of the phase selection.

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance area in LdAngle

forward direction LdAngle
R R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev RLdFwd

ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN

Figure 180: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

377
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.13.2.4 Short line application

Transmission line lengths for protection application purposes are classified as short,
medium and long. The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std
C37.113-1999. The length classification is defined by the ratio of the source impedance
at the protected line’s terminal to the protected line’s impedance (SIR). SIR’s of about
4 or greater generally define a short line. Medium lines are those with SIR’s greater
than 0.5 and less than 4.

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage. Load encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be
recognized as a short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as
voltage and source impedance, see table 29.

Table 37: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 0.75 -3.5 miles 3-15 miles
Short line 4-7 miles 15-30 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 7.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 cannot be used due to the
voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for
overreaching. It is difficult, if not impossible, to apply distance protection for short
lines. It is possible to apply an overreaching pilot communication based POTT or
Blocking scheme protection for such lines to have fast tripping along the entire line.
Usually a unit protection, based on comparison of currents at the ends of the lines is
applied for such lines.

Load encroachment is normally no problem for short line applications.

7.13.2.5 Long transmission line application

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to
achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-ground fault at remote line end of long lines when
the line is heavy loaded.

378
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance
protection can generally be described as in table 30, long lines have Source impedance
ratio (SIR’s) less than 0.5.

Table 38: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Vn Vn
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 45-60 miles 200-250 miles
Very long lines >60 miles >250 miles

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to
detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for
unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated), see figure 114.

Zm

ZL

LdAngle LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle

RLdRev RLdFwd

en05000220_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000220 V1 EN

Figure 181: Characteristic for zone measurement for a long line

7.13.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling

379
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

General
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get
necessary area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the zero sequence measurement due to the mutual
coupling between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order
to have mutual coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by
100 meters or more. The mutual coupling does not normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual
impedances for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self
impedance and it is a practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations
(classes) that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but separated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources separated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line
and rail road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although
it exists and is not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can
be in service, out of service, out of service and grounded in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the
operation condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different
setting groups for handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of
service and grounded at both ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero
sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-ground faults in the
following ways, by using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the ground-return

compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting
parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a
protected multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

380
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Parallel line applications

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission
lines terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and grounded.
3. Parallel line out of service and not grounded.

Parallel line in service

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission
and transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 115.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 124.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z 0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN (Equation 317)

Where:
Vph is phase to ground voltage at the relay point.
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase.
3I0 is ground fault current.
Z1 is positive sequence impedance.
Z0 is zero sequence impedance.

381
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

A B
FAULT

Z0m

21 21
en05000221_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000221 V1 EN

Figure 182: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 116.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN

Figure 183: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit,

parallel, operating line with a single phase-to-ground fault at the
remote busbar

When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed
according to equation 125.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN (Equation 318)

By dividing equation 125 by equation 124 and after some simplification we can write
the impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN (Equation 319)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

382
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the
line impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the
protected line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction
compared to the current on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If
the currents have the same direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is
weak. If considering a single phase-to-ground fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A
to B on the parallel line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end
is zero, the voltage VA in the faulty phase at A side as in equation 127.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN (Equation 320)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence
currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN (Equation 321)

Simplification of equation 128, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into
equation 127 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3 I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN (Equation 322)

If we finally divide equation 129 with equation 124 we can draw the impedance
present to the IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN (Equation 323)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance,
gives with X1L=0.48 Ohm/Mile, X0L=1.4Ohms/Mile, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of
the line reactance p=71% that is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

383
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the
reach is most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This
reach reduction is normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line
end, it is proportionally increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction
does not significantly affect the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000222_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000222 V1 EN

Figure 184: The parallel line is out of service and grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both line ends on the bus bar
side of the line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the
equivalent zero sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 118.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN

Figure 185: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line
that operates with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 131.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN (Equation 324)

384
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which

must be considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate
setting group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably
when the line is in operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero
sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence,
mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters
according to equation 132 and equation 133 for each particular line section and use
them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN (Equation 325)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN (Equation 326)

Parallel line out of service and not grounded

A B
OPEN OPEN

Z0m
CLOSED CLOSED

21 21
en05000223_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000223 V1 EN

Figure 186: Parallel line is out of service and not grounded

When the parallel line is out of service and not grounded, the zero sequence on that
line can only flow through the line admittance to the ground. The line admittance is
high which limits the zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In
practice, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus
bar can be simplified to the circuit shown in figure 119

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the
distance protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching

385
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

distance protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out
of operation and grounded at both ends.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN

Figure 187: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line

with one circuit disconnected and not grounded

The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 134.

1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = 3 = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f )
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN (Equation 327)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 135 and equation 136.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN (Equation 328)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN (Equation 329)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 137.

Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
( )
Re K u = 1 + 2
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN (Equation 330)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 138.

386
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN (Equation 331)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient
amount (at least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

7.13.2.7 Tapped line application

A B

BC

ANSI05000224-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000224 V2 EN

Figure 188: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to a similar problem that was highlighted in section Fault
infeed from remote end , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current
infeed. For example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured
impedance at A and C will be:

387
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN (Equation 332)

IA + IC V2
Z C = Z Trf + (Z CT + × Z TB ) × (
2
)
IC V1
EQUATION1714 V1 EN (Equation 333)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

V2/V1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at V1 side of the transformer to

the measuring side V2 (it is assumed that current and voltage distance function is
taken from V2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf is transformer impedance.

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T
point to the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T
point to the fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the
high voltage side V1 has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the
transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current
from one end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example,
for faults at T the current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending
on the system parameters (see the dotted line in figure 121), given that the distance
protection in B to T will measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the
impedances of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to
accept zone 2 trip in one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both
gives overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other
zone 1 settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are
necessary to determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

388
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Fault resistance
The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-ground faults is very
important, because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are
single phase-to-ground faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three
parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.
The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN (Equation 334)

Where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection
zone 1. Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for zone 2 to get a reasonable
margin against the influence of wind.
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-ground RFPE and phase-to-
phase RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance
in order to obtain reliable fault detection.

7.13.3 Series compensation in power systems

The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line
reactance in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of
transmission corridors. The principle is based on compensation of distributed line
reactance by insertion of series capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided
by the capacitor is continuously proportional to the square of the current flowing at the
same time through the compensated line and series capacitor. This means that the
series capacitor has a self-regulating effect. When the system loading increases, the
reactive power generated by series capacitors increases as well. The response of SCs is
automatic, instantaneous and continuous.

The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are:

• Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit

• Increase power transfer capability by raising the dynamic stability limit
• Improved reactive power balance
• Increase in power transfer capacity
• Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new
power lines

389
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.13.3.1 Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit

A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance
in a transmission line, as shown in figure 69. During low loading, the system voltage
drop is lower and at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower.
When the loading increases and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the
series capacitor increases and therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can
be regulated.

Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the
reactance of the line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage
collapse. Figure 70 presents the voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in
figure 69) on line loading and compensation degree KC, which is defined according to
equation 60. The effect of series compensation is in this particular case obvious and
self explanatory.

XC
KC =
X Line
EQUATION1895 V1 EN (Equation 335)

A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance

Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN (Equation 336)

A B
Z SA1 Power line Load
EA ~
Seires
capacitor

en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN

Figure 189: A simple radial power system

390
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

500

V limit
400

300

V[kV]
200

P30

P50

P70
P0
100

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

P[MW]

en06000586_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000586 V1 EN

Figure 190: Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of
compensation

7.13.3.2 Increase in power transfer

The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation

for a transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 74. The
power transfer on the transmission line is given by the equation 62:

VA × VB × sin ( d ) VA × VB × sin ( d )
P= =
X Line - X C X Line × (1 - K C )
EQUATION1994-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 337)

The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation 60

VA DV VB

PA A B PB
-jX C
+jXL
VA VB d
QA QB

en06000590_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000590 V1 EN

Figure 191: Transmission line with series capacitor

The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference (δ)
between the line ends is illustrated in figure 75. Practical compensation degree runs
from 20 to 70 percent. Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be
obtained in practice.

391
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Multiple of power over

a non-compensated line
Powe r tra nsfe r with co ns ta nt a ng le diffe re nce
3.5

Inc re a se in powe r tra ns fe r

2.5

1.5

1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
D e gre e of se rie s c ompe nsa tio n [%] Degree of
compensation

en06000592.vsd
IEC06000592 V1 EN

Figure 192: Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on

degree of series compensation

7.13.3.3 Voltage and current inversion

Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series
compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages
measured in different points of series compensated networks and this performances of
different protection functions, which have their operation based on properties of
measured voltage and current phasors.

Voltage inversion
Figure 82 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the
IED point and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement
is supposed to be on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED
point and fault on the protected line. Figure 83 presents the corresponding phasor
diagrams for the cases with bypassed and fully inserted series capacitor.

Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the
bus is linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in
scheme (as shown in figure 83). Voltage VM measured at the bus is equal to voltage
drop D VL on the faulty line and lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees.

The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point
and the fault position. The fault current IF (see figure 83) is increased due to the series
capacitor, generally decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The
reactive voltage drop D VL on XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees.
Voltage drop DVC on series capacitor lags the fault current by 90 degrees. Note that
line impedance XL1 could be divided into two parts: one between the IED point and the
capacitor and one between the capacitor and the fault position. The resulting voltage

392
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

VM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of voltage drops on partial

impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as presented by

VM = I F × j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1995-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 338)

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
Source voltage

Pre -fault voltage

V’ M Fault voltage

VM
V

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000605_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000605 V1 EN

Figure 193: Voltage inversion on series compensated line

VS
xVS

xVS
VS

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
x VL
V’M=xV L

IF IF
x VC

VM

en06000606_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000606 V1 EN

Figure 194: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and
inserted series capacitor during voltage inversion

It is obvious that voltage VM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This
situation corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line
without series capacitor. Voltage VM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case
when:

393
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN (Equation 339)

Where
XS is the source impedance behind the IED

The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its
dimension. It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its
consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks
depend on their operating principle. The most known effect has voltage inversion on
directional measurement of distance IEDs (see chapter "Distance protection" for more
details), which must for this reason comprise special measures against this phenomenon.

There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs
located on the bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does
not eliminate the phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of
IED point.

Current inversion
Figure 84 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent
voltage source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on non-
compensated lines from power source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series
capacitor may change the situation.
With inserted
capacitor
Source voltage v
VM

Pre -fault voltage

With bypassed
capacitor V’ M Fault voltage

Source
XS XL1
~ XF
IF XC

21

en06000607_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000607 V1 EN

Figure 195: Current inversion on series compensated line

394
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage VS
depends in general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and
the fault position. Two possibilities appear:

X S - X C + X L1 > 0
X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN (Equation 340)

The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases,
when the capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown
in phasor diagram in figure 85. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive
nature and the fault currents lags source voltage by 90 electrical degrees.

The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for
this reason lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive
current will flow from series compensated line to the system. The system conditions
are in such case presented by equation 67

X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN (Equation 341)
VS HVS
VS
HVS

VM

With bypassed With inserted

HVC

capacitor capacitor
V’M=HV L

IF IF
HVL

en06000608_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000608 V1 EN

Figure 196: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and
inserted series capacitor during current inversion

It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on

operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their
operating principle. The most known effect has current inversion on operation of
distance IEDs (as shown in section "Distance protection" for more details), which
cannot be used for the protection of series compensated lines with possible current
inversion. Equation 67 shows also big dependence of possible current inversion on

395
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

series compensated lines on location of series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for faults just behind
the capacitor when located at line IED and only the source impedance prevents current
inversion. Current inversion has been considered for many years only a theoretical
possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big power plants)
compared to the capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in modern
networks is increasing and must be studied carefully during system preparatory studies.

The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of
protection devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections,
based on residual (zero sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered
in studies as well. Current inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence
source impedance (a number of power transformers connected in parallel) must be
considered as practical possibility in many modern networks.

Location of instrument transformers

Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an
important role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection
scheme. It is on the other hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of
those protection schemes, which need for their operation information on voltage in IED
point.

Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement

only, like line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location.
Figure 88 shows schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers
related to the position of line-end series capacitor.

- jX C
CT 1 CT 2

VT1 VT 2
en06000611_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000611 V1 EN

Figure 197: Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series
capacitor

Bus side instrument transformers

CT1 and VT1 on figure 88 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers.
The protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current
inversion for line faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this
may series capacitor cause negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected
and adjacent lines as well for close-in line faults (see also figure 90 LOC=0%), which
requires special design of distance measuring elements to cope with such phenomena.
The advantage of such installation is that the protection zone covers also the series

396
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that line protection will detect and
cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor.

Line side instrument transformers

CT2 and VT2 on figure 88 represent the case with line side instrument transformers.
The protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults
on the protected line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1
may be active in most applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument
transformers are used.

Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults,
which decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied
seriously in case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs
for teleprotection schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments
transformers and the buses reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and
may cause voltage as well as current inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks
for line faults. It is for this reason absolutely necessary to study the possible effect on
operation of zero sequence directional ground-fault overcurrent protection before its
installation.

Dual side instrument transformers

Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common
are installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto
installations also in switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and breaker-and-a-
half arrangement. The advantage of such schemes is that the unit protections cover also
for shunt faults in series capacitors and at the same time the voltage inversion does not
appear for faults on the protected line.

Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument
transformers on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each
particular protection function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on
dependability and security. The line side VT can for example be used by the distance
protection and the bus side VT by the directional residual OC ground fault protection.

Apparent impedances and MOV influence

Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by
distance IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 89 presents typical locations of
capacitor banks on power lines together with corresponding compensation degrees.
Distance IED near the feeding bus will see in different cases fault on remote end bus
depending on type of overvoltage protection used on capacitor bank (spark gap or
MOV) and SC location on protected power line.

397
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

100 %
66%
50 %
33%
0%
EA ~ X
KC = 80% 33 % 50 % 33% 80 %
21

en06000612_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000612 V1 EN

Figure 198: Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line

Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture
relatively simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance
corresponds to the impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 90 case KC
= 0%.
KC = 80% KC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% KC = 80%
KC = 0% LOC = 0% LOC = 50% LOC = 33%, 66% LOC = 100%
jX
jX

jX

jX

jX
R R R R R

en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN

Figure 199: Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations
and spark gaps used for overvoltage protection

398
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

iM MOV

-jX C
iL iC

VC

MOV protected series capacitor

20 100

10 50

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

50
10

100
20
Line current as a function of time Capacitor voltage as a function of time

20 20

10 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

10
10

20
20

Capacitor current as a function of time MOV current as a function of time

en06000614_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000614 V1 EN

Figure 200: MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and
corresponding currents

The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of
capacitive reactance included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap
does not flash over, as presented for typical cases in figure 90. Here it is necessary to
distinguish between two typical cases:

• Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong
directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 90 for 50%
compensation at 50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and
66% of line length. The remote end compensation has the same effect.
• The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the
IED point and fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure
90, 80% compensation at local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and
the distance IED will see wrong direction towards the fault, if no special measures
have been introduced in its design.

The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor
overvoltage protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only
when the instantaneous voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the
protective voltage level in each half-cycle separately, see figure 91.

399
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L

“A Linearized Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors” Paper 86SM357–8 IEEE/
PES summer meeting in Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in construction of a non-
linear equivalent circuit with series connected capacitor and resistor. Their value
depends on complete line (fault) current and protection factor kp. The later is defined
by equation 74.

VMOV
kp = VNC
ANSI13000293 V1 EN (Equation 342)

Where
VMOV is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the
MOV has conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by √2
VNC is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX

jX

jX

I I
£1 =2
Kp × In Kp × In

I
Kp × In
= 10

R R R

en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN

Figure 201: Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of

protection factor KP

Figure 92 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case
LOC=0% in figure 90).

• Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or
equal to its protective current level (I £ kp · INC). Line apparent impedance is in
this case reduced for the complete reactance of a series capacitor.

• 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to

approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times
the protective current level (I £ 2· kp· INC). This information has high importance
for setting of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to
ground fault measurement as well as for phase to phase measurement.

400
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line
current becomes higher than 10-times the protective current level (I £ 10· kp· INC).

7.13.3.4 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines

Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series
compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way
influences the selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of
lines adjacent to the series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the
network.
VA VD
ZSA IA
EA
~ ZLA
A
-jXC
IF
F
VB Z LF
ZSB IB
EB ~ ZLB
B
D

en06000616_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000616 V1 EN

Figure 202: Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current
infeed

Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 93) is calculated for the loss-less system
according to the equation below.

VB = VD + I B × jX LB = ( I A + I B ) × j ( X LF - X C ) + I B × jX LB
EQUATION1998-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 343)

Further development of equation 75 gives the following expressions:

é æ IA ö ù
VB = jI B × ê X LB + ç 1 + ÷ × ( X LF - X C ) ú
ë è IB ø û
EQUATION1999-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 344)

X LB
X C (VB = 0 ) = + X LF
IA
1+
IB
EQUATION2000-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 345)

Equation 76 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of
capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent
series capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that

401
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

equation 77 indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of
series compensation through the effect of voltage inversion.

It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in
great extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF
between D bus and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the
bus and the fault appears just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of
voltage inversion to be expanded very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on
one hand the compensated line is very long with high degree of compensation, and the
adjacent lines are, on the other hand, relatively short.

Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on

implementation and location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly
estimate their influence on performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is
possible that the costs for number of protective devices, which should be replaced by
more appropriate ones due to the effect of applied series compensation, influences the
future position of series capacitors in power network.

Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short
circuits with zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher
fault resistances, for which spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct
at all. At the same time this kind of investigation must consider also the maximum
sensitivity and possible resistive reach of distance protection devices, which on the
other hand simplifies the problem.

Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection

makes simple calculations often impossible. Different kinds of transient or dynamic
network simulations are in such cases unavoidable.

7.13.3.5 Distance protection

Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle
on series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a
lot of challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional
measurement and transient overreach.

Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and
voltage. Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restrain quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing
quantity. Typically Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining
quantity is the system voltage Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different
way and is not discussed here.

Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance
and resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected
line and its protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong
picture of the protected line and all “solutions” related to distance protection of series

402
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

compensated and adjacent lines are concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which
may help eliminating the basic reason for wrong measurement. The most known of
them are decrease of the reach due to presence of series capacitor, which apparently
decreases the line reactance, and introduction of permanent memory voltage in
directional measurement.

Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a
transmission networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it
necessary to install distance protection in combination with telecommunication. The
most common is distance protection in Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode
(POTT).

7.13.3.6 Underreaching and overreaching schemes

It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no
circumstances overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone
should always, under all system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain
section selectivity, the first distance (underreaching) protection zone must be set to a
reach less than the reactance of the compensated line in accordance with figure 94.
Zone 2 A
A B
-j X
C
Zone 1 A
X 12

X 11
Zone 1 B
G
DA DB

Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN

Figure 203: Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series

compensated line

The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor,
as shown in the dashed line in figure 94. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way
cover bigger portion of the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin
the remote end bus. Distance protection Zone 1 is often set to

X Z 1 = K S × ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN (Equation 346)

Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 95, which covers for possible
overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted
separately that compensation degree KC in figure 95 relates to total system reactance,
inclusive line and source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless
MOV or spark gaps are used for capacitor overvoltage protection.

403
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Equation 78 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of
series capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed
in line side, but it is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS .

If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less
than 50% of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a
section, G in figure 94, of the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.

1.0
KS

0.8

0.6

0.4
0.2

0 20 40 60 80 100
KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN

Figure 204: Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system

compensation degree KC

For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main
protection. Permissive overreaching distance protection or some kind of directional or
unit protection must be used.

The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or

out of service. Figure 96 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can
be kept in the total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for
close up faults. The overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone.
When the capacitor is in operation the permissive zone will have a very high degree of
overreach which can be considered as a disadvantage from a security point of view.

A B
-jX C Permissive Zone A
X 12
X 11
Permissive Zone B
DA DB

en06000620_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000620 V1 EN

Figure 205: Permissive overreach distance protection scheme

Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion)

Assume in equation 79

404
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN (Equation 347)

and in figure 97

a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen
from the DB IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until
the spark gap has flashed.

Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 97 are influenced by this
negative impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is
taken into consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a protection
far away from the faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance
zone, if no precaution is taken. Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power
lines are presented by equations 80 to 83.

I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN (Equation 348)

IF
X DA1 = X A1 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A1
EQUATION1916 V2 EN (Equation 349)

IF
X DA2 = X A2 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A2
EQUATION1917 V2 EN (Equation 350)

IF
X DA3 = X A3 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A3
EQUATION1918 V2 EN (Equation 351)

405
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

A1 B
jX 1
IA1
A2
-jX C
jX 2 jX11
X
A3 IA2 F
IF
jX 3

DA1 IA3
DB
DA2

DA3

en06000621_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000621 V1 EN

Figure 206: Distance IED on adjacent

power lines are influenced by
the negative impedance

Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has
taken place. If the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be
added to the protection of all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection
system must be able to operate correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs.
Distance protection can be used, but careful studies must be made for each individual
case. The rationale described applies to both conventional spark gap and MOV
protected capacitors.

Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent

power lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the
reactance of a short adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor reactance and
voltage inversion phenomenon may occur also on remote end of adjacent lines.
Distance protection of such line must have built-in functionality which applies
normally to protection of series compensated lines.

It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault
current will be of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the
negative impedance will be sustained. If equation 84 is valid

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN (Equation 352)

in figure 98, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is
bypassed. So, the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is
negative and if the characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 98 the IED cannot
operate. However, if there is a memory circuit designed so it covers the negative
impedance, a three phase fault can be successfully cleared by the distance protection.
As soon as the spark gap has flashed the situation for protection will be as for an

406
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

ordinary fault. However, a good protection system should be able to operate correctly
before and after gap flashing occurs.

jX jX X12

X 12
R RV

X11

X FW
X 11

R R FW
ZS

X RV
XC
ZS

XC

en06000584_small.vsd
en06000625.vsd
IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN
IEC06000625 V1 EN

Figure 207: Cross-polarized Figure 208: Quadrilateral

quadrilateral characteristic with
characteristic separate impedance
and directional
measurement

If the distance protection is equipped with a ground-fault measuring unit, the negative
impedance occurs when

3 × X C > 2 × X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN (Equation 353)

Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic)

will normally handle ground-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs inside
the characteristic. The operating area for negative impedance depends upon the
magnitude of the source impedance and calculations must be made on a case by case
basis, as shown in figure 98. Distance IEDs with separate impedance and directional
measurement offer additional setting and operational flexibility when it comes to
measurement of negative apparent impedance (as shown in figure 99).

Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion)

If equation 86 is valid in Figure 84 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant
reactance becomes negative and the fault current will have an opposite direction
compared with fault current in a power line without a capacitor (current inversion). The
negative direction of the fault current will persist until the spark gap has flashed.
Sometimes there will be no flashover at all, because the fault current is less than the
setting value of the spark gap. The negative fault current will cause a high voltage on

407
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

the network. The situation will be the same even if a MOV is used. However,
depending upon the setting of the MOV, the fault current will have a resistive component.

X C > X S + X11
EQUATION2036 V2 EN (Equation 354)

The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase
fault, but the negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition
for a negative current in case of an ground fault can be written as follows:

3 × X C > 2 × X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 × X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN (Equation 355)

All designations relates to figure 84. A good protection system must be able to cope
with both positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can
occur. A distance protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional
element gives the wrong direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current
exists, distance protection is not a suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current
seldom occurs. In normal network configurations the gaps will flash in this case.

Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines

Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending
at the same busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 100) causes some challenges for
distance protection because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The
current reversal phenomenon also raises problems from the protection point of view,
particularly when the power lines are short and when permissive overreach schemes
are used.
A -jXC B
ZAC ZCB

Zm0AC Zm0CB
-jXC
ZAC ZCB

en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN

Figure 209: Double circuit, parallel operating line

Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of
distance protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions
related to settings of distance protection on series compensated line have been
considered. Influence of disconnected parallel circuit, which is grounded at both ends,
on operation of distance protection on operating circuit is known.

Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual

impedance between two circuits, see figure 101. It presents a zero sequence equivalent
circuit for a fault at B bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and

408
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

grounded at both IEDs. The effect of zero sequence mutual impedance on possible
overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus is increased compared to non compensated
operation, because series capacitor does not compensate for this reactance. The reach
of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for phase-to-ground measuring loops must
further be decreased for such operating conditions.
A -jXC B
j(X0L -Xm0)

jXm0

-jXC
j(X0L -Xm0)

en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN

Figure 210: Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double

circuit line with one circuit disconnected and grounded at both IEDs

Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance
protection for external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected
in one phase and runs non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing
cycle. All such operating conditions must carefully be studied in advance and
simulated by dynamic simulations in order to fine tune settings of distance IEDs.

If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure
102, than also one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel,
healthy circuit will send a carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal
will be received as a carrier receive signal CRBB.
RAA IFC1 IFC1 RBA RAA IFC1 RBA
X X
F F

RAB IFC2 RBB RAB IFC2 RBB

CSAB CRBB CSAB CRBB

en06000629_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000629 V1 EN

Figure 211: Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits

It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to
fault, which will reverse the current direction on the healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB
will suddenly detect fault in forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due
to long reset time of IED RAB and especially telecommunication equipment, trip its
related circuit breaker, since all conditions for POTT have been fulfilled. Zero
sequence mutual impedance will additionally influence this process, since it increases
the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after the opening of first circuit
breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause unwanted operation of
protection on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the complete system
stability.

409
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance
protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily
blocks distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the
signals received at the healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates
tripping. The second mentioned method has an advantage in that not the whole
protection is blocked for the short period. The disadvantage is that a local
communication is needed between two protection devices in the neighboring bays of
the same substation.

Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to
cover the whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of
service. When the capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously
and the whole system will be very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current
reversal difficulties will be accentuated because the ratio of mutual impedance against
self-impedance will be much higher than for a non-compensated line.

If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based

on negative sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual
coupling. However, they can only be used for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
faults. For three-phase faults an additional protection must be provided.

7.13.4 Setting guidelines

7.13.4.1 General

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMFCPDIS)

are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the
analog input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input
signals to primary values used in ZMFCPDIS.

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the
setting calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the
calculated value of the ground-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the
influence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops.
The difference between the impedances for different phase-to-ground loops can be
as large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

410
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.13.4.2 Setting of zone 1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching
zone (zone 1) to 75%...90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to
section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are
valid in the particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the
cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service and not grounded and out of
service and grounded in both ends. The setting of the ground-fault reach should be
<85% also when the parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends (the worst
case).

7.13.4.3 Setting of overreaching zone

The first overreaching zone (zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way
as for zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least
120% of the protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed
from adjacent lines at the remote end is considerably higher than the fault current that
comes from behind of the IED towards the fault.

The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current
infeed from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If the chosen zone 2 reach gives such a value that it will interfere with zone 2 on
adjacent lines, the time delay of zone 2 must be increased by approximately 200 ms to
avoid unwanted operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent
line at the remote end is down during faults. The zone 2 must not be reduced below
120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent
line at remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F, see figure 122, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

411
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN (Equation 356)

Z AC Z CB

F
A C Z CF B
IA

I A+ IB
21 IB

ANSI05000457-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000457 V2 EN

Figure 212: Setting of overreaching zone

7.13.4.4 Setting of reverse zone

The reverse zone (zone RV) is applicable for purposes of scheme communication
logic, current reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the
back-up protection of the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that
it always covers the overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the
telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent
lines. The equation can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the
zone is used for blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev >
_ 1.2 × (Z2rem - ZL)
GUID-ABFB1C53-F12A-45D5-90CC-907C9FA0EFC3 V1 EN (Equation 357)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance.
Z2rem is the zone 2 setting (zone used in the POTT scheme) at the remote end of the protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to the
fault current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain
certain sensitivity.

7.13.4.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines

412
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Setting of zone 1
A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as
well as on the adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component,
this is however small and can mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy
adjacent line.

An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal
have to be set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can
move and pass the bus, the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further
out in the net must be set with respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus.

Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMFCPDIS, 21) characteristic in forward
and reverse direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize
dependability and security for independent zone1.

Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault
conditions the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can
only be set with a percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 104

p
%
100

80

60

40

20

0 C
20 40 60 80 100 %

99000202.vsd

IEC99000202 V1 EN

Figure 213: Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at

different degrees of compensation

æX ö
c = degree of compensation çç c ÷÷
è Xl ø
EQUATION1894 V1 EN (Equation 358)

413
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Xc is the reactance of the series capacitor

p is the maximum allowable reach for an under-reaching zone with respect to the sub-
harmonic swinging related to the resulting fundamental frequency reactance the zone is
not allowed to over-reach.

The degree of compensation C in figure 104 has to be interpreted as the relation

between series capacitor reactance XC and the total positive sequence reactance X1 to
the driving source to the fault. If only the line reactance is used the degree of
compensation will be too high and the zone 1 reach unnecessary reduced. The highest
degree of compensation will occur at three phase fault and therefore the calculation
need only to be performed for three phase faults.

The compensation degree in ground return path is different than in phases. It is for this
reason possible to calculate a compensation degree separately for the phase-to-phase
and three-phase faults on one side and for the single phase-to-ground fault loops on the
other side. Different settings of the reach for the ph-ph faults and ph-G loops makes it
possible to minimise the necessary decrease of the reach for different types of faults.

414
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Reactive Reach
jX
Xline - XC

R RV

XLLOC

X1FW
XC
R

R FW
Z
ZSS

X1RV
XC

en06000584-2.vsd
IEC06000584 V2 EN

Figure 214: Measured impedance at voltage inversion

Forward direction:
Where
XLLoc equals line reactance up to the series capacitor(in the picture
approximate 33% of XLine)
X1Fw is set to (XLine-XC) · p/100.

X1Rv = max( 1.5 x (XC-XLLOCC); is defined according to figure 104

X1Fw

When the calculation of X1Fwgives a negative value the zone 1 must be

permanently blocked.

415
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

For protection on non compensated lines facing series capacitor on next line. The
setting is thus:

• X1Fw is set to (XLine-XC · K) · p/100.

• X1Rvcan be set to the same value as X1Fw

• K equals side infeed factor at next busbar.

When the calculation of X1Fwgives a negative value the zone 1 must be

permanently blocked.

Fault resistance
The resistive reach is, for all affected applications, restricted by the set reactive reach
and the load impedance and same conditions apply as for a non-compensated network.

However, special notice has to be taken during settings calculations due to the ZnO
because 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which
corresponds to approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals
two times the protective current level. This information has high importance for setting
of distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to ground- fault
measurement as well as, for phase-to-phase measurement.

Overreaching zone 2
In series compensated network where independent tripping zones will have reduced
reach due to the negative reactance in the capacitor and the sub-harmonic swinging the
tripping will to a high degree be achieved by the communication scheme.

With the reduced reach of the under-reaching zones not providing effective protection
for all faults along the length of the line, it becomes essential to provide over-reaching
schemes like permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) or blocking scheme can be used.

Thus it is of great importance that the zone 2 can detect faults on the whole line both
with the series capacitor in operation and when the capacitor is bridged (short
circuited). It is supposed also in this case that the reactive reach for phase-to-phase and
for phase-to-ground faults is the same. The X1Fw, for all lines affected by the series
capacitor, are set to:

• X1 >= 1,5 · XLine

The safety factor of 1.5 appears due to speed requirements and possible under reaching
caused by the sub harmonic oscillations.

416
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The increased reach related to the one used in non compensated system is
recommended for all protections in the vicinity of series capacitors to compensate for
delay in the operation caused by the sub harmonic swinging.

Settings of the resistive reaches are limited according to the minimum load impedance.

Reverse zone
The reverse zone that is normally used in the communication schemes for functions
like fault current reversal logic, weak-in-feed logic or issuing carrier send in blocking
scheme must detect all faults in the reverse direction which is detected in the opposite
IED by the overreaching zone 2. The maximum reach for the protection in the opposite
IED can be achieved with the series capacitor in operation.

The reactive reach can be set according to the following formula:

X1=1.3·(X12Rem-0.5(X1L-XC))

Settings of the resistive reaches are according to the minimum load impedance:

Optional higher distance protection zones

When some additional distance protection zones (zone 4, for example) are used they
must be set according to the influence of the series capacitor.

7.13.4.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85%
of the protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in
all cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits
are in service with a single phase-to-ground fault located at the end of a protected line.
The equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in
figure 116.

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be
equal to at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN (Equation 359)

417
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN (Equation 360)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN (Equation 361)

If the denominator in equation 146 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the
real and imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be
written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN (Equation 362)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN (Equation 363)

Parallel line is out of service and grounded in both ends

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This
means that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for
the single phase-to-ground faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance)
equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
-÷
è 2 2
R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN (Equation 364)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN (Equation 365)

418
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.13.4.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach R1 independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the
phase-to-ground faults RFPG for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining
reach setting parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-ground fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and
at the end of the protected zone is equal to equation 151.

1
R= ( 2 × R1 + R0 ) + RFPG
3
ANSIEQUATION2303 V1 EN (Equation 366)

j loop = arctan
é 2 × X1 + X0 ù
êë 2 × R1 + R0 úû
EQUATION2304 V1 EN (Equation 367)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition
to minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPG £ 4.5 × X1
ANSIEQUATION2305 V1 EN (Equation 368)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the
fault resistance for phase-to-ground faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit
the setting of the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop
measurement to:

RFPP ≤ 6 ⋅ X 1
IECEQUATION2306 V2 EN (Equation 369)

Note that RLdFwd and RldRev are not only defining the load encroachment boundary.
They are used internally as reference points to improve the performance of the phase
selection. In addition, they define the impedance area where the phase selection
element gives indications, so do not set RLdFwd and RldRev to excessive values even
if the load encroachment functionality is not needed (that is, when the load is not
encroaching on the distance zones). Always define the load encroachment boundary
according to the actual load or in consideration of how far the phase selection must
actually reach.

419
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

7.13.4.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function

The following instructions are valid when setting the resistive reach of the distance
zone itself with a sufficient margin towards the maximum load, that is, without the
common load encroachment characteristic (set by RLdFwd, RldRev and ArgLd).
Observe that even though the zones themselves are set with a margin, RLdFwd and
RldRev still have to be set according to maximum load for the phase selection to
achieve the expected performance.

Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a
sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The
minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

V2
Z loa d min =
S
EQUATION1718 V1 EN (Equation 370)

Where:
V is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Vmin
Z loa d =
3 × Ima x
EQUATION1719 V1 EN (Equation 371)

Minimum voltage Vmin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-ground measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPG £ 0.8 × Zload

GUID-AD2F1BE2-8442-4ED1-A558-21D092CEE170 V1 EN (Equation 372)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-
to-ground faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three

420
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

times the load-impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to
equation 158.

RFPG £ 0.8 × Z load min × cos ¶ -

é 2 × R1 + R 0
× sin ¶
ù
êë 2 × X1+ X 0 úû
GUID-11DD90FA-8FB5-425F-A46F-6553C00025BE V1 EN (Equation 373)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set
resistive reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum
load impedance.

RFPP £ 1.6 × Zload

EQUATION579 V2 EN (Equation 374)

RFP
Equation 159 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-
phase faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-
impedance angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 160.

× éê cos J - × sin J ùú
R1
RFPP £ 1.6 × Z load min
ë X1 û
IECEQUATION2307 V1 EN (Equation 375)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function
ZMRPSB (78) is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of
approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB (78) function is activated in the IED,
refer to the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (78).

7.13.4.9 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance

The impedance zones are enabled as soon as the (symmetrical) load impedance crosses
the vertical boundaries defined by RLdFwd and RldRev or the lines defined by ArgLd.
So, it is necessary to consider some margin. It is recommended to set RLdFwd and
RldRev to 90% of the per-phase resistance that corresponds to maximum load.

421
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The absolute value of the margin to the closest LdAngle line should be of the same
order, that is, at least 0.1 • Zload min.

The load encroachment settings are related to a per-phase load impedance in a

symmetrical star-coupled representation. For symmetrical load or three-phase and phase-
to-phase faults, this corresponds to the per-phase, or positive-sequence, impedance. For
a phase-to-ground fault, it corresponds to the per-loop impedance, including the ground
return impedance.
X

RLdFwd RLdFwd
10%
90% LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle 10% LdAngle R R

LdAngle LdAngle Possible

LdAngle LdAngle
load RLdRev
RLdRev

ANSI12000176-1-en.vsd

ANSI12000176 V1 EN

Figure 215: Load impedance limitation with load encroachment

During the initial current change for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-ground faults,
operation may be allowed also when the apparent impedance of the load encroachment
element is located in the load area. This improves the dependability for fault at the
remote end of the line during high load. Although it is not associated to any standard
event, there is one potentially hazardous situation that should be considered. Should
one phase of a parallel circuit open a single pole, even though there is no fault, and the
load current of that phase increase, there is actually no way of distinguish this from a
real fault with similar characteristics. Should this accidental event be given precaution,
the phase-to-ground reach (RFPG) of all instantaneous zones has to be set below the
emergency load for the pole-open situation. Again, this is only for the application
where there is a risk that one breaker pole would open without a preceding fault. If this
never happens, for example when there is no parallel circuit, there is no need to change
any phase-to-ground reach according to the pole-open scenario.

7.13.4.10 Parameter setting guidelines

IMinOpPG and IMinOpPP

422
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The ability for a specific loop and zone to issue start or trip is inhibited if the
magnitude of the input current for this loop falls below the threshold value defined by
these settings. The output of a phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In <
IMinOpPGZRV(Zx). In is the RMS value of the fundamental current in phase n.

The output of a phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if Imn < IMinOpPP(Zx). Imn is the
RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents m and n.

Both current limits IMinOpPG and IMinOpPP are automatically reduced to 75% of
regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is,
OperationDir=Reverse.

OpModeZx

These settings allow control over the operation/non-operation of the individual distance
zones. Normally the option ‘Enable Ph-G PhPh’ is active, to allow operation of both
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops. Operation in either phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground loops can be chosen by activating ‘Enable PhPh or Enable Ph-G,
respectively. The zone can be completely disabled with the setting option Disable-Zone.

DirModeZx

These settings define the operating direction for Zones Z3, Z4 and Z5 (the
directionality of zones Z1, Z2 and ZRV is fixed). The options are Non-directional,
Forward or Reverse. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 176
below, where positive impedance corresponds to the direction out on the protected line.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 216: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones 3 to 5

tPPZx, tPGZx, TimerModeZx, ZoneLinkPU and TimerLinksZx

423
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Refer to chapter Simplified logic schemes in Technical Manual for the application of
these settings.

OperationSC

Choose the setting value SeriesComp if the protected line or adjacent lines are
compensated with series capacitors. Otherwise maintain the NoSeriesComp setting value.

CVTtype

If possible, the type of capacitive voltage transformer (CVT) that is used for
measurement should be identified. Note that the alternatives are strongly related to the
type of ferro-resonance suppression circuit that is included in the CVT. There are two
main choices:

Passive type For CVTs that use a non-linear component, like a saturable inductor, to limit overvoltages
(caused by ferro-resonance). This component is practically idle during normal load and
fault conditions, hence the name ‘passive’. CVTs that have a high resistive burden to
mitigate ferro-resonance also fall in to this category.
Any This option is primarily related to the so-called active type CVT, which uses a set of
reactive components to form a filter circuit that essentially attenuates frequencies other
than the nominal in order to restrain the ferro-resonance. The name ‘active’ refers to the
fact that this circuit is always involved during transient conditions, regardless of voltage
level. This option should also be used for types that do not fall under the other two
categories, for example, CVTs with power electronic damping devices, or if the type cannot
be identified at all.
None This option should be selected if the voltage transformer is fully magnetic.
(Magnetic)

3I0Enable_PG

This setting opens up an opportunity to enable phase-to-ground measurement for phase-

to-phase-ground faults. It determines the level of residual current (3I0) above which
phase-to-ground measurement is activated (and phase-to-phase measurement is
blocked). The relations are defined by the following equation.

I 3I0Enable _ PG
3× I0 ³ × Iph max
100
EQUATION2548-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 376)

Where:
3I0Enable_P is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to-
G ground fault loops in %
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases

424
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

By default this setting is set excessively high to always enable phase-to-phase

measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults. Maintain this default setting value
unless there are very specific reasons to enable phase-to-ground measurement. Please
note that, even with the default setting value, phase-to-ground measurement is
activated whenever appropriate, like in the case of simultaneous faults: two ground
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line.

7.14 Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)

7.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68

Zpsb

SYMBOL-EE V1 EN

7.14.2 Application

7.14.2.1 General

Various changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotating units. The most
typical reasons for these oscillations are big changes in load or changes in power
system configuration caused by different faults and their clearance. As the rotating
masses strive to find a stable operate condition, they oscillate with damped oscillations
until they reach the final stability.

The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbances and on the
natural stability of the system.

The oscillation rate depends also on the inertia of the system and on the total system
impedance between different generating units. These oscillations cause changes in
phase and amplitude of the voltage difference between the oscillating generating units
in the power system, which reflects further on in oscillating power flow between two
parts of the system - the power swings from one part to another - and vice versa.

Distance IEDs located in interconnected networks see these power swings as the
swinging of the measured impedance in relay points. The measured impedance varies
with time along a locus in an impedance plane, see figure 217. This locus can enter the
operating characteristic of a distance protection and cause, if no preventive measures
have been considered, its unwanted operation.

425
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

jX

Operating characteristic

Impedance locus at
power swing

IEC09000224_1_en.vsd
IEC09000224 V1 EN

Figure 217: Impedance plane with Power swing detection operating characteristic
and impedance locus at power swing

7.14.2.2 Basic characteristics

Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB, 78) detects reliably power swings with
periodic time of swinging as low as 200 ms (which means slip frequency as high as
10% of the rated frequency on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the swings under normal
system operate conditions as well as during dead time of a single-pole automatic
reclosing cycle.

ZMRPSB (78) function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults during
power. The operation of the distance protection function remains stable for external
faults during the power swing condition, even with the swing (electrical) centre located
on the protected power line.

The operating characteristic of the ZMRPSB (78) function is easily adjustable to the
selected impedance operating characteristics of the corresponding controlled distance
protection zones as well as to the maximum possible load conditions of the protected
power lines. See the corresponding description in “Technical reference manual” for
the IEDs.

7.14.3 Setting guidelines

Setting guidelines are prepared in the form of a setting example for the protected power
line as part of a two-machine system presented in figure 218.

426
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

E E
A B

dA= const dB= f(t)

A B
Z SA
Z Z SB
L

~ R
~
99001019_ansi.vsd
ANSI99001019 V1 EN

Figure 218: Protected power line as part of a two-machine system

Reduce the power system with protected power line into equivalent two-machine
system with positive sequence source impedances ZSA behind the IED and ZSB behind
the remote end bus B. Observe a fact that these impedances can not be directly
calculated from the maximum three-phase short circuit currents for faults on the
corresponding busbar. It is necessary to consider separate contributions of different
connected circuits.

The required data is as follows:

Rated system voltage

Vr = 400kV
EQUATION1728 V1 EN

Minimum expected system voltage under critical system

Vmin = 380kV conditions
EQUATION1729 V1 EN

Rated system frequency

f n = 60 Hz
EQUATION1730 V1 EN

Rated primary voltage of voltage protection transformers used

400
Vp = kV
3
EQUATION1731 V1 EN

Rated secondary voltage of voltage instrument transformers used

0.115
Vs = kV
3
EQUATION1732 V1 EN

Rated primary current of current protection transformers used

I p = 1200 A
EQUATION1326 V1 EN

Rated secondary current of current protection transformers used

Is = 5A
EQUATION1734 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

427
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Line positive sequence impedance

Z L1 = (10.71 + j 75.6 ) W
EQUATION1328 V1 EN

Positive sequence source impedance behind A bus

Z SA1 = (1.15 + j 43.5) W
EQUATION1329 V1 EN

Positive sequence source impedance behind B bus

Z SB1 = ( 5.3 + j 35.7 ) W
EQUATION1330 V1 EN

Maximum expected load in direction from A to B (with minimum

S max = 1000 MVA system operating voltage Vmin)
EQUATION1331 V1 EN

Power factor at maximum line loading

cos (j max ) = 0.95
EQUATION1332 V1 EN

Maximum expected load angle

j max = 25°
EQUATION1333 V1 EN

Maximum possible initial frequency of power oscillation

f si = 2.5 Hz
EQUATION1334 V1 EN

Maximum possible consecutive frequency of power oscillation

f sc = 7.0 Hz
EQUATION1335 V1 EN

The impedance transformation factor, which transforms the primary impedances to the
corresponding secondary values is calculated according to equation 377. Consider a
fact that all settings are performed in primary values. The impedance transformation
factor is presented for orientation and testing purposes only.

I p Vs 1200 0.115
KIMP = × = × = 0.069
I s Vp 5 400
EQUATION1735 V1 EN (Equation 377)

The minimum load impedance at minimum expected system voltage is equal to

equation 378.

V 2 min 380 2
Z L min = = = 144.4W
S max 1000
EQUATION1736-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 378)

The minimum load resistance RLmin at maximum load and minimum system voltage is
equal to equation 379.

428
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

RL min = Z L min × cos (j max ) = 144.4 × 0.95 = 137.2W

EQUATION1338 V1 EN (Equation 379)

The system impedance ZS is determined as a sum of all impedance in an equivalent two-

machine system, see figure 218. Its value is calculated according to equation 380.

Z S = Z SA1 + Z L1 + Z SB1 = (17.16 + j154.8 ) W

EQUATION1339 V1 EN (Equation 380)

The calculated value of the system impedance is of informative nature and helps
determining the position of oscillation center, see figure 219, which is for general case
calculated according to equation 381.

ZS
Z CO = - Z SA1
EB
1+
EA
EQUATION1340 V1 EN (Equation 381)

In particular cases, when

E A = EB
EQUATION1342 V1 EN (Equation 382)

resides the center of oscillation on impedance point, see equation 383.

ZS
Z CO = - Z SA1 = ( 7.43 + j 33.9 ) W
2
EQUATION1341 V1 EN (Equation 383)

429
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

ANSI05000283 V1 EN

Figure 219: Impedance diagrams with corresponding impedances under

consideration

The outer boundary of oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction

RLdOutFw should be set with certain safety margin KL compared to the minimum
expected load resistance RLmin. When the exact value of the minimum load resistance

430
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

is not known, the following approximations may be considered for lines with rated
voltage 400 kV:

• KL = 0.9 for lines longer than 100 miles

• KL = 0.85 for lines between 50 and 100 miles
• KL = 0.8 for lines shorter than 50 miles

Multiply the required resistance for the same safety factor KL with the ratio between
actual voltage and 400kV when the rated voltage of the line under consideration is
higher than 400kV. The outer boundary RLdOutFw obtains in this particular case its
value according to equation 384.

RLdOutFw = K L × RL min = 0.9 ×137.2 = 123.5W

EQUATION1343 V1 EN (Equation 384)

It is a general recommendation to set the inner boundary RLdInFw of the oscillation

detection characteristic to 80% or less of its outer boundary. Exceptions are always
possible, but must be considered with special care especially when it comes to settings
of timers tP1 and tP2 included in oscillation detection logic. This requires the
maximum permitted setting values of factor kLdRFw = 0.8. Equation 385 presents the
corresponding maximum possible value of RLdInFw.

RLdInFw = kLdRFw × RLdOutFw = 98.8W

EQUATION1344 V3 EN (Equation 385)

The load angles, which correspond to external δOut and internal δIn boundary of
proposed oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction, are calculated with
sufficient accuracy according to equation 386 and 387 respectively.

æ ZS ö æ 155.75 ö
d Out = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 64.5°
ç 2 × RLdOutFw ÷ è 2 × 123.5 ø
è ø
EQUATION1345 V1 EN (Equation 386)

æ ZS ö æ 155.75 ö
d In = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 76.5°
ç 2 × RLdInFwmax ÷ è 2 × 98.8 ø
è ø
EQUATION1346 V1 EN (Equation 387)

The required setting tP1 of the initial oscillation detection timer depends on the load
angle difference according to equation 388.

431
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

d In - d Out 76.5° - 64.5°

tP1 = = = 13.3ms
f si × 360° 2.5 × 360°
EQUATION1347 V1 EN (Equation 388)

The general tendency should be to set the tP1 time to at least 30 ms, if possible. Since
it is not possible to further increase the external load angle δOut, it is necessary to
reduce the inner boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic. The minimum
required value is calculated according to the procedure listed in equation 389, 390, 391
and 392.

tP1min = 30 ms
EQUATION1348 V1 EN (Equation 389)

d In - min = 360° × f si × tP1min + d Out = 360° × 2.5 × 0.030 + 64.5° = 91.5°

EQUATION1349 V1 EN (Equation 390)

ZS 155.75
RLdInFwmax1 = = = 75.8W
æd ö æ 91.5 ö
2 × tan ç in - min ÷ 2 × tan ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
EQUATION1350 V1 EN (Equation 391)

RLdInFwmax1 75.8
kLdRFw = = = 0.61
RLdOutFw 123.5
EQUATION1351 V1 EN (Equation 392)

Also check if this minimum setting satisfies the required speed for detection of
consecutive oscillations. This requirement will be satisfied if the proposed setting of
tP2 time remains higher than 10 ms, see equation 393.

d In - d Out 91.5° - 64.5°

tP 2 max = = = 10.7 ms
f sc × 360° 7 × 360°
EQUATION1352 V1 EN (Equation 393)

The final proposed settings are as follows:

RLdOutFw = 123.5Ω

kLdRFw = 0.61

tP1 = 30 ms

432
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

tP2 = 10 ms

Consider RLdInFw = 75.0Ω.

Do not forget to adjust the setting of load encroachment resistance

RLdFwd in Phase selection with load encroachment (FDPSPDIS, 21 or
FRPSPDIS, 21) to the value equal to or less than the calculated value
RLdInFw. It is at the same time necessary to adjust the load angle in
FDPSPDIS (21) or FRPSPDIS (21) to follow the condition presented in
equation 394.

Index PHS designates correspondence to FDPSPDIS (21) or

FRPSPDIS (21) function and index PSD the correspondence to
ZMRPSB (68) function.

é tan( LdAnglePSD ) ù
LdAnglePHS ³ arctan
êë KLdRFw úû
EQUATION1737-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 394)

Consider equation 395,

LdAngle PSD = j max = 25°

EQUATION1739-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 395)

then it is necessary to set the load angle in FDPSPDIS (21) or FRPSPDIS (21) function
to not less than equation 396.

é tan(LdAngle PSD ) ù é tan(25°) ù

LdAngle PHS ³ arctan ê ú = arctan ê = 37.5°
ë kLdRFw û ë 0.61 úû
EQUATION1738-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 396)

It is recommended to set the corresponding resistive reach parameters in reverse

direction (RLdOutRv and kLdRRv) to the same values as in forward direction, unless
the system operating conditions, which dictate motoring and generating types of
oscillations, requires different values. This decision must be made on basis of possible
system contingency studies especially in cases, when the direction of transmitted
power may change fast in short periods of time. It is recommended to use different
setting groups for operating conditions, which are changing only between different
periods of year (summer, winter).

433
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH. The purpose of this
timer is, to secure continuous output signal from Power swing detection function
(ZMRPSB, 68) during the power swing, even after the transient impedance leaves
ZMRPSB (68) operating characteristic and is expected to return within a certain time
due to continuous swinging. Consider the minimum possible speed of power swinging
in a particular system.

The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit
criteria for ZMRPSB(68). It prevents operation of the function for short transients in
the residual current measured by the IED.

The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PICKUP signal from ZMRPSB (68) function,
if the measured impedance remains within ZMRPSB (68) operating area for a time
longer than the set tR2 value. This time delay was usually set to approximately two
seconds in older power-swing devices.

The setting of the tGF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the opening time of a
circuit breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase autoreclosing together with the
breaker closing time.

7.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH

7.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power swing logic PSLPSCH - -

7.15.2 Application
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function. It enables a reliable fault clearing for different
faults on protected lines during power swings in power systems.

It is a general goal, to secure fast and selective operation of the distance protection
scheme for the faults, which occur on power lines during power swings. It is possible
to distinguish between the following main cases:

434
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• A fault occurs on a so far healthy power line, over which the power swing has
been detected and the fast distance protection zone has been blocked by ZMRPSB
(68) element.
• The power swing occurs over two phases of a protected line during the dead time
of a singlepole auto-reclosing after the Ph-E fault has been correctly cleared by the
distance protection. The second fault can, but does not need to, occur within this
time interval.
• Fault on an adjacent line (behind the B substation, see figure 220) causes the
measured impedance to enter the operate area of ZMRPSB (68) function and, for
example, the zone 2 operating characteristic (see figure 221). Correct fault
clearance initiates an evolving power swing so that the locus of the measured
impedance continues through zone 1 operating characteristic and causes its
unwanted operation, if no preventive measures have been taken, see figure 221.

C ZSC
EC
A B
ZSA RA
EA F
ZSD
ED
D
xx06000238.vsd
IEC06000238 V1 EN

Figure 220: Fault on adjacent line and its clearance causes power swinging
between sources A and C

PSLPSCH function and the basic operating principle of ZMRPSB (68) function
operate reliably for different faults on parallel power lines with detected power swings.
It is, however, preferred to keep the distance protection function blocked in cases of
single phase-to-ground faults on so far healthy lines with detected power swings. In
these cases, it is recommended to use an optionally available directional overcurrent
ground-fault protection with scheme communication logic.

435
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

jX
Measured
impedance at initital
fault position
Zone 2

Zone 1

Impedance locus at initial power

swing after the fault clearance

A
R

ZMRPSB operating characteristic

IEC99000181_2_en.vsd
IEC99000181 V2 EN

Figure 221: Impedance trajectory within the distance protection zones 1 and 2
during and after the fault on line B – D

7.15.3 Setting guidelines

7.15.3.1 Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring during power
swinging over the protected line

The IED includes generally up to five distance protection zones. It is possible to use
one or two of them intentionally for selective fault clearing during power swings only.
Following are the basic conditions for the operation of the so called (underreaching and
overreaching) power-swing zones:

436
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• They must generally be blocked during normal operation and released during
power swings.
• Their operation must be time delayed but shorter (with sufficient margin) than the
set time delay of normal distance protection zone 2, which is generally blocked by
the power swing.
• Their resistive reach setting must secure, together with the set time delay for their
operation, that the slowest expected swings pass the impedance operate area
without initiating their operation.

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 222.

The operation of the power swing zones is conditioned by the operation of Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function. They operate in PUTT or POTT
communication scheme with corresponding distance protection zones at the remote line
end. It is preferred to use the communication channels over the optionally available
“Line Data Communication Module - LDCM” and the “Binary signal transfer to
remote end” function. It is also possible to include, in an easy way (by means of
configuration possibilities), the complete functionality into regular scheme
communication logic for the distance protection function. The communication scheme
for the regular distance protection does not operate during the power-swing conditions,
because the distance protection zones included in the scheme are normally blocked.
The powerswing zones can for this reason use the same communication facilities
during the power-swing conditions.

Only one power swing zone is necessary in distance protection at each line terminal, if
the POTT communication scheme is applied. One underreaching power swing zone,
which sends the time delayed carrier signal, and one overreaching power swing zone,
which performs the local tripping condition, are necessary with PUTT schemes.

The operation of the distance protection zones with long time delay (for example, zone
3) is in many cases not blocked by the power swing detection elements. This allows in
such cases the distance protection zone 3 (together with the full-scheme design of the
distance protection function) to be used at the same time as the overreaching power-
swing zone.

437
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

PUDOG
AR1P1 AND

PUPSD
CS
BLOCK AND 0-tCS AND
0
CSUR
BLKZMUR
AND
0
0-tTrip 0-tBlkTr
0
PLTR_CRD TRIP
OR
CR AND

en06000236_ansi.en
ANSI06000236 V1 EN

Figure 222: Simplified logic diagram - power swing communication and tripping logic

Configuration
Configure the BLOCK input to any combination of conditions, which are supposed to
block the operation of logic. Connection to detected fuse failure conditions is required
as a minimum.

The PUDOG functional input should be configured to the PICKUP signal of any line
ground fault overcurrent protection function within the IED. When the directional
ground fault O/C function is used an OR combination of forward and reverse operation
should be used.

Connect the AR1P1 to the output signal of the autoreclosing function, which signals
the activation of the single pole autoreclosing dead time.

The PUPSD input should be connected to the pickup signal of the power swing
detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function, which becomes active in cases of detected system
oscillations.

The CSUR functional input should be connected to the pickup output of the power
swing distance protection zone, which is used as a local tripping criteria during power
swings in PUTT schemes. When the POTT scheme is used (also on series compensated
networks) the local criteria and the carrier sending zone are one and the same. It is
preferred to use separate communication facilities for distance protection and for
power swing communication logic, but combination of functionality within the same
communication channel is possible as well.

438
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The CR signal should be configured to the functional input which provides the logic
with information on received carrier signal sent by the remote end power swing
distance protection zone.

The CS functional output signal should be configured to either output relay or to

corresponding input of the “Binary signal transfer to remote end” function.

The BLKZMPS output signal should be configured to BLOCK input of the power
swing distance protection zones.

The TRIP signal should be connected correspondingly towards the tripping

functionality of the complete distance protection within the IED.

Setting calculations

Time delay of power swing carrier send distance protection zones

Time delay for the underreaching or overreaching carrier send power swing zone
should be set shorter (with sufficient margin) than the time delay of normal distance
protection zone 2 to obtain selective time grading also in cases of faults during power
swings. The necessary time difference depends mostly on the speed of the
communication channel used, speed of the circuit breaker used, etc. Time difference
between 100 ms and 150 ms is generally sufficient.

Reactive reach setting of power swing distance protection zones

Set the reactive reach for the power swing zones according to the system selectivity
planning. The reach of the underreaching zone should not exceed 85% of the protected
line length. The reach of the overreaching zone should be at least 120% of the
protected line length.

Resistive reach setting of carrier send power swing distance protection zone
Determine the minimum possible speed of impedance ΔZ / Δt in primary Ω / s of the
expected power swings. When better information is not available from system studies,
the following equation may be used:

vz = 2 × Z L min × f s min
EQUATION1537 V1 EN (Equation 397)

Where:
vz is a minimum expected speed of swing impedance in Ω / s

ZLmin is a minimum expected primary load impedance in Ω

fsmin is a minimum expected oscillation (swing) frequency in Hz

Calculate the maximum permissible resistive reach for each power swing zone
separately according to the following equations.

439
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

RFPPn = v z × tnPP × 0.8

EQUATION1538 V1 EN (Equation 398)

VZ × tnPG
RFPGn = × 0.8
2
EQUATION1993-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 399)

Here is factor 0.8

considered for safety
reasons and:
RFPGn phase-to-ground resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection
zone n in Ω
RFPPn phase-to-phase resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection
zone n in Ω
tnPG time delay for phase-to-ground fault measurement of power swing distance
protection zone n in s
tnPP time delay for phase-to-phase fault measurement of power swing distance
protection zone n in s

Time-delay for the overreaching power swing zone

Time delay for the overreaching power swing zone is not an important parameter, if the
zone is used only for the protection purposes at power-swings.

Consider the normal time grading, if the overreaching zone serves as a time delayed back-
up zone, which is not blocked by the operation of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB,
68) function.

Timers within the power swing logic

Settings of the timers within Power swing logic (PSLPSCH) depend to a great extent
on the settings of other time delayed elements within the complete protection system.
These settings differ within different power systems. The recommended settings
consider only the general system conditions and the most used practice at different
utilities. It is always necessary to check the local system conditions.

The carrier send timer tCS is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires
continuous presence of the input signal PUPSD, before it can issue a carrier send
signal. A time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient.

The trip timer tTrip is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continuous
presence of the input signal PUPSD, before it can issue a tripping command during the
power swings. A time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient.

The blocking timer tBlkTr prolongs the presence of the BLKZMOR output signals,
which can be used to block the operation of the power swing zones after the detected
single-phase-to-ground faults during the power swings. It is necessary to permit the O/

440
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

C EF protection to eliminate the initial fault and still make possible for the power
swing zones to operate for possible consecutive faults. A time delay between 150 and
300 ms is generally sufficient.

7.15.3.2 Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings

The second part of a complete Power swing logic (PSLPSCH) functionality is a

blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings, see figure 220 and figure 221.
The simplified logic is presented in figure 223. The logic controls the operation of the
underreaching distance protection zone (Zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults
and their clearance on the adjacent power lines. The logic should generally be
configured between distance protection zones 1 and 2.

Configuration
The fault impedance should be detected within the external boundary of Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function without power swing detected during the entire
fault duration. Configure for this reason the PUZMPSD to the functional output signal
of ZMRPSB (68) function, which indicates the measured impedance within its external
boundaries.

AND

BLKZMOR
AND
PUZMUR
PUZMURPS
BLOCK AND 0-tZL OR
0 AND
PUZMOR
PUZMPSD AND 0-tDZ
0 OR
PUPSD

AND
-loop

en06000237_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000237 V1 EN

Figure 223: Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings

No system oscillation should be detected in power system. Configure for this reason
the PUPSD functional input to the PICKUP functional output of ZMRPSB (68)
function or to any binary input signal indicating the detected oscillations within the
power system.

441
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Configure the functional input PUZMUR to the pickup output of the instantaneous
underreaching distance protection zone (usually PICKUP of distance protection zone
1). The function will determine whether the pickup signal of this zone is permitted to
be used in further logic or not, dependent on time difference on appearance of
overreaching distance protection zone (usually zone 2).

Configure for this reason the functional output signal PUZMURPS to the pickup
output of the overreaching distance protection zone (usually PICKUP of distance
protection zone 2).

Functional output PUZMLL replaces the pickup (and trip) signals of the distance
protection zone 1 in all following logic. Configure it accordingly within the logic.

Functional output signal BLKZMOR should be configured to block the overreach

distance protection zone (generally zone 2) in order to prevent its maloperation during
the first swinging of the system. Configure it accordingly to BLOCK functional input
of distance protection zone 2.

Setting calculations
Setting of the differentiating timer tDZ influences to a great extent the performance of
the protection during the power swings, which develops by occurrence and clearance
of the faults on adjacent power lines. It is necessary to consider the possibility for the
faults to occur close to the set reach of the underreaching distance protection zone,
which might result in prolonged operate times of zone 1 (underreaching zone)
compared to zone 2 pickuped time (overreaching zone). A setting between 80 and 150
ms is generally sufficient.

The release timer tZL permits unconditional operation of the underreaching zone, if the
measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic longer than the set time
tZL. Its setting depends on the expected speed of the initial swings and on the setting of
the time delay for the overreaching zone 2. The release timer must still permit selective
tripping of the distance protection within the complete network. A setting between 200
and 300 ms is generally sufficient.

7.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)

7.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78

442
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.16.2 Application
Normally, the generator operates synchronously with the power system, that is, all the
generators in the system have the same angular velocity and approximately the same
phase angle difference. If the phase angle between the generators gets too large the
stable operation of the system cannot be maintained. In such a case the generator loses
the synchronism (pole slip) to the external power system.

The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons.

A short circuit occurs in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault
clearance time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, so the synchronism
cannot be maintained. The relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip,
relative to the external power system, is shown in figure 224.

en06000313.vsd
IEC06000313 V1 EN

Figure 224: Relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip relative to the
external power system

443
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

The relative angle of the generator is shown for different fault duration at a three-phase
short circuit close to the generator. As the fault duration increases the angle swing
amplitude increases. When the critical fault clearance time is reached the stability
cannot be maintained.

Un-damped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different
locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too
weak the amplitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost. At
the moment of pole slip there will be a centre of this pole slip, which is equivalent with
distance protection impedance measurement of a three-phase. If this point is situated in
the generator itself, the generator should be tripped as fast as possible. If the locus of
the out of step centre is located in the power system outside the generators the power
system should, if possible, be split into two parts, and the generators should be kept in
service. This split can be made at predefined locations (trip of predefined lines) after
function from pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) in the line protection IED.

en06000314.vsd
IEC06000314 V1 EN

Figure 225: Undamped oscillations causing pole slip

444
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The relative angle of the generator is shown a contingency in the power system,
causing un-damped oscillations. After a few periods of the oscillation the swing
amplitude gets to large and the stability cannot be maintained.

If the excitation of the generator gets too low there is a risk that the generator cannot
maintain synchronous operation. The generator will slip out of phase and operate as an
induction machine. Normally the under-excitation protection will detect this state and
trip the generator before the pole slip. For this fault the under-excitation protection and
PSPPPAM (78) function will give mutual redundancy.

The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator
block.

• At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine
shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the
generator normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The
consequence can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.
• At asynchronous operation the generator will absorb a significant amount of
reactive power, thus risking overload of the windings.

PSPPPAM (78) function shall detect out of step conditions and trip the generator as
fast as possible if the locus of the pole slip is inside the generator. If the centre of pole
slip is outside the generator, situated out in the power grid, the first action should be to
split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails there should be
operation of the generator pole slip protection, to prevent further damages to the
generator block.

7.16.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled or DIsabled.

MeasureMode: The voltage and current used for the impedance measurement is set by
the parameter MeasureMode. The setting possibilities are: PosSeq, AB, BC, or CA. If
all phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED the PosSeq alternative is
recommended (default).

Further settings can be illustrated in figure 226.

445
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB X’d XT EA
ZS

IED
B A

jX

ZA

Pole slip
impedance
movement Zone 2
ZC
TripAngle Zone 1
WarnAngle
f
R

ZB

IEC06000548_2_en.vsd
IEC06000548 V2 EN

Figure 226: Settings for the Pole slip detection function

The ImpedanceZA is the forward impedance as show in figure 226. ZA should be the
sum of the transformer impedance XT and the equivalent impedance of the external
system ZS. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, according to
equation 401.

UBase
3
Z Base =
IBase
EQUATION1883 V1 EN (Equation 401)

446
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The ImpedanceZB is the reverse impedance as show in figure 226. ZB should be equal
to the generator transient reactance X'd. The impedance is given in % of the base
impedance, see equation 401.

The ImpedanceZC is the forward impedance giving the borderline between zone 1 and
zone 2. ZC should be equal to the transformer reactance ZT. The impedance is given in
% of the base impedance, see equation 401.

The angle of the impedance line ZB – ZA is given as AnglePhi in degrees. This angle
is normally close to 90°.

StartAngle: An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor
angle exceeds the angle set for StartAngle. The default value 110° is recommended. It
should be checked so that the points in the impedance plane, corresponding to the
chosen StartAngle does not interfere with apparent impedance at maximum generator
load.

TripAngle: If a pole slip has been detected: change of rotor angle corresponding to slip
frequency 0.2 – 8 Hz, the slip line ZA – ZB is crossed and the direction of rotation is
the same as at start, a trip is given when the rotor angle gets below the set TripAngle.
The default value 90° is recommended.

N1Limit: The setting N1Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before
trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA – ZB is within zone 1, that is, the node of the
pole slip is within the generator transformer block. The default value 1 is
recommended to minimize the stress on the generator and turbine at out of step conditions.

N2Limit: The setting N2Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before
trip, if the crossing of the slip line ZA – ZB is within zone 2, that is, the node of the
pole slip is in the external network. The default value 3 is recommended give external
protections possibility to split the network and thus limit the system consequencies.

ResetTime: The setting ResetTime gives the time for (PSPPPAM ,78) function to reset
after start when no pole slip been detected. The default value 5s is recommended.

7.16.3.1 Setting example for line application

In case of out of step conditions this shall be detected and the line between substation 1
and 2 shall be tripped.

447
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

ZA = forward source impedance

ZB
Line impedance = ZC

IED

IEC07000014_2_en.vsd
IEC07000014 V2 EN

Figure 227: Line application of pole slip protection

If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB – ZA this is the detection
criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 228.

448
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X ZA

ZC

Apparent
anglePhi impedance at
normal load
R

ZB

IEC07000015_2_en.vsd
IEC07000015 V2 EN

Figure 228: Impedances to be set for pole slip protection

The setting parameters of the protection is:

ZA: Line + source impedance in the forward direction

ZB: The source impedance in the reverse direction

ZC: The line impedance in the forward direction

AnglePhi: The impedance phase angle

Use the following data:

UBase: 400 kV
SBase set to 1000 MVA
Short circuit power at station 1 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure
reactance)
Short circuit power at station 2 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a pure
reactance
Line impedance: 2 + j20 ohm

449
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

With all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED, it is
recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence.

The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:

UBase 2 400 2
ZBase = = = 160ohm
SBase 1000
EQUATION1960 V1 EN (Equation 402)

2
400
ZA = Z (line ) + Zsc ( station 2) = 2 + j 20 + j = 2 + j 52ohm
5000
EQUATION1961 V1 EN (Equation 403)

This corresponds to:

2 + j 52
ZA = = 0.0125 + j 0.325 pu = 0.325Ð88° pu
160
EQUATION1962 V1 EN (Equation 404)

Set ZA to 0.32.

400 2
ZB = Zsc ( station1) = j = j 32ohm
5000
EQUATION1963 V1 EN (Equation 405)

This corresponds to:

j 32
ZB = = j 0.20 pu = 0.20Ð90° pu
160
EQUATION1964 V1 EN (Equation 406)

Set ZB to 0.2

This corresponds to:

2 + j 20
ZC = = 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.126Ð84° pu
160
EQUATION1966 V1 EN (Equation 407)

Set ZC to 0.13 and AnglePhi to 88°

450
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating
area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 2000 MVA. This corresponds to
apparent impedance:

2 2
U 400
Z= = = 80ohm
S 2000
EQUATION1967 V1 EN (Equation 408)

Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 229.

ZA

Zload
R

ZB

en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN

Figure 229: Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 32 52
angleStart ³ arctan + arctan = arctan + arctan = 21.80 + 33.0 » 550
Zload Zload 80 80
EQUATION1968 V2 EN (Equation 409)

In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection
to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin.

Set StartAngle to 110°

451
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90° to assure limited
stress for the circuit breaker.

In a power system it is desirable to split the system into predefined parts in case of pole
slip. The protection is therefore situated at lines where this predefined split shall take
place.

Normally the N1Limit is set to 1 so that the line will be tripped at the first pole slip.

If the line shall be tripped at all pole slip situations also the parameter N2Limit is set to
1. In other cases a larger number is recommended.

7.16.3.2 Setting example for generator application

In case of out of step conditions this shall be checked if the pole slip centre is inside the
generator (zone 1) or if it is situated in the network (zone 2).

ZA
ZB
ZC

en07000017.vsd
IEC07000017 V1 EN

Figure 230: Generator application of pole slip protection

If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB – ZA this is the detected
criterion of out of step conditions, see figure 231.

452
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

X ZA

ZC

Apparent
anglePhi impedance at
normal load
R

ZB

IEC07000015_2_en.vsd
IEC07000015 V2 EN

Figure 231: Impedances to be set for pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)

The setting parameters of the protection

are:
ZA Block transformer + source impedance in the forward direction

ZB The generator transient reactance

ZC The block transformer reactance

AnglePhi The impedance phase angle

Use the following generator data:

VBase: 20 kV
SBase set to 200 MVA
Xd': 25%

453
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Use the following block transformer data:

VBase: 20 kV (low voltage side)
SBase set to 200 MVA
ek: 15%

Short circuit power from the external network without infeed from the protected line:
5000 MVA (assumed to a pure reactance).

We have all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED.
Therefore it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence.

The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:

2 2
UBase 20
ZBase = = = 2.0ohm
SBase 200
EQUATION1969 V1 EN (Equation 410)

202 202
ZA = Z (transf ) + Zsc (network ) = j × 0.15 + j = j 0.38ohm
200 5000
EQUATION1970 V1 EN (Equation 411)

This corresponds to:

j 0.38
ZA = = j 0.19 pu = 0.19Ð90° pu
2.0
EQUATION1971 V1 EN (Equation 412)

Set ZA to 0.19

20 2
ZB = jX d ' = j × 0.25 = j 0.5ohm
200
EQUATION1972 V2 EN (Equation 413)

This corresponds to:

j 0.5
ZB = = j 0.25 pu = 0.25Ð90° pu
2.0
EQUATION1973 V1 EN (Equation 414)

Set ZB to 0.25

454
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

202
ZC = jX T = j × 0.15 = j 0.3ohm
200
EQUATION1974 V1 EN (Equation 415)

This corresponds to:

j 0.3
ZC = = j 0.15 pu = 0.15Ð90o pu
2.0
EQUATION1975 V2 EN (Equation 416)

Set ZC to 0.15 and AnglePhi to 90°.

The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating
area. The maximum line power is assumed to be 200 MVA. This corresponds to
apparent impedance:

2 2
U 20
Z= = = 2ohm
S 200
EQUATION1976 V1 EN (Equation 417)

Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 232.

455
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

ZA

Zload
R

ZB

en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN

Figure 232: Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 0.25 0.19
angleStart ³ arctan + arctan = arctan + arctan = 7.10 + 5.4 » 130
Zload Zload 2 2
EQUATION1977 V2 EN (Equation 418)

In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection
to start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin.

Set StartAngle to 110°.

For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90° to assure limited
stress for the circuit breaker.

If the centre of pole slip is within the generator block set N1Limit to 1 to get trip at first
pole slip.

If the centre of pole slip is within the network set N2Limit to 3 to get enable split of the
system before generator trip.

456
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)

7.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78

<

7.17.2 Application
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor
(power) angle, delivering an active electrical power to the power system, which is
equal to the mechanical input power on the generator axis, minus the small losses in
the generator. In the case of a three-phase fault electrically close to the generator, no
active power can be delivered. Almost all mechanical power from the turbine is under
this condition used to accelerate the moving parts, that is, the rotor and the turbine. If
the fault is not cleared quickly, the generator may not remain in synchronism after the
fault has been cleared. If the generator loses synchronism (Out-of-step) with the rest of
the system, pole slipping occurs. This is characterized by a wild flow of synchronizing
power, which reverses in direction twice for every slip cycle.

The out-of-step phenomenon occurs when a phase opposition occurs periodically

between different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a simplified way as
two equivalent generators connected to each other via an equivalent transmission line
and the phase difference between the equivalent generators is 180 electrical degrees.

457
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Synchronous Synchronous
machine 1 machine 2

SM1 SM2
Voltages of all phases
E1 V, I E2
to ground are zero in
the center of
oscillation
E1

E2
Center of oscillation

ANSI10000107_3_en.vsd
ANSI10000107 V3 EN

Figure 233: The center of electromechanical oscillation

The center of the electromechanical oscillation can be in the generator unit (or generator-
transformer unit) or outside, somewhere in the power system. When the center of the
electromechanical oscillation occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the
generator immediately. If the center of the electromechanical oscillation is outside any
of the generators in the power system, the power system should be split into two
different parts; so each part may have the ability to restore stable operating conditions.
This is sometimes called “islanding”. The objective of islanding is to prevent an out-of-
step condition from spreading to the healthy parts of the power system. For this
purpose, uncontrolled tripping of interconnections or generators must be prevented. It
is evident that a reasonable strategy for out-of-step relaying as well as, appropriate
choice of other protection relays, their locations and settings require detailed stability
studies for each particular power system and/or subsystem. On the other hand, if severe
swings occur, from which a fast recovery is improbable, an attempt should be made to
isolate the affected area from the rest of the system by opening connections at
predetermined points. The electrical system parts swinging to each other can be
separated with the lines closest to the center of the power swing allowing the two
systems to be stable as separated islands. The main problem involved with systemic
islanding of the power system is the difficulty, in some cases, of predicting the
optimum splitting points, because they depend on the fault location and the pattern of
generation and load at the respective time. It is hardly possible to state general rules for
out-of-step relaying, because they shall be defined according to the particular design
and needs of each electrical network. The reason for the existence of two zones of
operation is selectivity, required for successful islanding. If there are several out-of-
step relays in the power system, then selectivity between separate relays is obtained by
the relay reach (for example zone 1) rather then by time grading.

458
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

The out-of-step condition of a generator can be caused by different reasons. Sudden

events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault occurrence or
slow fault clearance, can cause power oscillations, that are called power swings. In a non-
recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost:
this condition is called pole slipping.

Undamped oscillations occur in power systems, where generator groups at different

locations are not strongly connected and can oscillate against each other. If the
connection between the generators is too weak the magnitude of the oscillations may
increase until the angular stability is lost. More often, a three-phase short circuit
(unsymmetrical faults are much less dangerous in this respect) may occur in the
external power grid, electrically close to the generator. If the fault clearing time is too
long, the generator accelerates so much, that the synchronism cannot be maintained,
see Figure 234.
1.1
unstable
stable
3-ph ← 3-rd pole-slip
Generator rotational speed in per unit →

fault

260 ms ← 2-nd pole-slip

1.05
← For 260 ms long 3-phase fault generator
200
1-st loses synchronism. Generator operates in
ms
pole-slip asynchronous mode at speeds > nominal

← damped
oscillations
1

1 corresponds ← For fault clearing time 200 ms generator remains

to 50 or 60 Hz stable and in synchronism. After oscillations around
the nominal speed, the rotational speed returns to
the nominal, corresponding to 50 or 60 Hz

0.95
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
time in milliseconds →

IEC10000108-2-en.vsd
IEC10000108 V2 EN

Figure 234: Stable and unstable case. For the fault clearing time tcl = 200 ms, the
generator remains in synchronism, for tcl = 260 ms, the generator
loses step.

A generator out-of-step condition, with successive pole slips, can result in damages to
the generator, shaft and turbine.

459
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

• Stator windings are under high stress due to electrodynamic forces.

• The current levels during an out-of-step condition can be higher than those during
a three-phase fault and, therefore, there is significant torque impact on the generator-
turbine shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there is induction of currents in parts of the generator
normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The
consequence can be damages on insulation and iron core of both rotor and stator.

Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance

relative to a generator’s terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means
of detecting whether pole-slipping is taking place. The out-of-step protection should
protect a generator or motor (or two weakly connected power systems) against pole-
slipping with severe consequences for the machines and stability of the power system.
In particular it should:
1. Remain stable for normal steady state load.
2. Distinguish between stable and unstable rotor swings.
3. Locate electrical centre of a swing.
4. Detect the first and the subsequent pole-slips.
5. Take care of the circuit breaker soundness.
6. Distinguish between generator and motor out-of-step conditions.
7. Provide information for post-disturbance analysis.

7.17.3 Setting guidelines

The setting example for generator protection application shows how to calculate the
most important settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX.

Table 39: An example how to calculate values for the settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX

Turbine Generator Transformer Double circuit power line Equivalent

(hydro) 200 MVA 300 MVA 230 kV, 300 km power
system

13.8 kV
GEN

CT 1
CT 2 Y
ANSI11000090_2_en.vsd
to OOS relay
ANSI11000090 V2 EN

Generator Step-up transformer Single power line Power system

Data VBase = Vgen = 13.8 kV V1 = 13.8 kV Vline = 230 kV Vnom = 230 kV
required usc = 10% SC level = 5000 MVA
IBase = Igen = 8367 A V2 = 230 kV SC current = 12 551 A
I1 = 12 551 A φ = 84.289°
Xd' = 0.2960 pu Xline/km = 0.4289 Ω/km
Xt = 0.1000 pu (transf. ZBase)
Table continues on next page

460
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Rs = 0.0029 pu Rt = 0.0054 pu (transf. ZBase) Rline/km = 0.0659 Ω/km Ze = 10.5801 Ω

1-st step in ZBase = 0.9522 Ω (generator) ZBase (13.8 kV) = 0.6348 Ω
calculation Xd' = 0.2960 · 0.952 = 0.282 Ω Xt = 0.100 · 0.6348 = 0.064 Ω Xline = 300 · 0.4289 = 128.7 Ω Xe = Ze · sin (φ) = 10.52 Ω
Rs = 0.0029 · 0.952 = 0.003 Ω Rt = 0.0054 · 0.635 = 0.003 Ω Rline = 300 · 0.0659 = 19.8 Ω Re = Ze · cos (φ) = 1.05 Ω
(X and R above on 230 kV basis) (Xe and Re on 230 kV basis)
2-nd step in Xd' = 0.2960 · 0.952 = 0.282 Ω Xt = 0.100 · 0.6348 = 0.064 Ω Xline= 128.7 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.463 Xe = 10.52 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.038 Ω
calculation Rs = 0.0029 · 0.952 = 0.003 Ω Rt = 0.0054 · 0.635 = 0.003 Ω Ω Re = 1.05 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.004 Ω
Rline = 19.8 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.071 (X and R referred to 13.8 kV)
Ω
(X and R referred to 13.8 kV)
3-rd step in ForwardX = Xt + Xline + Xe = 0.064 + 0.463 + 0.038 = 0.565 Ω; ReverseX = Xd' = 0.282 Ω (all referred to gen. voltage 13.8 kV)
calculation ForwardR = Rt + Rline + Re = 0.003 + 0.071 + 0.004 = 0.078 Ω; ReverseR = Rs = 0.003 Ω (all referred to gen. voltage 13.8 kV)
Final ForwardX = 0.565/0.9522 · 100 = 59.33 in % ZBase; ReverseX = 0.282/0.9522 · 100 = 29.6 in % ZBase (all referred to 13.8 kV)
resulted ForwardR = 0.078/0.9522 · 100 = 8.19 in % ZBase; ReverseR = 0.003/0.9522 · 100 = 0.29 in % ZBase (all referred to 13.8 kV)
settings

Settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX.

• A precondition in order to be able to use the Out-of-step protection and construct a
suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which the Out-of-step
protection is installed, is modeled as a two-machine equivalent system, or as a
single machine – infinite bus equivalent power system. Then the impedances from
the position of the Out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow
can be taken as forward.
• The settings ForwardX, ForwardR, ReverseX and ReverseR must, if possible, take
into account, the post-disturbance configuration of the simplified power system.
This is not always easy, in particular with islanding. But for the two machine
model as in Table 39, the most probable scenario is that only one line is in service
after the fault on one power line has been cleared by line protections. The settings
ForwardX, ForwardR must therefore take into account the reactance and
resistance of only one power line.
• All the reactances and resistances must be referred to the voltage level where the
Out-of-step relay is installed; for the example case shown in Table 39, this is the
generator nominal voltage VBase = 13.8 kV. This affects all the forward
reactances and resistances in Table 39.
• All reactances and resistances must be finally expressed in percent of ZBase,
where ZBase is for the example shown in Table 39 the base impedance of the
generator, ZBase = 0.9522 Ω. Observe that the power transformer’s base
impedance is different, ZBase = 0.6348 Ω. Observe that this latter power
transformer ZBase = 0.6348 Ω must be used when the power transformer
reactance and resistance are transformed.

461
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

• For the synchronous machines as the generator in Table 39, the transient reactance
Xd' shall be used. This due to the relatively slow electromechanical oscillations
under out-of-step conditions.
• Sometimes the equivalent resistance of the generator is difficult to get. A good
estimate is 1 percent of transient reactance Xd'. No great error is done if this
resistance is set to zero (0).
• Inclination of the Z-line, connecting points SE and RE, against the real (R) axis
can be calculated as arctan ((ReverseX + ForwardX) / (ReverseR + ForwardR)),
and is for the case in Table 39 equal to 84.55 degrees, which is a typical value.

Other settings:
• ReachZ1: Determines the reach of the zone 1 in the forward direction. Determines
the position of the X-line which delimits zone 1 from zone 2. Set in % of
ForwardX. In the case shown in Table 39, where the reactance of the step-up
power transformer is 11.32 % of the total ForwardX, the setting ReachZ1 should
be set to ReachZ1 = 12 %. This means that the generator – step-up transformer
unit would be in the zone 1. In other words, if the centre of oscillation would be
found to be within the zone 1, only a very limited number of pole-slips would be
allowed, usually only one.
• pick up Angle: Angle between the two equivalent rotors induced voltages (that is,
the angle between the two internal induced voltages E1 and E2 in an equivalent
simplified two-machine system) to get the pickup signal, in degrees. The width of
the lens characteristic is determined by the value of this setting. Whenever the
complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, this is a sign of instability. The angle
recommended is 110 or 120 degrees, because it is at this rotor angle where
problems with dynamic stability usually begin. Power angle 120 degrees is
sometimes called “the angle of no return” because if this angle is reached under
generator swings, the generator is most likely to lose synchronism. When the
complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens the start output signal (PICKUP) is set
to 1 (TRUE).
• TripAngle: The setting TripAngle specifies the value of the rotor angle where the
trip command is sent to the circuit breaker in order to minimize the stress to which
the breaker is exposed when breaking the currents. The range of this value is from
15° to 90°, with higher values suitable for longer breaker opening times. If a
breaker opening is initiated at for example 60°, then the circuit breaker opens its
contacts closer to 0°, where the currents are smaller. If the breaker opening time
tBreaker is known, then it is possible to calculate more exactly when opening must
be initiated in order to open the circuit breaker contacts as close as possible to 0°,
where the currents are smallest. If the breaker opening time tBreaker is specified
(that is, higher than the default 0.0 s, where 0.0 s means that tBreaker is
unknown), then this alternative way to determine the moment when a command to
open the breaker is sent, is automatically chosen instead of the more approximate
method, based on the TripAngle.

462
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

• tReset: Interval of time since the last pole-slip detected, when the Out-of-step
protection is reset. If there is no more pole slips detected under the time interval
specified by tReset since the previous one, the function is reset. All outputs are set
to 0 (FALSE). If no pole slip at all is detected under interval of time specified by
tReset since the pickup signal has been set (for example a stable case with
synchronism retained), the function is as well reset, which includes the pickup
output signal (PICKUP), which is reset to 0 (FALSE) after tReset interval of time
has elapsed. However, the measurements of analogue quantities such as R, X, P,
Q, and so on continue without interruptions. Recommended setting of tReset is in
the range of 6 to 12 seconds.
• NoOfSlipsZ1: Maximum number of pole slips with centre of electromechanical
oscillation within zone 1 required for a trip. Usually, NoOfSlipsZ1= 1.
• NoOfSlipsZ2: Maximum number of pole slips with centre of electromechanical
oscillation within zone 2 required for a trip. The reason for the existence of two
zones of operation is selectivity, required particularly for successful islanding. If
there are several pole slip (out-of-step) relays in the power system, then selectivity
between relays is obtained by the relay reach (for example zone 1) rather then by
time grading. In a system, as in Table 39, the number of allowed pole slips in zone
2 can be the same as in zone 1. Recommended value: NoOfSlipsZ2 = 2 or 3.
• Operation: With the setting Operation OOSPPAM function can be set On/Off.
• OperationZ1: Operation zone 1 Enabled, Disabled. If OperationZ1 = Disabled, all
pole-slips with centre of the electromagnetic oscillation within zone 1 are ignored.
Default setting = Enabled. More likely to be used is the option to extend zone 1 so
that zone 1 even covers zone 2. This feature is activated by the input to extend the
zone 1 (EXTZ1).
• OperationZ2: Operation zone 2 Enabled, Disabled. If OperationZ1 = Disabled, all
pole-slips with centre of the electromagnetic oscillation within zone 2 are ignored.
Default setting = Enabled.
• tBreaker: Circuit breaker opening time. Use the default value tBreaker = 0.000 s if
unknown. If the value is known, then a value higher than 0.000 is specified, for
example tBreaker = 0.040 s: the out-of-step function gives a trip command
approximately 0.040 seconds before the currents reach their minimum value. This
in order to decrease the stress imposed to the circuit breaker.
• VBase: This is the voltage at the point where the Out-of-step protection is
installed. If the protection is installed on the generator output terminals, then
VBase is the nominal (rated) phase to phase voltage of the protected generator. All
the resistances and reactances are measured and displayed referred to voltage
VBase. Observe that ReverseX, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ForwardR must be
given referred to VBase.IBase is the protected generator nominal (rated) current, if
the Out-of-step protection belongs to a generator protection scheme.
• InvertCTCurr: If the currents fed to the Out-of-step protection are measured on the
protected generator neutral side (LV-side) then inversion is not necessary
(InvertCTCurr = Disabled), provided that the CT’s orientation complies with ABB
recommendations, as shown in Table 39. If the currents fed to the Out-of-step

463
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

protection are measured on the protected generator output terminals side (HV-
side), then invertion is necessary (InvertCTCurr = Enabled), provided that the
CT’s actual direction complies with ABB recommendations, as shown in Table 39.

7.18 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

7.18.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ - -

7.18.2 Application
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is an auxiliary function to Distance
protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS (21) and Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21). The purpose
is to create the logic in resonance or high resistive grounded systems (normally sub-
transmission) to achieve the correct phase selective tripping during two simultaneous
single-phase ground-faults in different phases on different line sections.

Due to the resonance/high resistive grounding principle, the ground faults in the system
gives very low fault currents, typically below 25 A. At the same time, the occurring
system voltages on the healthy phases will increase to line voltage level as the neutral
displacement is equal to the phase voltage level at a fully developed ground fault. This
increase of the healthy phase voltage, together with slow tripping, gives a considerable
increase of the risk of a second fault in a healthy phase and the second fault can occur
at any location. When it occurs on another feeder, the fault is commonly called cross-
country fault.

Different practices for tripping is used by different utilities. The main use of this logic
is in systems where single phase-to-ground faults are not automatically cleared, only
alarm is given and the fault is left on until a suitable time to send people to track down
and repair the fault. When cross-country faults occur, the practice is to trip only one of
the faulty lines. In other cases, a sensitive, directional ground-fault protection is
provided to trip, but due to the low fault currents long tripping times are utilized.

Figure 235 shows an occurring cross-country fault. Figure 236 shows the achievement
of line voltage on healthy phases and an occurring cross-country fault.

464
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Load

CG

Load
AG

ANSI06000550_2_en.vsd
ANSI06000550 V2 EN

Figure 235: An occurring cross-country fault on different feeders in a sub-

transmission network, high impedance (resistance, reactance) grounded
VA

VB F
F
VC

VB
VC
3V0

F
VC

en06000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000551 V1 EN

Figure 236: The voltage increase on healthy phases and occurring neutral point
voltage (3V0) at a single phase-to-ground fault and an occurring cross-
country fault on different feeders in a sub-transmission network, high
impedance (resistance, reactance) grounded

465
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

PPLPHIZ is connected between Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic

function ZMQPDIS (21) and ZMQAPDIS (21) and Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21) as shown in
figure 237. The integer from the phase selection function, which gives the type of fault
undergoes a check and will release the distance protection zones as decided by the
logic. The logic includes a check of the fault loops given by the phase selection and if
the fault type indicates a two or three phase fault the integer releasing the zone is not
changed.

If the fault indicates and ground-fault checks are done which mode of tripping to be
used, for example ABCAc, which means that fault in the phases are tripped in the
cyclic order A before B before C before A. Local conditions to check the phase-to-
ground voltage levels and occurring zero sequence current and voltages completes the
logic.
ZMQAPDIS (21)
FDPSPDIS (21)
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* TRIP
I3P* TRIP
W2_VT_B_v3P V3P* TR_A
V3P* BFI
FALSE BLOCK TR_B
BLOCK FWD_A PHS_L1 W2_FSD1-BLKZ LOVBZ TR_C
DIRCND FWD_B PHS_L2 FALSE BLKTR PICKUP
FWD_C PHS_L3 PHSEL PU_A
FWD_G
DIRCND PU_B
REV_A
PU_C
REV_B
PHPUND
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
ZMQPDIS (21)
NDIR_B
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* TRIP
NDIR_C
W2_VT_B_v3P V3P* TR_A
NDIR_G FALSE BLOCK TR_B
FWD_1PH
W2_FSD1-BLKZ LOVBZ TR_C
FWD_2PH
FALSE BLKTR PICKUP
FWD_3PH
PHSEL PU_A
PHG_FLT
DIRCND PU_B
PHPH_FLT
PU_C
PHSELZ
PHPUND
DLECND

PPLPHIZ
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* BFI_3P
W2_VT_B_V3P V3P* ZREL
FALSE BLOCK
FALSE RELAG
FALSE RELBG
FALSE RELCG
PHSEL
ANSI06000552-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000552 V2 EN

Figure 237: The connection of Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ between
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS (21)
and ZMQAPDIS (21) and Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21)

As the fault is a double ground-faults at different locations of the network, the fault
current in the faulty phase on each of the lines will be seen as a phase current and at the
same time as a neutral current as the remaining phases on each feeder virtually carries
no (load) current. A current through the grounding impedance does not exist. It is
limited by the impedance to below the typical, say 25 to 40 A. Occurring neutral
current is thus a sign of a cross-country fault (a double ground- fault)

466
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

IC=IG

IA=IG

en06000553_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000553 V1 EN

Figure 238: The currents in the phases at a double ground fault

The function has a block input (BLOCK) to block start from the function if required in
certain conditions.

7.18.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

Phase preference logic function is an intermediate logic between

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic function
ZMQPDIS (21) and Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS (21). Phase selection
and zones are set according to normal praxis, including ground-fault
loops, although ground-fault loops will only be active during a cross-
country fault.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

OperMode: The operating mode is selected. Choices includes cyclic or acyclic phase
selection in the preferred mode. This setting must be identical for all IEDs in the same
galvanic connected network part.

467
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

PU27PN: The setting of the phase-to- ground voltage level (phase voltage) which is
used by the evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in the phase. Normally in a
high impedance grounded system, the voltage drop is big and the setting can typically
be set to 70% of base voltage (VBase)

PU27PP: The setting of the phase-to-phase voltage level (line voltage) which is used
by the evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in two or more phases. The voltage
must be set to avoid that a partly healthy phase-to-phase voltage, for example, B-C for
a A-B fault, picks-up and gives an incorrect release of all loops. The setting can
typically be 40 to 50% of rated voltage (VBase) divided by √3, that is 40%.

3V0PU: The setting of the residual voltage level (neutral voltage) which is used by the
evaluation logic to verify that an ground-fault exists. The setting can typically be 20%
of base voltage (VBase).

Pickup_N: The setting of the residual current level (neutral current) which is used by
the evaluation logic to verify that a cross-country fault exists. The setting can typically
be 20% of base current (IBase) but the setting shall be above the maximum current
generated by the system grounding. Note that the systems are high impedance
grounded which means that the ground-fault currents at ground-faults are limited and
the occurring IN above this level shows that there exists a two-phase fault on this line
and a parallel line where the IN is the fault current level in the faulty phase. A high
sensitivity need not to be achieved as the two-phase fault level normally is well above
base current.

tIN: The time delay for detecting that the fault is cross-country. Normal time setting is
0.1 - 0.15 s.

tVN: The time delay for a secure VN detecting that the fault is an ground-fault or
double ground-fault with residual voltage. Normal time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s.

tOffVN: The VN voltage has a reset drop-off to ensure correct function without timing
problems. Normal time setting is 0.1 s

468
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.19 Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS

7.19.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Under impedance function for ZGVPDIS 21G
generators and transformers

S00346 V1 EN

7.19.2 Application
Under impedance protection for generator is generally used as back up protection for
faults on generator, transformer and transmission lines. Zone 1 can be used to provide
high speed protection for phase faults in the generator, bus ducts or cables and part of
the generator transformer. Zone 2 can be used to cover generator transformer and
power plant's substation bus-bar. Zone 3 can be used to cover power system faults.

The under impedance protection is provided with undervoltage detection feature in

order to provide the seal-in for the impedance based trip. Additionally, it is provided
with load encroachment feature in order to avoid tripping of the protection during
heavy load conditions. The load encroachment functionality is based on the positive
sequence components of voltage and current.

Characteristics of backup impedance protection

Characteristics of zone 1, zone 2 and zone 3 are shown in figure 239. All zones have
offset mho characteristics with adjustable reach in forward and reverse direction. The
characteristic angle for all three zones is common and adjustable. A load encroachment
blinder feature is provided for zone 2 and zone 3.

Protection designed to operate for below types of faults

Faults in the generator, generator terminal connections to the step-up transformer and
in the low voltage (LV) side of the generator step-up transformer are:

469
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

1. Phase-to-phase faults in generator

2. Three-phase faults in generator
3. Phase-to-phase faults in the LV winding of the generator transformer or inter-
connecting bus or cables
4. Three-phase faults in the LV winding of the generator transformer or inter-
connecting bus or cables

Faults in the system in the high voltage (HV) side of generator transformer are:

1. Phase-to-ground faults in the HV side of generator transformer and in the power

system
2. Phase-to-phase faults in the HV side of generator transformer and in the power
system
3. Phase-phase-ground faults in the HV side of generator transformer and in the
power system
4. Three-phase faults in the HV side of generator transformer and in the power system

470
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.19.2.1 Operating zones

471
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Zone3
Zone2

Zone1

Y/Y /Y

REG670

A) Power system model

Z3Fwd

X(ohm)

Z2Fwd

ImpedanceAng

Z3Rev ImpedanceAng

Z2Rev

Z1Fwd

ImpedanceAng

R(ohm)

Z1Rev

B) Typical setting of zones for under

impedance relay
IEC11000308-3-en.vsd

472
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

IEC11000308 V2 EN

Figure 239: Zone characteristics and typical power system model

The settings of all the zones is provided in terms of percentage of impedance based on
current and voltage ratings of the generator.

7.19.2.2 Zone 1 operation

Zone 1 is used as fast selective tripping for phase-to-phase faults and three–phase
faults in the generator, on the terminal leads and delta side of generator transformer.
Since generator is high impedance grounded, the fault current for phase-to-ground
faults will be too low and impedance protection is not intended to operate for these faults.

The measuring loops used for zone1 are given below.

Zone 1 measuring loops for phase-to-phase faults and three–phase faults on the
primary side of the generator transformer are:
Sl.No Phase-to-phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor
1 A–B VAB IAB
2 B–C VBC IBC
3 C–A VCA ICA

VAB, VBC, VCA are three phase-to-phase voltages. IAB, IBC, ICA
are the three phase-to-phase currents.

For this application the zone 1 element is typically set to see 75% of the transformer
impedance.

7.19.2.3 Zone 2 operation

Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus bar,
and is usually set to cover 125% of the generator transformer impedance. The time to
trip must be provided in order to coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest
outgoing line from the bus.

Two options are provided for measuring loops used for zone 2, which is set by the
user. The measuring loops used for zone 2 with different options are:

Phase-to-phase loops

473
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

Phase-to-phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor

A-B VAB IAB
B-C VBC IBC
C-A VCA ICA

Enhanced reach loop

Max current Loop selected Voltage phasor Current phasor
IA A-G VAG-V0 IA
IB B-G VBG-V0 IB
IC C-G VCG-V0 IC

If the currents are equal, A–G loop has higher priority than B-G and B-
G loop has higher priority than C-G. VAG, VBG, VCG are three phase–
to–ground voltages and IA, IB, IC are three phase currents and V0 is
zero sequence voltage.

To measure correct impedance for phase-to-phase faults on HV side of the generator

transformer, it is recommended that EnhancedReach option (phase-to-ground loop with
maximum current loop) is used. For three-phase faults on HV side, phase-to-phase
loop measures correct impedance.

In EnhancedReach, compensation signal V0 is used to prevent zone 2 operating for

ground faults in the generator. In the absence of this compensation, when a ground
fault takes place in the generator side, the voltage drops and the load current in the
machine leads due to which zone 2 element picks up resulting in misleading
indications. Zone 2 is not intended to operate for the generator winding ground faults.
The protection for generator winding ground fault is provided by sensitive ground fault
relays that are time delayed. To prevent such an operation, the phase-to-ground
measuring voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage V0. This prevents the
function from operating during the generator stator ground faults.

7.19.2.4 Zone 3 operation

Zone 3 covers the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting station bus to the
network and outgoing lines. Within its operating zone, the tripping time for this relay
should be coordinated with the longest time delay of the phase distance relays on the
transmission lines connected to the generating substation bus. It is normally set to
about 80% of the load impedance considering maximum short time overload on the
generator.

474
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

Zone 3 provides protection for phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and three phase faults
on the HV side of the system. Hence, all these faults can be detected using three phase-
to-phase loops or three phase-to-ground loops similar to zone 2. These options can be
selected in the function and their operation is quite similar to the operation of zone 2.

7.19.2.5 CT and VT positions

Voltage transformer is located at the terminals of the generator, but current transformer
can be located either at neutral side of the stator winding or at the terminals of the
generator.

If the current transformer is located at the neutral side of the generator winding, the
forward reach will be of the generator, transformer and connected power system
impedance. If the current transformers are located at the terminal of the generator
always the forward reach is only generator impedance and reverse reach comprises of
transformer impedance and the connected transmission lines impedance.

7.19.2.6 Undervoltage seal-in function

For faults close to generating terminals the CTs might go in to saturation. The problem
is due to very long DC constant of the generators. The persistent DC component of
primary currents even if relatively small has a tendency to drive current transformers
into saturation. The ZGVPDIS under this condition might reset for some duration. A
reliable backup protection is provided under these conditions by providing an
undervoltage seal-in feature.

The undervoltage function is enabled from zone 2 or zone 3 pickup.

7.19.2.7 Load encroachment for zone 2 and zone 3

As zone 2 and zone 3 have larger reaches, there is a possibility of load impedance
encroaching into mho characteristics during heavy load conditions. Hence zone 2 and
zone 3 are provided with load encroachment blinder feature which is to be enabled by
the user. This feature measures the impedance based on positive sequence voltage and
current. As the load from the generator corresponds to the positive sequence signals.
Positive sequence voltage and current will be used for load encroachment blocking logic,

Figure 240 shows the implemented load encroachment characteristic.

475
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

ANSI11000304-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000304 V1 EN

Figure 240: Load Encroachment characteristic in under Impedance function

The resistive settings of this function is also provided in percentage of ZBase.

It is calculated according to equation 419.

ZBase = (VRated / 3) / IRated

GUID-90239033-D824-4479-A03A-41EE034C9021-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 419)

The LdAngle is a separate setting.

7.19.2.8 External block signals

The under impedance function will have to be blocked in the event of PT fuse fail. A
BLKZ input for this purpose is provided. Also a BLOCK input is provided.

476
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

7.19.3 Setting Guidelines

7.19.3.1 General

The settings for the under impedance protection for generator (ZGVPDIS) are done in
percentage and base impedance is calculated from the VBase and IBase settings. The
base impedance is calculated according to equation 420.

VBase
3
ZBase =
IBase
ANSIEQUATION14000027 V1 EN (Equation 420)

ImpedanceAng: The common characteristic angle for all the three zone distance elements

IMinOp: The minimum operating current in %IBase.

Zone 1

ZGVPDIS function has an offset mho characteristic and it can evaluate three phase-to-
phase impedance measuring loops.

OpModeZ1: Zone 1 distance element can be selected as Disabled or PP Loops.

Z1Fwd: Zone 1 forward reach in percentage. It is recommended to set zone 1 forward

reach to 75% of transformer impedance.

Z1Rev: Zone 1 reverse reach in percentage. It is recommended to set zone 1 reverse

reach same as Z1Fwd.

tZ1: Zone 1 trip time delay in seconds.

Zone 2

Zone 2 in ZGVPDIS function has offset mho characteristic and it can evaluate three phase-
to-phase impedance measuring loops or Enhanced reach loop.

OpModeZ2: Zone 2 distance element can be selected as Disabled, PP Loops or

EnhancedReach.

Z2Fwd: Zone 2 forward reach in percentage. It is recommended to set zone 2 forward

reach to 125% of transformer impedance.

Z2Rev: Zone 2 reverse reach in percentage. It is recommended to give limited reverse

reach to ensure operation for close in fault and to minimize area covered in R-X plane.
A setting of 8%. is recommended.

477
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

tZ2: Zone 2 trip time delay in seconds. Time delay should be provided in order to
coordinate with zone 1 element provided for the outgoing line.

Zone 3

Zone 3 in ZGVPDIS function has offset mho characteristic and it can evaluate three phase-
to-phase impedance measuring loops or EnhancedReach loop

OpModeZ3: Zone 3 distance element can be selected as Disabled, PP Loops or

EnhancedReach. It is recommended to select EnhancedReach setting.

Z3Fwd: Zone 3 forward reach in percentage. It is recommended to set zone 3 forward

reach to coordinate with the longest time delay for the transmission line protection
connected to the generating substation bus. Alternatively it can be set to 80% of the
load impedance considering maximum short time over load of the generator.

Z3Rev: Zone 3 reverse reach in percentage. It is recommended to give limited reverse

reach to ensure operation for close in faults and to minimize area covered in R-X plane.
A setting of 8%. is recommended.

tZ3: Zone 3 operates time delay in seconds. Time delay is provided in order to
coordinate with slowest circuit backup protection or slowest local backup for faults
within zone 3 reach. A safety margin of 100 ms should be considered.

7.19.3.2 Load encroachment

The settings involved in load encroachment feature are:

LdAngle: Angle in degrees of load encroachment characteristics

RLd: Positive sequence resistance in per unit

The procedure of calculating the settings for load encroachment consists basically of
defining load angle LdAngle and resistive blinder RLd. The load encroachment logic
can be enabled for zone 2 and zone 3 elements. For zone 2, the load encroachment can
be enabled or disabled using the LoadEnchModZ2 setting by selecting either Enabled
or Disabled. Similarly for zone 3 load encroachment can be enabled or disabled using
the LoadEnchModZ3 setting by selecting either Enabled or Disabled.

The load angle LdAngle is same in forward and reverse direction, so it is suitable to
begin the calculation of the parameter setting. The parameter is set to the maximum
possible load angle at the maximum active load. A value larger than 20° must be used.

The blinder RLd can be calculated according to the equation 421

478
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 7
Impedance protection

æ Vmin ö
RLd = ç 0.8 × Vmin × ÷
è Pexp max ø
GUID-AF9BD6F2-E64B-424D-B361-49448A1CF690-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 421)

Where,

Pexpmax is the maximum exporting active power

Vmin is the minimum voltage for which Pexpmax occurs
0.8 is the security factor to ensure that the setting of RLd can be lesser than the calculated
minimal resistive load

ANSI11000304-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000304 V1 EN

Figure 241: Characteristics of load encroachment in R-X plane

7.19.3.3 Under voltage seal-in

Settings involved in under voltage seal-in are:

OpMode27pickup: Under voltage seal-in feature is enabled using this setting and can
be selected as Disabled or Z2pick up or Z3pick up. If the under voltage seal-in has to be

479
Application Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Impedance protection

triggered with zone 2 pickup, Z2pick up enumeration has to be selected . If zone 3

select Z3pick up enumeration.

27_COMP: The pickup value of the under voltage seal-in feature can be set using
27_COMP. This is provided in percentage of VBase. Recommended setting is 70%.

timeDelay27: The operate time delay in seconds for the under voltage seal-in. The
recommended time delay is to provide the same trip delay setting as the selected zone
that is, either zone 2 or zone 3.

480
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Section 8 Current protection

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC (50)

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

8.1.2 Application
Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electric power from
production to consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed
electric power at each end of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault
on the line can easily endanger the stability of a complete system.

The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at
constant amount of transmitted electric power):

• The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power
can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions.
• The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease
of transmitted power is high.
• The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the
generators on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted
stability limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection
operating time and the breaker opening time, is too long.

The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and
decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection

481
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

must operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for
which very high fault currents are characteristic.

The instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC (50) can
operate in 10 ms for faults characterized by very high currents.

8.1.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output PHPIOC
(50) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and
transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the
highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears
during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-ground and two-
phase-to-ground conditions.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times.
A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end,
which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also
cause the operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

OpModeSel: This parameter can be set to 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. The setting controls
the minimum number of phase currents that must be larger than the set operate current
Pickup for operation. Normally this parameter is set to 1 out of 3and will thus detect all
fault types. If the protection is to be used mainly for multi phase faults, 2 out of 3
should be chosen.

Pickup: Set operate current in % of IBase.

MultPU: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input
MULTPU to the set factor MultPU.

8.1.3.1 Meshed network without parallel line

The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-

ground and two-phase-to-ground faults. With reference to figure 242, apply a fault in B
and then calculate the current through-fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be
done using the minimum source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source
impedance values for ZB in order to get the maximum through fault current from A to B.

482
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

ANSI09000022-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000022 V1 EN

Figure 242: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be
calculated, figure 243. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum
value for ZB and the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000023-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000023 V1 EN

Figure 243: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The IED must not trip for any of the two through-fault currents. Hence the minimum
theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB )

EQUATION78 V1 EN (Equation 422)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety
margin of 5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An
additional 20% is suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under
transient conditions and inaccuracy in the system data.

483
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-
phase output is then:

I s ³ 1.3 × I min
EQUATION79 V3 EN (Equation 423)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting
value is equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the IED has to clear, IF in
figure 244.

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000024-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000024 V1 EN

Figure 244: Fault current: IF

The IED setting value Pickup is given in percentage of the primary base current value,
IBase. The value for Pickup is given from this formula:

Is
Pickup = × 100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION1147 V1 EN (Equation 424)

8.1.3.2 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to
the protected line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 245 where the
two lines are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced
fault current from the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered
together with the two through fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The
maximal influence from the parallel line for the IED in figure 245 will be with a fault
at the C point with the C breaker open.

484
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the IED (IM )
on the healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-ground and two-phase-to-ground
faults) is calculated.

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
ANSI09000025_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000025 V2 EN

Figure 245: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault
current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin)
will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )

EQUATION82 V1 EN (Equation 425)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the
safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous
phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output is then:

Is ³1.3·Imin
EQUATION83 V2 EN (Equation 426)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting
value is equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the IED has to clear.

The IED setting value Pickup is given in percentage of the primary base current value,
IBase. The value for Pickup is given from this formula:

Is
Pickup = × 100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION1147 V1 EN (Equation 427)

485
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC (51/67)

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN

8.2.2 Application
The Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC (51_67) is used
in several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers.
• Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModeSelx (x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4) shall be left to default value Non-
directional.

In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time delays
are needed. OC4PTOC (51_67) can have up to four different, individual settable, steps.
The flexibility of each step of OC4PTOC (51_67) is great. The following options are
possible:

Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary.

486
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination between all overcurrent protections, they
should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized
inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor
make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent protection shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some
sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can
be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a
large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of
the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large 2nd harmonic content.
This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore, OC4PTOC
(51/67) have a possibility of 2nd harmonic restrain if the level of this harmonic current
reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.

The phase overcurrent protection is often used as protection for two and three phase
short circuits. In some cases it is not wanted to detect single-phase ground faults by the
phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation of
ground fault protection. Therefore it is possible to make a choice how many phases, at
minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If set
1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3 single-
phase ground faults are not detected.

8.2.3 Setting guidelines

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

487
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The parameters for Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC
(51/67) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for OC4PTOC (51/67).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS)
signals. RMS is used when the harmonic contents are to be considered, for example in
applications with shunt capacitors.

Operation: The protection can be set to Disabled or Enabled

AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop
current has the angle RCA the direction to fault is forward.

AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional
function, see figure 246.

PUMinOpPhSel: Minimum current for phase selection set in % of IBase. This setting
should be less than the lowest step setting. Default setting is 7%.

NumPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: Not used,1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3. Default setting is 1 out
of 3.

2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the

fundamental current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. Default setting is 20%.

488
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Vref

2
4

Idir

ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN

Figure 246: Directional function characteristic

1. RCA = Relay characteristic angle

2. ROA = Relay operating angle
3. Reverse
4. Forward

8.2.3.1 Settings for each step

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

489
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available according to table 40.

Table 40: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in Technical reference manual.

Pickupx: Operate phase current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen.

TDx: Time multiplier for inverse time delay for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting
constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0

490
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

txMin: Minimum operate time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000 - 60.000s in steps of 0.001s.

Operate
time

IMinx

txMin

Current

IEC10000058-1-en.vsd
IEC10000058 V1 EN

Figure 247: Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time
characteristics

In order to fully comply with curves definition setting parameter txMin shall be set to
the value, which is equal to the operating time of the selected inverse curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 41.

Table 41: Reset possibilities

Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset (constant time) 2
ANSI Reset (inverse time) 3

491
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The delay characteristics are described in the technical reference manual. There are
some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current
dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types
of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time
reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is
used settings pr, tr and cr must be given.

HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Disabled/Enabled.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 428 for the time characteristic
equation.

æ ö
ç A ÷
t [s] = ç + B ÷ × MultPUx
çæ ö ÷
p
i
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
ANSI-EQUATION1261 V1 EN (Equation 428)

For more information, refer to the technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the
technical reference manual.

8.2.3.2 2nd harmonic restrain

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate
during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a
declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the
phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip.

492
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This
component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function.

The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the
fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%.
The default setting is 20% and can be used if a deeper investigation shows that no other
value is needed..

HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Disabled/Enabled, to disable or enable the

2nd harmonic restrain.

The four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output can be used in different
ways, depending on the application where the protection is used. A general description
is given below.

The pickup current setting of the inverse time protection, or the lowest current step of
the definite time protection, must be defined so that the highest possible load current
does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be taken to the
protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of
the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in
figure 248.

493
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Current I

Line phase current

Pickup current

Reset current

The IED does not reset

Time t

ANSI09000146-en-1.vsd
ANSI09000146 V1 EN

Figure 248: Pickup and reset current for an overcurrent protection

The lowest setting value can be written according to equation 429.

Im ax
Ipu ³ 1.2 ×
k
EQUATION1262 V2 EN (Equation 429)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
k is the resetting ratio of the protection
Imax is the maximum load current

From operation statistics the load current up to the present situation can be found. The
current setting must be valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic
that the setting values are updated not more often than once every five years. In many
cases this time interval is still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that
different equipment on the line can withstand. Study components such as line
conductors, current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer
of the equipment normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.

494
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. There is also a demand that
all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be detected by the phase
overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by the
protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current
setting can be written according to equation 430.

Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min

EQUATION1263 V2 EN (Equation 430)

where:
0.7 is a safety factor
Iscmin is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pickup current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
equation 431.

Im ax
1.2 × £ Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min
k
EQUATION1264 V2 EN (Equation 431)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay of
the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other
protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within
as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the
protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest
current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone.
Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC
component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid
stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to

I high ³ 1.2 × kt × I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN (Equation 432)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.05
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

495
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault
time is so short that protected equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload,
at the same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed
network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the
case of inverse time overcurrent protection. Figure 249 shows how the time-versus-
current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the shortest
fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time difference
between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.

en05000204.wmf
IEC05000204 V1 EN

Figure 249: Fault time with maintained selectivity

The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection.

To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there have to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The
minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the
shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections, breaker opening
time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary
significantly between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be
estimated:

496
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Protection operation 15-60 ms

time:
Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

Example for time coordination

Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the figure 250. Consider a fault located at another line from the station B. The
fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the
protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED A1
must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be described
using a time axis, see figure 250.

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

The fault Protection Breaker at Protection
occurs B1 trips B1 opens A1 resets en05000205_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000205 V1 EN

Figure 250: Sequence of events during fault

where:
t=0 is when the fault occurs
t=t1 is when the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent to the circuit breaker. The
operation time of this protection is t1

t=t2 is when the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1

t=t3 is when the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.

To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent
protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger than the time t3.

497
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time
and protection resetting time. Therefore a safety margin has to be included. With
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to equation 433.

Dt ³ 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN (Equation 433)

where it is considered that:

the operate time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
the breaker open time is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1 is 40 ms and
the additional margin is 40 ms

8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N)

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

8.3.2 Application
In many applications, when fault current is limited to a defined value by the object
impedance, an instantaneous ground-fault protection can provide fast and selective
tripping.

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC (50N), which can operate in 15 ms (50
Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is
included in the IED.

8.3.3 Setting guidelines

498
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

The parameters for the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)
are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Some guidelines for the choice of setting parameter for EFPIOC (50N) is given.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

The setting of the function is limited to the operate residual current to the protection
(Pickup).

The basic requirement is to assure selectivity, that is EFPIOC (50N) shall not be
allowed to operate for faults at other objects than the protected object (line).

For a normal line in a meshed system single phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase-
to-ground faults shall be calculated as shown in figure 251 and figure 252. The residual
currents (3I0) to the protection are calculated. For a fault at the remote line end this
fault current is IfB. In this calculation the operational state with high source impedance
ZA and low source impedance ZB should be used. For the fault at the home busbar this
fault current is IfA. In this calculation the operational state with low source impedance
ZA and high source impedance ZB should be used.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

ANSI09000022-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000022 V1 EN

Figure 251: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

499
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
ANSI09000023-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000023 V1 EN

Figure 252: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The function shall not operate for any of the calculated currents to the protection. The
minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfA )

EQUATION284 V1 EN (Equation 434)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is
suggested due to inaccuracy of instrument transformers under transient conditions and
inaccuracy in the system data.

The minimum primary current setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION285 V3 EN (Equation 435)

In case of parallel lines with zero sequence mutual coupling a fault on the parallel line,
as shown in figure 253, should be calculated.

500
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
ANSI09000025_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000025 V2 EN

Figure 253: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault
current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will in this case be:

I m in ³ M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
EQUATION287 V1 EN (Equation 436)

Where:
IfA and IfB have been described for the single line case.

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION288 V3 EN (Equation 437)

Transformer inrush current shall be considered.

The setting of the protection is set as a percentage of the base current (IBase).

Operation: set the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

Pickup: Set operate current in % of IBase.

MultPU: The operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input
MULTPU to the set factor MultPU.

501
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC (51N/67N)

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC IN 51N/67N
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V1 EN

8.4.2 Application
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N_67N) is used in several
applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Ground-fault protection of feeders in effectively grounded distribution and

subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up ground-fault protection of transmission lines.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection of transmission lines. EF4PTOC (51N_67N) can
have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-ground-faults compared to
distance protection.
• Back-up ground-fault protection of power transformers.
• Ground-fault protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. EF4PTOC (51N_67N) can have up to four, individual settable steps. The
flexibility of each step of EF4PTOC (51N_67N) is great. The following options are
possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for ground-fault protection
in meshed and effectively grounded transmission systems. The directional residual
overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection communication
schemes, which enables fast clearance of ground faults on transmission lines. The

502
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided by setting. Voltage

polarizing is most commonly used, but alternatively current polarizing where currents
in transformer neutrals providing the neutral source (ZN) is used to polarize (IN · ZN)
the function. Dual polarizing where the sum of both voltage and current components is
allowed to polarize can also be selected.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available
such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The
selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-
ordination between the operate time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-
ordination all overcurrent protections, to be co-ordinated against each other, should
have the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time
characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.

Table 42: Time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that EF4PTOC (51N_67N) shall reset as fast as possible when
the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of
delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used.

503
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pickup level
for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication
factor INxMult to the residual current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is
activated from a binary input signal MULTPUx to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This inrush
current can have residual current components. The phenomenon is due to saturation of
the transformer magnetic core during parts of the cycle. There is a risk that inrush
current will give a residual current that reaches level above the pickup current of the
residual overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore,
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) has a possibility of second harmonic restrain 2ndHarmStab if
the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the
fundamental current.

8.4.3 Setting guidelines

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative
sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the four step residual overcurrent protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

8.4.3.1 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Inverse time characteristic enables fast fault clearance of high current faults at the same
time as selectivity to other inverse time phase overcurrent protections can be assured.
This is mainly used in radial fed networks but can also be used in meshed networks. In
meshed networks the settings must be based on network fault calculations.

504
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there have to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The
minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the
shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections, breaker opening
time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary
significantly between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be
estimated:

Protection operate time: 15-60 ms

Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

The different characteristics are described in the technical reference manual.

Pickup"x": Operate residual current level for step x given in % of IBase.

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above for any step then signal will reset at current equals to zero.

INxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(MULTPUx) is activated the current operation level is increased by this setting constant.

txMin: Minimum operating time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

505
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Operate
time

IMinx

txMin

Current

IEC10000058-1-en.vsd
IEC10000058 V1 EN

Figure 254: Minimum operate current and operate time for inverse time
characteristics

In order to fully comply with curves definition the setting parameter txMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operate time of the selected IEC inverse curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. The
possibilities are described in the technical reference manual.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse time
characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 438:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s ] = + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN (Equation 438)

506
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

8.4.3.2 Common settings for all steps

tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen.

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degree. This angle is defined as shown
in figure 255. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = 3V0 or V2)

RCA V pol = 3V0 or V2

Operation

IDirPU

en 05000135-4- ansi. vsd

ANSI05000135 V3 EN

Figure 255: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a normal transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 65°. The setting
range is -180° to +180°.

polMethod: Defines if the directional polarization is from

• Voltage (3V0 or V2)
• Current (3I0 · ZNpol or 3I2 ·ZNpol where ZNpol is RNpol + jXNpol), or
• both currents and voltage, Dual (dual polarizing, (3V0 + 3I0 · ZNpol) or (V2 + I2 ·
ZNpol)).

507
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Normally voltage polarizing from the internally calculated residual sum or an external
open delta is used.

Current polarizing is useful when the local source is strong and a high sensitivity is
required. In such cases the polarizing voltage (3V0) can be below 1% and it is then
necessary to use current polarizing or dual polarizing. Multiply the required set current
(primary) with the minimum impedance (ZNpol) and check that the percentage of the
phase-to-ground voltage is definitely higher than 1% (minimum 3V0>VPolMin setting)
as a verification.

RNPol, XNPol: The zero-sequence source is set in primary ohms as base for the current
polarizing. The polarizing voltage is then achieved as 3I0 · ZNpol. The ZNpol can be
defined as (ZS1-ZS0)/3, that is the ground return impedance of the source behind the
protection. The maximum ground-fault current at the local source can be used to
calculate the value of ZN as V/(√3 · 3I0) Typically, the minimum ZNPol (3 · zero
sequence source) is set. Setting is in primary ohms.

When the dual polarizing method is used it is important that the settingPickupxor the
product 3I0 · ZNpol is not greater than 3V0. If so, there is a risk for incorrect operation
for faults in the reverse direction.

IPolMin: is the minimum ground-fault current accepted for directional evaluation. For
smaller currents than this value the operation will be blocked. Typical setting is 5-10%
of IBase.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) polarizing voltage for the directional

function, given in % of VBase/√3.

IDirPU: Operate residual current release level in % of IBase for directional comparison
scheme. The setting is given in % of IBase and must be set below the lowest INx>
setting, set for the directional measurement. The output signals, PUFW and PUREV
can be used in a teleprotection scheme. The appropriate signal should be configured to
the communication scheme block.

8.4.3.3 2nd harmonic restrain

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the current transformer core will
saturate during part of the period, resulting in a transformer inrush current. This will
give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating
between the phases. There is a risk that the residual overcurrent function will give an
unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic
component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this
unwanted function.

508
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

At current transformer saturation a false residual current can be measured by the

protection. Also here the 2nd harmonic restrain can prevent unwanted operation.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency
residual current.

HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function.

8.4.3.4 Parallel transformer inrush current logic

In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of

the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the
asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation
of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition.
The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The
residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the
transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little
delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic
current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal
2nd harmonic blocking will reset.

51N 51N
Power System

en05000136_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000136 V1 EN

Figure 256: Application for parallel transformer inrush current logic

If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will latch as
long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current
level. Assume that step 4 is chosen to be the most sensitive step of the four step
residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC (51N_67N). The harmonic restrain
blocking is enabled for this step. Also the same current setting as this step is chosen for
the blocking at parallel transformer energizing.

Below the settings for the parallel transformer logic are described.

509
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Use_PUValue: Gives which current level that should be used for activation of the
blocking signal. This is given as one of the settings of the steps: Step 1/2/3/4. Normally
the step having the lowest operation current level should be set.

BlkParTransf: This parameter can be set Disable/Enable, the parallel transformer logic.

8.4.3.5 Switch onto fault logic

In case of energizing a faulty object there is a risk of having a long fault clearance
time, if the fault current is too small to give fast operation of the protection. The switch
on to fault function can be activated from auxiliary signals from the circuit breaker,
either the close command or the open/close position (change of position).

This logic can be used to issue fast trip if one breaker pole does not close properly at a
manual or automatic closing.

SOTF and Under Time are similar functions to achieve fast clearance at asymmetrical
closing based on requirements from different utilities.

The function is divided into two parts. The SOTF function will give operation from
step 2 or 3 during a set time after change in the position of the circuit breaker. The
SOTF function has a set time delay. The Under Time function, which has 2nd harmonic
restrain blocking, will give operation from step 4. The 2nd harmonic restrain will
prevent unwanted function in case of transformer inrush current. The Under Time
function has a set time delay.

Below the settings for switch on to fault logics are described.

SOTF operation mode: This parameter can be set: Disabled/SOTF/Under Time/SOTF

+Under Time.

SOTFSel: This setting will select the signal to activate SOTF function; CB position open/
CB position closed/CB close command.

tSOTF: Time delay for operation of the SOTF function. The setting range is 0.000 -
60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.100 s

StepForSOTF: If this parameter is set on the step 3 pickup signal will be used as
current set level. If set disabled step 2 pickup signal will be used as current set level.

t4U: Time interval when the SOTF function is active after breaker closing. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 1.000 s.

ActUndrTimeSel: Describes the mode to activate the sensitive undertime function. The
function can be activated by Circuit breaker position (change) or Circuit breaker
command.

510
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

tUnderTime: Time delay for operation of the sensitive undertime function. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.300 s

8.4.3.6 Transformer application example

Two main cases are of interest when residual overcurrent protection is used for a power
transformer, namely if residual current can be fed from the protected transformer
winding or not.

The protected winding will feed ground-fault (residual) current to ground faults in the
connected power system. The residual current fed from the transformer at external phase-
to-ground faults is highly dependent on the total positive and zero-sequence source
impedances. It is also dependent on the residual current distribution between the
network zero-sequence impedance and the transformer zero-sequence impedance. An
example of this application is shown in Figure 257.

WYE/DELTA or WYE/WYE
transformer
Three phase CT
summated

alt Single CT

51N

en05000490_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000490 V1 EN

Figure 257: Residual overcurrent protection application on a directly grounded

transformer winding

In this case the protection has two different tasks:

• Detection of ground faults on the transformer winding.

• Detection of ground faults in the power system.

It can be suitable to use a residual overcurrent protection with at least two steps. Step 1
shall have a short definite time delay and a relatively high current setting, in order to
detect and clear high current ground faults in the transformer winding or in the power

511
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

system close to the transformer. Step 2 shall have a longer time delay (definite or
inverse time delay) and a lower current operation level. Step 2 shall detect and clear
transformer winding ground faults with low ground-fault current, that is, faults close to
the transformer winding neutral point. If the current setting gap between step 1 and
step 2 is large another step can be introduced with a current and time delay setting
between the two described steps.

The transformer inrush current will have a large residual current component. To
prevent unwanted function of the ground-fault overcurrent protection, the 2nd
harmonic restrain blocking should be used, at least for the sensitive step 2.

If the protected winding will not feed ground-fault (residual) current to ground faults in
the connected power system the application is as shown in Figure 258.

WYE/DELTA, DELTA/WYE or
WYE/WYE transformer
Three phase CT
summated

51N

en05000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000491 V1 EN

Figure 258: Residual overcurrent protection application on an isolated transformer

winding

In the calculation of the fault current fed to the protection, at different ground faults,
are highly dependent on the positive and zero sequence source impedances, as well as
the division of residual current in the network. Ground-fault current calculations are
necessary for the setting.

Setting of step 1
One requirement is that ground faults at the busbar, where the transformer winding is
connected, shall be detected. Therefore a fault calculation as shown in figure 259 is made.

512
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

YN/D or YN/Y
transformer
Three phase CT
summated

3I0

alt
Single phase-
Single CT
to-ground fault
51N

ANSI05000492_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000492 V3 EN

Figure 259: Step 1 fault calculation 1

This calculation gives the current fed to the protection: 3I0fault1.

To assure that step 1, selectivity to other ground-fault protections in the network a

short delay is selected. Normally, a delay in the range 0.3 – 0.4 s is appropriate. To
assure selectivity to line faults, tripped after a delay (typically distance protection zone
2) of about 0.5 s the current setting must be set so high so that such faults does not
cause unwanted step 1 trip. Therefore, a fault calculation as shown in figure 260 is made.

513
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

YN/D or YN/Y
transformer
Three phase CT
summated

3I0

alt

Single CT
67N
Single phase-
to- ground fault

ANSI05000493_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000493 V3 EN

Figure 260: Step 1 fault calculation 1

The fault is located at the borderline between instantaneous and delayed operation of
the line protection, such as Distance protection or line residual overcurrent protection.
This calculation gives the current fed to the protection: 3I0fault2

The setting of step 1 can be chosen within the interval shown in equation 439.

3I 0fault 2 × lowmar < I step1 < 3I 0fault1 × highmar

EQUATION1455 V2 EN (Equation 439)

Where:
lowmar is a margin to assure selectivity (typical 1.2) and
highmar is a margin to assure fast fault clearance of busbar fault (typical 1.2).

Setting of step 2
The setting of the sensitive step 2 is dependent of the chosen time delay. Often a
relatively long definite time delay or inverse time delay is chosen. The current setting

514
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

can be chosen very low. As it is required to detect ground faults in the transformer
winding, close to the neutral point, values down to the minimum setting possibilities
can be chosen. However, one must consider zero-sequence currents that can occur
during normal operation of the power system. Such currents can be due to un-
transposed lines.

In case to protection of transformer windings not feeding residual current at external

ground faults a fast lowcurrent step can be acceptable.

8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)

8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
I2
overcurrent protection
4
alt
4

IEC10000053 V1 EN

8.5.2 Application
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) is used in
several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of feeders in effectively

grounded distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have
radial structure.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection of transmission lines. NS4PTOC (4612) can
have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-ground-faults compared to
distance protection.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of power
transformers.
• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of different kinds of
equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt
reactors and others.

515
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. NS4PTOC (4612) can have up to four, individual settable steps. The
flexibility of each step of NS4PTOC (4612) function is great. The following options
are possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for unsymmetrical fault
protection in meshed and effectively grounded transmission systems. The directional
negative sequence overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection
communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of unsymmetrical faults on
transmission lines. The directional function uses the voltage polarizing quantity.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available
such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The
selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-
ordination between the operating time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-
ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated against each other, should have the
same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time
characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.

Table 43: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
Table continues on next page

516
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Curve name
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

There is also a user programmable inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the negative sequence overcurrent function shall reset as
fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some
cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset
characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pickup level
for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication
factor MultPUx to the negative sequence current pick-up level. This multiplication
factor is activated from a binary input signal MULTPUx to the function.

8.5.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
(46I2) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the four step negative sequence overcurrent
protection:

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.
GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

8.5.3.1 Settings for each step

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

517
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/

forward/reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Table 44: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM).

Pickupx: Operation negative sequence current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen.

TDx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

518
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(ENMULTx) is activated the current operation level is multiplied by this setting constant.

txMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting there are the following possibilities:
Curve name
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)

The different reset characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual
(TRM). There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 =
current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and
ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings
pr, tr and cr must be given.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse time

characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is according to
equation 438:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s ] = + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN (Equation 440)

519
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM).

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse reset time

characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the Technical reference
manual (TRM).

8.5.3.2 Common settings for all steps

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degrees. This angle is defined as shown
in figure 255. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = -)

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Vpol=-V2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN

Figure 261: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 80°.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) voltage % of VBase.

520
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

I>Dir: Operate residual current level for directional comparison scheme. The setting is
given in % of IBase. The pickup forward or pickup reverse signals can be used in a
communication scheme. The appropriate signal must be configured to the
communication scheme block.

8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE (67N)

8.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

8.6.2 Application
In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 · 3V0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has

521
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

-90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage (3V0). The characteristic angle is
chosen to -90º in such a network.

In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor,

the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the ground fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen
to 0º.

As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the ground fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1
A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks,
with large capacitive ground fault currents. In such networks, the active fault
current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power
protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better possibility to detect
ground faults. In addition, in low impedance grounded networks, the inverse time
characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 262: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

522
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3.
For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2
and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

8.6.3 Setting guidelines

The sensitive ground-fault protection is intended to be used in high impedance
grounded systems, or in systems with resistive grounding where the neutral point
resistor gives an ground-fault current larger than what normal high impedance gives
but smaller than the phase to phase short circuit current.

In a high impedance system the fault current is assumed to be limited by the system
zero sequence shunt impedance to ground and the fault resistance only. All the series
impedances in the system are assumed to be zero.

In the setting of ground-fault protection, in a high impedance grounded system, the

neutral point voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the ground-fault current will be
calculated at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point
voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated as:

Vphase
V0 =
3× Rf
1+
Z0
EQUATION2020-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 441)

Where
Vphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault,

Rf is the resistance to ground in the fault point and

Z0 is the system zero sequence impedance to ground

The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

3 × Vphase
I j = 3I0 =
Z0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION2021 V1 EN (Equation 442)

523
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system grounding. In an isolated system

(without neutral point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling
between the phase conductors and ground:

3 × Vphase
Z0 = - jX c = - j
Ij
EQUATION2022-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 443)

Where
Ij is the capacitive ground fault current at a non-resistive phase-to-ground fault

Xc is the capacitive reactance to ground

In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance grounded system) the impedance Z0
can be calculated as:

- jX c × 3R n
Z0 =
- jX c + 3R n
EQUATION1946 V1 EN (Equation 444)

Where
Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor

In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or
more transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:

9R n X n X c
Z 0 = - jX c // 3R n // j3X n =
3X n X c + j3R n × ( 3X n - X c )
EQUATION1947 V1 EN (Equation 445)

Where
Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil. If the Petersen coil is well tuned we have 3Xn = Xc In this
case the impedance Z0 will be: Z0 = 3Rn

Now consider a system with an grounding via a resistor giving higher ground fault
current than the high impedance grounding. The series impedances in the system can

524
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

no longer be neglected. The system with a single phase to ground fault can be
described as in Figure 263.

Source impedance
Zsc (pos. seq)
RN

ZT,1 (pos. seq)

ZT,0 (zero seq)

V0A Substation A

3I0

ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)

V0B Substation B

ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)

Phase to ground fault

en06000654_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000654 V1 EN

Figure 263: Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting

The residual fault current can be written:

3Vphase
3I 0 =
2 × Z1 + Z0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION2023-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 446)

Where
Vphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault

Z1 is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point. Z1 = Zsc+ZT,1+ZlineAB,1+ZlineBC,1

Z0 is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point. Z0 = ZT,0+3RN+ZlineAB,0+ZlineBC,0

Rf is the fault resistance.

525
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The residual voltages in stations A and B can be written:

V0 A = 3I 0 × (ZT ,0 + 3R N )
EQUATION2024-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 447)

VOB = 3I 0 × (Z T ,0 + 3R N + Z lineAB,0 )
EQUATION2025-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 448)

The residual power, measured by the sensitive ground fault protections in A and B will
be:

S0A = 3V0A × 3I 0
EQUATION2026-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 449)

S0B = 3V0B × 3I 0
EQUATION2027-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 450)

The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum
sensitivity in the characteristic angle RCA. The apparent residual power component in
the characteristic angle, measured by the protection, can be written:

S0 A ,prot = 3V0A × 3I 0 × cos jA

EQUATION2028-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 451)

S0 B,prot = 3V0 B × 3I 0 × cos jB

EQUATION2029-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 452)

The angles φA and φB are the phase angles between the residual current and the
residual voltage in the station compensated with the characteristic angle RCA.

The protection will use the power components in the characteristic angle direction for
measurement, and as base for the inverse time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

TDSN × (3I 0 × 3V0 × cos f (reference))

t inv =
3I 0 × 3V0 cos f (measured)
EQUATION2069 V1 EN (Equation 453)

The function can be set Enabled/Disabled with the setting of Operation.

526
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

RotResU: It is a setting for rotating the polarizing quantity (3V0) by 0 or 180 degrees.
This parameter is set to 180 degrees by default in order to inverse the residual voltage
(3V0) to calculate the reference voltage (-3V0 e-jRCADir). Since the reference voltage is
used as the polarizing quantity for directionality, it is important to set this parameter
correctly.

With the setting OpModeSel the principle of directional function is chosen.

With OpModeSel set to 3I0cosfi the current component in the direction equal to the
characteristic angleRCADir has the maximum sensitivity. The characteristic for
RCADir is equal to 0° is shown in Figure 264.

Vref RCA = 0°, ROA = 90°

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos

en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN

Figure 264: Characteristic for RCADir equal to 0°

The characteristic is for RCADir equal to -90° is shown in Figure 265.

527
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

RCA = -90°, ROA = 90°

Vref

3I0
3I0 cos

= ang(3I0) – ang(Vref)

-3V0

en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN

Figure 265: Characteristic for RCADir equal to -90°

When OpModeSel is set to 3I03V0Cosfi the apparent residual power component in the
direction is measured.

When OpModeSel is set to 3I0 and fi the function will operate if the residual current is
larger than the setting INDirPU and the residual current angle is within the sector
RCADir ± ROADir.

The characteristic for this OpModeSel when RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80° is shown
in figure 266.

528
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

RCA = 0º

ROA = 80º

Operate area

3I0

Vref=-3V0

ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN

Figure 266: Characteristic for RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80°

DirMode is set Forward or Reverse to set the direction of the operation for the
directional function selected by the OpModeSel.

All the directional protection modes have a residual current release level setting
INRelPU which is set in % of IBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or
equal to the lowest fault current to be detected.

All the directional protection modes have a residual voltage release level setting
VNRelPU which is set in % of VBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or
equal to the lowest fault residual voltage to be detected.

tDef is the definite time delay, given in s, for the directional residual current protection.

tReset is the time delay before the definite timer gets reset, given in s. With a tReset
time of few cycles, there is an increased possibility to clear intermittent ground faults
correctly. The setting shall be much shorter than the set trip delay. In case of
intermittent ground faults, the fault current is intermittently dropping below the set
value during consecutive cycles. Therefore the definite timer should continue for a
certain time equal to tReset even though the fault current has dropped below the set value.

The characteristic angle of the directional functions RCADir is set in degrees. RCADir
is normally set equal to 0° in a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point
resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only.
RCADir is set equal to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive.

529
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. ROADir is set in degrees. For
angles differing more than ROADir from RCADir the function is blocked. The setting
can be used to prevent unwanted operation for non-faulted feeders, with large
capacitive ground fault current contributions, due to CT phase angle error.

INCosPhiPU is the operate current level for the directional function when OpModeSel
is set 3I0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the active or capacitive ground fault current at required sensitivity of the
protection.

SN_PU is the operate power level for the directional function when OpModeSel is set
3I03V0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of SBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the active or capacitive ground fault residual power at required
sensitivity of the protection.

The input transformer for the Sensitive directional residual over current and power
protection function has the same short circuit capacity as the phase current
transformers. Hence, there is no specific requirement for the external CT core, i.e. any
CT core can be used.

If the time delay for residual power is chosen the delay time is dependent on two
setting parameters. SRef is the reference residual power, given in % of SBase. TDSN is
the time multiplier. The time delay will follow the following expression:

TDSN × Sref
t inv =
3I 0 × 3V0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION2030-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 454)

INDirPU is the operate current level for the directional function when OpModeSel is
set 3I0 and fi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on
calculation of the ground fault current at required sensitivity of the protection.

OpINNonDir is set Enabled to activate the non-directional residual current protection.

INNonDirPU is the operate current level for the non-directional function. The setting is
given in % of IBase. This function can be used for detection and clearance of cross-
country faults in a shorter time than for the directional function. The current setting
should be larger than the maximum single-phase residual current on the protected line.

TimeChar is the selection of time delay characteristic for the non-directional residual
current protection. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time
characteristics are available:

530
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Table 45: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

See chapter “Inverse time characteristics” in Technical Manual for the description of
different characteristics

tPCrv, tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s] = + B ÷ × InMult
çæ i ö
p
÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è Pickup _ N ø ø
EQUATION2031-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 455)

tINNonDir is the definite time delay for the non directional ground fault current
protection, given in s.

OpVN is set Enabled to activate the trip function of the residual over voltage protection.

531
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

tVN is the definite time delay for the trip function of the residual voltage protection,
given in s.

8.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant

Fahrenheit/Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26)

8.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26
constant, Fahrenheit

Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26

constant, Celsius

8.7.2 Application
Lines and cables in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current
level. If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected. As a
consequence the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the temperature of the
lines and cables reaches too high values the equipment might be damaged:

• The sag of overhead lines can reach unacceptable value.

• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, gets too high
the material will be destroyed.
• In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of the overtemperature.
As a consequence of this phase to phase or phase to ground faults can occur.

In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload lines and
cables for a limited time. This should be done while managing the risks safely.

The thermal overload protection provides information that makes a temporary

overloading of cables and lines possible. The thermal overload protection estimates the
conductor temperature continuously, in Celsius or Fahrenheit depending on whether
LFPTTR or LCPTTR (26) is chosen. This estimation is made by using a thermal model
of the line/cable based on the current measurement.

532
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level AlarmTemp, a
signal ALARM can be given to the operator. This enables actions in the power system
to be taken before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value TripTemp, the protection initiates trip of the protected line.

8.7.3 Setting guideline

The parameters for the Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit/
Celsius LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

GlobalBaseSel is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values,

primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary power (SBase).

Imult: Enter the number of lines in case the protection function is applied on multiple
parallel lines sharing one CT.

IRef: Reference, steady state current, given in % of IBase that will give a steady state
(end) temperature rise TRef. It is suggested to set this current to the maximum steady
state current allowed for the line/cable under emergency operation (a few hours per year).

TRef: Reference temperature rise (end temperature) corresponding to the steady state
current IRef. From cable manuals current values with corresponding conductor
temperature are often given. These values are given for conditions such as ground
temperature, ambient air temperature, way of laying of cable and ground thermal
resistivity. From manuals for overhead conductor temperatures and corresponding
current is given.

Tau: The thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. Please refer to
manufacturers manuals for details.

TripTemp: Temperature value for trip of the protected circuit. For cables, a maximum
allowed conductor temperature is often stated to be 190°F (88°C). For overhead lines,
the critical temperature for aluminium conductor is about 190-210°F (88-99°C). For a
copper conductor a normal figure is 160°F (71°C).

AlarmTemp: Temperature level for alarm of the protected circuit. ALARM signal can
be used as a warning before the circuit is tripped. Therefore the setting shall be lower
than the trip level. It shall at the same time be higher than the maximum conductor
temperature at normal operation. For cables this level is often given to 150°F (66°C).
Similar values are stated for overhead lines. A suitable setting can be about 60°F
(16°C) below the trip value.

533
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

ReclTemp: Temperature where lockout signal LOCKOUT from the protection is

released. When the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This
signal is intended to block switch in of the protected circuit as long as the conductor
temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated temperature is below the
set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm temperature.

8.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49)

8.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

8.8.2 Application
Transformers in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current
(power) level. If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected.
As a consequence the temperature of the transformer will increase. If the temperature
of the transformer reaches too high a value, the equipment might be damaged;

• The insulation within the transformer experiences forced ageing. As a

consequence of this, the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults
increases.
• There might be hot spots within the transformer, which degrades the paper
insulation. It might also cause bubbling in the transformer oil.

In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload transformers

for a limited time. This should be done without the above mentioned risks. The thermal
overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of
transformers possible.

The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the cooling
system of the transformer. There are two main principles:

534
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

• OA: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• FOA: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.

The protection can have two sets of parameters, one for non-forced cooling and one for
forced cooling. Both the permissive steady state loading level as well as the thermal
time constant is influenced by the cooling system of the transformer. The two
parameters sets can be activated by the binary input signal COOLING. This can be
used for transformers where forced cooling can be taken out of operation, for example
at fan or pump faults.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer which is based on current measurement.

If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches a set alarm level a signal can be
given to the operator. Two alarm levels are available. This enables preventive actions
in the power system to be taken before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the
temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the
protected transformer.

After tripping by the thermal overload protection, the transformer will cool down over
time. There will be a time gap before the heat content (temperature) reaches such a
level so that the transformer can be taken into service again. Therefore, the function
will continue to estimate the heat content using a set cooling time constant. Energizing
of the transformer can be blocked until the heat content has reached a set level.

8.8.3 Setting guideline

The parameters for the thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR, 49)
are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection:

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Disabled switches off the complete function.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (UBase) and (SBase).

IRef: Reference level of the current given in % of IBase. When the current is equal to
IRef the final (steady state) heat content is equal to 1. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer winding.

535
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

IRefMult: If a binary input ENMULT is activated the reference current value can be
multiplied by the factor IRefMult. The activation could be used in case of deviating
ambient temperature from the reference value. In the standard for loading of a
transformer an ambient temperature of 20°C is used. For lower ambient temperatures
the load ability is increased and vice versa. IRefMult can be set within a range: 0.01 -
10.00.

IBase1: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with no COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with natural cooling (OA).

IBase2: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with activated COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with forced cooling (FOA). If the
transformer has no forced cooling IBase2 can be set equal to IBase1.

Tau1: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase1 (no
cooling) given in minutes.

Tau2: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase2 (with
cooling) given in minutes.

The thermal time constant should be obtained from the transformer manufacturers
manuals. The thermal time constant is dependent on the cooling and the amount of oil.
Normal time constants for medium and large transformers (according to IEC 60076-7)
are about 2.5 hours for naturally cooled transformers and 1.5 hours for forced cooled
transformers.

The time constant can be estimated from measurements of the oil temperature during a
cooling sequence (described in IEC 60076-7). It is assumed that the transformer is
operated at a certain load level with a constant oil temperature (steady state operation).
The oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQo0. Then the transformer is
disconnected from the grid (no load). After a time t of at least 30 minutes the
temperature of the oil is measured again. Now the oil temperature above the ambient
temperature is DQot. The thermal time constant can now be estimated as:

t
t=
ln DQo 0 - ln DQ ot
EQUATION1180 V1 EN (Equation 456)

If the transformer has forced cooling (FOA) the measurement should be made both
with and without the forced cooling in operation, giving Tau2 and Tau1.

The time constants can be changed if the current is higher than a set value or lower
than a set value. If the current is high it is assumed that the forced cooling is activated

536
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

while it is deactivated at low current. The setting of the parameters below enables
automatic adjustment of the time constant.

Tau1High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is
higher than the set value IHighTau1. IHighTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Tau1Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau1. ILowTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Tau2High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is
higher than the set value IHighTau2. IHighTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

Tau2Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau2. ILowTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

The possibility to change time constant with the current value as the base can be useful
in different applications. Below some examples are given:

• In case a total interruption (low current) of the protected transformer all cooling
possibilities will be inactive. This can result in a changed value of the time constant.
• If other components (motors) are included in the thermal protection, there is a risk
of overheating of that equipment in case of very high current. The thermal time
constant is often smaller for a motor than for the transformer.

ITrip: The steady state current that the transformer can withstand. The setting is given
in % of IBase1 or IBase2.

Alarm1: Heat content level for activation of the signal ALARM1. ALARM1 is set in %
of the trip heat content level.

Alarm2: Heat content level for activation of the output signal ALARM2. ALARM2 is
set in % of the trip heat content level.

LockoutReset: Lockout release level of heat content to release the lockout signal. When
the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is
intended to block switching on of the protected circuit transformer as long as the
transformer temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated heat content
is below the set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm
temperature. LockoutReset is set in % of the trip heat content level.

ThetaInit: Heat content before activation of the function. This setting can be set a little
below the alarm level. If the transformer is loaded before the activation of the
protection function, its temperature can be higher than the ambient temperature. The
start point given in the setting will prevent risk of no trip at overtemperature during the
first moments after activation. ThetaInit: is set in % of the trip heat content level.

537
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Warning: If the calculated time to trip factor is below the setting Warning a warning
signal is activated. The setting is given in minutes.

8.9 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF (50BF)

8.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

8.9.2 Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault needs to be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It
is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for
the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF, 50BF) will issue a
back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the
“normal” circuit breaker for the protected component. The detection of failure to break
the current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as
detection of remaining trip signal (unconditional).

CCRBRF (50BF) can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to
the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the
probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid back-up trip of many
breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.

8.9.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF
(50BF) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.

538
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

FunctionMode This parameter can be set Current or Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
breaker position signal is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode
Current&Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can
be usable in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small.
This can be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse
power protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.

RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means
that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check)
and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow re-
trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means re-trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CBPos Check means re-
trip is done without check of breaker position.

Table 46: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode

RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A the re-trip function is not activated
CB Pos Check Current a phase current must be larger
than the operate level to allow re-
trip
Contact re-trip is done when breaker
position indicates that breaker is
still closed after re-trip time has
elapsed
Current&Contact both methods are used
No CBPos Check Current re-trip is done without check of
breaker position
Contact re-trip is done without check of
breaker position
Current&Contact both methods are used

BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect
failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least two currents, of
the three-phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker
failure. 1 out of 3 means that at least one current of the three-phase currents shall be
high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least one current of the three-
phase currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most

539
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used).

Pickup_PH: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This
parameter should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The
setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start
the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.

Pickup_BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function
can be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the
FunctionMode is set Current&Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely
detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact based
function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range
5 – 200% of IBase.

Pickup_N: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In
high impedance grounded systems the residual current at phase- to-ground faults are
normally much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure
at single-phase-ground faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual
current separately. Also in effectively grounded systems the setting of the ground-fault
current protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set
1 out of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the
sensitive ground-fault protection. The setting can be given within the range 2 – 200 %
of IBase.

t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 – 60s in steps
of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 – 50ms.

t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90
– 200ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).

The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:

t 2 ³ t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

EQUATION1430 V1 EN (Equation 457)

where:
tcbopen is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin is a safety margin

540
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.

Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen

The fault Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip

occurs
tBFPreset
Margin

Minimum back-up trip delay t2

Critical fault clearance time for stability

Time
Trip and Pickup
CCRBRF
(50BF)

ANSI05000479_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000479 V3 EN

Figure 267: Time sequence

t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase initiate. The critical fault
clearance time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase-
to-ground faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for multi-
phase faults. Typical setting is 90 – 150 ms.

t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.

tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is
a binary input 52FAIL from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal
supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault.
This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker, of others.
After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit
breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the 52FAIL is active.
Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.

541
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of
circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200
ms.

8.10 Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD)

8.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

8.10.2 Application
There is a risk that a circuit breaker will get discrepancy between the poles at circuit
breaker operation: closing or opening. One pole can be open and the other two closed,
or two poles can be open and one closed. Pole discrepancy of a circuit breaker will
cause unsymmetrical currents in the power system. The consequence of this can be:

• Negative sequence currents that will give stress on rotating machines

• Zero sequence currents that might give unwanted operation of sensitive ground-
fault protections in the power system.

It is therefore important to detect situations with pole discrepancy of circuit breakers.

When this is detected the breaker should be tripped directly.

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC (52PD) will detect situation with deviating
positions of the poles of the protected circuit breaker. The protection has two different
options to make this detection:

• By connecting the auxiliary contacts in the circuit breaker so that logic is created,
a signal can be sent to the protection, indicating pole discrepancy. This logic can
also be realized within the protection itself, by using opened and close signals for
each circuit breaker pole, connected to the protection.
• Each phase current through the circuit breaker is measured. If the difference
between the phase currents is larger than a CurrUnsymPU this is an indication of
pole discrepancy, and the protection will operate.

542
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

8.10.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the Pole discordance protection CCPDSC (52PD) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the pole discrepancy protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

tTrip: Time delay of the operation.

ContactSel: Operation of the contact based pole discrepancy protection. Can be set:
Disabled/PD signal from CB. If PD signal from CB is chosen the logic to detect pole
discrepancy is made in the vicinity to the breaker auxiliary contacts and only one signal
is connected to the pole discrepancy function. If the Pole pos aux cont. alternative is
chosen each open close signal is connected to the IED and the logic to detect pole
discrepancy is realized within the function itself.

CurrentSel: Operation of the current based pole discrepancy protection. Can be set:
Disabled/CB oper monitor/Continuous monitor. In the alternative CB oper monitor the
function is activated only directly in connection to breaker open or close command
(during 200 ms). In the alternative Continuous monitor function is continuously activated.

CurrUnsymPU: Unsymmetrical magnitude of lowest phase current compared to the

highest, set in % of the highest phase current. Natural difference between phase
currents in breaker-and-a-half installations must be considered. For circuit breakers in
breaker-and-a-half configured switch yards there might be natural unbalance currents
through the breaker. This is due to the existence of low impedance current paths in the
switch yard. This phenomenon must be considered in the setting of the parameter.

CurrRelPU: Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase.

8.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)

543
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

8.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

8.11.2 Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to
have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise
undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power

544
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the secondary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from
a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake
may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps
25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is good run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 268 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower protection and
with overpower protection. The underpower protection gives a higher margin and
should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation
immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower
protection (reference angle set to 0) to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower protection (reference angle set to 180) to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

545
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Underpower protection Overpower protection

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC09000019-2-en.vsd
IEC09000019 V2 EN

Figure 268: Reverse power protection with underpower or overpower protection

8.11.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 47.

Table 47: Complex power calculation

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 459)
Arone
S = V AB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 460)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 461)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 462)
BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 463)
Table continues on next page

546
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 464)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 465)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 466)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 467)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

547
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P
Operate

en06000441.vsd
IEC06000441 V1 EN

Figure 269: Underpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 468.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN (Equation 468)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 0° should be used for generator low forward active power
protection.

548
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Operate
Angle1(2) = 0°
P
Power1(2)

en06000556.vsd
IEC06000556 V1 EN

Figure 270: For low forward power the set angle should be 0° in the underpower
function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 469.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN (Equation 469)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 470)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

549
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

8.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)

8.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

8.12.2 Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

550
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to
have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise
undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power
consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a
start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake

551
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps
25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 271 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower IED and with
overpower IED. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better
dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active
power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 271: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.12.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

552
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 48.

Table 48: Complex power calculation

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A,B,C * * *
S = V A × I A + V B × I B + V C × IC
EQUATION2038 V1 EN (Equation 472)
Arone * *
S = V AB × I A - V BC × I C
EQUATION2039 V1 EN (Equation 473)
PosSeq *
S = 3 × V PosSeq × I PosSeq
EQUATION2040 V1 EN (Equation 474)
A,B * *
S = V AB × (I A - I B )
EQUATION2041 V1 EN (Equation 475)
B,C * *
S = V BC × (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN (Equation 476)
C,A * *
S = V CA × (I C - I A )
EQUATION2043 V1 EN (Equation 477)
A *
S = 3 × V A × IA
EQUATION2044 V1 EN (Equation 478)
B *
S = 3 × V B × IB
EQUATION2045 V1 EN (Equation 479)
C *
S = 3 × V C × IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN (Equation 480)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is larger than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

553
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Operate

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P

en06000440.vsd
IEC06000440 V1 EN

Figure 272: Overpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 481.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN (Equation 481)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 180° should be used for generator reverse power protection.

554
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Operate Angle1(2 ) = 180 o

P
Power1(2)

IEC06000557-2-en.vsd
IEC06000557 V2 EN

Figure 273: For reverse power the set angle should be 180° in the overpower function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 482.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN (Equation 482)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

555
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 483)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

The value of TD=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

8.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)

8.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

8.13.2 Application
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) function, consisting of continuous current

556
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED connected will give alarm or trip at
detecting broken conductors.

8.13.3 Setting guidelines

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46) must be set to detect open phase/s (series
faults) with different loads on the line. BRCPTOC (46) must at the same time be set to
not operate for maximum asymmetry which can exist due to, for example, not
transposed power lines.

All settings are in primary values or percentage.

Set IBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) to power line rated current or CT rated current.

Set minimum operating level per phase Pickup_PH to typically 10-20% of rated current.

Set the unsymmetrical current, which is relation between the difference of the
minimum and maximum phase currents to the maximum phase current to typical
Pickup_ub = 50%.

Note that it must be set to avoid problem with asymmetry under

minimum operating conditions.

Set the time delay tOper = 5 - 60 seconds and reset time tReset = 0.010 - 60.000 seconds.

8.14 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

8.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

8.14.2 Application
Shunt capacitor banks (SCBs) are somewhat specific and different from other power
system elements. These specific features of SCB are briefly summarized in this section.

A capacitor unit is the building block used for SCB construction. The capacitor unit is
made up of individual capacitor elements, arranged in parallel or series connections.

557
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Capacitor elements normally consist of aluminum foil, paper, or film-insulated cells

immersed in a biodegradable insulating fluid and are sealed in a metallic container. The
internal discharge resistor is also integrated within the capacitor unit in order to reduce
trapped residual voltage after disconnection of the SCB from the power system. Units
are available in a variety of voltage ratings (240V to 25kV) and sizes (2.5kVAr to
about 1000kVAr). Capacitor unit can be designed with one or two bushings.

The high-voltage SCB is normally constructed using individual capacitor units

connected in series and/or parallel to obtain the required voltage and MVAr rating.
Typically the neighboring capacitor units are mounted in racks. Each rack must be
insulated from the other by insulators because the can casing within each rack are at a
certain potential. Refer figure 274 for an example:

Rack

Capacitor Unit
(Can)

IEC09000753_1_en.vsd
IEC09000753 V1 EN

Figure 274: Replacement of a faulty capacitor unit within SCB

558
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

There are four types of the capacitor unit fusing designs which are used for
construction of SCBs:

Externally where an individual fuse, externally mounted, protects each capacitor unit.
fused
Internally fused where each capacitor element is fused inside the capacitor unit
Fuseless where SCB is built from series connections of the individual capacitor units (that is,
strings) and without any fuses
Unfused where, in contrary to the fuseless configuration, a series or parallel connection of the
capacitor units is used to form SCB, still without any fuses

Which type of fusing is used may depend on can manufacturer or utility preference and
previous experience.

Because the SCBs are built from the individual capacitor units the overall connections
may vary. Typically used SCB configurations are:

1. Delta-connected banks (generally used only at distribution voltages)

2. Single wye-connected banks
3. Double wye-connected banks
4. H-configuration, where each phase is connected in a bridge

Additionally, the SCB star point, when available, can be either grounded , grounded
via impedance or isolated from ground. Which type of SCB grounding is used depends
on voltage level, used circuit breaker, utility preference and previous experience. Many
utilities have standard system grounding principle to ground neutrals of SCB above
100 kV.

Switching of SCB will produce transients in power system. The transient inrush current
during SCB energizing typically has high frequency components and can reach peak
current values, which are multiples of SCB rating. Opening of capacitor bank circuit
breaker may produce step recovery voltages across open CB contact, which can
consequently cause restrikes upon the first interruption of capacitive current. In modern
power system the synchronized CB closing/opening may be utilized in such a manner
that transients caused by SCB switching are avoided.

8.14.2.1 SCB protection

IED protection of shunt capacitor banks requires an understanding of the capabilities

and limitations of the individual capacitor units and associated electrical equipment.
Different types of shunt capacitor bank fusing, configuration or grounding may affect
the IED selection for the protection scheme. Availability and placement of CTs and
VTs can be additional limiting factor during protection scheme design.

559
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

SCB protection schemes are provided in order to detect and clear faults within the
capacitor bank itself or in the connected leads to the substation busbar. Bank protection
may include items such as a means to disconnect a faulted capacitor unit or capacitor
element(s), a means to initiate a shutdown of the bank in case of faults that may lead to
a catastrophic failure and alarms to indicate unbalance within the bank.

Capacitor bank outages and failures are often caused by accidental contact by animals.
Vermin, monkeys, birds, may use the SCB as a resting place or a landing site. When
the animal touches the HV live parts this can result in a flash-over, can rapture or a
cascading failures that might cause extensive damages, fire or even total destruction of
the whole SCB, unless the bank is sufficiently fitted with protection IEDs.

In addition, to fault conditions SCB can be exposed to different types of abnormal

operating conditions. In accordance with IEC and ANSI standards capacitors shall be
capable of continuous operation under contingency system and bank conditions,
provided the following limitations are not exceeded:

1. Capacitor units should be capable of continuous operation including harmonics,

but excluding transients, to 110% of rated IED root-mean-square (RMS) voltage
and a crest voltage not exceeding of rated RMS voltage. The capacitor should also
be able to carry 135% of nominal current. The voltage capability of any series
element of a capacitor unit shall be considered to be its share of the total capacitor
unit voltage capability.
2. Capacitor units should not give less than 100% nor more than 110% of rated
reactive power at rated sinusoidal voltage and frequency, measured at a uniform
case and internal temperature of 25°C.
3. Capacitor units mounted in multiple rows and tiers should be designed for
continuous operation for a 24h average temperature of 40 °C during the hottest
day, or −40 °C during the coldest day expected at the location.
4. Capacitor units should be suitable for continuous operation at up to 135% of rated
reactive power caused by the combined effects of:
• Voltage in excess of the nameplate rating at fundamental frequency, but not
over 110% of rated RMS voltage
• Harmonic voltages superimposed on the fundamental frequency
• Reactive power manufacturing tolerance of up to 115% of rated reactive power
5. Capacitor units rated above 600 V shall have an internal discharge device to
reduce the residual voltage to 50 V or less in 5 or 10 minutes (depending on
national standard).

Note that capacitor units designed for special applications can exceed these ratings.

Thus, as a general rule, the minimum number of capacitor units connected in parallel
within a SCB is such that isolation of one capacitor unit in a group should not cause a
voltage unbalance sufficient to place more than 110% of rated voltage on the
remaining capacitors of that parallel group. Equally, the minimum number of series

560
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

connected groups within a SCB is such that complete bypass of one group should not
pause voltage higher than 110% of the rated voltage on the remaining capacitors of that
serial group. The value of 110% is the maximum continuous overvoltage capability of
capacitor units as per IEEE Std 18-1992.

The SCB typically requires the following types of IED protection:

1. Short circuit protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
PHPIOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
2. Ground-fault protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
EFPIOC, EF4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
3. Current or Voltage based unbalance protection for SCB (can be provided by using
EF4PTOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC or VDCPTOV functions)
4. Overload protection for SCB
5. Undercurrent protection for SCB
6. Reconnection inhibit protection for SCB
7. Restrike condition detection

CBPGAPC function can be used to provide the last four types of protection mentioned
in the above list.

8.14.3 Setting guidelines

This setting example will be done for application as shown in figure 275:

561
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

400kV

Preprocessing Capacitor bank

Function Block protection function
SMAI CBPGAPC

500/1

200MVAr
400kV IED

IEC09000754-1-en.vsd
IEC09000754 V1 EN

Figure 275: Single line diagram for the application example

From figure 275 it is possible to calculate the following rated fundamental frequency
current for this SCB:

1000 × 200[ MVAr ]

Ir = = 289 A
3 × 400[ kV ]
IEC09000755 V1 EN (Equation 484)

or on the secondary CT side:

289 A
I r _ S ec = = 0.578 A
500 1
IEC09000756 V1 EN (Equation 485)

Note that the SCB rated current on the secondary CT side is important for secondary
injection of the function.

The parameters for the Capacitor bank protection function CBPGAPC are set via the
local HMI or PCM600. The following settings are done for this function:

General Settings:

Operation =Enabled; to enable the function

562
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

IBase =289A; Fundamental frequency SCB rated current in primary amperes. This
value is used as a base value for pickup settings of all other features integrated in this
function.

Reconnection inhibit feature:

OperationRecIn =Enabled; to enable this feature

IRecInhibit =10% (of IBase); Current level under which function will detect that SCB
is disconnected from the power system

tReconnInhibit =300s; Time period under which SCB shall discharge remaining
residual voltage to less than 5%.

Overcurrent feature:

OperationOC =Enabled; to enable this feature

PU 51 =135% (of IBase); Current level for overcurrent pickup. Selected value gives
pickup recommended by international standards.

tOC =30s; Time delay for overcurrent trip

Undercurrent feature:

Operation37 =Enabled; to enable this feature

PU_37 =70% (of IBase); Current level for undercurrent pickup

tUC =5s; Time delay for undercurrent trip

Undercurrent feature is blocked by operation of Reconnection inhibit

feature.

Reactive power overload feature:

Operation QOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

UP_QOL =130% (of SCB MVAr rating); Reactive power level required for pickup.
Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

tQOL =60s; Time delay for reactive power overload trip

Harmonic voltage overload feature:

OperationHOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

563
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Settings for definite time delay step

HOL_DT_V =200% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup

tHOL_DT =10s; Definite time delay for harmonic overload trip

Settings for IDMT delay step

PU_HOL_DT_V =110% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup of
IDMT stage. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

k_HOL_IDMT =1.0; Time multiplier for IDMT stage. Selected value gives operate
time in accordance with international standards

tMax_HOL_IDMT =2000s; Maximum time delay for IDMT stage for very low level of
harmonic overload

tMin_HOL_IDMT =0.1s; Minimum time delay for IDMT stage. Selected value gives
operate time in accordance with international standards

8.14.3.1 Restrike detection

Opening of SCBs can be quite problematic for certain types of circuit breakers (CBs).
Typically such problems are manifested as CB restrikes.

In simple words this means that the CB is not breaking the current at the first zero
crossing after separation of the CB contacts. Instead current is re-ignited and only
braked at consecutive current zero crossings. This condition is manifested as high
current pulses at the moment of current re-ignition.

To detect this CB condition, the built in overcurrent feature can be used. Simply, any
start of the overcurrent feature during breaker normal opening means a restrike.
Therefore simple logic can be created in the Application Configuration tool to detect
such CB behavior. Such CB condition can be just alarmed, and if required, the built in
disturbance recorder can also be triggered.

To create this logic, a binary signal that the CB is going to be opened (but not trip
command) shall be made available to the IED.

8.15 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC (46I2)

564
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

8.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence time overcurrent NS2PTOC 2I2> 46I2
protection for machines

8.15.2 Application
Negative sequence overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC (46I2) is intended
primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the rotor
caused by negative sequence component in the stator current.

The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:

• Unbalanced loads
• Line to line faults
• Line to ground faults
• Broken conductors
• Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector

NS2PTOC (46I2) can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the
generator in the event line protections or circuit breakers fail to perform for unbalanced
system faults.

To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced conditions,
NS2PTOC (46I2) is able to directly measure the negative sequence current. NS2PTOC
(46I2) also have a time delay characteristic which matches the heating characteristic of
the generator I22t = K as defined in standard.

where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current

t is operating time in seconds

K is a constant which depends of the generators size and design

A wide range of I22t settings is available, which provide the sensitivity and capability
necessary to detect and trip for negative sequence currents down to the continuous
capability of a generator.

A separate output is available as an alarm feature to warn the operator of a potentially

dangerous situation.

565
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

8.15.2.1 Features

Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection NS2PTOC (46I2) is designed to

provide a reliable protection for generators of all types and sizes against the effect of
unbalanced system conditions.

The following features are available:

• Two steps, independently adjustable, with separate tripping outputs.

• Sensitive protection, capable of detecting and tripping for negative sequence
currents down to 3% of rated generator current with high accuracy.
• Two time delay characteristics:
• Definite time delay
• Inverse time delay
• 2
The inverse time overcurrent characteristic matches I 2 t = K capability curve of
the generators.
• Wide range of settings for generator capability constant K is provided, from 1 to
99 seconds, as this constant may vary greatly with the type of generator.
• Minimum trip time delay for inverse time characteristic, freely settable. This
setting assures appropriate coordination with, for example, line protections.
• Maximum trip time delay for inverse time characteristic, freely settable.
• Inverse reset characteristic which approximates generator rotor cooling rates and
provides reduced operate time if an unbalance reoccurs before the protection resets.
• Service value that is, measured negative sequence current value, in primary
Amperes, is available through the local HMI.

8.15.2.2 Generator continuous unbalance current capability

During unbalanced loading, negative sequence current flows in the stator winding.
Negative sequence current in the stator winding will induce double frequency current
in the rotor surface and cause heating in almost all parts of the generator rotor.

When the negative sequence current increases beyond the generator’s continuous
unbalance current capability, the rotor temperature will increase. If the generator is not
tripped, a rotor failure may occur. Therefore, industry standards has been established
that determine generator continuous and short-time unbalanced current capabilities in
2
terms of negative sequence current I2 and rotor heating criteria I 2 t .

Typical short-time capability (referred to as unbalanced fault capability) expressed in

2
terms of rotor heating criterion I 2 t = K is shown below in Table 49.

566
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

Table 49: ANSI requirements for unbalanced faults on synchronous machines

Types of Synchronous Machine
Permissible
I 22t = K [ s ]
Salient pole generator 40
Synchronous condenser 30
Cylindrical rotor generators: Indirectly cooled 30
Directly cooled (0 – 800 MVA) 10
Directly cooled (801 – 1600 MVA) See Figure 276

2
Fig 276 shows a graphical representation of the relationship between generator I 2 t
capability and generator MVA rating for directly cooled (conductor cooled) generators.
For example, a 500 MVA generator would have K = 10 seconds and a 1600 MVA
generator would have K = 5 seconds. Unbalanced short-time negative sequence current
I2 is expressed in per unit of rated generator current and time t in seconds.

en08000358.vsd
IEC08000358 V1 EN

Figure 276: Short-time unbalanced current capability of direct cooled generators

Continuous I2 - capability of generators is also covered by the standard. Table 50

below (from ANSI standard C50.13) contains the suggested capability:

567
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Table 50: Continous I2 capability

Type of generator Permissible I2 (in percent of rated

generator current)
Salient Pole: with damper winding 10
without damper winding 5
Cylindrical Rotor
Indirectly cooled 10
Directly cooled
to 960 MVA 8
961 to 1200 MVA 6
1201 to 1500 MVA 5

As it is described in the table above that the continuous negative sequence current
capability of the generator is in range of 5% to 10% of the rated generator current.
During an open conductor or open generator breaker pole condition, the negative
sequence current can be in the range of 10% to 30% of the rated generator current.
Other generator or system protections will not usually detect this condition and the
only protection is the negative sequence overcurrent protection.

Negative sequence currents in a generator may be caused by:

• Unbalanced loads such as

• Single phase railroad load
• Unbalanced system faults such as
• Line to ground faults
• Double line to ground faults
• Line to line faults
• Open conductors, includes
• Broken line conductors
• Malfunction of one pole of a circuit breaker
.

8.15.3 Setting guidelines

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

568
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

8.15.3.1 Operate time characteristic

Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC (46I2)

provides two operating time delay characteristics for step 1 and 2:

• Definite time delay characteristic

• Inverse time delay characteristic

The desired operate time delay characteristic is selected by setting CurveType1 as follows:
• CurveType1 = Definite
• CurveType1 = Inverse

Definite time delay is independent of the magnitude of the negative sequence current
once the pickup value is exceeded, while inverse time delay characteristic do depend
on the magnitude of the negative sequence current.

This means that inverse time delay is long for a small overcurrent and becomes
progressively shorter as the magnitude of the negative sequence current increases.
Inverse time delay characteristic of the NS2PTOC (46I2) function is represented in the
2
equation I 2 t = K , where the K1 setting is adjustable over the range of 1 – 99 seconds.
A typical inverse time overcurrent curve is shown in Figure 277.

569
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

Negative sequence inverse time characteristic

10000

tMax
1000
Time delay

100

10 tMin

1
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
I2
Negative sequence current
IEC08000355-2-en.vsd

IEC08000355 V2 EN

Figure 277: Inverse Time Delay characteristic, step 1

The example in figure 277 indicates that the protection function has a set minimum trip
time t1Min of 5 sec. The setting t1Min is freely settable and is used as a security
measure. This minimum setting assures appropriate coordination with for example line
protections. It is also possible to set the upper time limit, t1Max.

8.15.3.2 Pickup sensitivity

The trip pickup levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC (46I2) are freely settable
over a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of pickup
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.

After pickup, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting pickup levels. For both steps
the reset ratio is 0.97.

8.15.3.3 Alarm function

The alarm function is operated by PICKUP signal and used to warn the operator for an
abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence current
capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before removing

570
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the alarm
function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.

8.16 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC (51V)

8.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

8.16.2 Application
A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and
ground results in a short-circuit or a ground fault. Such faults can result in large fault
currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment.

A typical application of the voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection is in the

generator protection system, where it is used as backup protection. If a phase-to-phase
fault affects a generator, the fault current amplitude is a function of time, and it
depends on generator characteristic (reactances and time constants), its load conditions
(immediately before the fault) and excitation system performance and characteristic.
So the fault current amplitude may decay with time. A voltage-restrained overcurrent
relay can be set in order to remain in the picked-up state in spite of the current decay,
and perform a backup trip in case of failure of the main protection.

The IED can be provided with a voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

(VRPVOC, 51V). The VRPVOC (51V) function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure the maximum phase current and the minimum phase-to-phase voltage.

VRPVOC (51V) function module has two independent protection each consisting of:

• One overcurrent step with the following built-in features:

• Selectable definite time delay or Inverse Time IDMT characteristic
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-
up level of the overcurrent stage in proportion to the magnitude of the
measured voltage
• One undervoltage step with the following built-in feature:

571
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

• Definite time delay

The undervoltage function can be enabled or disabled. Sometimes in order to obtain

desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between the two
protection elements within the VRPVOC (51V) function by appropriate IED
configuration (for example, overcurrent protection with under-voltage seal-in).

8.16.2.1 Base quantities

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.

VBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

8.16.2.2 Application possibilities

VRPVOC (51V) function can be used in one of the following three applications:

• voltage controlled over-current

• voltage restrained over-current
• overcurrent protection with under-voltage seal-in.

8.16.2.3 Undervoltage seal-in

In the case of a generator with a static excitation system, which receives its power from
the generator terminals, the magnitude of a sustained phase short-circuit current
depends on the generator terminal voltage. In case of a nearby multi-phase fault, the
generator terminal voltage may drop to quite low level, for example, less than 25%,
and the generator fault current may consequently fall below the pickup level of the
overcurrent protection. The short-circuit current may drop below the generator rated
current after 0.5...1 s. Also, for generators with an excitation system not fed from the
generator terminals, a fault can occur when the automatic voltage regulator is out of
service. In such cases, to ensure tripping under such conditions, overcurrent protection
with undervoltage seal-in can be used.

To apply the VRPVOC(51V) function, the configuration is done according to figure

278. As seen in the figure, the pickup of the overcurrent stage will enable the
undervoltage stage. Once enabled, the undervoltage stage will start a timer, which
causes function tripping, if the voltage does not recover above the set value. To ensure
a proper reset, the function is blocked two seconds after the trip signal is issued.

572
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

VRPVOC (51V)
I3P* TRIP
Trip output
OR I3P*
V3P* TROC TRIP
V3P*
BLOCK TROC
27 Trip
t
BLOCK
BLKOC 27 Trip
PICKUP
OR BLKOC
BLKUV PICKUP
PU_OC
BLKUV 27PU_OC
PU
27 PU

ANSI12000183-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000183 V1 EN

Figure 278: Undervoltage seal-in of current pickup

8.16.3 Setting guidelines

8.16.3.1 Explanation of the setting parameters

Operation: Set to On in order to activate the function; set to Off to switch off the
complete function.

Pickup_Curr: Operation phase current level given in % of IBase.

Characterist: Selection of time characteristic: Definite time delay and different types
of inverse time characteristics are available; see Technical Manual for details.

tDef_OC: Definite time delay. It is used if definite time characteristic is chosen; it shall
be set to 0 s if the inverse time characteristic is chosen and no additional delay shall be
added.

k: Time multiplier for inverse time delay.

tMin: Minimum operation time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operation_UV: it sets On/Off the operation of the under-voltage stage.

PickUp_Volt: Operation phase-to-phase voltage level given in % of VBase for the under-
voltage stage. Typical setting may be, for example, in the range from 70% to 80% of
the rated voltage of the generator.

573
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

tDef_UV: Definite time delay. Since it is related to a backup protection function, a long
time delay (for example 0.5 s or more) is typically used.

EnBlkLowV: This parameter enables the internal block of the undervoltage stage for
low voltage condition; the voltage level is defined by the parameter BlkLowVolt.

BlkLowVolt: Voltage level under which the internal blocking of the undervoltage stage
is activated; it is set in % of VBase. This setting must be lower than the setting
StartVolt. The setting can be very low, for example, lower than 10%.

VDepMode: Selection of the characteristic of the start level of the overcurrent stage as
a function of the phase-to-phase voltage; two options are available: Slope and Step. See
Technical Manual for details about the characteristics.

VDepFact: Slope mode: it is the pickup level of the overcurrent stage given in % of
Pickup_Curr when the voltage is lower than 25% of VBase; so it defines the first point
of the characteristic (VDepFact*Pickup_Curr/100*IBase ; 0.25*VBase).

Step mode: it is the pickup level of the overcurrent stage given in % of Pickup_Curr
when the voltage is lower than VHighLimit/100*VBase.

VHighLimit: when the measured phase-to-phase voltage is higher than VHighLimit/

100*VBase, than the pickup level of the overcurrent stage is Pickup_Curr/100*IBase.
In particular, in Slope mode it define the second point of the characteristic
(Pickup_Curr/100*IBase ; VHighLimit/100*VBase).

8.16.3.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer

An example of how to use VRPVOC (51V) function to provide voltage restrained

overcurrent protection for a generator is given below. Let us assume that the time
coordination study gives the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current IDMT curve: IEC very inverse, with multiplier k=1
• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages
below 25% of rated voltage

To ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Set Operation to Enabled

2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values
Group with VBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the
rated phase current of the generator.
3. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to VRPVOC (51V) in the
application configuration.

574
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 8
Current protection

4. Select Characterist to match type of overcurrent curves used in the network IEC
Very inv.
5. Set the multiplier k = 1 (default value).
6. Set tDef_OC = 0.00 s, in order to add no additional delay to the trip time defined
by the inverse time characteristic.
7. If required, set the minimum operating time for this curve by using the parameter
t_MinTripDelay (default value 0.05 s).
8. Set PickupCurr to the value 185%.
9. Set VDepMode to Slope (default value).
10. Set VDepFact to the value 25% (default value).
11. Set VHighLimit to the value 100% (default value).

All other settings can be left at the default values.

8.16.3.3 Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in

To obtain this functionality, the IED application configuration shall include a logic in
accordance to figure 278 and, of course, the relevant three-phase generator currents and
voltages shall be connected to VRPVOC. Let us assume that, taking into account the
characteristic of the generator, the excitation system and the short circuit study, the
following settings are required:

• Pickup current of the overcurrent stage: 150% of generator rated current at rated
generator voltage;
• Pickup voltage of the undervoltage stage: 70% of generator rated voltage;
• Trip time: 3.0 s.

The overcurrent stage and the undervoltage stage shall be set in the following way:
1. Set Operation to Enabled.
2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values
Group with VBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the
rated phase current of the generator.
3. Set StartCurr to the value 150%.
4. Set Characteristic to IEC Def. Time.
5. Set tDef_OC to 6000.00 s, if no trip of the overcurrent stage is required.
6. Set VDepFact to the value 100% in order to ensure that the pickup value of the
overcurrent stage is constant, irrespective of the magnitude of the generator voltage.
7. Set Operation_UV to Enabled to activate the undervoltage stage.
8. Set StartVolt to the values 70%.
9. Set tDef_UV to 3.0 s.
10. Set EnBlkLowV to Disabled (default value) to disable the cut-off level for low-
voltage of the undervoltage stage.

575
Application Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Current protection

The other parameters may be left at their default value.

576
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

Section 9 Voltage protection

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

9.1.2 Application
Two-step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV ,27) is applicable in all
situations, where reliable detection of low phase voltages is necessary. It is used also as
a supervision and fault detection function for other protection functions, to increase the
security of a complete protection system.

UV2PTUV (27) is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,

motors and power lines in order to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage
conditions are caused by abnormal operation or fault in the power system. UV2PTUV
(27) is used in combination with overcurrent protections, either as restraint or in logic
"and gates" of the trip signals issued by the two functions. Other applications are the
detection of "no voltage" condition, for example, before the energization of a HV line
or for automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout. UV2PTUV (27) is also used to
initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt capacitor banks to
compensate for reactive load and thereby increasing the voltage. The function has a
high measuring accuracy and setting hysteresis to allow applications to control reactive
load.

UV2PTUV (27) is used to disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be
damaged when subject to service under low voltage conditions. UV2PTUV (27) deals
with low voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by the
following reasons:

577
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

1. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control

(symmetrical voltage decrease).
2. Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Short circuits, often as phase-to-ground faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease).

UV2PTUV (27) prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that
could cause their overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many
cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the
power system.

9.1.3 Setting guidelines

All the voltage conditions in the system where UV2PTUV (27) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used.
All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of the settings base voltage VBase
and base current IBase, which normally is set to the primary rated voltage level (phase-
to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

The setting for UV2PTUV (27) is normally not critical, since there must be enough
time available for the main protection to clear short circuits andground faults.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are described in
the following sections.

9.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage for the equipment.

9.1.3.2 Disconnected equipment detection

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is
disconnected.

9.1.3.3 Power supply quality

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

578
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.3.4 Voltage instability mitigation

This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough
studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.

9.1.3.5 Backup protection for power system faults

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.

9.1.3.6 Settings for Two step undervoltage protection

The following settings can be done for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
(27):

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase-to-phase in primary kV. This

voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. UV2PTUV (27) measures selectively
phase-to-ground voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType.
The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of VBase.
When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides
set value for VBase by √3. VBase is used when ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh
RMS. Therefore, always set VBase as rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of the
protected object. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:

V < (%) × VBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1711 V1 EN (Equation 486)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 487)

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore, the setting parameters are described only once.

579
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Prog. inv. curve. The selection
is dependent on the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that
should be below the set level to give operation for step n. The setting can be 1 out of 3,
2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. In most applications, it is sufficient that one phase voltage is
low to give operation. If UV2PTUV (27) shall be insensitive for single phase-to-
ground faults, 2 out of 3 can be chosen. In subtransmission and transmission networks
the undervoltage function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is
selected.

Pickupn: Set operate undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of the
parameter VBase. The setting is highly dependent of the protection application. It is
essential to consider the minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this
voltage is larger than 90% of nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. This setting is dependent of the protection
application. In many applications the protection function shall not directly trip when
there is a short circuit or ground faults in the system. The time delay must be
coordinated to the short circuit protections.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
When using inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage function during very low
voltages can give a short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting
t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can
be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set to

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting isInstantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for
coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under
voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical
reference manual.

CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal
to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity.
Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In

580
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

the voltage interval Pickup> down to Pickup> · (1.0 - CrvSatn/100) the used voltage
will be: Pickup> · (1.0 - CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this
parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN (Equation 488)

IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set to Disabled, Block of trip, Block all. In case of a
low voltage the undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to
prevent function when the protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block
of trip or Block all unwanted trip is prevented.

IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of VBase.
This setting must be lower than the setting Pickupn. As switch of shall be detected the
setting can be very low, that is, about 10%.

tBlkUVn: Time delay to block the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below
IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the operate time
delay of the undervoltage protection step.

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

9.2.2 Application
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high voltage is necessary. OV2PTOV (59) is used for supervision
and detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection
functions, increase the security of a complete protection system.

581
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

High overvoltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system.
OV2PTOV (59) is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,
motors and power lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. OV2PTOV (59) is
used in combination with low current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in
the remote end. In addition to that, OV2PTOV (59) is also used to initiate voltage
correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors, to compensate for low load, and
thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and
hysteresis setting to allow applications to control reactive load.

OV2PTOV (59) is used to disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be
damaged when subject to service under high voltage conditions. It deals with high
voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by:

1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power
system, like metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor
falling down to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high
voltage winding to the low voltage winding and so on).
2. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage decrease).
4. Ground-faults in high impedance grounded systems causes, beside the high
voltage in the neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical
voltage increase).

OV2PTOV (59) prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that
could cause their overheating or stress of insulation material, and, thus, shorten their
life time expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or
remote automation processes in the power system.

9.2.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

All the voltage conditions in the system where OV2PTOV (59) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There is a very wide application area where general overvoltage functions are used. All
voltage related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage,
which normally is set to the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power
system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for the OV2PTOV (59) can sometimes be critical and related to the size
of the overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand smaller

582
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

overvoltages for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment
should be disconnected more rapidly.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given below:

The hysteresis is for overvoltage functions very important to prevent that a transient
voltage over set level is not “sealed-in” due to a high hysteresis. Typical values should
be ≤ 0.5%.

9.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformers

High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding
insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and
well below the highest acceptable voltage for the equipment.

9.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be
well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest
acceptable voltage for the capacitor.

9.2.3.3 Power supply quality

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the
highest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

9.2.3.4 High impedance grounded systems

In high impedance grounded systems, ground-faults cause a voltage increase in the non-
faulty phases. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is used to detect such
faults. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the
lowest occurring voltage during faults. A metallic single-phase ground-fault causes the
non-faulted phase voltages to increase a factor of √3.

9.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage protection

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled.

583
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This
voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. OV2PTOV (59) measures selectively
phase-to-ground voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType.
The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of VBase.
When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides
set value for VBase by √3. When ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set
value for VBase is used. Therefore, always set VBase as rated primary phase-to-phase
ground voltage of the protected object. If phase to neutral (PhN) measurement is
selected as setting, the operation of phase-to-earth over voltage is automatically
divided by sqrt3. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:

V > (%) × VBase( kV ) / 3

EQUATION1713 V2 EN (Equation 489)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 490)

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Inverse Curve C or I/Prog. inv.
curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that
should be above the set level to give operation. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3,
3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give
operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase-to-ground faults 1 out of
3 can be chosen, because the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at
single phase-to-ground faults. In subtransmission and transmission networks the UV
function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is selected.

Pickupn: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of VBase. The
setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider
the maximum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than
110% of nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection
application. In many applications the protection function is used to prevent damages to
the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of
transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-ordinated with other
automated actions in the system.

584
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set:

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under
voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical
reference manual.

CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal
to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity.
Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the
voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used, this parameter must
be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN (Equation 491)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of VBase. The setting of this parameter is

highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic
switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the
voltage change after switching of the compensation device.

585
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N)

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN

9.3.2 Application
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is primarily used in high
impedance grounded distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary ground
fault protection of the feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different
ground fault related functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release
signal. The residual voltage can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a
voltage transformer open delta connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated
internally, based on measurement of the three-phase voltages.

In high impedance grounded systems the residual voltage will increase in case of any
fault connected to ground. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the
residual voltage will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to three
times the phase-to-ground voltage, is achieved for a single phase-to-ground fault. The
residual voltage increases approximately to the same level in the whole system and
does not provide any guidance in finding the faulted component. Therefore,
ROV2PTOV (59N) is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the
feeder ground fault protection.

9.3.3 Setting guidelines

All the voltage conditions in the system where ROV2PTOV (59N) performs its
functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
voltage and time characteristic.

There is a very wide application area where general single input or residual
overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related settings are made as a percentage of
a settable base voltage, which can be set to the primary nominal voltage (phase-phase)
level of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

586
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

The time delay for ROV2PTOV (59N) is seldom critical, since residual voltage is
related to ground faults in a high impedance grounded system, and enough time must
normally be given for the primary protection to clear the fault. In some more specific
situations, where the single overvoltage protection is used to protect some specific
equipment, the time delay is shorter.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given
below.

9.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformers

High residual voltage indicates ground fault in the system, perhaps in the component to
which Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is connected. For
selectivity reasons to the primary protection for the faulted device ROV2PTOV (59N)
must trip the component with some time delay. The setting must be above the highest
occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage
for the equipment

9.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectric and the insulation. Two step residual
overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) has to be connected to a neutral or open
delta winding. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual
voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.

9.3.3.3 Power supply quality

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below
the highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other
agreements.

9.3.3.4 High impedance grounded systems

In high impedance grounded systems, ground faults cause a neutral voltage in the
feeding transformer neutral. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
(59N) is used to trip the transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder ground fault
protection, and as a backup for the transformer primary ground fault protection. The
setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage, and below the
lowest occurring residual voltage during the faults under consideration. A metallic single-
phase ground fault causes a transformer neutral to reach a voltage equal to the nominal
phase-to-ground voltage.

587
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

The voltage transformers measuring the phase-to-ground voltages measure zero

voltage in the faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase-to-phase
voltage, as the faulty phase will be connected to ground. The residual overvoltage will
be three times the phase-to-ground voltage. See figure 279.

V_A
F

V_
C
V_

BF
C V_
V_ B
3V0

CF
V_

ANSI07000190-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000190 V1 EN

Figure 279: Ground fault in Non-effectively grounded systems

588
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.3.3.5 Direct grounded system

In direct grounded systems, an ground fault on one phase indicates a voltage collapse
in that phase. The two healthy phases will have normal phase-to-ground voltages. The
residual sum will have the same value as the remaining phase-to-ground voltage. See
figure 280.

V_A

F
IL1
F
V_A
V_
B
3V0

C C V_
V_ V_ B

ANSI07000189-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000189 V1 EN

Figure 280: Ground fault in Direct grounded system

9.3.3.6 Settings for Two step residual overvoltage protection

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) is used as voltage reference for the voltage. The
voltage can be fed to the IED in different ways:
1. The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual
voltage is calculated internally from the phase-to-ground voltages within the
protection. The setting of the analogue input is given as VBase=Vph-ph.
2. The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group.
In an open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3V0 (single input).

589
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

The Setting chapter in the application manual explains how the analog input needs
to be set.
3. The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of
a power transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed
by the voltage VN=V0 (single input). The Setting chapter in the application
manual explains how the analog input needs to be set. ROV2PTOV (59N) will
measure the residual voltage corresponding nominal phase-to-ground voltage for a
high impedance grounded system. The measurement will be based on the neutral
voltage displacement.

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = step 1 and
2). Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: Selected inverse time characteristic for step n. This parameter gives
the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be, Definite time or Inverse curve A
or Inverse curve B or Inverse curve C or Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly
dependent of the protection application.

Pickupn: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual
voltage corresponding to VBase:

V > ( % ) × VBase ( kV ) 3
ANSIEQUATION2290 V1 EN (Equation 492)

The setting is dependent of the required sensitivity of the protection and the system
grounding. In non-effectively grounded systems the residual voltage can be maximum
the rated phase-to-ground voltage, which should correspond to 100%.

In effectively grounded systems this value is dependent of the ratio Z0/Z1. The
required setting to detect high resistive ground faults must be based on network
calculations.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection
application. In many applications, the protection function has the task to prevent
damages to the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of
protection of transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-
ordinated with other automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

590
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

ResetTypeCrvn: Set reset type curve for step n. This parameter can be set:
Instantaneous,Frozen time,Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters for step n, to set to create
programmable undervoltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be
found in the technical reference manual.

CrvSatn: Set tuning parameter for step n. When the denominator in the expression of
the programmable curve is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/
100) the used voltage will be: Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN (Equation 493)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis for step n, set in % of VBase. The setting of this
parameter is highly dependent of the application.

9.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

9.4.2 Application
When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density
beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not

591
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause
excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively
short time.

Overvoltage, or underfrequency, or a combination of both, will result in an excessive

flux density level, which is denominated overfluxing or over-excitation.

The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the generator-
transformer block is disconnected from the rest of the network, or in network “islands”
occuring at disturbance where high voltages and/or low frequencies can occur.
Overexcitation can occur during start-up and shut-down of the generator if the field
current is not properly adjusted. Loss-of load or load-shedding can also result in
overexcitation if the voltage control and frequency governor is not functioning
properly. Loss of load or load-shedding at a transformer substation can result in
overexcitation if the voltage control function is insufficient or out of order. Low
frequency in a system isolated from the main network can result in overexcitation if the
voltage regulating system maintains normal voltage.

According to the IEC standards, the power transformers shall be capable of delivering
rated load current continuously at an applied voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated
frequency). For special cases, the purchaser may specify that the transformer shall be
capable of operating continuously at an applied voltage 110% of rated value at no load,
reduced to 105% at rated secondary load current.

According to ANSI/IEEE standards, the transformers shall be capable of delivering

rated load current continuously at an output voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated
frequency) and operate continuously with output voltage equal to 110% of rated value
at no load.

The capability of a transformer (or generator) to withstand overexcitation can be

illustrated in the form of a thermal capability curve, that is, a diagram which shows the
permissible time as a function of the level of over-excitation. When the transformer is
loaded, the induced voltage and hence the flux density in the core can not be read off
directly from the transformer terminal voltage. Normally, the leakage reactance of each
separate winding is not known and the flux density in the transformer core can then not
be calculated. In two-winding transformers, the low voltage winding is normally
located close to the core and the voltage across this winding reflects the flux density in
the core. However, depending on the design, the flux flowing in the yoke may be
critical for the ability of the transformer to handle excess flux.

The Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) has current inputs to allow calculation
of the load influence on the induced voltage. This gives a more exact measurement of
the magnetizing flow. For power transformers with unidirectional load flow, the
voltage to OEXPVPH (24) should therefore be taken from the feeder side.

592
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

Heat accumulated in critical parts during a period of overexcitation will be reduced

gradually when the excitation returns to the normal value. If a new period of
overexcitation occurs after a short time interval, the heating will start from a higher
level, therefore, OEXPVPH (24) must have thermal memory. A fixed cooling time
constant is settable within a wide range.

The general experience is that the overexcitation characteristics for a number of power
transformers are not in accordance with standard inverse time curves. In order to make
optimal settings possible, a transformer adapted characteristic is available in the IED.
The operate characteristic of the protection function can be set to correspond quite well
with any characteristic by setting the operate time for six different figures of
overexcitation in the range from 100% to 180% of rated V/Hz.

When configured to a single phase-to-phase voltage input, a corresponding phase-to-

phase current is calculated which has the same phase angle relative the phase-to-phase
voltage as the phase currents have relative the phase voltages in a symmetrical system.
The function should preferably be configured to use a three-phase voltage input if
available. It then uses the positive sequence quantities of voltages and currents.

Analog measurements shall not be taken from any winding where a

load tap changer is located.

Some different connection alternatives are shown in figure 281.

24

24
24

en05000208_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000208 V1 EN

Figure 281: Alternative connections of an Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)

(Volt/Hertz)

593
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

9.4.3 Setting guidelines

9.4.3.1 Recommendations for input and output signals

Recommendations for Input signals

Please see the default factory configuration.

BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the Overexcitation protection
OEXPVPH (24), for example, the block input can be used to block the operation for a
limited time during special service conditions.

RESET: OEXPVPH (24) has a thermal memory, which can take a long time to reset.
Activation of the RESET input will reset the function instantaneously.

Recommendations for Output signals

Please see the default factory configuration for examples of configuration.

ERROR: The output indicates a measuring error. The reason, for example, can be
configuration problems where analogue signals are missing.

BFI: The BFI output indicates that the level Pickup1> has been reached. It can be used
to initiate time measurement.

TRIP: The TRIP output is activated after the operate time for the V/f level has expired.
TRIP signal is used to trip the circuit breaker(s).

ALARM: The output is activated when the alarm level has been reached and the alarm
timer has elapsed. When the system voltage is high this output sends an alarm to the
operator.

9.4.3.2 Settings

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: The operation of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) can be set
to Enabled/Disabled.

MeasuredV: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. Normally the three
phase measurement measuring the positive sequence voltage should be used but when
only individual VT's are used a single phase-to-phase can be used.

MeasuredI: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. MeasuredI: must be
in accordance with MeasuredV.

594
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

Pickup1: Operating level for the inverse characteristic, IEEE or tailor made. The
operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as
a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 108-110% depending of the capability
curve for the transformer/generator.

Pickup2: Operating level for the t_MinTripDelay definite time delay used at high
overvoltages. The operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated
frequency and set as a percentage factor. Normal setting is around 110-180%
depending of the capability curve of the transformer/generator. Setting should be above
the knee-point when the characteristic starts to be straight on the high side.

XLeakage: The transformer leakage reactance on which the compensation of voltage

measurement with load current is based. The setting shall be the transformer leak
reactance in primary ohms. If no current compensation is used (mostly the case) the
setting is not used.

t_TripPulse: The length of the trip pulse. Normally the final trip pulse is decided by the
trip function block. A typical pulse length can be 50 ms.

CurveType: Selection of the curve type for the inverse delay. The IEEE curves or tailor
made curve can be selected depending of which one matches the capability curve best.

TDforIEEECurve: The time constant for the inverse characteristic. Select the one
giving the best match to the transformer capability.

t_CooolingK: The cooling time constant giving the reset time when voltages drops
below the set value. Shall be set above the cooling time constant of the transformer.
The default value is recommended to be used if the constant is not known.

t_MinTripDelay: The operating times at voltages higher than the set Pickup2. The
setting shall match capabilities on these high voltages. Typical setting can be 1-10 second.

t_MaxTripDelay: For overvoltages close to the set value times can be extremely long if
a high K time constant is used. A maximum time can then be set to cut the longest
times. Typical settings are 1800-3600 seconds (30-60 minutes)

AlarmPickup: Setting of the alarm level in percentage of the set trip level. The alarm
level is normally set at around 98% of the trip level.

tAlarm: Setting of the time to alarm is given from when the alarm level has been
reached. Typical setting is 5 seconds.

9.4.3.3 Service value report

A number of internal parameters are available as service values for use at

commissioning and during service. Remaining time to trip (in seconds) TMTOTRIP,

595
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

flux density VPERHZ, internal thermal content in percentage of trip value

THERMSTA. The values are available at local HMI, Substation SAsystem and PCM600.

9.4.3.4 Setting example

Sufficient information about the overexcitation capability of the protected object(s)

must be available when making the settings. The most complete information is given in
an overexcitation capability diagram as shown in figure 282.

The settings Pickup2 and Pickup1 are made in per unit of the rated voltage of the
transformer winding at rated frequency.

Set the transformer adapted curve for a transformer with overexcitation characteristics
in according to figure 282.

Pickup1 for the protection is set equal to the permissible continuous overexcitation
according to figure 282 = 105%. When the overexcitation is equal to Pickup1, tripping
is obtained after a time equal to the setting of t1.

This is the case when VBase is equal to the transformer rated voltages.
For other values, the percentage settings need to be adjusted accordingly.

When the overexcitation is equal to the set value of Pickup2, tripping is obtained after
a time equal to the setting of t6. A suitable setting would be Pickup2 = 140% and t6 =
4 s.

The interval between Pickup2 and Pickup1 is automatically divided up in five equal
steps, and the time delays t2 to t5 will be allocated to these values of overexcitation. In
this example, each step will be (140-105) /5 = 7%. The setting of time delays t1 to t6
are listed in table 51.

Table 51: Settings

V/f op (%) Timer Time set (s)
105 t1 7200 (max)
112 t2 600
119 t3 60
126 t4 20
133 t5 8
140 t6 4

Information on the cooling time constant Tcool should be retrieved from the power
transformer manufacturer.

596
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

V/Hz
%

150

transformer capability curve

relay operate characteristic

140

130

120

110

Continous

100
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 Time
(minutes)
t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1

en01000377.vsd

IEC01000377 V1 EN

Figure 282: Example on overexcitation capability curve and V/Hz protection

settings for power transformer

9.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)

9.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

9.5.2 Application
The Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) functions can be used in some
different applications.

• Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is
supervised with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference

597
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

indicates a fault, either short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It is

mainly used on elements with external fuses but can also be used on elements with
internal fuses instead of a current unbalance protection measuring the current
between the neutrals of two half’s of the capacitor bank. The function requires
voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor bank. Figure 283 shows some
different alternative connections of this function.

V1

Vd>L1
Single grounded wye
V2

Ph C Ph B

Vd>A Double wye

V1 V2

Ph C Ph B Ph C Ph B
en06000390_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000390 V1 EN

Figure 283: Connection of voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) function to

detect unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)

VDCPTOV (60) function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision
(or MCB tripped) can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor
bank voltage transformer set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is
connected to input V2). It will also ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a
Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm and/or tripping.

Fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) function for voltage transformers. In many

application the voltages of two fuse groups of the same voltage transformer or fuse
groups of two separate voltage transformers measuring the same voltage can be
supervised with this function. It will be an alternative for example, generator units
where often two voltage transformers are supplied for measurement and excitation
equipment.

598
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

The application to supervise the voltage on two voltage transformers in the generator
circuit is shown in figure 284.

To Protection
V1
Vd>
v2
To Excitation

Gen en06000389_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000389 V1 EN

Figure 284: Supervision of fuses on generator circuit voltage transformers

9.5.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings are done for the voltage differential function.

Operation: Off/On

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

BlkDiffAtVLow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are
low.

RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences
between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different
voltage transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside
the capacitor bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be
used by voltage drop in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by
evaluating the differential voltage achieved as a service value for each phase. The

599
Application Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Voltage protection

factor is defined as V2 · RFLx and shall be equal to the V1 voltage. Each phase has its
own ratio factor.

VDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be
tripped before excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting
values required are normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other
applications it has to be decided case by case. For fuse supervision normally only the
alarm level is used.

tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally, the delay does not
need to be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent
tripping.

tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter.
Normally, it can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur.

For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default
values are here expected to be acceptable.

V1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

V2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by
this parameter.

VDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required
are given by capacitor bank supplier.

For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level
is 3-5% if the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during commissioning.

For other applications it has to be decided case by case.

tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally, few seconds delay
can be used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) the
alarm delay can be set to zero.

600
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 9
Voltage protection

9.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

9.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

9.6.2 Application
The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is
normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after
a major blackout. Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) generates a TRIP signal only
if the voltage in all the three phases is low for more than the set time. If the trip to the
circuit breaker is not required, LOVPTUV (27) is used for signallization only through
an output contact or through the event recording function.

9.6.3 Setting guidelines

Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) is in principle independent of the protection
functions. It requires to be set to open the circuit breaker in order to allow a simple
system restoration following a main voltage loss of a big part of the network and only
when the voltage is lost with breakers still closed.

All settings are in primary values or per unit. Set VBase to rated voltage of the system
or the voltage transformer primary rated voltage. Set operating level per phase VPG to
typically 70% of rated VBase level. Set the time delay tTrip=5-20 seconds.

9.6.3.1 Advanced users settings

For advanced users the following parameters need also to be set. Set the length of the
trip pulse to typical tPulse=0.15 sec. Set the blocking time tBlock to block Loss of
voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27), if some but not all voltage are low, to typical 5.0
seconds and set the time delay for enabling the function after restoration tRestore to 3 -
40 seconds.

601
Application Manual
602
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 10
Frequency protection

Section 10 Frequency protection

10.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

10.1.2 Application
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is applicable in all situations, where reliable
detection of low fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power system
frequency, and the rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between
the actual generation and the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power
system indicates that the available generation is too low to fully supply the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTUF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding, generator boosting,
HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on. Sometimes shunt reactors are
automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to reduce the power system
voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the load.

SAPTUF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and is used to alert operators that
frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be
enough. The underfrequency signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is
especially important for generator step-up transformers, which might be connected to
the generator but disconnected from the grid, during a roll-out sequence. If the
generator is still energized, the system will experience overexcitation, due to the low
frequency.

603
Application Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Frequency protection

10.1.3 Setting guidelines

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTUF (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are especially two specific application areas for SAPTUF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators,

transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding load, in generation deficit situations.

The underfrequency PICKUP value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings
are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the
nominal primary voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage
equipment under consideration.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well
above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above
the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting
level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in
frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under
consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the
power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at
a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller
systems the frequency PICKUP level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay
must be rather short.

The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of SAPTUF (81)
could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed
firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic
areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.

10.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well
above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

604
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 10
Frequency protection

10.1.3.2 Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well
above the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The
setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or
in frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under
consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the
power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at
a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller
systems the frequency pickup level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay
must be rather short.

The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of the
underfrequency function could be the same all over the power system. The load
shedding is then performed firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which
normally are the most problematic areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.

10.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

10.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

10.2.2 Application
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power
system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance
between the actual generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a
power system indicates that the available generation is too large compared to the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTOF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-
point change and so on. SAPTOF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and can also be
used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that
manual actions might be enough.

605
Application Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Frequency protection

10.2.3 Setting guidelines

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTOF (81)
performs its functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are especially two application areas for SAPTOF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators,

and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding generation, in over production situations.

The overfrequency PICKUP value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings
are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the
nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage
equipment under consideration.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well
below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and below the
highest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level,
the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency)
depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The
size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical
parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency
level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency
PICKUP level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.

10.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well
below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

10.2.3.2 Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/
or in frequency) depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under
consideration. The size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power

606
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 10
Frequency protection

system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a
fairly low frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller
systems the frequency pickup level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay
must be rather short.

10.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

10.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

10.3.2 Application
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81), is applicable in all situations,
where reliable detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency
is needed. SAPFRC (81) can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing
frequency. SAPFRC (81) provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding or
generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up
and so on. Very often SAPFRC (81) is used in combination with a low frequency
signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large generator will
require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations
load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in combination
with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection can be
used at a rather high setting.

10.3.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPFRC (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are especially two application areas for SAPFRC (81):

607
Application Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Frequency protection

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high or too low frequency, such as
generators, transformers, and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown by
shedding load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in
balance.

SAPFRC (81) is normally used together with an overfrequency or underfrequency

function, in small power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance
between load and generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take
place very quickly, and there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency
signal has reached an abnormal value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level
closer to the primary nominal level, if the rate-of-change frequency is large (with
respect to sign).

SAPFRC (81)PICKUP value is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related settings are
made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the primary
nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment
under consideration.

SAPFRC (81) is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a
stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal
noise. However, the time, rate-of-change frequency and frequency steps between
different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is
required, for example, down to 70 ms.

Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change frequency as large as 5 Hz/

s, due to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a large
imbalance between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of faults)
are cleared - up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated from
a large system. For more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems, rate-of-
change of frequency is much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

608
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Section 11 Multipurpose protection

11.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

11.1.2 Application
A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and
ground results in a short circuit or a ground fault respectively. Such faults can result in
large fault currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary
equipment. Depending on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent
protections, based on measurement of phase, ground or sequence current components
can be used to clear these faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these
overcurrent protections shall be directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained.

The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as

generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage
conditions. Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system
abnormal condition different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of
phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, residual- or sequence- voltage components can be
used to detect and operate for such incident.

The IED can be provided with multiple General current and voltage protection
(CVGAPC) protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the
setting tool.

Each CVGAPC function module has got four independent protection elements built
into it.

1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features:

609
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
• Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of
the overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the
measured current is lower than pre-set level
• Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (Forward
or Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable (Non-
Directional,Block,Memory)
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-
up level of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the
measured voltage
• Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set
percentage of the current restrain quantity.
2. Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features:
• Definite time delay for both steps
3. Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
4. Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps

All these four protection elements within one general protection function works
independently from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled.
However it shall be once more noted that all these four protection elements measure
one selected current quantity and one selected voltage quantity (see table 52 and
table 53). It is possible to simultaneously use all four-protection elements and their
individual stages. Sometimes in order to obtain desired application functionality it is
necessary to provide interaction between two or more protection elements/stages
within one CVGAPC function by appropriate IED configuration (for example, dead
machine protection for generators).

11.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function

CVGAPC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage

input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single current and
the single voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool (selected current
quantity and selected voltage quantity).

610
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

The user can select, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the
following current quantities shown in table 52.

Table 52: Available selection for current quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"CurrentInput”
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
6 3 · ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A current
phasor and phase B current phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B current
phasor and phase C current phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C current
phasor and phase A current phasor ( VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be
set to 0° all the time

The user can select, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the
following voltage quantities shown in table 53.

611
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

Table 53: Available selection for voltage quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"VoltageInput"
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3*ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for
the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A voltage
phasor and phase B voltage phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B voltage
phasor and phase C voltage phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C voltage
phasor and phase A voltage phasor (VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be
set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 53 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-groundvoltages VA, VB and VC or three phase-

612
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

to-phase voltages VAB, VBC and VCA. This information about actual VT connection
is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take
automatically care about it.

11.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 52.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 52.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 53.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 53.

11.1.2.3 Application possibilities

Due to its flexibility the general current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function
can be used, with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications.
Some of possible examples are given below:

1. Transformer and line applications:

• Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic) (21)
• Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic) (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional)
Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 46, 67, 67N, 67Q)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27, 59, 47)
• Special thermal overload protection (49)
• Open Phase protection
• Unbalance protection
2. Generator protection

613
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

• 80-95% Stator earth fault protection (measured or calculated 3Vo) (59GN)

• Rotor earth fault protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection
unit) (64F)
• Underimpedance protection (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative
Sequence. Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs
looking into generator) (67Q)
• Stator Overload protection (49S)
• Rotor Overload protection (49R)
• Loss of Excitation protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection) (40)
• Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional pos. seq. OC
protection, 2% sensitivity) (32)
• Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection (51/27)
• Breaker head flashover protection
• Improper synchronizing detection
• Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm (46)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27x, 59x, 47)
• Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional pos. seq. OC) (78)
• Inadvertent generator energizing

11.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and stand-still, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker is closed by mistake.

Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes

it to behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point,
essentially represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to
draw from one to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance.
Machine terminal voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again,
depending on the system equivalent impedance (including the block transformer).
Higher quantities of machine current and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to
70% rated voltage) can be expected if the generator is connected to a strong system.
Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit current and 20% to 40% rated
voltage) are representative of weaker systems.

Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop
in the rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally
damaged from excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a
few seconds. Of more critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged
in a fraction of a second due to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high
speed tripping is provided. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).

614
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The
reverse power protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this
protection is normally too long.

For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of

undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage
function will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is
not connected to the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The
overvoltage function will detect the situation when the generator is taken into operation
and will disable the overcurrent function. The overcurrent function will have a pick-up
value about 50% of the rated current of the generator. The trip delay will be about 50 ms.

11.1.3 Setting guidelines

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (CVGAPC) are
set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The overcurrent steps has a IMinx (x=1 or 2 depending on step) setting

to set the minimumpickup current. Set IMinx below PickupCurr_OCx
for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to
standard. If IMinx is set above PickupCurr_OCx for any step the ANSI
reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.

11.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection

Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive

ground-fault protection of power lines where incorrect zero sequence polarization may
result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally, it can be
used in applications on underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends
on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is
practically constant. It shall be noted that directional negative sequence OC element
offers protection against all unbalance faults (phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall

615
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

be taken that the minimum pickup of such protection function shall be set above
natural system unbalance level.

An example will be given, how sensitive-ground-fault protection for power lines can
be achieved by using negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements
within a CVGAPC function.

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to
one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF04)
2. Set CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that CVGAPC function measures I2
current and NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting)
3. Set VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage
phasor is intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality
4. Set base current IBase value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs
5. Set base voltage UBase value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage
in kV
6. Set RCADir to value +65 degrees (NegSeq current typically lags the inverted
NegSeq voltage for this angle during the fault)
7. Set ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional
element will be enabled)
9. Enable one overcurrent stage (for example, OC1)
10. By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time
delayed curve in accordance with your network protection philosophy
11. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values)
12. Set tDef_OC1 or parameter “TD” when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure
proper time coordination with other ground-fault protections installed in the
vicinity of this power line
13. Set DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U
15. Set ActLowVolt1_VM to Block
• In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during
three-phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this
element to operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain
percentage (10% is typical value) of measured PosSeq current in the power
line. To do this the following settings within the same function shall be done:
16. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
17. Set RestrCurrInput to PosSeq
18. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.1

616
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

If required, this CVGAPC function can be used in directional comparison protection

scheme for the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of
this power line are available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are
required. One for forward and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1
stage can be used to detect faults in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be
used to detect faults in reverse direction.

However the following shall be noted for such application:

• the set values for RCADir and ROADir settings will be as well applicable for OC2
stage
• setting DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse
• setting parameter PickupCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup
value of forward OC1 element (that is, typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in
order to insure proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during
current reversal situations
• pickup signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and
reverse signals to the remote end of the power line
• the available scheme communications function block within IED shall be used
between multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in
order to insure proper conditioning of the above two pickup signals

Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for
other protection and alarming purposes.

11.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide negative
sequence inverse time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of
20s, and maximum continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated
current.

The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often
used world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following
formula:

617
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

TD
t op = 2
æ I NS ö
ç I ÷
è r ø
EQUATION1740-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 494)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent IED

TD is the generator capability constant in seconds

INS is the measured negative sequence current

Ir is the generator rated current

By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the

generator in accordance with the following formula

x = 7% = 0.07 pu
EQUATION1756-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 495)

Equation 494 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ I NS ö
ç x×I ÷
è r ø

EQUATION1741-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 496)

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

618
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M -C
P
ø
EQUATION1742-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 497)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm
TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)
M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 494 is compared with the equation 496 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the generator negative sequence capability value

2. set A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
4. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper
function operation:

1. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for the CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD_OC1 = 20
4. set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816
5. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
6. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 7%

Proper timing of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation
in case of repetitive unbalance conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes (for example, use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and
OV1 for negative sequence overvoltage alarm).

619
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI

standards

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide generator stator
overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimum-operating
current shall be set to 116% of generator rating.

The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo
generators in accordance with the following formula:

TD
t op = 2
æ Im ö
ç ÷ -1
è Ir ø
EQUATION1743-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 498)

where:
top is the operating time of the generator stator overload IED

TD is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (TD = 37.5 for the
IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard)
Im is the magnitude of the measured current

Ir is the generator rated current

This formula is applicable only when measured current (for example, positive sequence
current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the
generator rated current).

By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the
overload IED in accordance with the following formula:

x = 116% = 1.16 pu
EQUATION1755-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 499)

formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the generator stator overload IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ Im ö 1
ç ÷ - 2
è x × Ir ø x
EQUATION1744-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 500)

620
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value PosSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M P
- C ø
EQUATION1745-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 501)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm

TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)

M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 500 is compared with the equation 501 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value

2. set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
4. set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
5. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

1. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD = 37.5 for the IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard
4. set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
5. set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
6. set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
7. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 116%

621
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

Proper timing of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation
in case of repetitive overload conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be
achieved.

11.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit
breaker head flashover protection for generators

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide open phase
protection. This can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function by comparing the
unbalance current with a pre-set level. In order to make such a function more secure it
is possible to restrain it by requiring that at the same time the measured unbalance
current must be bigger than 97% of the maximum phase current. By doing this it will
be insured that function can only pickup if one of the phases is open circuited. Such an
arrangement is easy to obtain in CVGAPC function by enabling the current restraint
feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one CVGAPC instance
(for example, GF03)
2. Set CurrentInput to value UnbalancePh
3. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
4. Set RestrCurrInput to MaxPh
5. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97
6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary amperes
7. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
9. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 5%
10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (for example, 2.0s)

Proper operation of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable
for OC2 step as soon as it is enabled.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes. For example, in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step
with set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against
circuit breaker head flashover protection is achieved.

622
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

11.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide voltage restrained
overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study
gives the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse

• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages
below 25% of rated voltage

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one CVGAPC instance

(for example, GF05)
2. Set CurrentInput to value MaxPh
3. Set VoltageInput to value MinPh-Ph (it is assumed that minimum phase-to-phase
voltage shall be used for restraining. Alternatively, positive sequence voltage can
be used for restraining by selecting PosSeq for this setting parameter)
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
7. Select CurveType_OC1 to value ANSI Very inv
8. If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter
tMin_OC1 (default value 0.05s)
9. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value 185%
10. Set VCntrlMode_OC1 to On
11. Set VDepMode_OC1 to Slope
12. Set VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25
13. Set VHighLimit_OC1 to value 100%
14. Set VLowLimit_OC1 to value 25%

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the
other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.

11.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator

Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent

protection element within a CVGAPC function, loss of excitation protection for a
generator can be achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following
values are calculated:

623
Application Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Multipurpose protection

• Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero

active loading 38% of the generator MVA rating
• Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one

CVGAPC instance (for example, GF02)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to PosSeq
3. Set parameter VoltageInput to PosSeq
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Set parameter RCADir to value -84 degree (that is, current lead voltage for this angle)
7. Set parameter ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5%
9. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
10. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
11. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 38%
12. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting)
13. Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&V
15. Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if
directional feature is enabled for this step as well. Figure 285 shows overall protection
characteristic

Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

624
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 11
Multipurpose protection

Q [pu]
A Operating region
0.8

ILowSet
0.6 B IPS
0.4

rca
0.2

0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 P [pu] VPS
-rca
-0.2
C
-0.4 ILowSet
D

-0.6 Operating Region

-0.8
en05000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000535 V1 EN

Figure 285: Loss of excitation

625
Application Manual
626
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 12
System protection and control

Section 12 System protection and control

12.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

12.1.2 Application
The multi-purpose filter, function block with name SMAI HPAC, is arranged as a three-
phase filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. function block outputs) as
the standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. For all four
analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual quantity) the
input samples from the TRM module, which are coming at rate of 20 samples per
fundamental system cycle, are first stored. When enough samples are available in the
internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the setting parameter
SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally available for each of
the calculated phasors:
• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal

The SMAI HPAC filter is always used in conjunction with some other protection
function (e.g. multi-purpose protection function or overcurrent function or over-voltage
function or over-power function). In this way many different protection applications
can be arranged. For example the following protection, monitoring or measurement
features can be realized:

627
Application Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
System protection and control

• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase
power system
• Sensitive reverse power protection
• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
• etc.

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU (Phase-
phase voltage measurement), etc. in order to report the extracted phasor values to the
supervisory system (e.g. MicroSCADA).

The following figure shoes typical configuration connections required to utilize this
filter in conjunction with multi-purpose function as non-directional overcurrent
protection.

IEC13000179-1-en.vsd
IEC13000179 V1 EN

Figure 286: Required ACT configuration

Such overcurrent arrangement can be for example used to achieve the subsynchronous
resonance protection for turbo generators.

628
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 12
System protection and control

12.1.3 Setting guidelines

12.1.3.1 Setting example

A relay type used for generator subsynchronous resonance overcurrent protection shall
be replaced. The relay had inverse time operating characteristic as given with the
following formula:

K
top = T01 +
Is
EQUATION13000029 V1 EN (Equation 502)

Where:
• top is the operating time of the relay
• T01 is fixed time delay (setting)
• K is a constant (setting)
• IS is measured subsynchronous current in primary amperes

The existing relay was applied on a large 50Hz turbo generator which had shaft
mechanical resonance frequency at 18.5Hz. The relay settings were T01 = 0.64
seconds, K= 35566 Amperes and minimal subsynchronous current trip level was set at
IS0=300 Amperes primary.

Solution with 670 series IED:

First the IED configuration shall be arranged as shown in Figure 286. Then the settings
for SMAI HPAC filter and multipurpose function shall be derived from existing relay
settings in the following way:

The subsynchronous current frequency is calculated as follows:

fs = 50 Hz - 18.5Hz = 31.5Hz
EQUATION13000030 V1 EN (Equation 503)

In order to properly extract the weak subsynchronous signal in presence of the

dominating 50Hz signal the SMAI HPAC filter shall be set as given in the following
table:

Table 54: Proposed settings for SMAIHPAC

I_HPAC_31_5Hz: SMAIHPAC:1
ConnectionType Ph — N
SetFrequency 31.5
Table continues on next page

629
Application Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
System protection and control

FreqBandWidth 0.0

FilterLength 1.0 s
OverLap 75
Operation On

Now the settings for the multi-purpose overcurrent stage one shall be derived in order
to emulate the existing relay operating characteristic. To achieve exactly the same
inverse time characteristic the programmable IDMT characteristic is used which for
multi-purpose overcurrent stage one, which has the following equation (for more
information see Section “Inverse time characteristics” in the TRM).

æ ö
ç ÷
A
t [s] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION13000031 V1 EN (Equation 504)

In order to adapt to the previous relay characteristic the above equation can be re-
written in the following way:

æ K ö
ç ÷
ç I so ÷
t [s] = + T01 ÷ × 1
ç 1
ç çæ I s ÷ö - 0 ÷
ç I ÷
è è so ø ø
EQUATION13000032 V1 EN (Equation 505)

Thus if the following rules are followed when multi-purpose overcurrent stage one is set:
• in > = IS0= 300A
• K 35566
A= = = 118.55
I so 300
• B = T01 = 0.64
• C = 0.0
• p = 1.0
• k = 1.0

then exact replica of the existing relay will be achieved. The following table
summarizes all required settings for the multi-purpose function:

630
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 12
System protection and control

Setting Group1
Operation On
CurrentInput MaxPh
IBase 1000
VoltageInput MaxPh
UBase 20.50
OPerHarmRestr Off
I_2ndI_fund 20.0
BlkLevel2nd 5000
EnRestrainCurr Off
RestrCurrInput PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00
RCADir -75
ROADir 75
LowVolt_VM 0.5

OC1
Setting Group1
Operation_OC1 On
StartCurr_OC1 30.0
CurrMult_OC1 2.0
CurveType_OC1 Programmable
tDef_OC1 0.00
k_OC1 1.00
tMin1 30
tMin_OC1 1.40
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1 0.00
P_OC1 1.000
A_OC1 118.55
B_OC1 0.640
C_OC1 0.000

631
Application Manual
632
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

Section 13 Secondary system supervision

13.1 Current circuit supervision (87)

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

13.1.2 Application
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of
CTs, or CT cores, measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current
circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an
error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be blocked
and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different

remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary
currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the
transient stage must then be avoided.

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) must be sensitive and have short operate
time in order to prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical
protections in case of faulty CT secondary circuits.

Open CT circuits creates extremely high voltages in the circuits which

is extremely dangerous for the personnel. It can also damage the
insulation and cause new problems.
The application shall, thus, be done with this in consideration,
especially if the protection functions are blocked.

633
Application Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Secondary system supervision

13.1.3 Setting guidelines

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) compares the residual current from a three-
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the same current transformer.

The minimum operate current, IMinOp, must be set as a minimum to twice the residual
current in the supervised CT circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary
current.

The parameter Pickup_Block is normally set at 150% to block the function during
transient conditions.

The FAIL output is connected to the blocking input of the protection function to be
blocked at faulty CT secondary circuits.

13.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

13.2.2 Application
Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the
measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are:

• impedance protection functions

• undervoltage function
• energizing check function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic

These functions can operate unintentionally if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between the voltage instrument transformers and the IED.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature

circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits should be located as close as possible

634
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

to the voltage instrument transformers, and shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts
that are wired to the IEDs. Separate fuse-failure monitoring IEDs or elements within
the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are
combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function
(FUFSPVC).

FUFSPVC function built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external
binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The
first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second
one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring

quantities is recommended for use in isolated or high-impedance grounded networks: a
high value of voltage 3V2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2 is
a condition that is related to a fuse failure event.

The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities is recommended for use in directly or low impedance grounded networks: a
high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0 is a condition
that is related to a fuse failure event. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of
zero sequence current this function shall be avoided.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure. This is
beneficial for example during three phase transformer switching.

13.2.3 Setting guidelines

13.2.3.1 General

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-
symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument
transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage
measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%, depending
on the system operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function
is used on long untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on.

The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of
the base voltage and base current for the function. Common base IED values for
primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and primary power (SBase) are set in
Global Base Values GBASVAL. The setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a particular
GBASVAL and used its base values.

635
Application Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Secondary system supervision

13.2.3.2 Setting of common parameters

Set the operation mode selector Operation to Enabled to release the fuse failure function.

The voltage threshold VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of VBase.

The drop off time of 200 ms for dead phase detection makes it recommended to always
set SealIn to Enabled since this will secure a fuse failure indication at persistent fuse
fail when closing the local breaker when the line is already energized from the other
end. When the remote breaker closes the voltage will return except in the phase that
has a persistent fuse fail. Since the local breaker is open there is no current and the
dead phase indication will persist in the phase with the blown fuse. When the local
breaker closes the current will start to flow and the function detects the fuse failure
situation. But due to the 200 ms drop off timer the output BLKZ will not be activated
until after 200 ms. This means that distance functions are not blocked and due to the
“no voltage but current” situation might issue a trip.

The operation mode selector OpModeSel has been introduced for better adaptation to
system requirements. The mode selector enables selecting interactions between the
negative sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications, the
OpModeSel is set to either V2I2 for selecting negative sequence algorithm or V0I0 for
zero sequence based algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there
is a risk that the fuse failure function will not be activated due to the system conditions,
the dependability of the fuse failure function can be increased if the OpModeSel is set
to V0I0 OR V2I2 or OptimZsNs. In mode V0I0 OR V2I2 both negative and zero
sequence based algorithms are activated and working in an OR-condition. Also in
mode OptimZsNs both negative and zero sequence algorithms are activated and the one
that has the highest magnitude of measured negative or zero sequence current will
operate. If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse failure function
OpModeSel can be selected to V0I0 AND V2I2 which gives that both negative and zero
sequence algorithms are activated and working in an AND-condition, that is, both
algorithms must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKV
or BLKZ.

13.2.3.3 Negative sequence based

The relay setting value 3V2PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase and
should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to equation 506.

636
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

3V 2
3V 2 PU = × 100
VBase
EQUATION1757-ANSI V3 EN (Equation 506)

where:
3V2PU is the maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I2PU is in percentage of parameter IBase. The setting
of 3I2PU must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system and can be calculated according to equation 507.

3I 2
3I 2 PU = × 100
IBase
EQUATION1758-ANSI V3 EN (Equation 507)

where:
3I2 is the maximal negative sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

13.2.3.4 Zero sequence based

The IED setting value 3V0PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase. The
setting of 3V0PU should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to
equation 508.

3V 0
3V 0 PU = × 100
VBase
EQUATION1759-ANSI V3 EN (Equation 508)

where:
3V0 is the maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of 10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

637
Application Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Secondary system supervision

The setting of the current limit 3I0PU is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of
pickup must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 509.

3I 0
3I 0 PU = × 100
IBase
EQUATION2293-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 509)

where:
3I0PU is the maximal zero sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of 10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

13.2.3.5 Delta V and delta I

Set the operation mode selector OpDVDI to Enabled if the delta function shall be in
operation.

The setting of DVPU should be set high (approximately 60% of VBase) and the current
threshold DIPU low (approximately 10% of IBase) to avoid unwanted operation due to
normal switching conditions in the network. The delta current and delta voltage
function shall always be used together with either the negative or zero sequence
algorithm. If VSetprim is the primary voltage for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the
primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of DVPU and DIPU will be given
according to equation 510 and equation 511.

VSet prim
DVPU = ⋅100
VBase
EQUATION1765-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 510)

ISet prim
DIPU = ⋅100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION2385 V2 EN (Equation 511)

The voltage thresholds VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. A setting of approximately 70% of VBase is recommended.

The current threshold 50P shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance
protection function. A 5...10% lower value is recommended.

638
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

13.2.3.6 Dead line detection

The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLDPU
for the current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold.

Set the IDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A
safety margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however
exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is
disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases).

Set the VDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating
voltage. A safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.

13.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60)

13.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

13.3.2 Application
Some protection functions operate on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point.
Examples of such protection functions are distance protection function, undervoltage
function and energisation-check function. These functions might mal-operate if there is
an incorrect measured voltage due to fuse failure or other kind of faults in voltage
measurement circuit.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit

based on comparison of the voltages of the main and pilot fused circuits phase wise.
VDSPVC output can be configured to block voltage dependent protection functions
such as high-speed distance protection, undervoltage relays, underimpedance relays
and so on.

639
Application Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Secondary system supervision

A B C

V1C
V1A

V1B
V2C
V2A

V2B

Main Vt circuit
Pilot VT circuit

IED
FuseFailSupvn

ANSI12000143-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000143 V1 EN

Figure 287: Application of VDSPVC

13.3.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

The voltage input type (phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) is selected using

ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot parameters, for main and pilot fuse groups respectively.

The connection type for the main and the pilot fuse groups must be
consistent.

640
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 13
Secondary system supervision

The settings Vdif Main block, Vdif Pilot alarm and VSealIn are in percentage of the
base voltage, VBase. Set VBase to the primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
potential voltage transformer. VBase is available in the Global Base Value groups; the
particular Global Base Value group, that is used by VDSPVC (60), is set by the setting
parameter GlobalBaseSel.

The settings Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm should be set low (approximately
30% of VBase) so that they are sensitive to the fault on the voltage measurement
circuit, since the voltage on both sides are equal in the healthy condition. If VSetPrim is
the desired pick up primary phase-to-phase voltage of measured fuse group, the setting
of Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm will be given according to equation 512.

VSetPrim
Vdif Main block or Vdif Pilot alarm= ⋅100
VBase
ANSI13000279 V1 EN (Equation 512)

VSetPrim is defined as phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage dependent of the

selected ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot. If ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot are set
to Ph-N than the function performs internally the rescaling of VSetPrim.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. The fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the
normal voltage conditions are restored.

641
Application Manual
642
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Section 14 Control

14.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25)

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

14.1.2 Application

14.1.2.1 Synchronizing

To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks a synchronizing function

is provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when
conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and
its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between
bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less
than this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the
synchronism check function is used.

The synchronizing function measures the difference between the V-Line and the V-
Bus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the
calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following
conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

643
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

• The voltages V-Line and V-Bus are higher than the set values for VHighBusSynch
and VHighLineSynch of the base voltages GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine.
• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of VDiffSynch.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger
than the set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the
synchronism check is used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to
the value FreqDiffM resp FreqDiffA for synchronism check function. The bus and
line frequencies must also be within a range of +/- 5 Hz from the rated frequency.
When the synchronizing option is included also for autoreclose there is no reason
to have different frequency setting for the manual and automatic reclosing and the
frequency difference values for synchronism check should be kept low.
• The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both V-Bus and V-Line.
• The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-
closing time.

The synchronizing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well as the
circuit breaker closing delay. The phase angle advance is calculated continuously.
Closing angle is the change in angle during the set breaker closing operate time
tBreaker.

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral A, B, C or phase-phase A-B, B-C, C-A or

positive sequence (Require a three phase voltage, that is VA, VB and VC) . By setting
the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2,
SelPhaseLine2 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the
voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different setting
values are selected for the two sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

14.1.2.2 Synchronism check

The main purpose of the synchronism check function is to provide control over the
closing of circuit breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions
for synchronism are not detected. It is also used to prevent the re-connection of two
systems, which are divided after islanding and after a three pole reclosing.

Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchronism check

since the system is tied together by two phases.

SESRSYN (25) function block includes both the synchronism check function and the
energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. SESRSYN
(25) function also includes a built in voltage selection scheme which allows adoption
to various busbar arrangements.

644
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

~ ~
en04000179_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000179 V1 EN

Figure 288: Two interconnected power systems

Figure 288 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the
interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations.
The need for a check of synchronization increases if the meshed system decreases
since the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic
closing is greater.

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. Output is generated only when all measured conditions are
within their set limits simultaneously. The check consists of:

• Live line and live bus.

• Voltage level difference.
• Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a
range of ±5 Hz from rated frequency.
• Phase angle difference.

A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum
period of time.

In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for
manually initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a
bigger phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long
and loaded parallel power line. For this application we accept a synchronism check
with a long operation time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The
phase angle difference setting can be set for steady state conditions.

Another example is the operation of a power network that is disturbed by a fault event:
after the fault clearance a highspeed auto-reclosing takes place. This can cause a power
swing in the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the
frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will,
typically oscillate between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker
needs to be closed by auto-reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference
should be tolerated, to a greater extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the
case above. But if a big phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is
some risk that auto-reclosing will take place when the phase angle difference is big and

645
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is
smaller.

To fulfill the above requirements the synchronism check function is provided with
duplicate settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under
disturbed conditions (Auto).

52

SynchroCheck
Bus voltage
VHighBusSC > 50 – 120% of GblBaseSelBus Fuse fail
VHighLineSC >50 – 120% of GblBaseSelLine
Line
VDiffSC < 0.02 – 0.50 p.u. Line Bus Voltage
reference
PhaseDiffM < 5 – 90 degrees voltage
PhaseDiffA < 5 – 90 degrees Fuse fail Line Voltage
FreqDiffM < 3 – 1000 mHz
FreqDiffA < 1000 mHz

ANSI10000079-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000079 V2 EN

Figure 289: Principle for the synchronism check function

14.1.2.3 Energizing check

The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled re-
connection of disconnected lines and buses to energized lines and buses.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold values. The output is given only when the actual
measured conditions match the set conditions. Figure 290 shows two substations,
where one (1) is energized and the other (2) is not energized. The line between CB A
and CB B is energized (DLLB) from substation 1 via the circuit breaker A and
energization of station 2 is done by CB B energization check device for that breaker
DBLL. (or Both).

646
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

1 2
A B

Bus voltage Line voltage

EnergizingCheck
VLiveBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelBus
VLiveLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelLine
VDeadBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelBus
VDeadLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelLine
VMaxEnerg < 50 - 180 % of GblBaseSelBus and/or
GblBaseSelLine

ANSI10000078-4-en.vsd
ANSI10000078 V4 EN

Figure 290: Principle for the energizing check function

The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead
bus live line (DBLL) direction, or in both directions over the circuit breaker.
Energizing from different directions can be different for automatic reclosing and
manual closing of the circuit breaker. For manual closing it is also possible to allow
closing when both sides of the breaker are dead, Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL).

The equipment is considered energized (Live) if the voltage is above the set value for
VLiveBusEnerg or VLiveLineEnerg of the base voltages GblBaseSelBus and
VGblBaseSelLine, which are defined in the Global Base Value groups, according to the
setting of GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine; in a similar way, the equipment is
considered non-energized (Dead) if the voltage is below the set value for
VDeadBusEnerg or VDeadLineEnerg of the Global Base Value groups. A
disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to factors such as induction
from a line running in parallel, or feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit
breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50% or more of the base voltage of the line.
Normally, for breakers with single breaking elements (<330 kV) the level is well
below 30%.

When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose
of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and
that the condition is not due to temporary interference.

14.1.2.4 Voltage selection

The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the
synchronism check, synchronizing and energizing check functions. For example, when
the IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected

647
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of
the disconnectors auxiliary contacts, the right voltages for the synchronism check and
energizing check functions can be selected.

Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and
the breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single
circuit breaker with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither
does a single circuit breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need
any internal voltage selection.

Manual energization of a completely open diameter in breaker-and-a-half switchgear is

allowed by internal logic.

The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs
in the IED and connected, using the PCM software, to each of the SESRSYN (25)
functions available in the IED.

14.1.2.5 External fuse failure

Either external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse (or miniature circuit
breaker) are connected to HW binary inputs of the IED; these signals are connected to
inputs of SESRSYN function in the application configuration tool of PCM600. The
internal fuse failure supervision function can also be used if a three phase voltage is
present. The signal BLKV, from the internal fuse failure supervision function, is then
used and connected to the fuse supervision inputs of the SESRSYN function block. In
case of a fuse failure, the SESRSYN energizing (25) function is blocked.

The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the VL1OK/VL2OK and VL1FF/VL2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.

External selection of energizing direction

The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is
an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol ,created in the Graphical
Design Editor (GDE) tool on the local HMI, through selector switch function block,
but alternatively there can for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the
panel which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).

If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the local HMI, the
choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through
IEC 61850–8–1 communication.

The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in
figure 291. Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on the local HMI
can only show the active position of the virtual selector.

648
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

SLGGIO

PSTO SESRSYN (25)

INTONE

NAME1 SWPOSN MENMODE

OFF
NAME2
DL
DB NAME3
DLB NAME4

ANSI09000171_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000171 V1 EN

Figure 291: Selection of the energizing direction from a local HMI symbol through a
selector switch function block.

14.1.3 Application examples

The synchronism check function block can also be used in some switchyard
arrangements, but with different parameter settings. Below are some examples of how
different arrangements are connected to the IED analog inputs and to the function
block SESRSYN, 25. One function block is used per circuit breaker.

The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use
of configuration and signal matrix tools.

The SESRSYN and connected SMAI function block instances must

have the same cycle time in the application configuration.

649
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 1 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
189 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse
BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT
BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus1Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
V REF1 152 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
lineVoltage/1/2/3 VL2FF FRDIFFA
VA/VB/VC STARTSYN PHDIFFA
Fuse TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
VT TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
Line MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

ANSI0000093-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000093 V1 EN

Figure 292: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single busbar

arrangement

Figure 292 illustrates connection principles for a single busbar. For the SESRSYN (25)
function there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The
voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage
selection is necessary.

The voltage from busbar VT is connected to V3PB1 and the voltage from the line VT
is connected to V3PL1. The conditions of the VT fuses shall also be connected as
shown above. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

650
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
Bus 1 V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 2 BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
Fuse BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse VT BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF1 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
189 VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
289 VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
152 AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Voltag Vbus
Line 1/2/3
V e VLine
MODEAEN
VA/VB/ Fuse
MODEMEN
C VT
Line
ANSI10000094-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000094 V1 EN

Figure 293: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single breaker,

double busbar arrangement with external voltage selection

In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage

selection is made by external relays typically connected according to figure 293.
Suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected
based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. This means that the connections to
the function block will be the same as for the single busbar arrangement. The voltage
selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

651
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 1 BLOCK MANENOK
Bus 2 BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse
bus1 Voltage VT
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
VREF 1 LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
Fuse
bus2 Voltage VT VB1OK VOKSYN
V REF 2 VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
189 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
152 Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
lineVoltage /1/2/3
VA/VB/VC
Fuse
VT

Line ANSI10000095-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000095 V1 EN

Figure 294: Connection of the SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double
busbar arrangement with internal voltage selection

When internal voltage selection is needed, the voltage transformer circuit connections
are made according to figure 294. The voltage from the busbar 1 VT is connected to
V3PB1 and the voltage from busbar 2 is connected to V3PB2. The voltage from the
line VT is connected to V3PL1. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall
be connected as shown in figure 294. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set
to Double bus.

652
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker

152
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 1 V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 2 V3PB2*
V3PL1*
AUTOSYOK
AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse BUS2_OP B1SEL
bus 1 Voltage VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
VREF1 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
Fuse LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
bus 2 Voltage VT 152 VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VREF2 VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
252 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
lineVoltage/1/2/3 PHDIFFME
Fuse Vbus
VA/VB/VC VT
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Line 252
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI10000096-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000096 V1 EN

Figure 295: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a double breaker
arrangement

653
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks, one for breaker
WA1_QA1 and one for breaker WA2_QA1. No voltage selection is necessary, because
the voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to V3PB1 on SESRSYN for WA1_QA1
and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected toV3PB1 on SESRSYN for
WA2_QA1. The voltage from the line VT is connected to V3PL1 on both function
blocks. The condition of VT fuses shall also be connected as shown in figure 294. The
voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel. for both function blocks.

14.1.3.5 Breaker-and-a-half

Figure 296 describes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with three SESRSYN

functions in the same IED, each of them handling voltage selection for WA1_QA1,
TIE_QA1 and WA2_QA1 breakers respectively. The voltage from busbar 1 VT is
connected to V3PB1 on all three function blocks and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is
connected to V3PB2 on all three function blocks. The voltage from line1 VT is
connected to V3PL1 on all three function blocks and the voltage from line2 VT is
connected to V3PL2 on all three function blocks. The positions of the disconnectors
and VT fuses shall be connected as shown in Figure 296.

654
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Bus 1 Bus 1 CB
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 2 V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
189 189 V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
152 152 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Fuse BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
bus1 Voltage VT BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
VREF1 289 289 BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
bus 2Voltage VT LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF2 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
152 VL2FF
STARTSYN
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
6189 6289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
989 989 MENMODE FRDIFFME
line 1 Voltage Fuse PHDIFFME
VT Vbus
1/2/3 VLine
VA/VB/VC MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Fuse SESRSYN (25)
line 2 Voltage VT V3PB1* SYNOK
VREF3 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Line 1 Line 2 BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Tie CB
ANSI10000097-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000097 V1 EN

Figure 296: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with internal
voltage selection

655
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The connections are similar in all SESRSYN functions, apart from the breaker position
indications. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the IED
and SESRSYN (25) function blocks must be carefully checked in PCM600. In all
SESRSYN functions the connections and configurations must abide by the following
rules: Normally apparatus position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-
type) and closed positions (a-type).

WA1_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus CB

TIE_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = Tie CB

WA2_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus alt. CB

If only two SESRSYN functions are provided in the same IED, the connections and
settings are according to the SESRSYN functions for WA1_QA1 and TIE_QA1.

656
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.1.4 Setting guidelines

The setting parameters for the Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check
function SESRSYN (25) are set via the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guidelines describes the settings of the SESRSYN (25) function via the
LHMI.

Common base IED value for primary voltage ( VBase ) is set in a Global base value
function, GBASVAL, found under Main menu//Configuration/Power system/
GlobalBaseValue/GBASVAL_X/VBase. The SESRSYN (25) function has one
setting for the bus reference voltage (GblBaseSelBus) and one setting for the line
reference voltage (GblBaseSelLine) which independently of each other can be set to
select one of the twelve GBASVAL functions used for reference of base values. This
means that the reference voltage of bus and line can be set to different values. The
settings for the SESRSYN (25) function are found under Main menu/Settings/IED
Settings/Control/Synchronizing(25,SC/VC)/SESRSYN(25,SC/VC):X has been
divided into four different setting groups: General, Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and
Energizingcheck.

General settings
Operation: The operation mode can be set Enabled or Disabled. The setting Disabled
disables the whole function.

GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine

These configuration settings are used for selecting one of twelve GBASVAL functions,
which then is used as base value reference voltage, for bus and line respectively.

SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for line 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

CBConfig

This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage
selection can be selected as:

657
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

• no voltage selection, No voltage sel.

• single circuit breaker with double bus, Double bus
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1, 1 1/2 bus
CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2, 1 1/2 bus
alt. CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2, Tie CB

PhaseShift

This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a power transformer
between the two measurement points for bus voltage and line voltage. The set value is
added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

Synchronizing settings
OperationSynch

The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function
is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch

The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch have to be set lower than
the value where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80% of
the rated voltage.

VDiffSynch

Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The
difference is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the
two networks running asynchronously. A normal setting is 0.10-0.15 p.u.

FreqDiffMin

The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the systems are
defined to be asynchronous. For frequency differences lower than this value, the
systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value for FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz.
Generally, the value should be low if both synchronizing and synchrocheck functions
are provided, and it is better to let the synchronizing function close, as it will close at
exactly the right instance if the networks run with a frequency difference.

To avoid overlapping of the synchronizing function and the

synchrocheck function the setting FreqDiffMin must be set to a higher

658
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

value than used setting FreqDiffM, respective FreqDiffA used for

synchrocheck.

FreqDiffMax

The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is

accepted. 1/FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn
on the synchronoscope, and is called Beat time. A typical value for FreqDiffMax is
200-250 mHz, which gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided
as the two networks normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each
other, so the frequency difference shall be small.

FreqRateChange

The maximum allowed rate of change for the frequency.

tBreaker

The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should
also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check
that no slow logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then
can be big variations in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is
80-150 ms depending on the breaker closing time.

tClosePulse

The setting for the duration of the breaker close pulse.

tMaxSynch

The setting tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the
operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of
FreqDiffMin, which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase
equality. At the setting of 10 mHz, the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would
thus need to be at least tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network frequencies are
expected to be outside the limits from the start, a margin needs to be added. A typical
setting is 600 seconds.

tMinSynch

The setting tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which the synchronizing
closing attempt is given. The synchronizing function will not give a closing command
within this time, from when the synchronizing is started, even if a synchronizing
condition is fulfilled. A typical setting is 200 ms.

659
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Synchrocheck settings
OperationSC

The OperationSC setting Off disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs
AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting
On, the function is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input
conditions.

VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC have to be set lower than the
value at which the breaker is expected to close with the synchronism check. A typical
value can be 80% of the base voltages.

VDiffSC

The setting for voltage difference between line and bus in p.u. This setting in p.u. is
defined as (V-Bus/GblBaseSelBus) - (V-Line/GblBaseSelLine). A normal setting is
0,10-0,15 p.u.

FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA

The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen
depending on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency
difference setting is needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. For autoreclosing a
bigger frequency difference setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used.
A typical value for FreqDiffM can be10 mHz, and a typical value for FreqDiffA can be
100-200 mHz.

PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA

The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be
chosen depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be
chosen to allow closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in
heavy-loaded networks can be 45 degrees, whereas in most networks the maximum
occurring angle is below 25 degrees. The PhaseDiffM setting is a limitation to
PhaseDiffA setting. Fluctuations occurring at high speed autoreclosing limit
PhaseDiffA setting.

tSCM and tSCA

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the
synchrocheck conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a
temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the
delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled
again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has

660
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. Manual closing is normally
under more stable conditions and a longer operation time delay setting is needed,
where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing, a shorter operation time delay
setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical value for tSCM can be 1
second and a typical value for tSCA can be 0.1 seconds.

Energizingcheck settings
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit
breaker. The settings for each of them are:

• Disabled, the energizing function is disabled.

• DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of
VDeadLineEnerg and the bus voltage is above set value of VLIveBusEnerg.
• DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of VDeadBusEnerg
and the line voltage is above set value of VLiveLineEnerg.
• Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.

ManEnergDBDL

If the parameter is set to Enabled, manual closing is also enabled when both line
voltage and bus voltage are below VDeadLineEnerg and VDeadBusEnerg respectively,
and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both.

VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg have to be set lower than
the value at which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value can be
80% of the base voltages.

VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg

The threshold voltages VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg, have to be set to a

value greater than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A
typical value can be 40% of the base voltages.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for

instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via
the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be
as high as 30% or more of the base line voltage.

661
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg/VLiveLineEnerg

and VDeadBusEnerg/VDeadLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions
may be such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of
the energized threshold value. The parameters must therefore be set carefully to avoid
overlapping.

VMaxEnerg

This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the
set value of VMaxEnerg.

tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that
the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary
interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is
reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit
breaker closing is thus not permitted until the energizing condition has remained
constant throughout the set delay setting time.

14.2 Apparatus control APC

14.2.1 Application
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervising of circuit breakers,
disconnectors, and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given
after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism
check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

Figure 297 gives an overview from what places the apparatus control function receive
commands. Commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Centre (CC),
the station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.

662
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

cc

Station HMI

GW

Station bus

Local Local Local

HMI HMI HMI
IED IED IED
Apparatus Apparatus Apparatus
Control Control Control
CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN

breakers disconnectors grounding switches

ANSI08000227.vsd
ANSI08000227 V1 EN

Figure 297: Overview of the apparatus control functions

Features in the apparatus control function:

• Operation of primary apparatuses

• Select-Execute principle to give high security
• Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchronism check
• Pole discrepancy supervision
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks

designated:

• Switch controller SCSWI

• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
• Bay control QCBAY
• Position evaluation POS_EVAL
• Bay reserve QCRSV

663
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

• Reservation input RESIN

• Local remote LOCREM
• Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

The signal flow between the function blocks is shown in Figure 298. To realize the
reservation function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve
(QCRSV) also are included in the apparatus control function. The application
description for all these functions can be found below. The function SCILO in the
Figure below is the logical node for interlocking.

Control operation can be performed from the local IED HMI. If the administrator has
defined users with the IED Users tool in PCM600, then the local/remote switch is
under authority control. If not, the default (factory) user is the SuperUser that can
perform control operations from the local IED HMI without LogOn. The default
position of the local/remote switch is on remote.

IEC 61850

QCBAY SCSWI SXCBR 189

SXCBR
SXCBR 152
SCILO

SCSWI SXSWI 989

SCILO

en05000116_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000116 V1 EN

Figure 298: Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks

664
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Accepted originator categories for PSTO

If the requested command is accepted by the authority, the value will change.
Otherwise the attribute blocked-by-switching-hierarchy is set in the cause signal. If the
PSTO value is changed during a command, then the command is aborted.

The accepted originator categories for each PSTO value are shown in Table 55

Table 55: Accepted originator categories for each PSTO

Permitted Source To Operate Originator (orCat)

0 = Off 4,5,6
1 = Local 1,4,5,6
2 = Remote 2,3,4,5,6
3 = Faulty 4,5,6
4 = Not in use 4,5,6
5 = All 1,2,3,4,5,6
6 = Station 2,4,5,6
7 = Remote 3,4,5,6

PSTO = All, then it is no priority between operator places. All operator places are
allowed to operate.

According to IEC61850 standard the orCat attribute in originator category are defined
in Table 56

Table 56: orCat attribute according to IEC61850

Value Description
0 not-supported
1 bay-control
2 station-control
3 remote-control
4 automatic-bay
5 automatic-station
6 automatic-remote
7 maintenance
8 process

665
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.2.1.1 Bay control (QCBAY)

The Bay control (QCBAY) is used to handle the selection of the operator place per
bay. The function gives permission to operate from two main types of locations either
from Remote (for example, control centre or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on
the IED) or from all (Local and Remote). The Local/Remote switch position can also
be set to Off, which means no operator place selected that is, operation is not possible
either from local or from remote.

For IEC 61850-8-1 communication, the Bay Control function can be set to discriminate
between commands with orCat station and remote (2 and 3). The selection is then done
through the IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 command LocSta.

QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different

apparatuses within the bay. There are two different blocking alternatives:

• Blocking of update of positions

• Blocking of commands

IEC13000016-2-en.vsd
IEC13000016 V2 EN

Figure 299: APC - Local remote function block

666
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.2.1.2 Switch controller (SCSWI)

SCSWI may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase
switching devices.

After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller
performs the following checks and actions:

• A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation.

• Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the
operation is permitted.
• The synchronism check/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and
performs operation upon positive response.
• The blocking conditions are evaluated
• The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its
requested direction (open or closed).

The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between:

• Select and execute.

• Select and until the reservation is granted.
• Execute and the final end position of the apparatus.
• Execute and valid close conditions from the synchronism check.

At error the command sequence is cancelled.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch
controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches
to the resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the
positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time;
an error signal will be given.

The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or
SXSWI. The switch controller represents the content of the SCSWI logical node
(according to IEC 61850) with mandatory functionality.

14.2.1.3 Switches (SXCBR/SXSWI)

Switches are functions used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal
conditions, or to interrupt the circuit under fault, or emergency conditions. The
intention with these functions is to represent the lowest level of a power-switching
device with or without short circuit breaking capability, for example, circuit breakers,
disconnectors, grounding switches etc.

667
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The purpose of these functions is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to the primary apparatus
via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Switches have the following functionalities:

• Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard

• Block/deblock for open/close command respectively
• Update block/deblock of position indication
• Substitution of position indication
• Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively

The realizations of these function are done with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker
and with SXSWI representing a circuit switch that is, a disconnector or an grounding
switch.

Circuit breaker (SXCBR) can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one
three-phase switch.

The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical
nodes Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) with mandatory
functionality.

14.2.1.4 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN)

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching

devices, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches can be required
from the same bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other
bays, it is exchanged over the station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem
that arises, even at a high speed of communication, is a space of time during which the
information about the position of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking
function uses this information for evaluation, which means that also the interlocking
conditions are uncertain.

To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique
reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method, the bay that
wants the reservation sends a reservation request to other bays and then waits for a
reservation granted signal from the other bays. Actual position indications from these

668
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

bays are then transferred over the station bus for evaluation in the IED. After the
evaluation the operation can be executed with high security.

This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks
QCRSV and RESIN. The application principle is shown in Figure 300.

The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation
request to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from
another bay.

The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays.
The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from
another bay or the acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a
request from this bay. Also the information of valid transmission over the station bus
must be received.

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_GRT
RES_RQ

3 RESIN
EXCH_IN
QCRSV
EXCH_ OUT
RES_RQ1
... From other ..
SCSWI in RES_RQ8
...

the bay
RES_GRT1 To other
RESIN ..
SCSWI
EXCH_IN RES_GRT8
in the
EXCH_OUT RES_ DATA bay
3 2

...

Station bus

en 05000117_ansi. vsd
ANSI05000117 V2 EN

Figure 300: Application principles for reservation over the station bus

The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application
example in Figure 301. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra
binary inputs and outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and
RESIN.

669
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_ EXT
SELECTED

OR
Other SCSWI in the bay

BI BO BI BO

en 05000118_ ansi. vsd

ANSI05000118 V2 EN

Figure 301: Application principles for reservation with external wiring

The solution in Figure 301 can also be realized over the station bus according to the
application example in Figure 302. The solutions in Figure 301 and Figure 302 do not
have the same high security compared to the solution in Figure 300, but instead have a
higher availability, since no acknowledgment is required.

IED IED

IntlReceive SCSWI
RESGRANT RES_EXT

SELECTED
. . .
. . .

IntlReceive SPGAPC
RESGRANT Other SCWI in OR IN
the bay

...
Station bus

IEC05000178-3-en.vsd
IEC05000178 V3 EN

Figure 302: Application principle for an alternative reservation solution

14.2.2 Interaction between modules

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical
nodes or functions that are described here:

670
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

• The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes all operations for one apparatus. It is the
command interface of the apparatus. It includes the position reporting as well as
the control of the position
• The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the
apparatus control function.
• The Circuit switch (SXSWI) is the process interface to the disconnector or the
grounding switch for the apparatus control function.
• The Bay control (QCBAY) fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such
as operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay.
• The Reservation (QCRSV) deals with the reservation function.
• The Protection trip logic (SMPPTRC, 94) connects the "trip" outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR.
• The Autorecloser (SMBRREC, 79) consists of the facilities to automatically close
a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions.
• The logical node Interlocking (SCILO, 3) provides the information to SCSWI
whether it is permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking
conditions are evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO (3).
• The Synchronism, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) calculates
and compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker
with predefined switching conditions (synchronism check). Also the case that one
side is dead (energizing-check) is included.
• The Generic Automatic Process Control function, GAPC, handles generic
commands from the operator to the system.

The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in Figure 303 below.

671
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

ZMQPDIS SMPPTRC SECRSYN

(Distance) (Trip logic) (Synchrocheck)

Trip
Synchrocheck
OK

QCBAY Operator place

Initiate AR
(Bay control) selection Open cmd
Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
Res. granted (Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC

Enable

Enable
open

close
(Auto- Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O
ANSI05000120-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000120 V2 EN

Figure 303: Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical bay

14.2.3 Setting guidelines

The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

672
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.2.3.1 Bay control (QCBAY)

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and
remote are accepted without any priority.

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set to Yes, commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients

at both station and remote level are accepted, when the QCBAY function is in Remote.
If set to No, the command LocSta controls which operator place is accepted when
QCBAY is in Remote. If LocSta is true, only commands from station level are
accepted, otherwise only commands from remote level are accepted.

The parameter RemoteIncStation has only effect on the IEC61850-8-1

communication. Further, when using IEC61850 edition 1
communication, the parameter should be set to Yes, since the command
LocSta is not defined in IEC61850-8-1 edition 1.

14.2.3.2 Switch controller (SCSWI)

The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850.
The default for control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches the
control model is set to SBO Enh (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security.

When the operation shall be performed in one step, and no monitoring of the result of
the command is desired, the model direct control with normal security is used.

At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value
by the control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated
by a termination command.

The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position

indication, that is, at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of
the value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the
position is in bad or intermediate state.

tSelect is the maximum allowed time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the
selection of the object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal
is set to false and a cause-code is given.

The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the
feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When
the time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given.

tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchronism check function to fulfill the
close conditions. When the time has expired, the function tries to start the

673
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

synchronizing function. If tSynchrocheck is set to 0, no synchrocheck is done, before

starting the synchronizing function.

The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is

obtained in SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the
synchronizing is set if the synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled. When the
time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given. If no
synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function is done, and when tSynchrocheck has expired, the control
function is reset and a cause-code is given.

tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the
command termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset and a
cause-code is given.

tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of
three single-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for
trip or alarm, and during a command, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is
given.

SuppressMidPos when On suppresses the mid-position during the time tIntermediate

of the connected switches.

The parameter InterlockCheck decides if interlock check should be done at both select
and operate, Sel & Op phase, or only at operate, Op phase.

14.2.3.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset, and a cause-code is
given.

During the tIntermediate time the position indication is allowed to be in an

intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the switch function is reset, and a
cause-code is given. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed during
this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa if the
parameter SuppressMidPos is set to On in the SCSWI function.

If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets
when a new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the
command output pulse remains active until the timer tOpenPulsetClosePulse has elapsed.

tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

674
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

14.2.3.4 Bay Reserve (QCRSV)

The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when
this cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure.

When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually
for each apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, that is, the output for
reservation request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of
apparatus x.

14.2.3.5 Reservation input (RESIN)

With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not
yet installed in the SA system.

14.3 Voltage control

14.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U

IEC10000165 V1 EN

Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84

binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC - 84
32 binary inputs

675
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.3.2 Application
When the load in a power network is increased the voltage will decrease and vice
versa. To maintain the network voltage at a constant level, power transformers are
usually equipped with on-load tap-changer. This alters the power transformer ratio in a
number of predefined steps and in that way changes the voltage. Each step usually
represents a change in voltage of approximately 0.5-1.7%.

The voltage control function is intended for control of power transformers with a motor
driven on-load tap-changer. The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the
secondary side of the power transformer. The control method is based on a step-by-step
principle which means that a control pulse, one at a time, will be issued to the tap
changer mechanism to move it one position up or down. The length of the control
pulse can be set within a wide range to accommodate different types of tap changer
mechanisms. The pulse is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given time,
deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset deadband (degree of
insensitivity).

The voltage can be controlled at the point of voltage measurement, as well as at a load
point located out in the network. In the latter case, the load point voltage is calculated
based on the measured load current and the known impedance from the voltage
measuring point to the load point.

The automatic voltage control can be either for a single transformer, or for parallel
transformers. Parallel control of power transformers can be made in three alternative
ways:

• With the master-follower method

• With the reverse reactance method
• With the circulating current method

Of these alternatives, the first and the last require communication between the function
control blocks of the different transformers, whereas the middle alternative does not
require any communication.

The voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility to avoid
simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer
within a parallel group, with a LV CB open, compensation for a possible capacitor
bank on the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including
contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so
that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses and so on.

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks which both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1:

676
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

• Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for single control and
TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control.
• Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs, TCMYLTC (84) and 32
binary inputs, TCLYLTC (84)

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) is a
function designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of a power
transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower command
is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time, deviates from
the set target value by more than the preset deadband value (degree of insensitivity). A
time delay (inverse or definite time) is set to avoid unnecessary operation during
shorter voltage deviations from the target value, and in order to coordinate with other
automatic voltage controllers in the system.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84)are an interface between the Automatic voltage

control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) and the transformer load
tap changer itself. More specifically this means that it gives command-pulses to a
power transformer motor driven load tap changer and that it receives information from
the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given commands, and so on.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) also serve the purpose of giving information about
tap position to the transformer differential protection.

Control location local/remote

The tap changer can be operated from the front of the IED or from a remote place
alternatively. On the IED front there is a local remote switch that can be used to select
the operator place. For this functionality the Apparatus control function blocks Bay
control (QCBAY), Local remote (LOCREM) and Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) are used.

Information about the control location is given to TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function through connection of the Permitted Source to Operate (PSTO) output of the
QCBAY function block to the input PSTO of the TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function block.

Control Mode
The control mode of the automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC
(90) for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control can be:

• Manual
• Automatic

The control mode can be changed from the local location via the command menu on
the local HMI under Main menu/Control/Commands/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x, or changed

677
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

from a remote location via binary signals connected to the MANCTRL, AUTOCTRL
inputs on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function block.

Measured Quantities
In normal applications, the LV side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring
point. If necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-
voltage drop to the regulation point.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for single control and
TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control function block has three inputs I3P1, I3P2 and
V3P2 corresponding to HV-current, LV-current and LV-voltage respectively. These
analog quantities are fed to the IED via the transformer input module, the Analog to
Digital Converter and thereafter a Pre-Processing Block. In the Pre-Processing Block, a
great number of quantities for example, phase-to-phase analog values, sequence values,
max value in a three phase group etc., are derived. The different function blocks in the
IED are then “subscribing” on selected quantities from the pre-processing blocks. In
case of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90), there are the following possibilities:

• I3P1 represents a three-phase group of phase current with the highest current in
any of the three phases considered. As only the highest of the phase current is
considered, it is also possible to use one single-phase current as well as two-phase
currents. In these cases, the currents that are not used will be zero.
• For I3P2 and V3P2 the setting alternatives are: any individual phase current/
voltage, as well as any combination of phase-phase current/voltage or the positive
sequence current/voltage. Thus, single-phase as well as, phase-phase or three-
phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current
and voltage.

678
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

High Voltage Side

IA,IB,IC

IED
raise,lower

Load Tap
Changer
BOM
signals/alarms
BIM
position
MIM
(Load Current) IL

3ph or ph-ph or 1ph Currents

TRM
3ph or ph-ph or 1ph Voltages

Low Voltage Side

VB (Busbar Voltage)

Line Impedance R+jX

Load Center
VL (Load Point Voltage)

ANSI10000044-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000044 V1 EN

Figure 304: Signal flow for a single transformer with voltage control

On the HV side, the three-phase current is normally required in order to feed the three-
phase over current protection that blocks the load tap changer in case of over-current
above harmful levels.

The voltage measurement on the LV-side can be made single phase-ground. However,
it shall be remembered that this can only be used in solidly grounded systems, as the
measured phase-ground voltage can increase with as much as a factor √3 in case of
ground faults in a non-solidly grounded system.

The analog input signals are normally common with other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

The LV-busbar voltage is designated VB, the load current IL and load
point voltage VL.

679
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Automatic voltage control for a single transformer

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC (90) measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage VB. If no other additional features are enabled (line
voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation.

TR1ATCC (90) then compares this voltage with the set voltage, VSet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a
deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical around
VSet, see figure 305, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer and an inner
deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the timer to initiate tap
commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured voltage is once again back
inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer deadband is denoted ΔV. The setting
of ΔV, setting Vdeadband should be set to a value near to the power transformer’s tap
changer voltage step (typically 75–125% of the tap changer step).

Security Range

*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DV DV Lower Cmd
DVin DVin

0 Vblock Vmin V1 Vset V2 Vmax Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

ANSI06000489-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000489 V2 EN

Figure 305: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage VB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between V1 and V2 in figure 305). In that case no actions will be
taken by TR1ATCC (90). However, if VB becomes smaller than V1, or greater than
V2, an appropriate raise or lower timer will start. The timer will run as long as the
measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists longer
than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC (90) will initiate that the appropriate VLOWER
or VRAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary
inputs TCMYLTC, 84), or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84) to the transformer load tap
changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the magnitude of the busbar
voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of the inner deadband is
denoted ΔVin. The inner deadband ΔVin, setting VDeadbandInner should be set to a
value smaller than ΔV. It is recommended to set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the
ΔV value.

This way of working is used by TR1ATCC (90) while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Vmin and Vmax.

A situation where VB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal situation.

680
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

When VB falls below setting Vblock, or alternatively, falls below setting Vmin but still
above Vblock, or rises above Vmax, actions will be taken in accordance with settings
for blocking conditions (refer to table 60).

If the busbar voltage rises above Vmax, TR1ATCC (90) can initiate one or more fast
step down commands (VLOWER commands) in order to bring the voltage back into
the security range (settings Vmin, and Vmax). The fast step down function operation
can be set in one of the following three ways: off /auto/auto and manual, according to
the setting FSDMode. The VLOWER command, in fast step down mode, is issued with
the settable time delay tFSD.

The measured RMS magnitude of the busbar voltage VB is shown on the local HMI as
value BUSVOLT under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Time characteristic
The time characteristic defines the time that elapses between the moment when
measured voltage exceeds the deadband interval until the appropriate VRAISE or
VLOWER command is initiated.

The purpose of the time delay is to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations
caused by temporary voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations
in radial networks in order to limit the number of load tap changer operations. This can
be done by setting a longer time delay closer to the consumer and shorter time delays
higher up in the system.

The first time delay, t1, is used as a time delay (usually long delay) for the first
command in one direction. It can have a definite or inverse time characteristic,
according to the setting t1Use (Constant/Inverse). For inverse time characteristics
larger voltage deviations from the VSet value will result in shorter time delays, limited
by the shortest time delay equal to the tMin setting. This setting should be coordinated
with the tap changer mechanism operation time.

Constant (definite) time delay is independent of the voltage deviation.

The inverse time characteristic for the first time delay follows the formulas:

DA = VB - VSet
ANSIEQUATION2294 V1 EN (Equation 513)

DA
D=
DV
EQUATION1846-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 514)

681
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

tMin = Dt1
EQUATION1848 V2 EN (Equation 515)

Where:
DA absolute voltage deviation from the set point
D relative voltage deviation in respect to set deadband value

For the last equation, the condition t1 > tMin shall also be fulfilled. This practically
means that tMin will be equal to the set t1 value when absolute voltage deviation DA is
equal to ΔV ( relative voltage deviation D is equal to 1). For other values see
figure 306. It should be noted that operating times, shown in the figure 306 are for 30,
60, 90, 120, 150 & 180 seconds settings for t1 and 10 seconds for tMin.

t1=180

t1=150

t1=120

t1=90

t1=60

t1=30

IEC06000488_2_en.vsd
IEC06000488 V2 EN

Figure 306: Inverse time characteristic for TR1ATCC (90) and TR8ATCC (90)

The second time delay, t2, will be used for consecutive commands (commands in the
same direction as the first command). It can have a definite or inverse time
characteristic according to the setting t2Use (Constant/Inverse). Inverse time
characteristic for the second time delay follows the similar formulas as for the first
time delay, but the t2 setting is used instead of t1.

682
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Line voltage drop

The purpose with the line voltage drop compensation is to control the voltage, not at
the power transformer low voltage side, but at a point closer to the load point.

Figure 307 shows the vector diagram for a line modelled as a series impedance with
the voltage VB at the LV busbar and voltage VL at the load center. The load current on
the line is IL, the line resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point
are RL and XL. The angle between the busbar voltage and the current, is j. If all these
parameters are known VL can be obtained by simple vector calculation.

Values for RL and XL are given as settings in primary system ohms. If more than one
line is connected to the LV busbar, an equivalent impedance should be calculated and
given as a parameter setting.

The line voltage drop compensation function can be turned Enabled/Disabled by the
setting parameter OperationLDC. When it is enabled, the voltage VL will be used by
the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control for voltage regulation instead of VB.
However, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will still perform the following two checks:

1. The magnitude of the measured busbar voltageVB, shall be within the security
range, (setting Vmin and Vmax). If the busbar voltage falls-out of this range the
line voltage drop compensation calculations will be temporarily stopped until the
voltage VB comes back within the range.
2. The magnitude of the calculated voltage VL at the load point, can be limited such
that it is only allowed to be equal to or smaller than the magnitude of VB,
otherwise VB will be used. However, a situation where VL>VB can be caused by a
capacitive load condition, and if the wish is to allow for a situation like that, the
limitation can be removed by setting the parameter OperCapaLDC to Enabled.

RL XL
~
Load

VB

VB

VL jXLIL
Re
RLIL
en06000487_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000487 V1 EN

Figure 307: Vector diagram for line voltage drop compensation

683
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The calculated load voltage VL is shown on the local HMI as value ULOAD under
Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/
TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Load voltage adjustment

Due to the fact that most loads are proportional to the square of the voltage, it is
possible to provide a way to shed part of the load by decreasing the supply voltage a
couple of percent. During high load conditions, the voltage drop might be considerable
and there might be reasons to increase the supply voltage to keep up the power quality
and customer satisfaction.

It is possible to do this voltage adjustment in two different ways in Automatic voltage

control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC (90) and parallel control TR8ATCC
(90):

1. Automatic load voltage adjustment, proportional to the load current.

2. Constant load voltage adjustment with four different preset values.

In the first case the voltage adjustment is dependent on the load and maximum voltage
adjustment should be obtained at rated load of the transformer.

In the second case, a voltage adjustment of the set point voltage can be made in four
discrete steps (positive or negative) activated with binary signals connected to
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function block inputs LVA1, LVA2, LVA3 and
LVA4. The corresponding voltage adjustment factors are given as setting parameters
LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4. The inputs are activated with a
pulse, and the latest activation of anyone of the four inputs is valid. Activation of the
input LVARESET in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) block, brings the voltage
setpoint back to Vset.

With these factors, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) adjusts the value of the set
voltage Vset according to the following formula:

IL
Vsetadjust = Vset + Sa × + Sci
I 2 Base
EQUATION1978-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 516)

Vset, adjust Adjusted set voltage in per unit

VSet Original set voltage: Base quality is Vn2

Sa Automatic load voltage adjustment factor, setting VRAuto

IL Load current

I2Base Rated current, LV winding

Sci Constant load voltage adjust. factor for active input i (corresponding to
LVAConst1, LVAConst2, LVAConst3 and LVAConst4)

684
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

It shall be noted that the adjustment factor is negative in order to decrease the load
voltage and positive in order to increase the load voltage. After this calculation Vset,
adjust will be used by TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) for voltage regulation instead
of the original value Vset. The calculated set point voltage Vset, adjust is shown on the
local HMI as a service value under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR1ATCC:x/TR8ATCC:x.

Automatic control of parallel transformers

Control of parallel transformers means control of two or more power transformers
connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on the HV side.
Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway situation where the tap
changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and end up in opposite end
positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with the Automatic voltage
control for tap changer, single/parallel control TR8ATCC (90):
• master-follower method
• reverse reactance method
• circulating current method

In order to realize the need for special measures to be taken when controlling
transformers in parallel, consider first two parallel transformers which are supposed to
be equal with similar tap changers. If they would each be in automatic voltage control
for single transformer that is, each of them regulating the voltage on the LV busbar
individually without any further measures taken, then the following could happen.
Assuming for instance that they start out on the same tap position and that the LV
busbar voltage VB is within VSet ± DV, then a gradual increase or decrease in the load
would at some stage make VB fall outside VSet ± DV and a raise or lower command
would be initiated. However, the rate of change of voltage would normally be slow,
which would make one tap changer act before the other. This is unavoidable and is due
to small inequalities in measurement and so on. The one tap changer that responds first
on a low voltage condition with a raise command will be prone to always do so, and
vice versa. The situation could thus develop such that, for example T1 responds first to
a low busbar voltage with a raise command and thereby restores the voltage. When the
busbar voltage thereafter at a later stage gets high, T2 could respond with a lower
command and thereby again restore the busbar voltage to be within the inner deadband.
However, this has now caused the load tap changer for the two transformers to be 2 tap
positions apart, which in turn causes an increasing circulating current. This course of
events will then repeat with T1 initiating raise commands and T2 initiating lower
commands in order to keep the busbar voltage within VSet ± DV, but at the same time
it will drive the two tap changers to their opposite end positions. High circulating
currents and loss of control would be the result of this runaway tap situation.

685
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Parallel control with the master-follower method

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and
will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles for Automatic voltage
control. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary input FORCMAST in
TR8ATCC (90) function block for one of the transformers in the group.

The followers can act in two alternative ways depending on the setting of the parameter
MFMode. When this setting is Follow Cmd, raise and lower commands (VRAISE and
VLOWER) generated by the master, will initiate the corresponding command in all
follower TR8ATCCs (90) simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow
the master irrespective of their individual tap positions. Effectively this means that if
the tap positions of the followers were harmonized with the master from the beginning,
they would stay like that as long as all transformers in the parallel group continue to
participate in the parallel control. On the other hand for example, one transformer is
disconnected from the group and misses a one tap step operation, and thereafter is
reconnected to the group again, it will thereafter participate in the regulation but with a
one tap position offset.

If the parameter MFMode is set to Follow Tap, then the followers will read the tap
position of the master and adopt to the same tap position or to a tap position with an
offset relative to the master, and given by setting parameter TapPosOffs (positive or
negative integer value). The setting parameter tAutoMSF introduces a time delay on
VRAISE/VLOWER commands individually for each follower when setting MFMode
has the value Follow Tap.

Selecting a master is made by activating the input FORCMAST in TR8ATCC (90)

function block. Deselecting a master is made by activating the input RSTMAST. These
two inputs are pulse activated, and the most recent activation is valid that is, an
activation of any of these two inputs overrides previous activations. If none of these
inputs has been activated, the default is that the transformer acts as a follower (given of
course that the settings are parallel control with the master follower method).

When the selection of master or follower in parallel control, or automatic control in

single mode, is made with a three position switch in the substation, an arrangement as
in figure 308 below is arranged with application configuration.

Figure 308: Principle for a three-position switch Master/Follower/Single

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method

Consider Figure 309 with two parallel transformers with equal rated data and similar
tap changers. The tap positions will diverge and finally end up in a runaway tap
situation if no measures to avoid this are taken.

686
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

T1 T2

IT1 IT2
VB
IL

VL Load

en06000486_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000486 V1 EN

Figure 309: Parallel transformers with equal rated data.

In the reverse reactance method, the line voltage drop compensation is used. The
original of the line voltage drop compensation function purpose is to control the
voltage at a load point further out in the network. The very same function can also be
used here to control the voltage at a load point inside the transformer, by choosing a
negative value of the parameter Xline.

Figure 310, shows a vector diagram where the principle of reverse reactance has been
introduced for the transformers in figure 309. The transformers are here supposed to be
on the same tap position, and the busbar voltage is supposed to give a calculated
compensated value VL that coincides with the target voltage VSet.

RLIT1=RLIT2
= V set
V L1=V L2
jXLIT1=jXLIT2

VB

IT1=IT2=(IT1+IT2)/2
en06000485_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000485 V1 EN

Figure 310: Vector diagram for two transformers regulated exactly on target voltage.

687
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

A comparison with figure 307 gives that the line voltage drop compensation for the
purpose of reverse reactance control is made with a value with opposite sign on XL,
hence the designation “reverse reactance” or “negative reactance”. Effectively this
means that, whereas the line voltage drop compensation in figure 307 gave a voltage
drop along a line from the busbar voltage VB to a load point voltage VL, the line
voltage drop compensation in figure 310 gives a voltage increase (actually, by
adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector VL
will be approximately equal to the length of VB) from VB up towards the transformer
itself. Thus in principal the difference between the vector diagrams in figure 307 and
figure 310 is the sign of the setting parameter XL.

If now the tap position between the transformers will differ, a circulating current will
appear, and the transformer with the highest tap (highest no load voltage) will be the
source of this circulating current. Figure 311 below shows this situation with T1 being
on a higher tap than T2.

I
cc....T2

T1 T2
RLIT2 RIT1
V L1
I
cc....T1

jXLIT2 jXLIT
IT1 IT2 V L2
1
VB
-Icc VB
IL IT2
(IT1+IT2)/2
IT1
Icc
VL Load

en06000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000491 V1 EN

Figure 311: Circulating current caused by T1 on a higher tap than T2.

The circulating current Icc is predominantly reactive due to the reactive nature of the
transformers. The impact of Icc on the individual transformer currents is that it
increases the current in T1 (the transformer that is driving Icc) and decreases it in T2 at
the same time as it introduces contradictive phase shifts, as can be seen in figure 311.
The result is thus, that the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage VL for T1
will be higher than the line voltage drop compensation calculated voltage VL for T2, or

688
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

in other words, the transformer with the higher tap position will have the higher VL
value and the transformer with the lower tap position will have the lower VL value.
Consequently, when the busbar voltage increases, T1 will be the one to tap down, and
when the busbar voltage decreases, T2 will be the one to tap up. The overall
performance will then be that the runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the
circulating current will be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method

Two transformers with different turns ratio, connected to the same busbar on the HV-
side, will apparently show different LV-side voltage. If they are now connected to the
same LV busbar but remain unloaded, this difference in no-load voltage will cause a
circulating current to flow through the transformers. When load is put on the
transformers, the circulating current will remain the same, but now it will be
superimposed on the load current in each transformer. Voltage control of parallel
transformers with the circulating current method means minimizing of the circulating
current at a given voltage target value, thereby achieving:

1. that the busbar or load voltage is regulated to a preset target value

2. that the load is shared between parallel transformers in proportion to their ohmic
short circuit reactance

If the transformers have equal percentage impedance given in the respective

transformer MVA base, the load will be divided in direct proportion to the rated power
of the transformers when the circulating current is minimized.

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC (90) function
blocks (one TR8ATCC (90) function for each transformer in the parallel group).
TR8ATCC (90) function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are located
in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the
IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete exchange of TR8ATCC (90) data,
analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made cyclically every 300 ms.

The busbar voltage VB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel
group by its associated TR8ATCC (90) function. These measured values will then be
exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC (90) block, the mean
value of all VB values will be calculated. The resulting value VBmean will then be used
in each IED instead of VB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value
is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous
measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time,
supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed. This works such that, if a measured
voltage VB, differs from VBmean with more than a preset value (setting parameter
VTmismatch) and for more than a pre set time (setting parameter tVTmismatch) an
alarm signal VTALARM will be generated.

689
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The calculated mean busbar voltage VBmean is shown on the local HMI as a service
value BusVolt under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

Measured current values for the individual transformers must be communicated

between the participating TR8ATCC (90) functions, in order to calculate the
circulating current.

The calculated circulating current Icc_i for transformer “i” is shown on the HMI as a
service value ICIRCUL under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

When the circulating current is known, it is possible to calculate a no-load voltage for
each transformer in the parallel group. To do that the magnitude of the circulating
current in each bay, is first converted to a voltage deviation, Vdi, with equation 517:

Vdi = C i × I cc _ i × X i
EQUATION1979-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 517)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting parameter
named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or decreasing the
impact of the circulating current in TR8ATCC control calculations. It should be noted
that Vdi will have positive values for transformers that produce circulating currents and
negative values for transformers that receive circulating currents.

Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be approximated
with:

Vi = VBmean + Vdi
EQUATION1980-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 518)

This value for the no-load voltage is then simply put into the voltage control function
for single transformer. There it is treated as the measured busbar voltage, and further
control actions are taken as described previously in section "Automatic voltage control
for a single transformer". By doing this, the overall control strategy can be summarized
as follows.

For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-load
voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage VBmean. The calculated no-
load voltage will then be compared with the set voltage VSet. A steady deviation which
is outside the outer deadband will result in VLOWER or VRAISE being initiated
alternatively. In this way the overall control action will always be correct since the
position of a tap changer is directly proportional to the transformer no-load voltage.
The sequence resets when VBmean is inside the inner deadband at the same time as the

690
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in the parallel group are inside the
outer deadband.

In parallel operation with the circulating current method, different VSet values for
individual transformers can cause the voltage regulation to be unstable. For this reason,
the mean value of VSet for parallel operating transformers can be automatically
calculated and used for the voltage regulation. This is set Enabled/Disabled by setting
parameter OperUsetPar. The calculated mean VSet value is shown on the local HMI as
a service value USETPAR under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

The use of mean VSet is recommended for parallel operation with the circulating
current method, especially in cases when Load Voltage Adjustment is also used.

Line voltage drop compensation for parallel control

The line voltage drop compensation for a single transformer is described in section
"Line voltage drop". The same principle is used for parallel control with the circulating
current method and with the master – follower method, except that the total load
current, IL, is used in the calculation instead of the individual transformer current. (See
figure 307 for details). The same values for the parameters Rline and Xline shall be set
in all IEDs in the same parallel group. There is no automatic change of these
parameters due to changes in the substation topology, thus they should be changed
manually if needed.

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the circulating current

method)
For some types of tap changers, especially older designs, an unexpected interruption of
the auxiliary voltage in the middle of a tap manoeuvre, can jam the tap changer. In
order not to expose more than one tap changer at a time, simultaneous tapping of
parallel transformers (regulated with the circulating current method) can be avoided.
This is done by setting parameter OperSimTap to On. Simultaneous tapping is then
avoided at the same time as tapping actions (in the long term) are distributed evenly
amongst the parallel transformers.

The algorithm in Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC
(90) will select the transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Vdi to tap first. That
transformer will then start timing, and after time delay t1 the appropriate VRAISE or
VLOWER command will be initiated. If now further tapping is required to bring the
busbar voltage inside VDeadbandInner, the process will be repeated, and the
transformer with the then greatest value of Vdi amongst the remaining transformers in
the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so on. This is made possible as the
calculation of Icc is cyclically updated with the most recent measured values. If two

691
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

transformers have equal magnitude of Vdi then there is a predetermined order

governing which one is going to tap first.

Avoidance of simultaneous tapping (operation with the master follower method)

A time delay for the follower in relation to the command given from the master can be
set when the setting MFMode is Follow Tap that is, when the follower follows the tap
position (with or without an offset) of the master. The setting parameter tAutoMSF then
introduces a time delay on VRAISE/VLOWER commands individually for each
follower, and effectively this can be used to avoid simultaneous tapping.

Homing

Homing (operation with the circulating current method)

This function can be used with parallel operation of power transformers using the
circulating current method. It makes possible to keep a transformer energized from the
HV side, but open on the LV side (hot stand-by), to follow the voltage regulation of
loaded parallel transformers, and thus be on a proper tap position when the LV circuit
breaker closes.

For this function, it is needed to have the LV VTs for each transformer on the cable
(tail) side (not the busbar side) of the CB, and to have the LV CB position hardwired to
the IED.

In TR8ATCC block for one transformer, the state "Homing" will be defined as the
situation when the transformer has information that it belongs to a parallel group (for
example, information on T1INCLD=1 or T2INCLD=1 ... and so on), at the same time
as the binary input DISC on TR8ATCC block is activated by open LV CB. If now the
setting parameter OperHoming = Enabled for that transformer, TR8ATCC will act in
the following way:

• The algorithm calculates the “true” busbar voltage, by averaging the voltage
measurements of the other transformers included in the parallel group (voltage
measurement of the “disconnected transformer” itself is not considered in the
calculation).
• The value of this true busbar voltage is used in the same way as Vset for control of
a single transformer. The “disconnected transformer” will then automatically
initiate VRAISE or VLOWER commands (with appropriate t1 or t2 time delay) in
order to keep the LV side of the transformer within the deadband of the busbar
voltage.

Homing (operation with the master follower method)

If one (or more) follower has its LV circuit breaker open and its HV circuit breaker
closed, and if OperHoming = Enabled, this follower continues to follow the master just
as it would have made with the LV circuit breaker closed. On the other hand, if the LV

692
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

circuit breaker of the master opens, automatic control will be blocked and TR8ATCC
function output MFERR will be activated as the system will not have a master.

Adapt mode, manual control of a parallel group

Adapt mode (operation with the circulating current method)

When the circulating current method is used, it is also possible to manually control the
transformers as a group. To achieve this, the setting OperationAdapt must be set
Enabled, then the control mode for one TR8ATCC (90) shall be set to “Manual” via
the binary input MANCTRL or the local HMI under Main menu/Control/Commands/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x whereas the other
TR8ATCCs (90) are left in “Automatic”. TR8ATCCs (90) in automatic mode will then
observe that one transformer in the parallel group is in manual mode and will then
automatically be set in adapt mode. As the name indicates they will adapt to the
manual tapping of the transformer that has been put in manual mode.

TR8ATCC (90) in adapt mode will continue the calculation of Vdi, but instead of
adding Vdi to the measured busbar voltage, it will compare it with the deadband DV.
The following control rules are used:

1. If Vdi is positive and its modulus is greater than DV, then initiate an VLOWER
command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing.
2. If Vdi is negative and its modulus is greater than DV, then initiate an VRAISE
command. Tapping will then take place after appropriate t1/t2 timing.
3. If Vdi modulus is smaller than DV, then do nothing.

The binary output signal ADAPT on the TR8ATCC (90) function block will be
activated to indicate that this TR8ATCC (90) is adapting to another TR8ATCC (90) in
the parallel group.

It shall be noted that control with adapt mode works as described under the condition
that only one transformer in the parallel group is set to manual mode via the binary
input MANCTRL or, the local HMI Main menu/Control/Commands/
TransformerVoltageControl(ATCC,90)/TR8ATCC:x.

In order to operate each tap changer individually when the circulating current method
is used, the operator must set each TR8ATCC (90) in the parallel group, in manual.

Adapt mode (operation with the master follower method)

When in master follower mode, the adapt situation occurs when the setting
OperationAdapt is Enabled, and the master is put in manual control with the followers
still in parallel master-follower control. In this situation the followers will continue to
follow the master the same way as when it is in automatic control.

693
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

If one follower in a master follower parallel group is put in manual mode, still with the
setting OperationAdaptEnabled, the rest of the group will continue in automatic master
follower control. The follower in manual mode will of course disregard any possible
tapping of the master. However, as one transformer in the parallel group is now
exempted from the parallel control, the binary output signal ADAPT on TR8ATCC
(90) function block will be activated for the rest of the parallel group.

Plant with capacitive shunt compensation (for operation with the

circulating current method)
If significant capacitive shunt generation is connected in a substation and it is not
symmetrically connected to all transformers in a parallel group, the situation may
require compensation of the capacitive current to the ATCC.

An asymmetric connection will exist if for example, the capacitor is situated on the LV-
side of a transformer, between the CT measuring point and the power transformer or at
a tertiary winding of the power transformer, see figure 312. In a situation like this, the
capacitive current will interact in opposite way in the different ATCCs with regard to
the calculation of circulating currents. The capacitive current is part of the imaginary
load current and therefore essential in the calculation. The calculated circulating
current and the real circulating currents will in this case not be the same, and they will
not reach a minimum at the same time. This might result in a situation when
minimizing of the calculated circulating current will not regulate the tap changers to
the same tap positions even if the power transformers are equal.

However if the capacitive current is also considered in the calculation of the circulating
current, then the influence can be compensated for.

694
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

I cc....T2 I cc....T2

T1 T2 T1 T2
I I cc....T1
cc....T1

IT1 IT2 IT1 IT2

IC
IT1 IT2
IC
IT2-IC

IT1
VB VB
IL IL

VL Load VL Load

en06000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000512 V1 EN

Figure 312: Capacitor bank on the LV-side

From figure 312 it is obvious that the two different connections of the capacitor banks
are completely the same regarding the currents in the primary network. However the
CT measured currents for the transformers would be different. The capacitor bank
current may flow entirely to the load on the LV side, or it may be divided between the
LV and the HV side. In the latter case, the part of IC that goes to the HV side will
divide between the two transformers and it will be measured with opposite direction
for T2 and T1. This in turn would be misinterpreted as a circulating current, and would
upset a correct calculation of Icc. Thus, if the actual connection is as in the left figure
the capacitive current IC needs to be compensated for regardless of the operating
conditions and in ATCC this is made numerically. The reactive power of the capacitor
bank is given as a setting Q1, which makes it possible to calculate the reactive capacitance:

695
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

2
V
XC =
Q1
EQUATION1981-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 519)

Thereafter the current IC at the actual measured voltage VB can be calculated as:

VB
IC =
3 × XC
EQUATION1982-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 520)

In this way the measured LV currents can be adjusted so that the capacitor bank current
will not influence the calculation of the circulating current.

Three independent capacitor bank values Q1, Q2 and Q3 can be set for each
transformer in order to make possible switching of three steps in a capacitor bank in
one bay.

Power monitoring
The level (with sign) of active and reactive power flow through the transformer, can be
monitored. This function can be utilized for different purposes for example, to block
the voltage control function when active power is flowing from the LV side to the HV
side or to initiate switching of reactive power compensation plant, and so on.

There are four setting parameters P>, P<, Q> and Q< with associated outputs in
TR8ATCC (90) and TR1ATCC (90) function blocks PGTFWD, PLTREV, QGTFWD
and QLTREV. When passing the pre-set value, the associated output will be activated
after the common time delay setting tPower.

The definition of direction of the power is such that the active power P is forward when
power flows from the HV-side to the LV-side as shown in figure 313. The reactive
power Q is forward when the total load on the LV side is inductive ( reactance) as
shown in figure 313.

696
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

HV-side

Pforward
Qforward
(inductive)
IED

ATCC

LV-side
ANSI06000536-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000536 V2 EN

Figure 313: Power direction references

With the four outputs in the function block available, it is possible to do more than just
supervise a level of power flow in one direction. By combining the outputs with logical
elements in application configuration, it is also possible to cover for example, intervals
as well as areas in the P-Q plane.

Busbar topology logic

Information of the busbar topology that is, position of circuit breakers and isolators,
yielding which transformers that are connected to which busbar and which busbars that
are connected to each other, is vital for the Automatic voltage control for tap changer,
parallel control function TR8ATCC (90) when the circulating current or the master-
follower method is used. This information tells each TR8ATCC (90), which
transformers that it has to consider in the parallel control.

In a simple case, when only the switchgear in the transformer bays needs to be
considered, there is a built-in function in TR8ATCC (90) block that can provide
information on whether a transformer is connected to the parallel group or not. This is
made by connecting the transformer CB auxiliary contact status to TR8ATCC (90)
function block input DISC, which can be made via a binary input, or via GOOSE from
another IED in the substation. When the transformer CB is open, this activates that
input which in turn will make a corresponding signal DISC=1 in TR8ATCC (90) data
set. This data set is the same data package as the package that contains all TR8ATCC
(90) data transmitted to the other transformers in the parallel group (see section
"Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions" for more details). Figure 314
shows an example where T3 is disconnected which will lead to T3 sending the DISC=1
signal to the other two parallel TR8ATCC (90) modules (T1 and T2) in the group. Also
see table 59.

697
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

T1 T2 T3
V1 V2 V3

Z1 I1 Z2 I2 Z3 I3=0

IL=I1+I2
99000952.VSD
ANSI99000952 V1 EN

Figure 314: Disconnection of one transformer in a parallel group

When the busbar arrangement is more complicated with more buses and bus couplers/
bus sections, it is necessary to engineer a specific station topology logic. This logic can
be built in the application configuration in PCM600 and will keep record on which
transformers that are in parallel (in one or more parallel groups). In each TR8ATCC
(90) function block there are eight binary inputs (T1INCLD,..., T8INCLD) that will be
activated from the logic depending on which transformers that are in parallel with the
transformer to whom the TR8ATCC (90) function block belongs.

TR8ATCC (90) function block is also fitted with eight outputs (T1PG,..., T8PG) for
indication of the actual composition of the parallel group that it itself is part of. If
parallel operation mode has been selected in the IED with setting TrfId = Tx, then the
TxPG signal will always be set to 1. The parallel function will consider communication
messages only from the voltage control functions working in parallel (according to the
current station configuration). When the parallel voltage control function detects that
no other transformers work in parallel it will behave as a single voltage control
function in automatic mode.

Exchange of information between TR8ATCC functions

Each transformer in a parallel group needs an Automatic voltage control for tap
changer, parallel control TR8ATCC (90) function block of its own for the parallel
voltage control. Communication between these TR8ATCCs (90) is made either on the
GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850 protocol if TR8ATCC (90)
functions reside in different IEDs, or alternatively configured internally in one IED if
multiple instances of TR8ATCC (90) reside in the same IED. Complete exchange of
TR8ATCC (90) data, analog as well as binary, on GOOSE is made cyclically every
300 ms.

TR8ATCC (90) function block has an output ATCCOUT. This output contains two
sets of signals. One is the data set that needs to be transmitted to other TR8ATCC (90)
blocks in the same parallel group, and the other is the data set that is transferred to the

698
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function block for the same transformer as TR8ATCC
(90) block belongs to.

There are 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals in the data set that is transmitted from
one TR8ATCC (90) block to the other TR8ATCC (90) blocks in the same parallel group:

Table 57: Binary signals

Signal Explanation
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to
tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control
mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 58: Analog signals

Signal Explanation
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoadCurrim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (VSet) for automatic control

Manual configuration of VCTR GOOSE data set is required. Note that

both data value attributes and quality attributes have to be mapped. The
following data objects must be configured:
• BusV
• LodAIm
• LodARe
• PosRel

699
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

• SetV
• VCTRStatus
• X2

The transformers controlled in parallel with the circulating current method or the master-
follower method must be assigned unique identities. These identities are entered as a
setting in each TR8ATCC (90), and they are predefined as T1, T2, T3,..., T8
(transformers 1 to 8). In figure 314 there are three transformers with the parameter
TrfId set to T1, T2 and T3, respectively.

For parallel control with the circulating current method or the master-follower method
alternatively, the same type of data set as described above, must be exchanged between
two TR8ATCC (90). To achieve this, each TR8ATCC (90) is transmitting its own data
set on the output ATCCOUT as previously mentioned. To receive data from the other
transformers in the parallel group, the output ATCCOUT from each transformer must
be connected (via GOOSE or internally in the application configuration) to the inputs
HORIZx (x = identifier for the other transformers in the parallel group) on TR8ATCC
(90) function block. Apart from this, there is also a setting in each TR8ATCC =/,..., =/
T1RXOP=Off/On,..., T8RXOP=Off/ On. This setting determines from which of the
other transformer individuals that data shall be received. Settings in the three
TR8ATCC blocks for the transformers in figure 314, would then be according to the
table 59:

Table 59: Setting of TxRXOP

TrfId=T1 T1RXOP=O T2RXOP=O T3RXOP=O T4RXOP=O T5RXOP=O T6RXOP=O T7RXOP=O T8RXOP=Off

ff n n ff ff ff ff
TrfId=T2 T1RXOP=O T2RXOP=O T3RXOP=O T4RXOP=O T5RXOP=O T6RXOP=O T7RXOP=O T8RXOP=Off
n ff n ff ff ff ff
TrfId=T3 T1RXOP=O T2RXOP=O T3RXOP=O T4RXOP=O T5RXOP=O T6RXOP=O T7RXOP=O T8RXOP=Off
n n ff ff ff ff ff

Observe that this parameter must be set to Disabled for the “own” transformer. (for
transformer with identity T1 parameter T1RXOP must be set to Disabled, and so on.

Blocking

Blocking conditions
The purpose of blocking is to prevent the tap changer from operating under conditions
that can damage it, or otherwise when the conditions are such that power system
related limits would be exceeded or when, for example the conditions for automatic
control are not met.

700
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

For the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, three types of blocking are used:

Partial Block: Prevents operation of the tap changer only in one direction (only
VRAISE or VLOWER command is blocked) in manual and automatic control mode.

Auto Block: Prevents automatic voltage regulation, but the tap changer can still be
controlled manually.

Total Block: Prevents any tap changer operation independently of the control mode
(automatic as well as manual).

Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
under general settings in PST/local HMI are listed in table 60.

Table 60: Blocking settings

Setting Values (Range) Description
OCBk Alarm When any one of the three HV currents exceeds the
(automatically Auto Block preset value IBlock, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will
reset) Auto&Man Block be temporarily totally blocked. The outputs IBLK and
TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the
actual parameter setting.
OVPartBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB(not the compensated load point
(automatically Auto&Man Block voltage UVL) exceedsVmax (see figure 305), an alarm
reset) will be initiated or further VRAISE commands will be
blocked. If permitted by setting in PST configuration, Fast
Step Down (FSD) of the tap changer will be initiated in
order to re-enter the voltage into the range Vmin < VB <
Vmax. The FSD function is blocked when the lowest
voltage tap position is reached. The time delay for the
FSD function is separately set. The output VHIGH will be
activated as long as the voltage is above Vmax.
UVPartBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB (not the compensated load point
(automatically Auto&Man Block voltage VL) is between Vblock and Vmin (see figure305),
reset) an alarm will be initiated or further VLOWER commands
will be blocked. The output VLOW will be activated.
UVBk Alarm If the busbar voltage VB falls below Vblock this blocking
(automatically Auto Block condition is active. It is recommended to block automatic
reset) Auto&Man Block control in this situation and allow manual control. This is
because the situation normally would correspond to a
disconnected transformer and then it should be allowed to
operate the tap changer before reconnecting the
transformer. The outputs VBLK and TOTBLK or
AUTOBLK will be activated depending on the actual
parameter setting.
Table continues on next page

701
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

RevActPartBk(auto Alarm The risk of voltage instability increases as transmission
matically reset) Auto Block lines become more heavily loaded in an attempt to
maximize the efficient use of existing generation and
transmission facilities. In the same time lack of reactive
power may move the operation point of the power
network to the lower part of the P-V-curve (unstable part).
Under these conditions, when the voltage starts to drop, it
might happen that an VRAISE command can give
reversed result that is, a lower busbar voltage. Tap
changer operation under voltage instability conditions
makes it more difficult for the power system to recover.
Therefore, it might be desirable to block TR1ATCC (90) or
TR8ATCC (90) temporarily.
Requirements for this blocking are:

• The load current must exceed the set value

RevActLim
• After an VRAISE command, the measured busbar
voltage shall have a lower value than its previous
value
• The second requirement has to be fulfilled for two
consecutive VRAISE commands

If all three requirements are fulfilled, TR1ATCC (90) or

TR8ATCC (90) automatic control will be blocked for raise
commands for a period of time given by the setting
parameter tRevAct and the output signal REVACBLK will
be set. The reversed action feature can be turned off/on
with the setting parameter OperationRA.
CmdErrBk Alarm Typical operating time for a tap changer mechanism is
(manually reset) Auto Block around 3-8 seconds. Therefore, the function should wait
Auto&Man Block for a position change before a new command is issued.
The command error signal, CMDERRAL on the
TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function block, will be set if
the tap changer position does not change one step in the
correct direction within the time given by the setting
tTCTimeout in TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function
block. The tap changer module TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC
(84) will then indicate the error until a successful
command has been carried out or it has been reset by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic. The
outputs CMDERRAL on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) and
TOTBLK or AUTOBLK on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) will be activated depending on the actual parameter
setting.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
Table continues on next page

702
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

TapChgBk Alarm If the input TCINPROG of TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84)
(manually reset Auto Block function block is connected to the tap changer
Auto&Man Block mechanism, then this blocking condition will be active if
the TCINPROG input has not reset when the tTCTimeout
timer has timed out. The output TCERRAL will be
activated depending on the actual parameter setting. In
correct operation the TCINPROG shall appear during the
VRAISE/VLOWER output pulse and disappear before the
tTCTimeout time has elapsed.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
Table continues on next page

703
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Setting Values (Range) Description

TapPosBk Alarm This blocking/alarm is activated by either:
(automatically Auto Block
reset/manually Auto&Man Block 1. The tap changer reaching an end position i.e. one of
reset) the extreme positions according to the setting
parameters LowVoltTapand HighVoltTap. When the
tap changer reaches one of these two positions
further commands in the corresponding direction will
be blocked. Effectively this will then be a partial
block if Auto Block or Auto&Man Blockis set. The
outputs POSERRAL and LOPOSAL or HIPOSAL
will be activated.
2. Tap Position Error which in turn can be caused by
one of the following conditions:

• Tap position is out of range that is, the indicated

position is above or below the end positions.
• The tap changer indicates that it has changed more
than one position on a single raise or lower command.
• The tap position reading shows a BCD code error
(unaccepted combination) or a parity fault.
• The reading of tap position shows a mA value that is
out of the mA-range. Supervision of the input signal
for MIM is made by setting the MIM parameters
I_Max and I_Min to desired values, for example,
I_Max = 20mA and I_Min = 4mA.
• Very low or negative mA-values.
• Indication of hardware fault on BIM or MIM module.
Supervision of the input hardware module is
provided by connecting the corresponding error
signal to the INERR input (input module error) or
BIERR on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function
block.
• Interruption of communication with the tap changer.

The outputs POSERRAL and AUTOBLK or TOTBLK will

be set.
This error condition can be reset by the input RESETERR
on TCMYLTC (84) function block, or alternatively by
changing control mode of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function to Manual and then back to Automatic.
CircCurrBk Alarm When the magnitude of the circulating current exceeds
(automatically Auto Block the preset value (setting parameter CircCurrLimit) for
reset) Auto&Man Block longer time than the set time delay (setting parameter
tCircCurr) it will cause this blocking condition to be fulfilled
provided that the setting parameter OperCCBlock is
Enabled. The signal resets automatically when the
circulating current decreases below the preset value.
Usually this can be achieved by manual control of the tap
changers. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) outputs
ICIRC and TOTBLK or AUTOBLK will be activated
depending on the actual parameter setting.
MFPosDiffBk Alarm In the master-follower mode, if the tap difference between
(manually reset) Auto Block a follower and the master is greater than the set value
(setting parameter MFPosDiffLim) then this blocking
condition is fulfilled and the outputs OUTOFPOS and
AUTOBLK (alternatively an alarm) will be set.

704
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Setting parameters for blocking that can be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
under setting group Nx in PST/ local HMI are listed in table 61.

Table 61: Blocking settings

Setting Value (Range) Description
TotalBlock (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function can be totally
blocked via the setting
parameter TotalBlock, which can
be set Enabled/Disabled from
the local HMI or PST. The output
TOTBLK will be activated.
AutoBlock (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function can be blocked for
automatic control via the setting
parameter AutoBlock, which can
be set Enabled/Disabled from
the local HMI or PST. The output
AUTOBLK will be set.

TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) blockings that can be made via input signals in the
function block are listed in table 62.

Table 62: Blocking via binary inputs

Input name Activation Description
BLOCK (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled(via binary The voltage control function can
input) be totally blocked via the binary
input BLOCK on TR1ATCC (90)
or TR8ATCC (90) function block.
The output TOTBLK will be
activated.
EAUTOBLK (manually reset) Enabled/Disabled(via binary The voltage control function can
input) be blocked for automatic control
via the binary input EAUTOBLK
on TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function block. The output
AUTOBLK will be activated.
Deblocking is made via the input
DEBLKAUT.

Blockings activated by the operating conditions and there are no setting or separate
external activation possibilities are listed in table 63.

705
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Table 63: Blockings without setting possibilities

Activation Type of blocking Description
Disconnected Auto Block Automatic control is blocked for a transformer when
transformer parallel control with the circulating current method is
(automatically reset) used, and that transformer is disconnected from the
LV-busbar. (This is under the condition that the
setting OperHoming is selected Off for the
disconnected transformer. Otherwise the transformer
will get into the state Homing). The binary input signal
DISC in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function
shall be used to supervise if the transformer LV
circuit breaker is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC
and AUTOBLK will be activated . Blocking will be
removed when the transformer is reconnected (input
signal DISC set back to zero).
No Master/More than Auto Block Automatic control is blocked when parallel control
one Master with the master-follower method is used, and the
(automatically reset) master is disconnected from the LV-busbar. Also if
there for some reason should be a situation with
more than one master in the system, the same
blocking will occur. The binary input signal DISC in
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function shall be
used to supervise if the transformer LV circuit breaker
is closed or not. The outputs TRFDISC, MFERR and
AUTOBLK will be activated. The followers will also be
blocked by mutual blocking in this situation. Blocking
will be removed when the transformer is reconnected
(input signal DISC set back to zero).
One transformer in a Auto Block When the setting OperationAdapt is “Disabled”,
parallel group switched automatic control will be blocked when parallel
to manual control control with the master-follower or the circulating
(automatically reset) current method is used, and one of the transformers
in the group is switched from auto to manual. The
output AUTOBLK will be activated.
Communication error Auto block If the horizontal communication (GOOSE) for any one
(COMMERR) (automatic of TR8ATCCs (90) in the group fails it will cause
deblocking) blocking of automatic control in all TR8ATCC (90)
functions, which belong to that parallel group. This
error condition will be reset automatically when the
communication is re-established. The outputs
COMMERR and AUTOBLK will be set.

Circulating current method

Mutual blocking
When one parallel instance of voltage control TR8ATCC (90) blocks its operation, all
other TR8ATCCs (90) working in parallel with that module, shall block their operation
as well. To achieve this, the affected TR8ATCC (90) function broadcasts a mutual
block to the other group members via the horizontal communication. When mutual
block is received from any of the group members, automatic operation is blocked in the
receiving TR8ATCCs (90) that is, all units of the parallel group.

706
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

The following conditions in any one of TR8ATCCs (90) in the group will cause mutual
blocking when the circulating current method is used:

• Over-Current
• Total block via settings
• Total block via configuration
• Analog input error
• Automatic block via settings
• Automatic block via configuration
• Under-Voltage
• Command error
• Position indication error
• Tap changer error
• Reversed Action
• Circulating current
• Communication error

Master-follower method
When the master is blocked, the followers will not tap by themselves and there is
consequently no need for further mutual blocking. On the other hand, when a follower
is blocked there is a need to send a mutual blocking signal to the master. This will
prevent a situation where the rest of the group otherwise would be able to tap away
from the blocked individual, and that way cause high circulating currents.

Thus, when a follower is blocked, it broadcasts a mutual block on the horizontal

communication. The master picks up this message, and blocks its automatic operation
as well.

Besides the conditions listed above for mutual blocking with the circulating current
method, the following blocking conditions in any of the followers will also cause
mutual blocking:

• Master-follower out of position

• Master-follower error (No master/More than one master)

General
It should be noted that partial blocking will not cause mutual blocking.

TR8ATCC (90), which is the “source” of the mutual blocking will set its AUTOBLK
output as well as the output which corresponds to the actual blocking condition for
example, IBLK for over-current blocking. The other TR8ATCCs (90) that receive a
mutual block signal will only set its AUTOBLK output.

707
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The mutual blocking remains until TR8ATCC (90) that dispatched the mutual block
signal is de-blocked. Another way to release the mutual blocking is to force TR8ATCC
(90), which caused mutual blocking to Single mode operation. This is done by
activating the binary input SNGLMODE on TR8ATCC (90) function block or by
setting the parameter OperationPAR to Off from the built-in local HMI or PST.

TR8ATCC (90) function can be forced to single mode at any time. It will then behave
exactly the same way as described in section "Automatic voltage control for a single
transformer", except that horizontal communication messages are still sent and
received, but the received messages are ignored. TR8ATCC (90) is at the same time
also automatically excluded from the parallel group.

Disabling of blockings in special situations

When the Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC (90) for single control
and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control, function block is connected to read back
information (tap position value and tap changer in progress signal) it may sometimes
be difficult to find timing data to be set in TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) for
proper operation. Especially at commissioning of for example, older transformers the
sensors can be worn and the contacts maybe bouncing etc. Before the right timing data
is set it may then happen that TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) becomes totally
blocked or blocked in auto mode because of incorrect settings. In this situation, it is
recommended to temporarily set these types of blockings to alarm instead until the
commissioning of all main items are working as expected.

Tap Changer position measurement and monitoring

Tap changer extreme positions

This feature supervises the extreme positions of the tap changer according to the
settings LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap. When the tap changer reaches its lowest/
highest position, the corresponding VLOWER/VRAISE command is prevented in both
automatic and manual mode.

Monitoring of tap changer operation

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) or 32 binary
inputs TCLYLTC (84) output signal VRAISE or VLOWER is set high when
TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function has reached a decision to operate the tap
changer. These outputs from TCMYLTC (84) and TCLYLTC (84) function blocks
shall be connected to a binary output module, BOM in order to give the commands to
the tap changer mechanism. The length of the output pulse can be set via TCMYLTC
(84) or TCLYLTC (84) setting parameter tPulseDur. When an VRAISE/VLOWER
command is given, a timer ( set by setting tTCTimeout ) (settable in PST/local HMI) is
also started, and the idea is then that this timer shall have a setting that covers, with
some margin, a normal tap changer operation.

Usually the tap changer mechanism can give a signal, “Tap change in progress”, during
the time that it is carrying through an operation. This signal from the tap changer

708
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

mechanism can be connected via a BIM module to TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
input TCINPROG, and it can then be used by TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
function in three ways, which is explained below with the help of figure 315.

b c

VRAISE/VLOWER

tTCTimeout

TCINPROG

e f
a
h
d
en06000482_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000482 V1 EN

Figure 315: Timing of pulses for tap changer operation monitoring

pos Description
a Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG is not set high without the simultaneous presence of an
VRAISE or VLOWER command.
b Time setting tPulseDur.
c Fixed extension 4 sec. of tPulseDur, made internally in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84) function.
d Time setting tStable
e New tap position reached, making the signal “tap change in progress” disappear from the tap
changer, and a new position reported.
f The new tap position available in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84).
g Fixed extension 2 sec. of TCINPROG, made internally in TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84) function.
h Safety margin to avoid that TCINPROG extends beyond tTCTimeout.

The first use is to reset the Automatic voltage control for tap changer function
TR1ATCC (90) for single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control as soon as
the signal TCINPROG disappears. If the TCINPROG signal is not fed back from the
tap changer mechanism, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) will not reset until
tTCTimeout has timed out. The advantage with monitoring the TCINPROG signal in
this case is thus that resetting of TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) can sometimes be
made faster, which in turn makes the system ready for consecutive commands in a
shorter time.

709
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The second use is to detect a jammed tap changer. If the timer tTCTimeout times out
before the TCINPROG signal is set back to zero, the output signal TCERRAL is set
high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function is blocked.

The third use is to check the proper operation of the tap changer mechanism. As soon
as the input signal TCINPROG is set back to zero TCMYLTC (84) or TCLYLTC (84)
function expects to read a new and correct value for the tap position. If this does not
happen the output signal CMDERRAL is set high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC
(90) function is blocked. The fixed extension (g) 2 sec. of TCINPROG, is made to
prevent a situation where this could happen despite no real malfunction.

In figure 315, it can be noted that the fixed extension (c) 4 sec. of tPulseDur, is made
to prevent a situation with TCINPROG set high without the simultaneous presence of
an VRAISE or VLOWER command. If this would happen, TCMYLTC (84) or
TCLYLTC (84) would see this as a spontaneous TCINPROG signal without an
accompanying VRAISE or VLOWER command, and this would then lead to the
output signal TCERRAL being set high and TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90)
function being blocked. Effectively this is then also a supervision of a run-away tap
situation.

Hunting detection
Hunting detection is provided in order to generate an alarm when the voltage control
gives an abnormal number of commands or abnormal sequence of commands within a
pre-defined period of time.

There are three hunting functions:

1. The Automatic voltage control for tap changer function, TR1ATCC (90) for single
control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control will activate the output signal
DAYHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number given
by the setting DayHuntDetect during the last 24 hours (sliding window). Active as
well in manual as in automatic mode.
2. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function will activate the output signal
HOURHUNT when the number of tap changer operations exceed the number
given by the setting HourHuntDetect during the last hour (sliding window). Active
as well in manual as in automatic mode.
3. TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function will activate the output signal
HUNTING when the total number of contradictory tap changer operations
(RAISE, LOWER, RAISE, LOWER, and so on) exceeds the pre-set value given
by the setting NoOpWindow within the time sliding window specified via the
setting parameter tWindowHunt. Only active in automatic mode.

Hunting can be the result of a narrow deadband setting or some other abnormalities in
the control system.

710
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Wearing of the tap changer contacts

Two counters, ContactLife and NoOfOperations are available within the Tap changer
control and supervision function, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs
TCLYLTC (84). They can be used as a guide for maintenance of the tap changer
mechanism. The ContactLife counter represents the remaining number of operations
(decremental counter) at rated load.
a
æ I load ö
ContactLife n+1 = ContactLife - ç ÷÷
n ç
è I rated ø
EQUATION1873 V2 EN (Equation 521)

where n is the number of operations and α is an adjustable setting parameter,

CLFactor, with default value is set to 2. With this default setting an operation at rated
load (current measured on HV-side) decrements the ContactLife counter with 1.

The NoOfOperations counter simply counts the total number of operations

(incremental counter).

Both counters are stored in a non-volatile memory as well as, the times and dates of
their last reset. These dates are stored automatically when the command to reset the
counter is issued. It is therefore necessary to check that the IED internal time is correct
before these counters are reset. The counter value can be reset on the local HMI under
Main menu/Reset/Reset counters/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,84)/
TCMYLTC:1 or TCLYLTC:1/Reset Counter and ResetCLCounter

Both counters and their last reset dates are shown on the local HMI as service values
under Main menu/Test/Function status/Control/TransformerTapControl(YLTC,
84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/CLCNT_VALandMain menu/Test/Function
status/Control/TransformerTapControl (YLTC,84)/TCMYLTC:x/TCLYLTC:x/
CNT_VAL

14.3.3 Setting guidelines

14.3.3.1 TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC general settings

TrfId: The transformer identity is used to identify transformer individuals in a parallel

group. Thus, transformers that can be part of the same parallel group must have unique
identities. Moreover, all transformers that communicate over the same horizontal
communication (GOOSE) must have unique identities.

Xr2: The reactance of the transformer in primary ohms referred to the LV side.

711
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

tAutoMSF: Time delay set in a follower for execution of a raise or lower command
given from a master. This feature can be used when a parallel group is controlled in the
master-follower mode, follow tap, and it is individually set for each follower, which
means that different time delays can be used in the different followers in order to avoid
simultaneous tapping if this is wanted. It shall be observed that it is not applicable in
the follow command mode.

OperationAdapt: This setting enables or disables adapt mode for parallel control with
the circulating current method or the master-follower method.

MFMode: Selection of Follow Command or Follow Tap in the master-follower mode.

CircCurrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the circulating current exceeds

CircCurrLimit.

CmdErrBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the feedback from the tap changer
has resulted in command error.

OCBk: Selection of action to be taken in case any of the three phase currents on the HV-
side has exceeded Iblock.

MFPosDiffBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the tap difference between a

follower and the master is greater than MFPosDiffLim.

OVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB exceeds Vmax.

RevActPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case Reverse Action has been activated.

TapChgBk: Selection of action to be taken in case a Tap Changer Error has been identified.

TapPosBk: Selection of action to be taken in case of Tap Position Error, or if the tap
changer has reached an end position.

UVBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB falls below Vblock.

UVPartBk: Selection of action to be taken in case the busbar voltage VB is between

UVblock and Vmin.

14.3.3.2 TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) Setting group

General
Operation: Switching automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR1ATCC (90) for
single control and TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control function Enabled/Disabled.

I1Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer.

I2Base: Base current in primary Ampere for the LV-side of the transformer.

712
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

VBase: Base voltage in primary kV for the LV-side of the transformer.

MeasMode: Selection of single phase, or phase-phase, or positive sequence quantity to

be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-side. The involved phases are
also selected. Thus, single phase as well as phase-phase or three-phase feeding on the
LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current and voltage.

Q1, Q2 and Q3: Mvar value of a capacitor bank or reactor that is connected between
the power transformer and the CT, such that the current of the capacitor bank (reactor)
needs to be compensated for in the calculation of circulating currents. There are three
independent settings Q1, Q2 and Q3 in order to make possible switching of three steps
in a capacitor bank in one bay.

TotalBlock: When this setting is Enabled, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function
that is, the voltage control is totally blocked for manual as well as automatic control.

AutoBlock: When this setting is Enabled, TR1ATCC (90) or TR8ATCC (90) function
that is, the voltage control is blocked for automatic control.

Operation
FSDMode: This setting enables/disables the fast step down function. Enabling can be
for automatic and manual control, or for only automatic control alternatively.

tFSD: Time delay to be used for the fast step down tapping.

Voltage
VSet: Setting value for the target voltage, to be set in per cent of VBase.

VDeadband: Setting value for one half of the outer deadband, to be set in per cent of
VBase. The deadband is symmetrical around VSet, see section "Automatic voltage
control for a single transformer", figure 305. In that figure VDeadband is equal to DV.
The setting is normally selected to a value near the power transformer’s tap changer
voltage step (typically 75 - 125% of the tap changer step).

VDeadbandInner: Setting value for one half of the inner deadband, to be set in per cent
of VBase. The inner deadband is symmetrical around VSet, see section "Automatic
voltage control for a single transformer",figure 305. In that figure VDeadbandInner is
equal to DVin. The setting shall be smaller than VDeadband. Typically the inner
deadband can be set to 25-70% of the VDeadband value.

Vmax: This setting gives the upper limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section
"Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 305). It is set in per cent of
VBase. If OVPartBk is set to Auto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages above Vmax will
result in a partial blocking such that only lower commands are permitted.

713
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Vmin This setting gives the lower limit of permitted busbar voltage (see section
"Automatic voltage control for a single transformer", figure 305). It is set in per cent of
VBase. If UVPartBk is set to Auto Block orAuto&ManBlock, then busbar voltages
below Vmin will result in a partial blocking such that only raise commands are permitted.

Vblock: Voltages below Vblock normally correspond to a disconnected transformer and

therefore it is recommended to block automatic control for this condition (setting
UVBk). Vblock is set in per cent of VBase.

Time
t1Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t1.

t1: Time delay for the initial (first) raise/lower command.

t2Use: Selection of time characteristic (definite or inverse) for t2.

t2: Time delay for consecutive raise/lower commands. In the circulating current
method, the second, third, etc. commands are all executed with time delay t2
independently of which transformer in the parallel group that is tapping. In the master-
follower method with the follow tap option, the master is executing the second, third,
etc. commands with time delay t2. The followers on the other hand read the master’s
tap position, and adapt to that with the additional time delay given by the setting
tAutoMSF and set individually for each follower.

t_MinTripDelay: The minimum operate time when inverse time characteristic is used
(see section "Time characteristic", figure 306).

Line voltage drop compensation (LDC)

OpertionLDC: Sets the line voltage drop compensation function Enabled/Disabled.

OperCapaLDC: This setting, if set Enabled, will permit the load point voltage to be
greater than the busbar voltage when line voltage drop compensation is used. That
situation can be caused by a capacitive load. When the line voltage drop compensation
function is used for parallel control with the reverse reactance method, then
OperCapaLDC must always be set Enabled.

Rline and Xline: For line voltage drop compensation, these settings give the line
resistance and reactance from the station busbar to the load point. The settings for Rline
and Xline are given in primary system ohms. If more than one line is connected to the
LV busbar, equivalent Rline and Xline values should be calculated and given as settings.

When the line voltage drop compensation function is used for parallel control with the
reverse reactance method, then the compensated voltage which is designated “load
point voltage” VL is effectively an increase in voltage up into the transformer. To
achieve this voltage increase, Xline must be negative. The sensitivity of the parallel
voltage regulation is given by the magnitude of Rline and Xline settings, with Rline

714
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

being important in order to get a correct control of the busbar voltage. This can be
realized in the following way. Figure 307 shows the vector diagram for a transformer
controlled in a parallel group with the reverse reactance method and with no circulation
(for example, assume two equal transformers on the same tap position). The load
current lags the busbar voltage VB with the power factor j and the argument of the
impedance Rline and Xline is designated j1.

Rline
j1

Xline Zline
IT*Rline
VL

jIT*Xline
DV

j VB
j2

IT

en06000626_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000626 V1 EN

Figure 316: Transformer with reverse reactance regulation and no circulating current

The voltage DV=VB-VL=IT*Rline+j IT*Xline has the argument j2 and it is realised

that if j2 is slightly less than -90°, then VL will have approximately the same length as
VB regardless of the magnitude of the transformer load current IT (indicated with the
dashed line). The automatic tap change control regulates the voltage towards a set
target value, representing a voltage magnitude, without considering the phase angle.
Thus, VB as well as VL and also the dashed line could all be said to be on the target value.

Assume that we want to achieve that j2 = -90°, then:

DV = Z ´ I
ß
0
DVe - j 90 = Ze jj1 ´ Ie jj = ZIe j (j1 +j )
ß
-900 = j1 + j
ß
j1 = -j - 900
EQUATION1983-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 522)

715
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

If for example cosj = 0.8 then j = arcos 0.8 = 37°. With the references in figure 316, j
will be negative (inductive load) and we get:

j1 = - ( -37 0 ) - 90 0 = -530
EQUATION1939 V1 EN (Equation 523)

To achieve a more correct regulation, an adjustment to a value of j2 slightly less than

-90° (2 – 4° less) can be made.

The effect of changing power factor of the load will be that j2 will no longer be close
to -90° resulting in VL being smaller or greater than VB if the ratio Rline/Xline is not
adjusted.

Figure 317 shows an example of this where the settings of Rline and Xline for j = 11°
from figure 316 has been applied with a different value of j (j = 30°).

j1=110-900=-790
Rline
j1

Xline Zline
IT*Rline
VL

DV
jIT*Xline

VB
j=300 j2

IT en06000630_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000630 V1 EN

Figure 317: Transformer with reverse reactance regulation poorly adjusted to the
power factor

As can be seen in figure 318, the change of power factor has resulted in an increase of
j2 which in turn causes the magnitude of VL to be greater than VB. It can also be
noted that an increase in the load current aggravates the situation, as does also an
increase in the setting of Zline (Rline and Xline).

Apparently the ratio Rline/Xline according to equation 523, that is the value of j1
must be set with respect to the power factor, also meaning that the reverse reactance
method should not be applied to systems with varying power factor.

716
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

The setting of Xline gives the sensitivity of the parallel regulation. If Xline is set too
low, the transformers will not pull together and a run away tap situation will occur. On
the other hand, a high setting will keep the transformers strongly together with no, or
only a small difference in tap position, but the voltage regulation as such will be more
sensitive to a deviation from the anticipated power factor. A too high setting of Xline
can cause a hunting situation as the transformers will then be prone to over react on
deviations from the target value.

There is no rule for the setting of Xline such that an optimal balance between control
response and susceptibility to changing power factor is achieved. One way of
determining the setting is by trial and error. This can be done by setting e.g. Xline
equal to half of the transformer reactance, and then observe how the parallel control
behaves during a couple of days, and then tune it as required. It shall be emphasized
that a quick response of the regulation that quickly pulls the transformer tap changers
into equal positions, not necessarily corresponds to the optimal setting. This kind of
response is easily achieved by setting a high Xline value, as was discussed above, and
the disadvantage is then a high susceptibility to changing power factor.

A combination of line voltage drop compensation and parallel control with the negative
reactance method is possible to do simply by adding the required Rline values and the
required Xline values separately to get the combined impedance. However, the line
drop impedance has a tendency to drive the tap changers apart, which means that the
reverse reactance impedance normally needs to be increased.

Load voltage adjustment (LVA)

LVAConst1: Setting of the first load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

LVAConst2: Setting of the second load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of
the target value VSet is given in percent ofVBase.

LVAConst3: Setting of the third load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

LVAConst4: Setting of the fourth load voltage adjustment value. This adjustment of the
target value VSet is given in percent of VBase.

VRAuto: Setting of the automatic load voltage adjustment. This adjustment of the target
valueVSet is given in percent of VBase, and it is proportional to the load current with
the set value reached at the nominal current I2Base.

RevAct
OperationRA: This setting enables/disables the reverse action partial blocking function.

tRevAct: After the reverse action has picked up, this time setting gives the time during
which the partial blocking is active.

717
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

RevActLim: Current threshold for the reverse action activation. This is just one of two
criteria for activation of the reverse action partial blocking.

Tap changer control (TCCtrl)

Iblock: Current setting of the over current blocking function. In case, the transformer is
carrying a current exceeding the rated current of the tap changer for example, because
of an external fault. The tap changer operations shall be temporarily blocked. This
function typically monitors the three phase currents on the HV side of the transformer.

DayHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the
last 24 hours (sliding window) to activate the signal DAYHUNT

HourHuntDetect: Setting of the number of tap changer operations required during the
last hour (sliding window) to activate the signal HOURHUNT

tWindowHunt: Setting of the time window for the window hunting function. This
function is activated when the number of contradictory commands to the tap changer
exceeds the specified number given by NoOpWindow within the time tWindowHunt.

NoOpWindow: Setting of the number of contradictory tap changer operations (RAISE,

LOWER, RAISE, LOWER etc.) required during the time window tWindowHunt to
activate the signal HUNTING.

Power
P>: When the active power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output
PGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that a negative value of P> means
an active power greater than a value in the reverse direction. This is shown in figure
318 where a negative value of P> means pickup for all values to the right of the
setting. Reference is made to figure 313 for definition of forward and reverse direction
of power through the transformer.

P> P

en06000634_2_en.vsd
IEC06000634 V2 EN

Figure 318: Setting of a negative value for P>

P<: When the active power falls below the value given by this setting, the output
PLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that, for example a positive value of

718
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

P< means an active power less than a value in the forward direction. This is shown in
figure 319 where a positive value of P< means pickup for all values to the left of the
setting. Reference is made to figure 313 for definition of forward and reverse direction
of power through the transformer.

P< P

en06000635_2_en.vsd
IEC06000635 V2 EN

Figure 319: Setting of a positive value for P<

Q>: When the reactive power exceeds the value given by this setting, the output
QGTFWD will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all
values of reactive power greater than the set value, similar to the functionality for P>.

Q<: When the reactive power falls below the value given by this setting, the output
QLTREV will be activated after the time delay tPower. It shall be noticed that the
setting is given with sign, which effectively means that the function picks up for all
values of reactive power less than the set value, similar to the functionality for P<.

tPower: Time delay for activation of the power monitoring output signals (PGTFWD,
PLTREV, QGTFWD and QLTREV).

Parallel control (ParCtrl)

OperationPAR: Setting of the method for parallel operation.

OperCCBlock: This setting enables/disables blocking if the circulating current exceeds

CircCurrLimit.

CircCurrLimit: Pick up value for the circulating current blocking function. The setting
is made in percent of I2Base.

tCircCurr: Time delay for the circulating current blocking function.

Comp: When parallel operation with the circulating current method is used, this setting
increases or decreases the influence of the circulating current on the regulation.

If the transformers are connected to the same bus on the HV- as well as the LV-side,
Comp can be calculated with the following formula which is valid for any number of two-

719
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

winding transformers in parallel, irrespective if the transformers are of different size

and short circuit impedance.

2 ´ DV
Comp = a ´ ´ 100%
n´p
EQUATION1984-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 524)

where:

• DV is the deadband setting in percent.

• n denotes the desired number of difference in tap position between the

transformers, that shall give a voltage deviation Vdi which corresponds to the dead-
band setting.

• p is the tap step (in % of transformer nominal voltage).

• a is a safety margin that shall cover component tolerances and other non-linear
measurements at different tap positions (for example, transformer reactances
changes from rated value at the ends of the regulation range). In most cases a
value of a = 1.25 serves well.

This calculation gives a setting of Comp that will always initiate an action (start timer)
when the transformers have n tap positions difference.

OperSimTap: Enabling/disabling the functionality to allow only one transformer at a

time to execute a Lower/Raise command. This setting is applicable only to the
circulating current method, and when enabled, consecutive tap changes of the next
transformer (if required) will be separated with the time delay t2.

OperUsetPar: Enables/disables the use of a common setting for the target voltage VSet.
This setting is applicable only to the circulating current method, and when enabled, a
mean value of the VSet values for the transformers in the same parallel group will be
calculated and used.

OperHoming: Enables/disables the homing function. Applicable for parallel control

with the circulating current method, as well for parallel control with the master-
follower method.

VTmismatch: Setting of the level for activation of the output VTALARM in case the
voltage measurement in one transformer bay deviates to the mean value of all voltage
measurements in the parallel group.

tVTmismatch: Time delay for activation of the output VTALARM.

720
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

T1RXOP.......T8RXOP: This setting is set Enabled for every transformer that can
participate in a parallel group with the transformer in case. For this transformer (own
transformer), the setting must always be Disabled.

TapPosOffs: This setting gives the tap position offset in relation to the master so that
the follower can follow the master’s tap position including this offset. Applicable when
regulating in the follow tap command mode.

MFPosDiffLim: When the difference (including a possible offset according to

TapPosOffs) between a follower and the master reaches the value in this setting, then
the output OUTOFPOS in the Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel
control TR8ATCC (90) function block of the follower will be activated after the time
delay tMFPosDiff.

tMFPosDiff: Time delay for activation of the output OUTOFPOS.

Transformer name
TRFNAME: Non-compulsory transformer name. This setting is not used for any
purpose by the voltage control function.

14.3.3.3 TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) general settings

LowVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the lowest LV-voltage.

HighVoltTap: This gives the tap position for the highest LV-voltage.

mALow: The mA value that corresponds to the lowest tap position. Applicable when
reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal.

mAHigh: The mA value that corresponds to the highest tap position. Applicable when
reading of the tap position is made via a mA signal.

CodeType: This setting gives the method of tap position reading.

UseParity: Sets the parity check Enabled/Disabled for tap position reading when this is
made by Binary, BCD, or Gray code.

tStable: This is the time that needs to elapse after a new tap position has been reported
to TCMYLTC until it is accepted.

CLFactor: This is the factor designated “a” in equation 524. When a tap changer
operates at nominal load current(current measured on the HV-side), the ContactLife
counter decrements with 1, irrespective of the setting of CLFactor. The setting of this
factor gives the weighting of the deviation with respect to the load current.

InitCLCounter: The ContactLife counter monitors the remaining number of operations

(decremental counter). The setting InitCLCounter then gives the start value for the

721
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

counter that is, the total number of operations at rated load that the tap changer is
designed for.

EnabTapCmd: This setting enables/disables the lower and raise commands to the tap
changer. It shall be Enabled for voltage control, and Disabled for tap position feedback
to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T) or T3WPDIF (87T).

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC (84) Setting group

General
Operation: Switching the TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC (84) function Enabled/Disabled.

IBase: Base current in primary Ampere for the HV-side of the transformer.

tTCTimeout: This setting gives the maximum time interval for a raise or lower
command to be completed.

tPulseDur: Length of the command pulse (VRAISE/VLOWER) to the tap changer. It

shall be noticed that this pulse has a fixed extension of 4 seconds that adds to the
setting value of tPulseDur.

14.4 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC

14.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

14.4.2 Application
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function
(SLGAPC) (or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used to get a
selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware multi-
position selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are
however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended
purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

722
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

SLGAPC function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking
input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO).

SLGAPC can be activated both from the local HMI and from external sources
(switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the
station computer). SWPOSN is an integer value output, giving the actual output
number. Since the number of positions of the switch can be established by settings (see
below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings with the configuration (if one
sets the number of positions to x in settings – for example, there will be only the first x
outputs available from the block in the configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or
DOWN) pulses should be lower than the setting tPulse.

From the local HMI, the selector switch can be operated from Single-line diagram (SLD).

14.4.3 Setting guidelines

The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection
and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function:

Operation: Sets the operation of the function Enabled or Disabled.

NrPos: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32).

OutType: Steady or Pulsed.

tPulse: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds).

tDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.

StopAtExtremes: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions – if set to
Disabled, when pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last
position; when pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first
position; when set to Enabled, no jump will be allowed.

14.5 Selector mini switch VSGAPC

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

723
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.5.2 Application
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function is a multipurpose function used in the
configuration tool in PCM600 for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch. VSGAPC can be used for both acquiring an external switch position (through
the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line diagram
symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as,
a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching commands
through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs.

The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer
number 0 – 3.

An example where VSGAPC is configured to switch Autorecloser enabled–disabled

from a button symbol on the local HMI is shown in figure 320. The Close and Open
buttons on the local HMI are normally used for enable–disable operations of the circuit
breaker.

INV
OUT INPUT
VSGAPC
PSTO
INTONE
IPOS1
IPOS2
SMBRREC_79
NAM_POS1 CMDPOS12 ON SETON
Disabled
Enabled NAM_POS2 CMDPOS21 OFF

ANSI07000112-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000112 V3 EN

Figure 320: Control of Autorecloser from local HMI through Selector mini switch

VSGAPC is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from
SA system as well.

14.5.3 Setting guidelines

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by
setting the Mode parameter). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the
pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line
diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel):
Dir Norm and SBO Enh.

724
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.6 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

14.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

14.6.2 Application
DPGAPC function block is used to combine three logical input signals into a two bit
position indication, and publish the position indication to other systems, equipment or
functions in the substation. The three inputs are named OPEN, CLOSE and VALID.
DPGAPC is intended to be used as a position indicator block in the interlocking
stationwide logics.

The OPEN and CLOSE inputs set one bit each in the two bit position indication,
POSITION. If both OPEN and CLOSE are set at the same time the quality of the
output is set to invalid. The quality of the output is also set to invalid if the VALID
input is not set.

14.6.3 Setting guidelines

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.7 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

14.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

725
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.7.2 Application
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA)
to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks
that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator
positions, the only functional position usable with the SPC8GAPC
function block is REMOTE.

14.7.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function are
set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Operation: turning the function operation Enabled/Disabled.

There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):

Latchedx: decides if the command signal for output x is Latched (steady) or Pulsed.

tPulsex: if Latchedx is set to Pulsed, then tPulsex will set the length of the pulse (in
seconds).

14.8 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

14.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

726
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.8.2 Application
Automation bits, command function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600
in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0
protocol.The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV
(for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).AUTOBITS function block have 32
individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The
output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-
code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-
code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining
parameters are regarded as appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-time=100, off-
time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to the Communication

manual.

14.8.3 Setting guidelines

AUTOBITS function block has one setting, (Operation: Enabled/Disabled) enabling or
disabling the function. These names will be seen in the DNP3 communication
management tool in PCM600.

14.9 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

14.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

14.9.2 Application
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) is a common function and always
included in the IED.

The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with

727
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for
control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs.

Figure 321 shows an application example of how the user can connect SINGLECMD
via configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of
command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of
the IED. Figure 321 shows a close operation. An open breaker operation is performed
in a similar way but without the synchro-check condition.

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLECMD

Close CB1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions
Synchro-
check
en04000206_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000206 V2 EN

Figure 321: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit
breaker via configuration logic circuits

Figure 322 and figure 323 show other ways to control functions, which require steady
Enabled/Disabled signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or
external devices.

728
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Single
command
function Function n
SINGLECMD

Function n CMDOUTy

OUTy

en04000207.vsd
IEC04000207 V2 EN

Figure 322: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in
functions

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLESMD

Device 1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions

en04000208_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000208 V2 EN

Figure 323: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external
devices via configuration logic circuits

729
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.9.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which
includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the
outputs to be one of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse.

• Disabled, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station
level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is
changed from 0 to 1. That means the configured logic connected to the command
function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the
command function block.

14.10 Interlocking (3)

The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is:

• To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear

• To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons for
example, load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of
parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always
from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.

This section only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by
switching devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock,
because of device alarms, is not included in this section.

Disconnectors and grounding switches have a limited switching capacity.

Disconnectors may therefore only operate:

• With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small
extension. The capacitive current is small (for example, < 5A) and power
transformers with inrush current are not allowed.
• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching
voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit
(for example, < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not
allowed.

730
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Grounding switches are allowed to connect and disconnect grounding of isolated

points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for
example < 40% of rated voltage) before grounding and some current (for example <
100A) after grounding of a line.

Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against
running disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked
during a busbar transfer.

The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the
conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not
available. Therefore, a line grounding switch is usually not fully interlocked. The
operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before
closing the grounding switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for
interlocking. Take care to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT
secondary voltage, for example, because of a blown fuse.

The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from
auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true
indication is needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function
continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the
switch may be in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic state
may continue for some time, which in the case of disconnectors may be up to 10
seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication
will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and
the state is again treated as unknown.

In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be
self-checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the
signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching
state of a switching device cannot be determined operation is not permitted.

For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider
possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an AND-function for all three
phases in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will
result in an unknown double indication state.

14.10.1 Configuration guidelines

The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear
configuration can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and
their interconnections. They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for
delivery specific conditions (Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except
in the following cases:

731
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

• 989_EX2 and 989_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B

• 152_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO

when they are set to 0=FALSE.

14.10.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)

14.10.2.1 Application

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 324. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a
single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 789

189G

152
289G

989
989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN

Figure 324: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE (3) are described below.

14.10.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB7_D_OP All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open.
VP_BB7_D The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7

732
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) except that of the own bay are needed:
Signal
789OPTR 789 is open
VP789TR The switch status for 789 is valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bay n, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
789OPTR (bay 2) AND BB7_D_OP
. . .
. . .
789OPTR (bay n-1)

VP789TR (bay 1)
VP789TR (bay 2) AND VP_BB7_D
. . .
. . .
VP789TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_BPB (bay 1)
EXDU_BPB (bay 2) AND EXDU_BPB
. . .
. . .
EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
en04000477_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000477 V1 EN

Figure 325: Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n

14.10.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbar-
busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus section.

733
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE ABC_BC

en04000479_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000479 V1 EN

Figure 326: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
BC_17_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7.
BC_17_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7.
BC_27_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7.
BC_27_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VP_BC_17 The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VP_BC_27 The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
BC17OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA7.
BC17CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA7.
BC27OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2 and
WA7.
BC27CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA2
and WA7.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VPBC17TR The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VPBC27TR The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

734
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

735
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

BC12CLTR (sect.1)
BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
DCCLTR (B1B2) AND
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2) AND
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

BC17OPTR (sect.1)
BC_17_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
OR
BC17OPTR (sect.2)

BC17CLTR (sect.1)
BC_17_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
AND
BC17CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC17TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_17
AND
VPBC17TR (sect.2)

BC27OPTR (sect.1)
BC_27_OP
DCOPTR (B1B2) AND
BC27OPTR (sect.2) OR

BC27CLTR (sect.1)
BC_27_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2) OR
AND
BC27CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC27TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (B1B2) VP_BC_27
AND
VPBC27TR (sect.2)

EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_BC
EXDU_DC (B1B2) AND
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000480_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000480 V1 EN

Figure 327: Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each
section

For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section
1 to section 2 and vice versa.

736
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.10.2.4 Configuration setting

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 789 disconnector, then the interlocking
for 789 is not used. The states for 789, 7189G, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open
by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0
and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

• BB7_D_OP = 1

• BC_17_OP = 1
• BC_17_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• EXDU_BPB = 1

• VP_BB7_D = 1
• VP_BC_17 = 1
• VP_BC_27 = 1

If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12, BC_27 are set to
open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block
diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• VP_BC_12 = 1

737
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.10.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)

14.10.3.1 Application

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 328. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN

Figure 328: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

14.10.3.2 Configuration

The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are
described below.

14.10.3.3 Signals from all feeders

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler.
VP_BBTR The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:

738
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Signal
Q1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:

1289OPTR (bay 1)
BBTR_OP
1289OPTR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
1289OPTR (bay n-1)

VP1289TR (bay 1)
VP_BBTR
VP1289TR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
VP1289TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_12 (bay 1)
EXDU_12
EXDU_12 (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
EXDU_12 (bay n-1)

en04000481_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000481 V1 EN

Figure 329: Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for
the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000482_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000482 V1 EN

Figure 330: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

739
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
have to be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The
same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1)
BBTR_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
DCOPTR (B1B2) OR
BBTR_OP (sect.2)

VP_BBTR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BBTR
AND
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VP_BBTR (sect.2)

EXDU_12 (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_12
AND
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_12 (sect.2)

en04000483_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000483 V1 EN

Figure 331: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section

740
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

14.10.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BC_12 from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the
own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC ABC_BC

en04000484_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000484 V1 EN

Figure 332: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay, are needed:
Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

741
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

Signal
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

DCCLTR (A1A2)
AND BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2)
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPDCTR (A1A2)
AND VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

EXDU_DC (A1A2)
AND EXDU_BC
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000485_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000485 V1 EN

Figure 333: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in

another section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

14.10.3.5 Configuration setting

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 289 and 789 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 789 is not used. The states for 289, 789, 7189G are set to open

742
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0
and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no 289 and 2089 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 2089 are not used. The states for 289, 2089, 2189G, BC_12,
BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the
functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2089_OP = 1
• 2089_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

14.10.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)

14.10.4.1 Application

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 334.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

743
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G

152 AB_TRAFO

289G

389G

252 252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489G

389 489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN

Figure 334: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described below.

14.10.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbar-

busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus-section.

744
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)

AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC

en04000487_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000487 V1 EN

Figure 335: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the
specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):
Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals from bus-coupler“.

14.10.4.3 Configuration setting

If there are no second busbar B and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and
1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289QB2_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

745
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no 489
disconnector, then the state for 489 is set to open by setting the appropriate module
inputs as follows:

• 489_OP = 1
• 489_CL = 0

14.10.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)

14.10.5.1 Application

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 336. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

189G 189 289 289G

152

389G 489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN

Figure 336: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_BS are described below.

14.10.5.2 Signals from all feeders

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both
circuit breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-
coupler connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other
bus-section side a busbar transfer is in progress:

746
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_BS
B1B2_BS

ABC_BC ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000489_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000489 V1 EN

Figure 337: Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section.
VP_BBTR The switch status of BBTR is valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are needed.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

747
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR

... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR

...
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000490_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000490 V1 EN

Figure 338: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections A1 and A2

For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

748
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR
... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR
... AND
...
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (A1A2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (A1A2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000491 V1 EN

Figure 339: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections B1 and B2

14.10.5.3 Configuration setting

If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the
interlocking for the 152 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to
open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section:

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

749
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.10.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)

14.10.6.1 Application

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 340. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

52

189G 289G

A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN

Figure 340: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.

14.10.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other

disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2 A2
(WA1)A1 A3
B2
(WA2)B1 B3
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000493_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000493 V1 EN

Figure 341: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

750
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE).
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC).
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section

disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bus-section

disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather
than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

751
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000494 V1 EN

Figure 342: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A2/A3)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A2/A3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A2/A3)

en04000495_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000495 V1 EN

Figure 343: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

752
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000496_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000496 V1 EN

Figure 344: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B2/B3)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B2/B3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B2/B3)

en04000497_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000497 V1 EN

Figure 345: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector

14.10.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

753
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000498_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000498 V1 EN

Figure 346: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above
information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals in single breaker
arrangement”.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

754
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000499_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000499 V1 EN

Figure 347: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2)

en04000500_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000500 V1 EN

Figure 348: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

755
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000501_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000501 V1 EN

Figure 349: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B2)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2)

en04000502_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000502 V1 EN

Figure 350: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section

disconnector

14.10.6.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

756
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000503_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000503 V1 EN

Figure 351: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic is the same as for the logic for the double-breaker configuration.
Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above
information.

14.10.7 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)

14.10.7.1 Application

The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one
busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 352.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN

Figure 352: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.

757
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

14.10.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BB_ES ABC_BC BB_ES
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE

en04000505_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000505 V1 EN

Figure 353: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE)
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC)
789OPTR 789 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289and 2089 is valid.
VP789TR The switch status of 789 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

758
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If no bus-section disconnector exists, the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC

are set to 1 (TRUE).

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000506_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000506 V1 EN

Figure 354: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

759
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000507_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000507 V1 EN

Figure 355: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

760
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

289OPTR(22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)
... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289PTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B1) VP_BB_DC

... AND
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B1)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)

en04000508_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000508 V1 EN

Figure 356: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

761
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
en04000509_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000509 V1 EN

Figure 357: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
... BB_DC_OP
... AND
...
789OPTR (bay n)

VP789TR (bay 1)
... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP789TR (bay n)

EXDU_BB (bay 1)
... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n)
en04000510_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000510 V1 EN

Figure 358: Signals from bypass busbar to busbar grounding switch

762
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

14.10.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000511_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000511 V1 EN

Figure 359: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

763
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section “Signals
in single breaker arrangement”.

14.10.7.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000512 V1 EN

Figure 360: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar
configuration described in section “Signals in single breaker arrangement”.
Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

14.10.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)

14.10.8.1 Application

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 361.

764
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G 489G

DB_BUS_A 152 252 DB_BUS_B

289G 589G

6189 6289
389G

DB_LINE
989

989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN

Figure 361: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.

For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and

DB_BUS_B must be used.

14.10.8.2 Configuration setting

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

765
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

14.10.9 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)

14.10.9.1 Application

The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),

BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half
diameter according to figure 362.

766
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 14
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 289
189G 189G

152 152
289G 289G

689 689

389G 389G
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

6189 6289
152

989 989
189G 289G
989G 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN

Figure 362: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.

For a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and

BH_LINE_B must be used.

14.10.9.2 Configuration setting

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

767
Application Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Control

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

14.10.10 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV
Table 64: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

768
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 15
Scheme communication

Section 15 Scheme communication

15.1 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH (85)

15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

15.1.2 Application
To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels.

One communication channel is used in each direction, which can transmit an on/off
signal if required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to
the transmission channel speed and security against false or lost signals.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted
to the other line end.

With directional comparison in permissive schemes, a short operate time of the

protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate
time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the autoreclosing device must block the
directional comparison ground-fault communication scheme.

The communication logic module enables blocking as well as permissive under/

overreaching schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-
end infeed and current reversal, included in the Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH, 85) function.

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be
suitable for conventional permissive schemes that rely on signal transmitted during a

769
Application Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Scheme communication

protected line fault. With power line carrier, for example, the communication signal
may be attenuated by the fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end,
thereby disabling the communication channel.

To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function

can be used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC)
communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The
unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even
when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal during the security time
is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line
fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35 ms.

15.1.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection function:

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

SchemeType: This parameter can be set to Off , Intertrip, Permissive UR, Permissive
OR or Blocking.

tCoord: Delay time for trip from ECPSCH (85) function. For Permissive under/
overreaching schemes, this timer shall be set to at least 20 ms plus maximum reset time
of the communication channel as a security margin. For Blocking scheme, the setting
should be > maximum signal transmission time +10 ms.

Unblock: Select Off if unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is used. Set
to Restart if unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is used.

15.2 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85)

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

770
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 15
Scheme communication

15.2.2 Application

15.2.2.1 Fault current reversal logic

Figure 363 and Figure 364 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault
current reversal.

Assume that fault is near the B1 breaker. B1 Relay sees the fault in Zone1 and A1 relay
identifies the fault in Zone2.

Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker B1 opening.

It can cause an unselective trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block
the permissive overreaching scheme in the IED at B2.

CLOSED FAULT CLOSED

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2
en99000043_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000043 V1 EN

Figure 363: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are closed

CLOSED FAULT OPEN

Strong LINE 1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B
CLOSED CLOSED
LINE 2

A:2 B:2

en99000044_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000044 V1 EN

Figure 364: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker at B1 is
opened

When the breaker on the parallel line operates, the fault current on the healthy line is
reversed. The IED at B2 recognizes the fault in forward direction from reverse
direction before breaker operates. As IED at B2 already received permissive signal
from A2 and IED at B2 is now detecting the fault as forward fault, it will immediately
trip breaker at B2. To ensure that tripping at B2 should not occur, the permissive
overreaching function at B2 needs to be blocked by IRVL till the received permissive
signal from A2 is reset.

771
Application Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Scheme communication

The IED at A2, where the forward direction element was initially activated, must reset
before the send signal is initiated from B2. The delayed reset of output signal IRVL
also ensures the send signal from IED B2 is held back till the forward direction
element is reset in IED A2.

15.2.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic

Figure 365 shows a typical system condition that can result in a missing operation.
Note that there is no fault current from node B. This causes that the IED at B cannot
detect the fault and trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak-
end infeed logic is provided for the permissive overreaching scheme.

Strong Weak
source CLOSED CLOSED source
FAULT
A LINE 1 B

en99000054_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000054 V1 EN

Figure 365: Initial condition for weak-end infeed

15.2.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

15.2.3.1 Current reversal

The current reversal function is set on or off by setting the parameter CurrRev to
Enabled or Disabled. Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUpRev and
tDelayRev.

tPickUpRev is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20
ms.

tDelayRev is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the
communication reset time. A minimum tDelayRev setting of 40 ms is recommended.

772
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 15
Scheme communication

The reset time of the directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC) is

typically 25 ms. If other type of residual overcurrent protection is used in the remote
line end, its reset time should be used.

The signal propagation time is in the range 3 – 10 ms/km for most types of
communication media. In communication networks small additional time delays are
added in multiplexers and repeaters. Theses delays are less than 1 ms per process. It is
often stated that the total propagation time is less than 5 ms.

When a signal picks-up or drops out there is a decision time to be added. This decision
time is highly dependent on the interface between communication and protection used.
In many cases an external interface (teleprotection equipment) is used. This equipment
makes a decision and gives a binary signal to the protection device. In case of analog
teleprotection equipment typical decision time is in the range 10 – 30 ms. For digital
teleprotection equipment this time is in the range 2 – 10 ms.

If the teleprotection equipment is integrated in the protection IED the decision time can
be slightly reduced.

The principle time sequence of signaling at current reversal is shown.

Tele- Tele- Tele- Protection

Protection
Protection communication Protection Function
Function
Equipment System Equipment

CS initiation to
CS from the CR to the
the CR selection and
protection CS propagation, protection
communication decision, operate
function, operate propagation function, operate
system, operate and reset time
and reset time and reset time
and reset time

Sending CR
protection reception
reset drop
CR to
CR to CR to CS to
prot.
teleprot. prot. communication
Fault Protection Fault current func
CS initiation eq. func drop
occurs pick-up reversal drop

Time

Minimum setting of tDelay IEC05000536-2-en.vsd

IEC05000536 V2 EN

Figure 366: Time sequence of signaling at current reversal

773
Application Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Scheme communication

15.2.3.2 Weak-end infeed

The weak-end infeed can be set by setting the parameter WEI to Off, Echo or Echo &
Trip. Operating zero sequence voltage when parameter WEI is set to Echo & Trip is set
with 3V0PU.

The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault
resistance is calculated.

To avoid unwanted trip from the weak-end infeed logic (if spurious signals should
occur), set the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3V0) higher
than the maximum false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during
normal service conditions. The recommended minimum setting is two times the false
zero-sequence voltage during normal service conditions.

774
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

Section 16 Logic

16.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94)

16.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

16.1.2 Application
All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip
logic. In its simplest alternative the logic will only link the TRIP signal and make sure
that it is long enough.

Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) offers three different operating modes:

• Three-pole tripping for all fault types (3ph operating mode)

• Single-pole tripping for single-phase faults and three-pole tripping for multi-phase
and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-pole
tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions
is not possible, or when external conditions request three-pole tripping.
• Two-pole tripping for two-phase faults.

The three-pole trip for all faults offers a simple solution and is often sufficient in well
meshed transmission systems and in sub-transmission systems. Since most faults,
especially at the highest voltage levels, are single phase-to-ground faults, single-pole
tripping can be of great value. If only the faulty phase is tripped, power can still be
transferred on the line during the dead time that arises before reclosing. Single-pole
tripping during single-phase faults must be combined with single pole reclosing.

775
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

To meet the different double, breaker-and-a-half and other multiple circuit breaker
arrangements, two identical SMPPTRC (94) function blocks may be provided within
the IED.

One SMPPTRC (94) function block should be used for each breaker, if the line is
connected to the substation via more than one breaker. Assume that single-pole
tripping and autoreclosing is used on the line. Both breakers are then normally set up
for 1/3-pole tripping and 1/3-phase autoreclosing. As an alternative, the breaker chosen
as master can have single-pole tripping, while the slave breaker could have three-pole
tripping and autoreclosing. In the case of a permanent fault, only one of the breakers
has to be operated when the fault is energized a second time. In the event of a transient
fault the slave breaker performs a three-pole reclosing onto the non-faulted line.

The same philosophy can be used for two-pole tripping and autoreclosing.

To prevent closing of a circuit breaker after a trip the function can block the closing.

The two instances of the SMPPTRC (94) function are identical except, for the name of
the function block (SMPPTRC1 and SMPPTRC2). References will therefore only be
made to SMPPTRC1 in the following description, but they also apply to SMPPTRC2.

16.1.2.1 Three-pole tripping

A simple application with three-pole tripping from the logic block utilizes part of the
function block. Connect the inputs from the protection function blocks to the input
TRINP_3P. If necessary (normally the case) use a logic OR block to combine the
different function outputs to this input. Connect the output TRIP to the digital Output/s
on the IO board.

This signal can also be used for other purposes internally in the IED. An example could
be the starting of Breaker failure protection. The three outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
will always be activated at every trip and can be utilized on individual trip outputs if
single-pole operating devices are available on the circuit breaker even when a three-
pole tripping scheme is selected.

Set the function block to Program = 3Ph and set the required length of the trip pulse to
for example, tTripMin = 150ms.

For special applications such as Lock-out refer to the separate section below. The
typical connection is shown below in figure 367. Signals that are not used are dimmed.

776
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

SMPPTRC (94)

BLOCK TRIP
Impedance protection zone 1 TRIP
BLKLKOUT TR_A
Impedance protection zone 3 TRIP
OR TRINP_3P TR_B
Impedance protection zone 2 TRIP
EF4PTOC TRIP TRINP_A TR_C

TRINP_B TR1P

TRINP_C TR2P

PS_A TR3P

PS_B CLLKOUT

PS_C

1PTRZ

1PTRGF

P3PTR

SETLKOUT

RSTLKOUT

ANSI05000544-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000544 V2 EN

Figure 367: Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) is used for a simple three-pole tripping
application

16.1.2.2 Single- and/or three-pole tripping

The single-/three-pole tripping will give single-pole tripping for single-phase faults and
three-pole tripping for multi-phase fault. The operating mode is always used together
with a single-phase autoreclosing scheme.

The single-pole tripping can include different options and the use of the different
inputs in the function block.

The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF are used for single-pole tripping for distance
protection and directional ground fault protection as required.

The inputs are combined with the phase selection logic and the pickup signals from the
phase selector must be connected to the inputs PS_A, PS_B and PS_C to achieve the
tripping on the respective single-pole trip outputs TR_A, TR_B and TR_C. The Output
TRIP is a general trip and activated independent of which phase is involved.
Depending on which phases are involved the outputs TR1P, TR2P and TR3P will be
activated as well.

When single-pole tripping schemes are used a single-phase autoreclosing attempt is

expected to follow. For cases where the autoreclosing is not in service or will not
follow for some reason, the input Prepare Three-pole Trip P3PTR must be activated.
This is normally connected to the respective output on the Synchronism check,
energizing check, and synchronizing function SESRSYN (25) but can also be

777
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

connected to other signals, for example an external logic signal. If two breakers are
involved, one TR block instance and one SESRSYN (25) instance is used for each
breaker. This will ensure correct operation and behavior of each breaker.

The output Trip 3 Phase TR3P must be connected to the respective input in SESRSYN
(25) to switch SESRSYN (25) to three-phase reclosing. If this signal is not activated
SESRSYN (25) will use single-phase reclosing dead time.

Note also that if a second line protection is utilizing the same

SESRSYN (25) the three-pole trip signal must be generated, for
example by using the three-trip relays contacts in series and connecting
them in parallel to the TR3P output from the trip block.

The trip logic also has inputs TRIN_A, TRIN_B and TRIN_C where phase-selected
trip signals can be connected. Examples can be individual phase inter-trips from
remote end or internal/external phase selected trip signals, which are routed through
the IED to achieve, for example SESRSYN (25), Breaker failure, and so on. Other back-
up functions are connected to the input TRIN as described above. A typical connection
for a single-pole tripping scheme is shown in figure 368.
Distance protection zone 2 TRIP
Distance protection zone 3 TRIP SMPPTRC (94)
OR
Overcurrent protection TRIP
BLOCK TRIP

BLKLKOUT TR_A
TRIN_3P
TR_B
Distance protection zone 1 TRIP TRINP_A TR_C

TRIN_B TR1P
Phase Selection TRINL3 TR2P
PS_A PS_A TR3P
CLLKOUT
PS_B PS_B

PS_C PS_C
TR3P
1PTRZ

1PTREF
SMBRREC (79)
PREP3P P3PTR

SETLKOUT

TR3P RSTLKOUT

ANSI05000545-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000545 V4 EN

Figure 368: The trip logic function SMPPTRC (94) used for single-pole tripping
application

778
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

16.1.2.3 Single-, two- or three-pole tripping

The single-/two-/three-pole tripping mode provides single-pole tripping for single-

phase faults, two-pole tripping for two-phase faults and three-pole tripping for multi-
phase faults. The operating mode is always used together with an autoreclosing scheme
with setting Program = 1/2/3Ph or Program = 1/3Ph attempt.

The functionality is very similar to the single-phase scheme described above. However
SESRSYN (25) must in addition to the connections for single phase above be informed
that the trip is two phase by connecting the trip logic output TR2P to the respective
input in SESRSYN (25).

16.1.2.4 Lock-out

This function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lock-out. The lock-out can
be set to only activate the block closing output CLLKOUT or initiate the block closing
output and also maintain the trip signal (latched trip).

The lock-out can then be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating
the input reset Lock-Out RSTLKOUT.

If external conditions are required to initiate Lock-out but not initiate trip this can be
achieved by activating input SETLKOUT. The setting AutoLock = Disabled means that
the internal trip will not activate lock-out so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT
will result in lock-out. This is normally the case for overhead line protection where
most faults are transient. Unsuccessful autoreclose and back-up zone tripping can in
such cases be connected to initiate Lock-out by activating the input SETLKOUT.

16.1.2.5 Blocking of the function block

The function block can be blocked in two different ways. Its use is dependent on the
application. Blocking can be initiated internally by logic, or by the operator using a
communication channel. Total blockage of the trip function is done by activating the
input BLOCK and can be used to block the output of the trip logic in the event of
internal failures. Blockage of lock-out output by activating input BLKLKOUT is used
for operator control of the lock-out function.

16.1.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following trip parameters can be set to regulate tripping.

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Disabled switches the tripping off. The normal
selection is Enabled.

779
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

Program: Sets the required tripping scheme. Normally 3Ph or 1/2Ph are used.

TripLockout: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Disabled only activates the lock-out output.
Enabled activates the lock-out output and latches the output TRIP. The normal
selection is Disabled.

AutoLock: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Disabled only activates lock-out through the
input SETLKOUT. Enabled additonally allows activation through the trip function
itself. The normal selection is Disabled.

tTripMin: Sets the required minimum duration of the trip pulse. It should be set to
ensure that the breaker is tripped correctly. Normal setting is 0.150s.

tWaitForPHS: Sets a duration after any of the inputs 1PTRZ or 1PTREF has been
activated during which a phase selection must occur to get a single phase trip. If no
phase selection has been achieved a three-phase trip will be issued after the time has
elapsed.

16.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

16.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

16.2.2 Application
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected
to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable
pulse or steady output.

16.2.3 Setting guidelines

Operation: Operation of function Enabled/Disabled.

PulseTime: Defines the pulse time when in Pulsed mode. When used for direct tripping
of circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in

780
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker
trip coils.

OnDelay: Used to prevent output signals to be given for spurious inputs. Normally set
to 0 or a low value.

OffDelay: Defines a delay of the reset of the outputs after the activation conditions no
longer are fulfilled. It is only used in Steady mode. When used for direct tripping of
circuit breaker(s) the off delay time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain a satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

ModeOutputx: Defines if output signal OUTPUTx (where x=1-3) is Steady or Pulsed.

16.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

16.3.2 Application
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route alarm signals to different
LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

ALMCALH output signal and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the alarm
signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

16.3.3 Setting guidelines

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

16.4 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH

16.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

781
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

16.4.1.1 Application

Group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route warning signals to LEDs and/
or output contacts on the IED.

WRNCALH output signal WARNING and the physical outputs allows the user to
adapt the warning signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific
application needs.

16.4.1.2 Setting guidelines

OperationEnabled or Disabled

16.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH

16.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

16.5.1.1 Application

Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route indication signals to

different LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

INDCALH output signal IND and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
indication signal to physical outputs according to the specific application needs.

16.5.1.2 Setting guidelines

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

16.6 Configurable logic blocks

16.6.1 Application
A set of standard logic blocks, like AND, OR etc, and timers are available for adapting
the IED configuration to the specific application needs.

782
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates.

For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the local HMI or via the PST tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed
on drop-out) always have a common setting value.

For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting
parameters are accessible via the local HMI or via the PST tool.

16.6.2.1 Configuration

Logic is configured using the ACT configuration tool in PCM600.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a

fixed sequence with different cycle times.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is
shown when using the ACT configuration tool with the designation of the function
block and the cycle time, see example below.

IEC09000695_2_en.vsd
IEC09000695 V2 EN

Figure 369: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function

The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the
order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or
more logical function blocks in series.

Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle

time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the
execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional

783
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors,
for example, race between functions.

16.7 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN

16.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

16.7.2 Application
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.

Example for use of GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN

The Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF (87N) can be used both for auto-
transformers and normal transformers.

When used for auto-transformers, information from both windings parts, together with
the neutral point current, needs to be available to the function. This means that three
inputs are needed.

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

ANSI11000083_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000083 V1 EN

Figure 370: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for autotransformer application

784
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

For normal transformers only one winding and the neutral point is available. This
means that only two inputs are used. Since all group connections are mandatory to be
connected, the third input needs to be connected to something, which is the GRP_OFF
signal in FXDSIGN function block.

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

FXDSIGN
GRP_OFF

ANSI11000084_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000084 V1 EN

Figure 371: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for normal transformer application

16.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

16.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

16.8.2 Application
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary
(logical) signals into an integer. It can be used – for example, to connect logical output
signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another
function (like line differential protection). B16I does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =

785
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

16.9 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

786
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

16.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation

16.9.2 Application
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC is
used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. BTIGAPC can
receive an integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850–8–1. These
functions are very useful when you want to generate logical commands (for selector
switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. BTIGAPC has a
logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination

of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. BTIGAPC function is designed
for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
Table continues on next page

787
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

16.10 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

16.10.2 Application
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. It can be used – for example, to connect integer
output signals from one function to binary (logical) inputs to another function. IB16
function does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (IB16) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. IB16 function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

788
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the IB16 function block.

16.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

16.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

789
Application Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Logic

16.11.2 Application
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC)
is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean signals. ITBGAPC function can
receive an integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850–8–1. This
function is very useful when the user wants to generate logical commands (for selector
switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. ITBGAPC function
has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16.

The values of the different OUTx are according to the Table 65.

If the BLOCK input is activated, it freezes the logical outputs at the last value.

Table 65: Output signals

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted by the
ITBGAPC function block.

790
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 16
Logic

16.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

16.12.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

16.12.2 Application
The function TEIGAPC is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for
different purposes internally in the IED. An application example is the integration of
elapsed time during the measurement of neutral point voltage or neutral current at earth-
fault conditions.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow
indication is fixed to 999999.9 seconds.

16.12.3 Setting guidelines

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in seconds. The
achievable resolution of the settings depends on the level of the values defined.

A resolution of 10 ms can be achieved when the settings are defined within the range

1.00 second ≤ tAlarm ≤ 99 999.99 seconds

1.00 second ≤ tWarning ≤ 99 999.99 seconds.

If the values are above this range the resolution becomes lower

99 999.99 seconds ≤ tAlarm ≤ 999 999.9 seconds

99 999.99 seconds≤ tWarning ≤ 999 999.9 seconds

Note that tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds.

791
Application Manual
792
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Section 17 Monitoring

17.1 Measurement

17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

I

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

793
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

17.1.2 Application
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

794
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals.
The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated
quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on
the selected settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,

(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

17.1.3 Zero clamping

The measuring functions, CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU have no
interconnections regarding any setting or parameter.

Zero clampings are also entirely handled by the ZeroDb for each and every signal
separately for each of the functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled
by UL12ZeroDb in VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by IL1ZeroDb in
CMMXU ETC.

Example how CVMMXN is operating:

The following outputs can be observed on the local HMI under Monitoring/
Servicevalues/SRV1

S Apparent three-phase power

P Active three-phase power
Q Reactive three-phase power
PF Power factor
ILAG I lagging U
ILEAD I leading U
U System mean voltage, calculated according to selected mode
I System mean current, calculated according to selected mode
F Frequency

795
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

The settings for this function is found under Setting/General setting/Monitoring/

Service values/SRV1

It can be seen that:

• When system voltage falls below UGenZeroDB, the shown value for S, P, Q, PF,
ILAG, ILEAD, U and F on the local HMI is forced to zero
• When system current falls below IGenZeroDB, the shown value for S, P, Q, PF,
ILAG, ILEAD, U and F on the local HMI is forced to zero
• When the value of a single signal falls below the set dead band for that specific
signal, the value shown on the local HMI is forced to zero. For example, if
apparent three-phase power falls below SZeroDb the value for S on the local HMI
is forced to zero.

17.1.4 Setting guidelines

The available setting parameters of the measurement function CVMMXN, CMMXU,
VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The parameters for the Measurement functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU,

CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: Disabled/Enabled. Every function instance (CVMMXN, CMMXU,

VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) can be taken in operation (Enabled) or out
of operation (Disabled).

The following general settings can be set for the Measurement function (CVMMXN).

PowMagFact: Magnitude factor to scale power calculations.

PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & V.

Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of
calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table.

k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, V and I.

VGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of VBase used as indication of zero

voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb calculated S,
P, Q and PF will be zero.

796
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of IBase used as indication of zero

current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P,
Q and PF will be zero.

VMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

Parameters IBase, Ubase and SBase have been implemented as a

settings instead of a parameters, which means that if the values of the
parameters are changed there will be no restart of the application. As
restart is required to activate new parameters values, the IED must be
restarted in some way. Either manually or by changing some other
parameter at the same time.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase current measurement
(CMMXU).

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase voltage measurement
(VMMXU).

VMagCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

VAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Vn,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the
functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) X in
setting names below equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA,IB,IC, VA, VB, VCVAB, VBC,
VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0.

Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X set directly in applicable measuring unit.

Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X.

797
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.

Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for CVMMXN
(VGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb and/or
IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override
XZeroDb.

XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), magnitude deadband (Dead band) or

integral deadband (Int deadband). The reporting interval is controlled by the parameter
XDbRepInt.

XDbRepInt: Reporting deadband setting. Cyclic reporting is the setting value and is
reporting interval in seconds. Magnitude deadband is the setting value in % of
measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, that is, measured value
in % of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured values.

XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set in applicable measuring unit.

XHiLim: High limit.

XLowLim: Low limit.

XLowLowLim: Low-low limit.

XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits.

All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "".

Calibration curves
It is possible to calibrate the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU) to get class 0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is
accomplished by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current
and voltage. The compensation curve will have the characteristic for magnitude and
angle compensation of currents as shown in figure 372 (example). The first phase will
be used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors.
The factors will then be used for all related channels.

798
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 372: Calibration curves

17.1.4.1 Setting examples

Three setting examples, in connection to Measurement function (CVMMXN), are

provided:

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a OHL

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application on the secondary side of a
transformer
• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a generator

For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values
will be provided.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

799
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Measurement function application for a 380kV OHL

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 373:

380kV Busbar

800/5 A

IED
380kV 120V
/ kV
3 3

P Q

380kV OHL ANSI09000039-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000039 V1 EN

Figure 373: Single line diagram for 380kV OHL application

In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated
in figure 373 it is necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see section "") using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs
3. Set under General settings parameters for the Measurement function:
• general settings as shown in table 66.
• level supervision of active power as shown in table 67.
• calibration parameters as shown in table 68.

800
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Table 66: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 It can be used during commissioning
calculations to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no scaling is
required
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 It can be used during commissioning
shift between measured I & U to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no angle
compensation is required. As well
here required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards protected
object (as per IED internal default
direction)
Mode Selection of measured current L1, L2, L3 All three phase-to-ground VT inputs
and voltage are available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%.
Ubase Voltage below 25% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of Ibase 3 Set minimum current level to 3%.
Current below 3% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 400.00 Set rated OHL phase-to-phase voltage
Global base) kV
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in A 800 Set rated primary CT current used for
Global base) OHL

Table 67: Settings parameters for level supervision

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
PMin Minimum value -100 Minimum expected load
PMax Minimum value 100 Maximum expected load
PZeroDb Zero point clamping in 0.001% of 3000 Set zero point clamping to 45 MW
range that is, 3% of 200 MW
PRepTyp Reporting type db Select magnitude deadband
supervision
PDbRepInt Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 2 Set ±Δdb=30 MW that is, 2% (larger
% of range, Int Db: In %s changes than 30 MW will be reported)
PHiHiLim High High limit (physical value) 60 High alarm limit that is, extreme
overload alarm
PHiLim High limit (physical value) 50 High warning limit that is, overload
warning
Table continues on next page

801
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected Comments

value
PLowLim Low limit (physical value) -50 Low warning limit. Not active
PLowLowlLim Low Low limit (physical value) -60 Low alarm limit. Not active
PLimHyst Hysteresis value in % of range 2 Set ±Δ Hysteresis MW that is, 2%
(common for all limits)

Table 68: Settings for calibration parameters

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
IMagComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 100% of In
VAmpComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 100% of Vn
IAngComp5 Angle calibration for current at 0.00
5% of In
IAngComp30 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 30% of In
IAngComp100 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 100% of In

Measurement function application for a power transformer

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 374.

802
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

132kV Busbar

200/5

31.5 MVA IED

P Q

VAB
500/5 33kV 120V
/
3 3
33kV Busbar ANSI09000040-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000040 V1 EN

Figure 374: Single line diagram for transformer application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 374, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see section "") data using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table 69:

803
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Table 69: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Disabled/Enabled Enabled Function must be Enabled
PowAmpFact Magnitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 180.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. However here the required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards busbar (Not per IED internal
default direction). Therefore angle
compensation have to be used in
order to get measurements in aliment
with the required direction.
Mode Selection of measured current L1L2 Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage
and voltage is available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of Ibase 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 35.00 Set LV side rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in A 495 Set transformer LV winding rated
Global base) current

Measurement function application for a generator

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 375.

804
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

230kV Busbar

300/5

100 MVA
IED

15/0.12kV
VAB ,, VBC

P Q

100 MVA G
15.65kV
4000/5

ANSI09000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000041 V1 EN

Figure 375: Single line diagram for generator application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 375, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel
PhaseAngleRef(see section "") using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:

805
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Table 70: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. As well here required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards protected object (as per IED
internal default direction)
Mode Selection of measured current Arone Generator VTs are connected
and voltage between phases (V-connected)
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25% Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of Ibase 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 15,65 Set generator rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in A 3690 Set generator rated current
Global base)

17.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)

17.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63

17.2.2 Application
Gas medium supervision (SSIMG ,63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker is very
important. When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the
circuit breaker operation shall be blocked to minimize the risk of internal failure.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as an input
signal to the function. The function generates alarms based on the received information.

806
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

17.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)

17.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71

17.3.2 Application
Liquid medium supervision (SSIML ,71) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Proper arc extinction by the compressed oil in the circuit breaker is very
important. When the level becomes too low, compared to the required value, the circuit
breaker operation is blocked to minimize the risk of internal failures. Binary
information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the
function. In addition to that, the function generates alarms based on received information.

17.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

17.4.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

17.4.2 Application
The circuit breaker maintenance is usually based on regular time intervals or the
number of operations performed. This has some disadvantages because there could be
a number of abnormal operations or few operations with high-level currents within the
predetermined maintenance interval. Hence, condition-based maintenance scheduling
is an optimum solution in assessing the condition of circuit breakers.

Circuit breaker contact travel time

Auxiliary contacts provide information about the mechanical operation, opening time
and closing time of a breaker. Detecting an excessive traveling time is essential to
indicate the need for maintenance of the circuit breaker mechanism. The excessive
travel time can be due to problems in the driving mechanism or failures of the contacts.

807
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Circuit breaker status

Monitoring the breaker status ensures proper functioning of the features within the
protection relay such as breaker control, breaker failure and autoreclosing. The breaker
status is monitored using breaker auxiliary contacts. The breaker status is indicated by
the binary outputs. These signals indicate whether the circuit breaker is in an open,
closed or error state.

Remaining life of circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the circuit breaker life reduces due to wear. The wear
in a breaker depends on the interrupted current. For breaker maintenance or
replacement at the right time, the remaining life of the breaker must be estimated. The
remaining life of a breaker can be estimated using the maintenance curve provided by
the circuit breaker manufacturer.

Circuit breaker manufacturers provide the number of make-break operations possible at

various interrupted currents. An example is shown in Figure376.

808
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

100000

50000

P1
20000

10000
Number of make-break operations ( n)

5000

2000

1000

500

200

P2
100

50

20

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100

Interrupted current (kA)

IEC12000623_1_en.vsd
IEC12000623 V1 EN

Figure 376: An example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker

Calculation for estimating the remaining life

The graph shows that there are 10000 possible operations at the rated operating current
and 900 operations at 10 kA and 50 operations at rated fault current. Therefore, if the
interrupted current is 10 kA, one operation is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations
at the rated current. It is assumed that prior to tripping, the remaining life of a breaker
is 10000 operations. Remaining life calculation for three different interrupted current
conditions is explained below.

• Breaker interrupts at and below the rated operating current, that is, 2 kA, the
remaining life of the CB is decreased by 1 operation and therefore, 9999
operations remaining at the rated operating current.
• Breaker interrupts between rated operating current and rated fault current, that is,
10 kA, one operation at 10kA is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations at the

809
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

rated current. The remaining life of the CB would be (10000 – 10) = 9989 at the
rated operating current after one operation at 10 kA.
• Breaker interrupts at and above rated fault current, that is, 50 kA, one operation at
50 kA is equivalent to 10000/50 = 200 operations at the rated operating current.
The remaining life of the CB would become (10000 – 200) = 9800 operations at
the rated operating current after one operation at 50 kA.

Accumulated energy
Monitoring the contact erosion and interrupter wear has a direct influence on the
required maintenance frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately estimate the
erosion of the contacts and condition of interrupters using cumulative summation of Iy.
The factor "y" depends on the type of circuit breaker. The energy values were
accumulated using the current value and exponent factor for CB contact opening
duration. When the next CB opening operation is started, the energy is accumulated
from the previous value. The accumulated energy value can be reset to initial
accumulation energy value by using the Reset accumulating energy input, RSTIPOW.

Circuit breaker operation cycles

Routine breaker maintenance like lubricating breaker mechanism is based on the
number of operations. A suitable threshold setting helps in preventive maintenance.
This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing
in case of an oil circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

By monitoring the activity of the number of operations, it is possible to calculate the
number of days the breaker has been inactive. Long periods of inactivity degrade the
reliability for the protection system.

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

For normal circuit breaker operation, the circuit breaker spring should be charged
within a specified time. Detecting a long spring charging time indicates the time for
circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the spring charging time can be given as
a service value.

Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

For proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker, the pressure of
the gas must be adequate. Binary input available from the pressure sensor is based on
the pressure levels inside the arc chamber. When the pressure becomes too low
compared to the required value, the circuit breaker operation is blocked.

810
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

17.4.3 Setting guidelines

The breaker monitoring function is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit
breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached
a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is also essential to
monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and accumulated energy during arc extinction.

17.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED

The parameters for breaker monitoring (SSCBR) can be set using the local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: Enabled or Disabled.

IBase: Base phase current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
settings.

OpenTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker opening travel time.

CloseTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker closing travel time.

tTrOpenAlm: Setting of alarm level for opening travel time.

tTrCloseAlm: Setting of alarm level for closing travel time.

OperAlmLevel: Alarm limit for number of mechanical operations.

OperLOLevel: Lockout limit for number of mechanical operations.

CurrExponent: Current exponent setting for energy calculation. It varies for different
types of circuit breakers. This factor ranges from 0.5 to 3.0.

AccStopCurr: RMS current setting below which calculation of energy accumulation

stops. It is given as a percentage of IBase.

ContTrCorr: Correction factor for time difference in auxiliary and main contacts'
opening time.

AlmAccCurrPwr: Setting of alarm level for accumulated energy.

LOAccCurrPwr: Lockout limit setting for accumulated energy.

811
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

SpChAlmTime: Time delay for spring charging time alarm.

tDGasPresAlm: Time delay for gas pressure alarm.

tDGasPresLO: Time delay for gas pressure lockout.

DirCoef: Directional coefficient for circuit breaker life calculation.

RatedOperCurr: Rated operating current of the circuit breaker.

RatedFltCurr: Rated fault current of the circuit breaker.

OperNoRated: Number of operations possible at rated current.

OperNoFault: Number of operations possible at rated fault current.

CBLifeAlmLevel: Alarm level for circuit breaker remaining life.

AccSelCal: Selection between the method of calculation of accumulated energy.

OperTimeDelay: Time delay between change of status of trip output and start of main
contact separation.

17.5 Event function EVENT

17.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN

17.5.2 Application
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-
tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

812
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

17.5.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the Event (EVENT) function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

EventMask (Ch_1 - 16)

The inputs can be set individually as:

• NoEvents
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect

LONChannelMask or SPAChannelMask
Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:

• Disabled
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

MinRepIntVal (1 - 16)
A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel.
This can be set between 0.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. It should normally be set to
0, that is, no cyclic communication.

It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized

way to minimize the load on the station bus.

17.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

17.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Table continues on next page

813
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Disturbance report A2RADR - -
Disturbance report A3RADR - -
Disturbance report A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Disturbance report B2RBDR - -
Disturbance report B3RBDR - -
Disturbance report B4RBDR - -
Disturbance report B5RBDR - -
Disturbance report B6RBDR - -

17.6.2 Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or
in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able
to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
disturbance report function DRPRDRE and facilitate a better understanding of the
power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after
a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can
be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improve existing
equipment, and so on. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when
planning for and designing new installations, that is, a disturbance recording could be a
part of Functional Analysis (FA).

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks that is,
• maximum 30 external analog signals,
• 10 internal derived analog signals, and
• 96 binary signals.

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions that is, Indications
(IND), Event recorder (ER), Sequential of events (SOE), Trip value recorder (TVR),
Disturbance recorder (DR).

Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus,
disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can
record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or
another. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance recorder.

814
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. Local HMI can be used to get
information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded in
the PCM600 using the Disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis
(using WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also
upload disturbance report files using FTP or MMS (over 61850–8–1) clients.

If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder
(record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available as
GOOSE or Report Control data. The same information is obtainable if
IEC60870-5-103 is used.

17.6.3 Setting guidelines

The setting parameters for the Disturbance report function DRPRDRE are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals or

signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions
that is, Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value
recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE) function.

User-defined names of binary and analog input signals is set using PCM600. The
analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all
related functions (Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND),
Trip value recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE)).

Figure 377 shows the relations between Disturbance report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indication (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR),.
Disturbance report function acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

815
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Sequential of
events
Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000337-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000337 V1 EN

Figure 377: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

For Disturbance report function there are a number of settings which also influences
the sub-functions.

Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick
status information about the IED.

Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal failure
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light A Disturbance Report is triggered
Flashing light The IED is in test mode

Red LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDN = Enabled

816
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Operation
The operation of Disturbance report function DRPRDRE has to be set Enabled or
Disabled. If Disabled is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none
sub-function will operate (the only general parameter that influences Sequential of
events (SOE)).

Operation = Disabled:

• Disturbance reports are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

Operation = Enabled:

• Disturbance reports are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI
and from a PC using PCM600.
• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is stored.

Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (local HMI,
disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is
date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by
one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of
recordings stored in the IED is 100. The oldest recording will be overwritten when a
new recording arrives (FIFO).

To be able to delete disturbance records, Operation parameter has to be

Enabled.

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

17.6.3.1 Recording times

Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point
of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the
estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip value recorder (TVR) function.

817
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR)
function).

Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The
parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long
or permanently set (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).

Post retrigger (PostRetrig) can be set to Enabled or Disabled. Makes it possible to

choose performance of Disturbance report function if a new trig signal appears in the
post-fault window.

PostRetrig = Disabled

The function is insensitive for new trig signals during post fault time.

PostRetrig = Enabled

The function completes current report and starts a new complete report that is, the
latter will include:

• new pre-fault- and fault-time (which will overlap previous report)

• events and indications might be saved in the previous report too, due to overlap
• new trip value calculations if installed, in operation and started

Operation in test mode

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Disabled. Disturbance report function
does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed.

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Enabled. Disturbance report function
works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.

17.6.3.2 Binary input signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input signals.
The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.

For each of the 96 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a
trigger for the start of the Disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on
positive (1) or negative (0) slope.

TrigDRN: Disturbance report may trig for binary input N (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input N.

818
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176:
transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection.

Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.

See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.

17.6.3.3 Analog input signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input
signals. PCM600 is used to configure the signals.

For retrieving remote data from LDCM module, the Disturbance report
function should not be connected to a 3 ms SMAI function block if this
is the only intended use for the remote data.

The analog trigger of Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be

included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM = Enabled/Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

NomValueM: Nominal value for input M.

OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance report may

trig for high/low level of analog input M (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

OverTrigLeM, UnderTrigLeM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative
nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.

17.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters

All functions are in operation as long as Disturbance report is in operation.

Indications
IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on local
HMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.

SetLEDN: Set red LED on local HMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status.

819
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

Disturbance recorder
OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder
(Enabled) or not (Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

Event recorder
Event recorder (ER) function has no dedicated parameters.

Trip value recorder

ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase
angle reference for all other analog input signals. This signal will also be used for
frequency measurement and the measured frequency is used when calculating trip
values. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example, a line
or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).

Sequential of events
function has no dedicated parameters.

17.6.3.5 Consideration

The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number
of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast
number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be
handled if the recording functions do not have proper settings. The goal is to optimize
the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to
maximize the number that is possible to save in the IED.

The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and TimeLimit).

• Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
• How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
• Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault
generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?

Minimize the number of recordings:

• Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording that is, protection
trip, carrier receive and/or pickup signals.
• Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since
unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless

820
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 17
Monitoring

analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal
operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a
report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT ratios.

17.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

17.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

17.7.2 Application
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other function blocks.

BINSTATREP has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and
can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 378: BINSTATREP logical diagram

821
Application Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Monitoring

17.7.3 Setting guidelines

The pulse time t is the only setting for the Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP).
Each output can be set or reset individually, but the pulse time will be the same for all
outputs in the entire BINSTATREP function.

17.8 Limit counter L4UFCNT

17.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

17.8.2 Application
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) is intended for applications where positive and/or negative
sides on a binary signal need to be counted.

The limit counter provides four independent limits to be checked against the
accumulated counted value. The four limit reach indication outputs can be utilized to
initiate proceeding actions. The output indicators remain high until the reset of the
function.

It is also possible to initiate the counter from a non-zero value by resetting the function
to the wanted initial value provided as a setting.

If applicable, the counter can be set to stop or rollover to zero and continue counting
after reaching the maximum count value. The steady overflow output flag indicates the
next count after reaching the maximum count value. It is also possible to set the
counter to rollover and indicate the overflow as a pulse, which lasts up to the first
count after rolling over to zero. In this case, periodic pulses will be generated at
multiple overflow of the function.

17.8.2.1 Setting guidelines

The parameters for Limit counter L4UFCNT are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

822
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 18
Metering

Section 18 Metering

18.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

18.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN

18.1.2 Application
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and
read by the PCFCNT function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via
the station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station monitoring
system as a service value. When using IEC 61850–8–1, a scaled service value is
available over the station bus.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy
meters. An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED can be
used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse-counter logic
PCFCNT can also be used as a general purpose counter.

18.1.3 Setting guidelines

From PCM600, these parameters can be set individually for each pulse counter:

• Operation: Disabled/Enabled
• tReporting: 0-3600s
• EventMask: NoEvents/ReportEvents

823
Application Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Metering

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter-logic PCFCNT
function block is made with PCM600.

On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed to 5 ms, that is, the
counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms. The input oscillation
blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That means that the counter finds the input
oscillating if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is
released at 30 Hz. The values for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed in
the local HMI and PCM600 under Main menu/Settings/General settings/I/O-
modules.

The debounce time should be set to the same value for all channels on
the board.

The setting is common for all input channels on a Binary Input Module,
that is, if changes of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the
pulse counter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board
used for pulse counting.

18.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR

18.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

18.2.2 Application
Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) is intended for
statistics of the forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy
basically given by the measurements function (CVMMXN). This function has a site
calibration possibility to further increase the total accuracy.

824
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 18
Metering

The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of (CVMMXN) as shown in

figure 379.
ETPMMTR
ACCINPRG
P EAFPULSE
Q EARPULSE
STARTACC ERFPULSE
STOPACC ERRPULSE
RSTACC EAFALM
RSTDMD EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC13000184-1-en.vsd
IEC13000190 V1 EN

Figure 379: Connection of energy calculation and demand handling function

ETPMMTR to the measurements function (CVMMXN)

The energy values can be read through communication in MWh and MVArh in
monitoring tool of PCM600 and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the
local HMI. The local HMI graphical display is configured with PCM600 Graphical
Display Editor tool (GDE) with a measuring value which is selected to the active and
reactive component as preferred. Also all Accumulated Active Forward, Active
Reverse, Reactive Forward and Reactive Reverse energy values can be presented.

Maximum demand values are presented in MWh or MVArh in the same way.

Alternatively, the energy values can be presented with use of the pulse counters
function (PCGGIO). The output energy values are scaled with the pulse output setting
values EAFAccPlsQty, EARAccPlsQty, ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty of the
energy metering function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct
values by scaling in this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the
local HMI in the same way and/or sent to the SA (Substation Automation) system
through communication where the total energy then is calculated by summation of the
energy pulses. This principle is good for very high values of energy as the saturation of
numbers else will limit energy integration to about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A.
After that the accumulation will start on zero again.

18.2.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the energy calculation and demand handling
function ETPMMTR:

825
Application Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Metering

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

EnaAcc: Disabled/Enabled is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off.

tEnergy: Time interval when energy is measured.

tEnergyOnPls: gives the pulse length ON time of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms
when connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms.

tEnergyOffPls: gives the OFF time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms.

EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: gives the MWh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty : gives the MVArh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max
limit, and so on. Normally, the default values are suitable for these parameters.

826
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

Section 19 Station communication

19.1 670 series protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or

many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA)
bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

19.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

19.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients
and allows horizontal communication between two or more intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) from one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in
the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850–8–
1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst
themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the
IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered to
receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can
also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network.

Figure 380 shows the topology of an IEC 61850–8–1 configuration. IEC 61850–8–1
specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system
integrator.

827
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Engineering
Station HSI
Workstation Gateway
Base System
SMS
CC

Printer

IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

KIOSK 1 KIOSK 2 KIOSK 3

IEC09000135_en.v
sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN

Figure 380: SA system with IEC 61850–8–1

Figure 381 shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

828
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway

GOOSE

IED IED IED IED IED

A A A A A

Control Protection Control and protection Control Protection

en05000734.vsd
IEC05000734 V1 EN

Figure 381: Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message

19.2.2 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV
Table 71: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

19.2.3 Setting guidelines

There are two settings related to the IEC 61850–8–1 protocol:

Operation User can set IEC 61850 communication to Enabled or Disabled.

GOOSE has to be set to the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be send and received.

19.2.4 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

829
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

19.2.4.1 Application

Generic communication function for Measured Value (SPGAPC) function is used to

send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It has
one visible input, that should be connected in ACT tool.

19.2.4.2 Setting guidelines

There are no settings available for the user for SPGAPC. However, PCM600 must be
used to get the signals sent by SPGAPC.

19.2.5 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC

19.2.5.1 Application

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to

send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

19.2.5.2 Setting guidelines

The settings available for Generic communication function for Measured Value
(MVGAPC) function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the
monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero.

The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low
and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is
shown on the range output of MVGAPC function block. When a Measured value
expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of
the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.

19.2.6 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

19.2.6.1 Identification
Function description LHMI identification IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration

830
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

19.2.6.2 Application

Parallel redundancy protocol status (PRPSTATUS) together with Duo driver

configuration (DUODRV) are used to supervise and assure redundant Ethernet
communication over two channels. This will secure data transfer even though one
communication channel might not be available for some reason. Together
PRPSTATUS and DUODRV provide redundant communication over station bus
running IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The redundant communication use both port AB and
CD on OEM module.

831
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data
Data

AB CD IED
Configuration OEM

DUODRV PRPSTATUS

IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN

Figure 382: Redundant station bus

832
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

19.2.6.3 Setting guidelines

Redundant communication (DUODRV) is configured in the local HMI under Main

menu/Settings/General settings/Communication/Ethernet configuration/Rear
OEM - Redundant PRP

The settings can then be viewed, but not set, in the Parameter Setting tool in PCM600
under Main menu/IED Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/
DUODRV:

Operation: The redundant communication will be activated when this parameter is set
to On.After confirmation the IED will restart and the setting alternatives Rear OEM -
Port AB and CD will not be further displayed in the local HMI. The ETHLANAB and
ETHLANCD in the Parameter Setting Tool are irrelevant when the redundant
communication is activated, only DUODRV IPAdress and IPMask are valid.

833
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

IEC10000057-1-en.vsd

IEC10000057 V1 EN

Figure 383: PST screen: DUODRV Operation is set to On, which affect Rear OEM
- Port AB and CD which are both set to Duo

19.3 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

19.3.1 Introduction
Every IED can be provided with a communication interface enabling it to connect to a
process bus, in order to get data from analog data acquisition units close to the process
(primary apparatus), commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The protocol used in
this case is the IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.

Note that the IEC 61850-9-2LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled
values, only the transportation. Thus, the accuracy of the current and voltage inputs to

834
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

the merging unit and the inaccuracy added by the merging unit must be coordinated
with the requirement for actual type of protection function.

Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are for
example anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D
conversion inaccuracy, time tagging accuracy etc.

In principle shall the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with
the merging unit, have the same quality as direct input of currents and voltages.

The process bus physical layout can be arranged in several ways, described in Annex B
of the standard, depending on what are the needs for sampled data in a substation.

IEC06000537 V1 EN

Figure 384: Example of a station configuration with separated process bus and
station bus

The IED can get analog values simultaneously from a classical CT or VT and from a
Merging Unit, like in this example:

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one
or more measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to
other clients (or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data
from classical measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring
transducers and yet others can pick up data from both types. The electronic part of a non-

835
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

conventional measuring transducer (like a Rogowski coil or a capacitive divider) can

represent a MU by itself as long as it can send sampled data over process bus.

Station Wide Station Wide

SCADA System GPS Clock

IEC61850-8-1

Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

IEC61850-8-1

110 V
Other 1A IED 1PPS
Relays 1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
1PPS
Merging
Unit

Combi
CT CT
Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000069-3.vsd

IEC08000069 V2 EN

Figure 385: Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analog values
from both classical measuring transformers and merging units.

Figure 386: Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analogue
values from merging units

836
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

19.3.2 Setting guidelines

There are several settings related to the Merging Units in local HMI under:

Main menu\Settings\General Settings\Analog Modules\Merging Unit x

where x can take the value 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.

19.3.2.1 Specific settings related to the IEC 61850-9-2LE communication

The process bus communication IEC 61850-9-2LE have specific settings, similar to the
analog inputs modules.

Besides the names of the merging unit channels (that can be edited only from PCM600,
not from the local HMI) there are important settings related to the merging units and
time synchronization of the signals:

When changing the sending (MU unit) MAC address, a reboot of the
IED is required.

If there are more than one sample group involved, then time synch is mandatory and
the protection functions will be blocked if there is no time synchronization.

SmpGrp – this setting parameter is not used

CTStarPointx: This parameter specifies the direction to or from object. See also section
"Setting of current channels".

AppSynch: If this parameter is set to Synch and the IED HW-time synchronization is
lost or the synchronization to the MU time is lost, the protection functions in the list 72
will be blocked and the output SYNCH will be set.

SynchMode: marks how the IED will receive the data coming from a merging unit:

• if it is set to NoSynch, then when the sampled values arrive, there will be no check
on the “SmpSynch” flag
• If it is set to Operation, the “SmpSynch” flag will be checked all time.
• setting Init, should not be used

The rest of the setting are explained in table "".

837
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

19.3.2.2 Loss of communication

If IEC 61850-9-2LE communication is lost, see examples in figures 387, 388 and 389,
the protection functions in table 72are blocked.

Case 1:

ANSI13000298-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000298 V1 EN

Figure 387: Normal operation

Case 2:

Failure of the MU (sample lost) blocks the sending of binary signals through LDCM.
The received binary signals are not blocked and processd normally.

→DTT from the remote end is still processed.

ANSI13000299-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000299 V1 EN

Figure 388: MU failed, mixed system

Case 3:

Failure of one MU (sample lost) blocks the sending and receiving of binary signals
through LDCM.

838
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

→DTT from the remote end is not working.

ANSI13000300-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000300 V1 EN

Figure 389: MU failed, 9-2 system

Table 72: Blocked protection functions if IEC 61850-9-2LE communication is interrupted.

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Accidental energizing AEGPVOC Two step overvoltage OV2PTOV
protection for protection
synchronous generator
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC Four step single phase PH4SPTOC
overcurrent protection
Capacitor bank CBPGAPC Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
protection
Pole discordance CCPDSC Instantaneous phase PHPIOC
protection overcurrent protection
Breaker failure CCRBRF PoleSlip/Out-of-step PSPPPAM
protection protection
Breaker failure CCSRBRF Restricted earth fault REFPDIF
protection, single phase protection, low
version impedance
Current circuit CCSSPVC Two step residual ROV2PTOV
supervison overvoltage protection
Compensated over- and COUVGAPC Rate-of-change SAPFRC
undervoltage protection frequency protection
General currrent and CVGAPC Overfrequency SAPTOF
voltage protection protection
Current reversal and ECRWPSCH Underfrequency SAPTUF
weakend infeed logic protection
for residual overcurrent
protection
Four step residual EF4PTOC Sudden change in SCCVPTOC
overcurrent protection current variation
Table continues on next page

839
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Instantaneous residual EFPIOC Sensitive Directional SDEPSDE
overcurrent protection residual over current
and power protetcion
Phase selection, FDPSPDIS Synchrocheck, SESRSYN
quadrilateral energizing check, and
characteristic with fixed synchronizing
angle
Faulty phase FMPSPDIS Circuit breaker SSCBR
identification with load condition monitoring
enchroachment
Phase selection, FRPSPDIS Insulation gas SSIMG
quadrilateral monitoring
characteristic with
settable angle
Frequency time FTAQFVR Insulation liquid SSIML
accumulation protection monitoring
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC Stub protection STBPTOC
Generator differential GENPDIF Transformer differential T2WPDIF
protection protection, two winding
Directional Overpower GOPPDOP Transformer differential T3WPDIF
protection protection, three winding
Generator rotor GRPTTR Automatic voltage TR1ATCC
overload protection control for tapchanger,
single control
Generator stator GSPTTR Automatic voltage TR8ATCC
overload protection control for tapchanger,
parallel control
Directional Underpower GUPPDUP Thermal overload TRPTTR
protection protection, two time
constants
1Ph High impedance HZPDIF Two step undervoltage UV2PTUV
differential protection protection
Line differential L3CPDIF Voltage differential VDCPTOV
protection, 3 CT sets, protection
2-3 line ends
Line differential L6CPDIF Fuse failure supervision VDRFUF
protection, 6 CT sets,
3-5 line ends
Low active power and LAPPGAPC Voltage-restrained time VRPVOC
power factor protection overcurrent protection
Negative sequence LCNSPTOC Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
overcurrent protection
Negative sequence LCNSPTOV Scheme communication ZCPSCH
overvoltage protection logic for distance or
overcurrent protection
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC Current reversal and ZCRWPSCH
weak-end infeed logic
for distance protection
Table continues on next page

840
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Three phase LCP3PTUC Automatic switch onto ZCVPSOF
undercurrent fault logic, voltage and
current based
Thermal overload LCPTTR Under impedance ZGVPDIS
protection, one time protection for generator
constant
Zero sequence LCZSPTOC Fast distance protection ZMFCPDIS
overcurrent protection
Zero sequence LCZSPTOV High speed distance ZMFPDIS
overvoltage protection protection
Line differential LDLPSCH Distance measuring ZMCAPDIS
coordination zone, quadrilateral
characteristic for series
compensated lines
Additional security logic LDRGFC Distance measuring ZMCPDIS
for differential protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic for series
compensated lines
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS Fullscheme distance ZMHPDIS
protection, mho
characteristic
Thermal overload LFPTTR Fullscheme distance ZMMAPDIS
protection, one time protection, quadrilateral
constant for earth faults
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV Fullscheme distance ZMMPDIS
protection, quadrilateral
for earth faults
Line differential LT3CPDIF Distance protection ZMQAPDIS
protection 3 CT sets, zone, quadrilateral
with inzone characteristic
transformers, 2-3 line
ends
Line differential LT6CPDIF Distance protection ZMQPDIS
protection 6 CT sets, zone, quadrilateral
with inzone characteristic
transformers, 3-5 line
ends
Negativ sequence time NS2PTOC Distance protection ZMRAPDIS
overcurrent protection zone, quadrilateral
for machines characteristic, separate
settings
Four step directional NS4PTOC Distance protection ZMRPDIS
negative phase zone, quadrilateral
sequence overcurrent characteristic, separate
protection settings
Table continues on next page

841
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Four step phase OC4PTOC Power swing detection ZMRPSB
overcurrent protection
Overexcitation OEXPVPH Mho Impedance ZSMGAPC
protection supervision logic
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

19.3.2.3 Setting examples for IEC 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization

It is important that the IED and the merging units (MU) uses the same time reference.
This is especially true if analog data is used from several sources, for example an
internal TRM and a MU. Or if several physical MU is used. The same time reference is
important to correlate data so that channels from different sources refer to correct
phase angel.

When only one MU is used as analog source it is theoretically possible to do without

time- synchronization. However, this would mean that timestamps for analog and
binary data/events would be uncorrelated. Disturbance recordings will appear incorrect
since analog data will be timestamped by MU and binary events will use internal IED
time. For this reason it is recommended to use time synchronization also when analog
data emanate from only one MU.

An external time-source can be used to synchronize both the IED and the MU. It is also
possible to use the MU as clock-master to synchronize the IED from the MU. When
using an external clock, it is possible to set the IED to be synchronized via PPS or IRIG-
B. It is also possible to use an internal GPS-receiver in the IED (if the external clock is
using GPS).

Using the MU as time source for synchronization

842
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

IED

PPS
Synchronization

IEC 61850-9-2LE
Analog data

MU

IEC10000061-1-en.vsd
IEC10000061 V1 EN

Figure 390: Setting example when MU is the synchronizing source

Settings in local HMI under Settings/Time/Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN/

IEC 61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc: set to PPS since this is what is generated by the MU (ABB MU)
• AppSynch : set to Synch, since protection functions should be blocked in case of
loss of timesynchronization
• SyncAccLevel: could be set to 4us since this corresponds to a maximum phase-
angle error of 0.072 degrees at 50Hz
• fineSyncSource could still be set to something different in order to correlate events
and data to other IED’s in the station

Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/MU01

• SyncMode : set to Operation. This means that the IED will be blocked if the MU
loose time synchronization. Since the MU is set as Time-master, this is unlikely to
happen so the setting of SyncMode is not important in this case

There are 3 signals that monitors state related to time synchronization:

• TSYNCERR signal on the TIMEERR function block. This signal will go high
whenever internal timeQuality goes above the setting SyncAccLevel (4us in this

843
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

case) and this will block the protection functions.. This will happen max 4 seconds
after an interruption of the PPS fiber from the MU (or if the fineSyncSource is lost).
• SYNCH signal on the MU1_4I_4U function block indicates when protection
functions are blocked due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED (that
is loss of the hardware synchSrc)
• MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block monitor the synchronization
from the MU (in the datastream). When the MU indicates loss of time
synchronization this signal will go high. In this case the MU is set to master so it
can not loose time synchronization.

The SMPLLOSTsignal will of course also be interesting since this indicate blocking
due to missing analog data (interruption of IEC 61850-9-2LE fiber), although this has
nothing to do with time synchronization.

Using an external clock for time synchronization

PPS / IRIG-B
IED

IEC 61850-9-2LE
data
STATION
CLOCK

PPS
MU

IEC10000074-1-en.vsd
IEC10000074 V1 EN

Figure 391: Setting example with external synchronization

Settings in local HMI under Settings/Time/Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN/

IEC 61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc : set to PPS/IRIG-B depending on available outputs on the clock

• AppSynch : set to Synch, for blocking protection functions in case of loss of time
synchronization
• SyncAccLevel : could be set to 4us since this correspond to a maximum phase-
angle error of 0.072 degrees at 50Hz
• fineSyncSource :should be set to IRIG-B if this is available from the clock. If using
PPS for HWSyncSrc , “full-time” has to be acquired from another source. If the

844
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

station clock is on the local area network (LAN) and has a sntp-server this is one
option.

Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/MU01

• SyncMode: set to Operation. This means that the IED will block if the MU loose
time synchronization.

There are 3 signals that monitors state related to time synchronization:

• TSYNCERR signal on the TIMEERR function block will go high whenever

internal timeQuality goes above the setting SyncAccLevel (4us in this case). This
will block the protection functions after maximum 4 seconds after an interruption
in the PPS fiber communication from the MU.
• SYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block indicate that protection functions
are blocked by loss of internal time synchronization to the IED (that is loss of the
HW-synchSrc).
• MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block monitors the
synchronization flag from the MU (in the datastream). When the MU indicates
loss of time synchronization, this signal is set.

A “blockedByTimeSynch” signal could be made by connecting the MUSYNCH and

the SYNCH through an OR gate. If also the SMPLLOST signal is connected to the
same OR gate, it will be more of a “BlockedByProblemsWith9-2” signal.

No synchronization

845
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

IED

IEC 61850-9-2LE

Data

MU

IEC10000075-1-en.vsd
IEC10000075 V1 EN

Figure 392: Setting example without time synchronization

It is possible to use IEC 61850-9-2LE communication without time synchronization.

Settings in this case under Settings/Time/Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN/IEC
61850-9-2 are:
• HwSyncSrc: set to Off
• AppSynch: set to NoSynch. This means that protection functions will not be blocked
• SyncAccLevel : set to unspecified

Settings in PST in PCM600 under: Hardware/Analog modules/Merging units/MU01

• SyncMode: set to NoSynch. This means that the IED do not care if the MU
indicates loss of time synchronization.
• TSYNCERR signal will not be set since there is no configured time
synchronization source
• SYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block indicates when protection
functions are blocked due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED.
Since AppSynch is set to NoSynch this signal will not be set.
• MUSYNCH signal on the MU_4I_4U function block will be set if the datastream
indicates time synchronization is lost. However, protection functions will not be
blocked.

To get higher availability in the protection functions, it is possible to avoid blocking if

time synchronization is lost when there is a single source of analog data. This means
that if there is only one physical MU and no TRM, parameter AppSynch can be set to

846
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

NoSynch but parameter HwSyncSrc can still be set to PPS. This will keep analog and
binary data correlated in disturbance recordings while not blocking the protection
functions if PPS is lost.

19.4 LON communication protocol

19.4.1 Application

Station HSI Control Center

MicroSCADA

Gateway

Star coupler
RER 111

IED IED IED

IEC05000663-1-en.vsd
IEC05000663 V2 EN

Figure 393: Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation

system

An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IEDs in the 670 series through the LON bus from the
operator’s workplace, from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay
horizontal communication.

The fibre optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fibre
optic cables.

847
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Table 73: Specification of the fibre optic connectors

Glass fibre Plastic fibre
Cable connector ST-connector snap-in connector
Cable diameter 62.5/125 m 1 mm
Max. cable length 1000 m 10 m
Wavelength 820-900 nm 660 nm
Transmitted power -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)

The LON Protocol

The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from
Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks
and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can
communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay
communication, refer to the section Multiple command function.

Hardware and software modules

The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application,
but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting
the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from MicroSCADA, the application
library LIB670 is required.

The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process
package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA
applications.

The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in IEDs in the 670
series. This module contains the process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate the
process database for the control application in MicroSCADA.

Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software
tool applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to
know
• The node addresses of the other connected IEDs.
• The network variable selectors to be used.

This is organized by LNT.

The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can
scan the network for new nodes.

848
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can
be changed by LNT.

19.5 SPA communication protocol

19.5.1 Application
SPA communication protocol as an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103. The same
communication port as for IEC 60870-5-103 is used.

When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN, via WAN
and the utility office LAN, as shown in figure 394, and using the rear Ethernet port on
the optical Ethernet module (OEM), the only hardware required for a station
monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres from the IED to the utility substation LAN.

• PC connected to the utility office LAN.

Utility LAN

Remote monitoring

WAN

Substation LAN

IED IED IED

ANSI05000715-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000715 V3 EN

Figure 394: SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a
substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN

The SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can
include different IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a
computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by
telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU (former CCITT)
characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.

glass <1000 m according to optical budget

plastic <20 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

849
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the
PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fibre optic loop. A program
is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for
translation of the data that should be sent to the IED.

For the specification of the SPA protocol V2.5, refer to SPA-bus Communication
Protocol V2.5.

19.5.2 Setting guidelines

The setting parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI.

SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 uses the same rear communication port. Set the
parameter Operation, under Main menu /Settings /General settings /
Communication /SLM configuration /Rear optical SPA-IEC-DNP port /Protocol
selection to the selected protocol.

When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically
restarted.

The most important settings in the IED for SPA communication are the slave number
and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all
communication contact to the IED.

These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication and
for front channel communication.

The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number is
unique within the used SPA loop.

The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and
38400 baud. Refer to technical data to determine the rated communication speed for
the selected communication interfaces. The baud rate should be the same for the whole
station, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in
the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network are used, consider this when making the
communication setup in the communication master, the PC.

For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If
telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality of
the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the IED does not
adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set on the
local HMI.

850
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

19.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

19.6.1 Application

TCP/IP

Control
Station Center
HSI

Gateway

Star coupler

IED IED IED

ANSI05000660-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000660 V4 EN

Figure 395: Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation

automation system

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED

communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

When communicating locally in the station using a Personal Computer (PC) or a

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) connected to the Communication and processing
module, the only hardware needed is optical fibres and an opto/electrical converter for
the PC/RTU, or a RS-485 connection depending on the used IED communication
interface.

Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a
primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is
based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC

851
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

60870-5-103, refer to IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the

section 103, Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

Design

General
The protocol implementation consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurands)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

Hardware
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:·
Optical fibres, glass/plastic· Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU· PC/RTU

Commands
The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a dedicated
function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands
according to the protocol.

• IED commands in control direction

Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This
block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

Function block with pre defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block
includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

852
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private
range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.

Status
The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on
the:

• IED status indication in monitor direction

Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block
use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter
is defined for each input signal.

• Function status indication in monitor direction, user-defined

Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef.
These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the
private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input signal.

• Supervision indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor direction,
I103Superv. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Ground fault indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor direction,
I103EF. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1

Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltDis. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block is
suitable for distance protection function.

• Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2

Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltStd. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal.

853
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

This block is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, over-current and
ground-fault protection functions.

• Autorecloser indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction,
I103AR. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.

Measurands
The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the
standard.

• Measurands in public range

Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.

• Measurands in private range

Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction,

I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for
each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for
each block.

Fault location
The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in
reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and
reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED.

Disturbance recordings
• The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The
analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The
eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A
file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be
transferred again.
• The binary signals that are included in the disturbance recorder are those that are
connected to the disturbance function blocks B1RBDR to B6RBDR. These
function blocks include the function type and the information number for each
signal. For more information on the description of the Disturbance report in the
Technical reference manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those
connected to the disturbance function blocks A1RADR to A4RADR. The eight
first ones belong to the public range and the remaining ones to the private range.

854
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

Settings

Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication

General settings
SPA, DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 can be configured to operate on the SLM optical
serial port while DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 only can utilize the RS485 port. A single
protocol can be active on a given physical port at any time.

Two different areas in the HMI are used to configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

1. The port specific IEC 60870-5-103 protocol parameters are configured under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/
IEC6870-5-103/
• <config-selector>
• SlaveAddress
• BaudRate
• RevPolarity (optical channel only)
• CycMeasRepTime
• MasterTimeDomain
• TimeSyncMode
• EvalTimeAccuracy
• EventRepMode
• CmdMode
<config-selector> is:
• “OPTICAL103:1” for the optical serial channel on the SLM
• “RS485103:1” for the RS485 port
2. The protocol to activate on a physical port is selected under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/Port
configuration/
• RS485 port
• RS485PROT:1 (off, DNP, IEC103)
• SLM optical serial port
• PROTOCOL:1 (off, DNP, IEC103, SPA)

855
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN
GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN

Figure 396: Settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The general settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:
• SlaveAddress and BaudRate: Settings for slave number and communication speed
(baud rate).
The slave number can be set to any value between 1 and 254. The communication
speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s.
• RevPolarity: Setting for inverting the light (or not). Standard IEC 60870-5-103
setting is Enabled.
• CycMeasRepTime: See I103MEAS function block for more information.
• EventRepMode: Defines the mode for how events are reported. The event buffer
size is 1000 events.

Event reporting mode

If SeqOfEvent is selected, all GI and spontaneous events will be delivered in the order
they were generated by BSW. The most recent value is the latest value delivered. All
GI data from a single block will come from the same cycle.

If HiPriSpont is selected, spontaneous events will be delivered prior to GI event. To

prevent old GI data from being delivered after a new spontaneous event, the pending
GI event is modified to contain the same value as the spontaneous event. As a result,
the GI dataset is not time-correlated.

The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud rate can be found
on the local HMI under: Main menu/Configuration/Communication /Station
configuration /SPA/SPA:1 and then select a protocol.

Settings from PCM600

Event
For each input of the Event (EVENT) function there is a setting for the information
number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value
between 0 and 255. To get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks
in the event function is to be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the
event mask is to be set to ON_SET.

856
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description
of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Commands
As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with
eight output signals. Use PCM600 to configure these signals. To realize the
BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output
BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input
on an event function block. This input must have the information number 20 (monitor
direction blocked) according to the standard.

Disturbance Recordings
For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the
information number of the connected signal. The function type and the information
number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To get INF and FUN for the
recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input.
The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input.

Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Recorded analog channels are sent with ASDU26 and ASDU31. One information
element in these ASDUs is called ACC and indicates the actual channel to be
processed. The channels on disturbance recorder will be sent with an ACC according to
the following table:
DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning
1 1 IA
2 2 IB
3 3 IC
4 4 IG
5 5 VA
6 6 VB
7 7 VC
8 8 VG
9 64 Private range
10 65 Private range
11 66 Private range
12 67 Private range
13 68 Private range
14 69 Private range
15 70 Private range
16 71 Private range
Table continues on next page

857
Application Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Station communication

DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning

17 72 Private range
18 73 Private range
19 74 Private range
20 75 Private range
21 76 Private range
22 77 Private range
23 78 Private range
24 79 Private range
25 80 Private range
26 81 Private range
27 82 Private range
28 83 Private range
29 84 Private range
30 85 Private range
31 86 Private range
32 87 Private range
33 88 Private range
34 89 Private range
35 90 Private range
36 91 Private range
37 92 Private range
38 93 Private range
39 94 Private range
40 95 Private range

Function and information types

The function type is defined as follows:

128 = distance protection

160 = overcurrent protection

176 = transformer differential protection

192 = line differential protection

Refer to the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication,

specifying the information types supported by the communication protocol IEC
60870-5-103.

858
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 19
Station communication

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection

IED.

There is no representation for the following parts:

• Generating events for test mode

• Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation

EIA RS-485 is not supported. Glass or plastic fibre should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the
recommended interface to use (BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST
connectors are used with the optical power as specified in standard.

For more information, refer to IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.

19.7 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

19.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

19.7.2 Application
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16
binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function
block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

19.7.3 Setting guidelines

19.7.3.1 Settings

The parameters for the multiple command function are set via PCM600.

The Mode setting sets the outputs to either a Steady or Pulsed mode.

859
Application Manual
860
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 20
Remote communication

Section 20 Remote communication

20.1 Binary signal transfer

20.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

20.1.2 Application
The IEDs can be equipped with communication devices for line differential
communication and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same
communication hardware is used for both purposes.

Communication between two IEDs geographically on different locations is a

fundamental part of the line differential function.

Sending of binary signals between two IEDs, one in each end of a power line is used in
teleprotection schemes and for direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are
application possibilities, for example, blocking/enabling functionality in the remote
substation, changing setting group in the remote IED depending on the switching
situation in the local substation and so on.

When equipped with a LDCM, a 64 kbit/s communication channel can be connected to

the IED, which will then have the capacity of 192 binary signals to be communicated
with a remote IED.

20.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that
two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 397.
The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The distance with this solution is typical 110
km/68 miles.

861
Application Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Remote communication

C M
CM LD
LD
CM CM
LD LD

en06000519-2.vsd
IEC06000519 V2 EN

Figure 397: Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM

The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703
converter or with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 converter as shown in
figure 398. These solutions are aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in turn is
connected to a telecommunications transmission network (for example, SDH or PDH).

Multiplexer Multiplexer

Telecom. Network

*) *)

M CM
DC LD
L
M
CM DC
D L
L

*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703 or X.21 alternatively

en05000527.vsd
IEC05000527 V1 EN

Figure 398: LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer

When an external modem G.703 or X21 is used, the connection between LDCM and
the modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km/2 mile length. The IEEE/
ANSI C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.

Alternatively, a LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole
connector output can be used.

862
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 20
Remote communication

20.1.3 Setting guidelines

ChannelMode: This parameter can be set Enabled or Disabled. Besides this, it can be
set OutOfService which signifies that the local LDCM is out of service. Thus, with this
setting, the communication channel is active and a message is sent to the remote IED
that the local IED is out of service, but there is no COMFAIL signal and the analog
and binary values are sent as zero.

TerminalNo: This setting shall be used to assign an unique address to each LDCM, in
all current differential IEDs. Up to 256 LDCMs can be assigned a unique number.
Consider a local IED with two LDCMs:
• LDCM for slot 302: Set TerminalNo to 1 and RemoteTermNo to 2
• LDCM for slot 303: Set TerminalNo to 3 and RemoteTermNo to 4

In multiterminal current differential applications, with 4 LDCMs in each IED, up to 20

unique addresses must be set.

The unique address is necessary to give high security against incorrect

addressing in the communication system. Using the same number for
setting TerminalNo in some of the LDCMs, a loop-back test in the
communication system can give incorrect trip.

RemoteTermNo: This setting assigns a number to each related LDCM in the remote
IED. For each LDCM, the parameter RemoteTermNo shall be set to a different value
than parameter TerminalNo, but equal to the TerminalNo of the remote end LDCM. In
the remote IED the TerminalNo and RemoteTermNo settings are reversed as follows:
• LDCM for slot 302: Set TerminalNo to 2 and RemoteTermNo to 1
• LDCM for slot 303: Set TerminalNo to 4 and RemoteTermNo to 3

The redundant channel is always configured in the lower position, for

example
• Slot 302: Main channel
• Slot 303: Redundant channel

The same is applicable for slot 312-313 and slot 322-323.

DiffSync: Here the method of time synchronization, Echo or GPS, for the line
differential function is selected.

863
Application Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Remote communication

GPSSyncErr: If GPS synchronization is lost, the synchronization of the line differential

function will continue during 16 s. based on the stability in the local IED clocks.
Thereafter the setting Block will block the line differential function or the setting Echo
will make it continue by using the Echo synchronization method. It shall be noticed
that using Echo in this situation is only safe as long as there is no risk of varying
transmission asymmetry.

CommSync: This setting decides the Master or Slave relation in the communication
system and shall not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current
samples. When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other one as
Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave, as the
telecommunication system will provide the clock master.

OptoPower: The setting LowPower is used for fibres 0 – 1 km (0.6 mile) and
HighPower for fibres >1 km (>0.6 mile).

TransmCurr: This setting decides which of 2 possible local currents that shall be
transmitted, or if and how the sum of 2 local currents shall be transmitted, or finally if
the channel shall be used as a redundant channel.

In a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, there will be 2 local currents, and the grounding

on the CTs can be different for these. CT-SUM will transmit the sum of the 2 CT
groups. CT-DIFF1 will transmit CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 will
transmit CT group 2 minus CT group 1.

CT-GRP1 or CT-GRP2 will transmit the respective CT group, and the setting
RedundantChannel makes the channel be used as a backup channel.

ComFailAlrmDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm. In communication

systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration up to 50
ms. Thus, a too short time delay setting might cause nuisance alarms in these situations.

ComFailResDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm reset.

RedChSwTime: Time delay before switchover to a redundant channel in case of

primary channel failure.

RedChRturnTime: Time delay before switchback to a the primary channel after channel
failure.

AsymDelay: The asymmetry is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If a

fixed asymmetry is known, the Echo synchronization method can be used if the
parameter AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that the asymmetry
will always be positive in one end, and negative in the other end.

AnalogLatency: Local analog latency; A parameter which specifies the time delay
(number of samples) between actual sampling and the time the sample reaches the

864
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 20
Remote communication

local communication module, LDCM. The parameter shall be set to 2 when

transmitting analog data from the local transformer module, TRM. .

RemAinLatency: Remote analog latency; This parameter corresponds to the

LocAinLatency set in the remote IED.

MaxTransmDelay: Data for maximum 40 ms transmission delay can be buffered up.

Delay times in the range of some ms are common. It shall be noticed that if data arrive
in the wrong order, the oldest data will just be disregarded.

CompRange: The set value is the current peak value over which truncation will be
made. To set this value, knowledge of the fault current levels should be known. The
setting is not overly critical as it considers very high current values for which correct
operation normally still can be achieved.

MaxtDiffLevel: Allowed maximum time difference between the internal clocks in

respective line end.

865
Application Manual
866
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Section 21 Basic IED functions

21.1 Authority status ATHSTAT

21.1.1 Application
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block, which informs
about two events related to the IED and the user authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

The two outputs of ATHSTAT function can be used in the configuration for different
indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same purpose.

21.2 Change lock CHNGLCK

21.2.1 Application
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to make it
impossible to perform inadvertent IED configuration and setting changes.

However, when activated, CHNGLCK will still allow the following actions that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states

867
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT. The CHNGLCK
function is configured using ACT.

LOCK Binary input signal that will activate/deactivate the function, defined in ACT or SMT.

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked"
will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied
by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is
controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that
signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal
path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently
issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.

21.3 Denial of service DOS

21.3.1 Application
The denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit the CPU load that can be produced by Ethernet network traffic on the
IED. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that
too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be
the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD measure the IED load from

communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and
protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

868
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.3.2 Setting guidelines

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.4 IED identifiers

21.4.1 Application
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

21.5 Product information

21.5.1 Application
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change) that
uniquely identifies the IED:

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).

21.5.2 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different

869
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is
either changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

21.6 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

21.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

21.6.2 Application
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are

870
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be

supervised with four settable limits, that is low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-
high limit. The measure value expander block ( RANGE_XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
signals, that is below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.

21.6.3 Setting guidelines

There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.

21.7 Parameter setting groups

21.7.1 Application
Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different power system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can
cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially,
if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.

Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pre-tested
settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting
parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different
programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.

A function block, SETGRPS, defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is
done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each IED.
Only the number of setting groups set will be available in the Parameter Setting tool
for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

21.7.2 Setting guidelines

The setting ActiveSetGrp, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The
active group can also be selected with configured input to the function block
SETGRPS.

871
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal GRP_CHGD when an active
group has changed, is set with the parameter t.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between. Only the selected number of setting groups will be available in the
Parameter Setting tool (PST) for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

21.8 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL

21.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

21.8.2 Application
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power system/
Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

21.8.3 Setting guidelines

Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
SMAI" for description on frequency tracking.

21.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

21.9.1 Application
The analog summation block 3PHSUM function block is used in order to get the sum
of two sets of 3 phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that
might need it.

872
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.9.2 Setting guidelines

The summation block receives the three-phase signals from SMAI blocks. The
summation block has several settings.

SummationType: Summation type (Group 1 + Group 2, Group 1 - Group 2, Group 2 -

Group 1 or –(Group 1 + Group 2)).

DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref,DFTRefGrp1 or External

DFT ref) .

FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBasebase voltage setting (for each instance x).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

21.10 Global base values GBASVAL

21.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

21.10.2 Application
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

873
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

21.10.3 Setting guidelines

VBase: Phase-to-phase voltage value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

IBase: Phase current value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

SBase: Standard apparent power value to be used as a base value for applicable
functions throughout the IED, typically SBase=√3·VBase·IBase.

21.11 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

21.11.1 Application
The Signal matrix for binary inputs function SMBI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBI represents the
way binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

21.11.2 Setting guidelines

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI available
to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user shall give a name to SMBI
instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These
names will define SMBI function in the Signal Matrix tool. The user defined name for
the input or output signal will also appear on the respective output or input signal.

21.12 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

21.12.1 Application
The Signal matrix for binary outputs function SMBO is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBO represents the
way binary outputs are sent from one IED configuration.

874
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.12.2 Setting guidelines

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
available to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to
SMBO instance and SMBO outputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.
These names will define SMBO function in the Signal Matrix tool.

21.13 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

21.13.1 Application
The Signal matrix for mA inputs function SMMI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMMI represents the
way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

21.13.2 Setting guidelines

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI available to
the user in the Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMMI
instance and SMMI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.

21.14 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

21.14.1 Application
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle,
frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This
information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

21.14.2 Frequency values

The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive sequence
voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If

875
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is blocked.

IntBlockLevel, is set in % of VBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B
and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. Note
that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-
L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three
inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate
positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 399 to make SMAI calculating a
positive sequence voltage.

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 399: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when
setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the
same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive
sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not
work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
(SAPFRC, 81) due to that all other information except frequency and
positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

876
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

21.14.3 Setting guidelines

The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current. SMAI outputs give information about every
aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates, and so on – 244 values in total). Besides the block “group name”,
the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names that can be set
directly in ACT.

Application functions should be connected to a SMAI block with same task cycle as
the application function, except for e.g. measurement functions that run in slow cycle
tasks.

DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid only for function block SMAI1 .

Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the SMAI block use.

These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations. The
setting InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency.
DFTRefGrp(n) will use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group
is selected, an adaptive DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal
frequency from own group. The setting ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on
what is connected to input DFTSPFC.

The setting ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the
SMAI (if it is Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected
Ph-N or Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated as long as they are possible to calculate. E.g.
at Ph-Ph connection A, B and C will be calculated for use in symmetrical situations. If
N component should be used respectively the phase component during faults IN/VN
must be connected to input 4.

Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate
only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph
+N. negation means rotation with 180° of the vectors.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBase (for each instance n).

877
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Even if the user sets the AnalogInputType of a SMAI block to

“Current”, the MinValFreqMeas is still visible. However, using the
current channel values as base for frequency measurement is not
recommendable for a number of reasons, not last among them being
the low level of currents that one can have in normal operating conditions.

Examples of adaptive frequency tracking

Preprocessing block shall only be used to feed functions within the

same execution cycles (e.g. use preprocessing block with cycle 1 to
feed transformer differential protection). The only exceptions are
measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU,VMMXU, etc.) which
shall be fed by preprocessing blocks with cycle 8.

When two or more preprocessing blocks are used to feed one protection
function (e.g. over-power function GOPPDOP), it is of outmost
importance that parameter setting DFTReference has the same set value
for all of the preprocessing blocks involved

878
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:1 1
SMAI2:2 2
SMAI3:3 3
SMAI4:4 4 AdDFTRefCh7
SMAI5:5 5
SMAI6:6 6
SMAI7:7 7
SMAI8:8 8
SMAI9:9 9
SMAI10:10 10
SMAI11:11 11
SMAI12:12 12

Task time group 2

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:13 1 AdDFTRefCh4
SMAI2:14 2
SMAI3:15 3
SMAI4:16 4
SMAI5:17 5
SMAI6:18 6
SMAI7:19 7
SMAI8:20 8
SMAI9:21 9
SMAI10:22 10
SMAI11:23 11
SMAI12:24 12

Task time group 3

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:25 1
SMAI2:26 2
SMAI3:27 3
SMAI4:28 4
SMAI5:29 5
SMAI6:30 6
SMAI7:31 7
SMAI8:32 8
SMAI9:33 9
SMAI10:34 10
SMAI11:35 11
SMAI12:36 12

IEC07000197.vsd
IEC07000197 V2 EN

Figure 400: Twelve SMAI instances are grouped within one task time. SMAI blocks
are available in three different task times in the IED. Two pointed
instances are used in the following examples.

The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application. The adaptive frequency tracking is needed in IEDs that belong to
the protection system of synchronous machines and that are active during run-up and

879
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

shout-down of the machine. In other application the usual setting of the parameter
DFTReference of SMAI is InternalDFTRef.

Example 1
SMAI1:13
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:1 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000198 V1 EN

Figure 401: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference

Assume instance SMAI7:7 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking . Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e.
frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence
voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 400 for numbering):

SMAI1:1: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp7 to route SMAI7:7 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI1:1 to use SMAI7:7 as
reference (see Figure 401) SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for
SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12 to use SMAI7:7 as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input of

SMAI1:13 as reference (SMAI7:7)

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI7:7)

880
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

Example 2
SMAI1:1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:13 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000199 V1 EN

Figure 402: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT
reference.

Assume instance SMAI4:16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference
instance (i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive
sequence voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 400 for numbering):

SMAI1:1 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp4 to route SMAI4:16 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 for SMAI1:13 to use SMAI4:16 as
reference (see Figure 402) SMAI2:14 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 to
use SMAI4:16 as reference.

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

881
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

21.15 Test mode functionality TEST

21.15.1 Application
The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many
included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature
that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions.

This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.

21.15.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode

The IEC 61850 Test Mode has improved testing capabilities for IEC 61850 systems.
Operator commands sent to the IEC 61850 Mod determine the behavior of the
functions. The command can be given from the LHMI under the Main menu/Test/
Function test modes menu or remotely from an IEC 61850 client. The possible values
of IEC 61850 Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850
Edition 1 and Edition 2.

To be able to set the IEC61850 Mod the parameter remotely, the PST
setting RemoteModControl may not be set to Off. The possible values
are Off, Maintenance or All levels. The Off value denies all access to
data object Mod from remote, Maintenance requires that the category
of the originator (orCat) is Maintenance and All levels allow any orCat.

The mod of the Root LD.LNN0 can be configured under Main menu/Test/Function
test modes/Communication/Station communication/IEC61850 LD0 LLN0/
LD0LLN0:1

When the Mod is changed at this level, all components under the logical device update
their own behavior according to IEC61850-7-4. The supported values of IEC61850
Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2. The
IEC61850 test mode is indicated with the Start LED on the LHMI.

The mod of an specific component can be configured under Main menu/Test/

Function test modes/Communication/Station Communication

It is possible that the behavior is also influenced by other sources as well, independent
of the mode, such as the insertion of the test handle, loss of SV, and IED configuration

882
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

or LHMI. If a function of an IED is set to Off, the related Beh is set to Off as well. The
related mod keeps its current state.

When the setting Operation is set to Off, the behavior is set to Off and it is not possible
to override it. When a behavior of a function is Offthe function will not execute.

When IEC61850 Mod of a function is set to Off or Blocked, the Start

LED on the LHMI will be set to flashing to indicate the abnormal
operation of the IED.

The IEC61850-7-4 gives a detailed overview over all aspects of the test mode and
other states of mode and behavior.

• When the Beh of a component is set to Test, the component is not blocked and all
control commands with a test bit are accepted.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Test/blocked, all control commands with a
test bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are
blocked by the LN. Only process-related outputs on LNs related to primary
equipment are blocked. If there is an XCBR, the outputs EXC_Open and
EXC_Close are blocked.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Blocked, all control commands with a test
bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are blocked
by the LN. In addition, the components can be blocked when their Beh is blocked.
This can be done if the component has a block input. The block status of a
component is shown as the Blk output under the Test/Function status menu. If the
Blk output is not shown, the component cannot be blocked.

21.15.2 Setting guidelines

Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the TestMode=
Enabled” state. If, the IED is set to normal operation (TestMode = Disabled), but the
functions are still shown being in the test mode, the input signal INPUT on the
TESTMODE function block might be activated in the configuration.

21.16 Self supervision with internal event list

21.16.1 Application
The protection and control IEDs have many functions included . The included self-
supervision with internal event list function block provides good supervision of the
IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault.

883
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate
possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through
the software communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the:

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the IED is changed.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is
full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list contents cannot be modified, but the whole
list can be cleared using the Reset menu in the LHMI.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.

The information can only be retrieved with the aid of PCM600 Event Monitoring Tool.
The PC can either be connected to the front port, or to the port at the back of the IED.

21.17 Time synchronization

21.17.1 Application
Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection
and control system. This makes it possible to compare events and disturbance data
between all IEDs in the system.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating
faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can be compared
to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the entire
station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation.

In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources:

884
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 21
Basic IED functions

• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)

• DNP
• GPS
• IEC103
• SNTP
• IRIG-B
• SPA
• LON
• PPS

Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:

• Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time,
that is year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
• Fine time messages are sent every second and comprise only seconds and
milliseconds.

The setting tells the IED which of these that shall be used to synchronize the IED.

It is possible to set a backup time-source for GPS signal, for instance SNTP. In this
case, when the GPS signal quality is bad, the IED will automatically choose SNTP as
the time-source. At a given point in time, only one time-source will be used.

21.17.2 Setting guidelines

System time
The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.

Synchronization
The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization
(TIME) are set via local HMI or PCM600.

TimeSynch
When the source of the time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the
parameter is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from
PCM600. The setting alternatives are:

FineSyncSource which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
• GPS

885
Application Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Basic IED functions

• GPS+SPA
• GPS+LON
• GPS+BIN
• SNTP
• GPS+SNTP
• GPS+IRIG-B
• IRIG-B
• PPS

CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• SNTP
• DNP

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called BININPUT.

The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the
communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and
milliseconds).

The parameter SyncMaster defines if the IED is a master, or not a master for time
synchronization in a system of IEDs connected in a communication network
(IEC61850-8-1). The SyncMaster can have the following values:
• Disabled
• SNTP -Server

Set the course time synchronizing source (CoarseSyncSrc) to Disabled

when GPS time synchronization of line differential function is used. Set
the fine time synchronization source (FineSyncSource) to GPS. The
GPS will thus provide the complete time synchronization. GPS alone
shall synchronize the analogue values in such systems.

21.17.2.1 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

886
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

Section 22 Requirements

22.1 Current transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
current signal. Saturation of the current transformers (CTs) will cause distortion of the
current signals and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the
dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been designed
to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.

22.1.1 Current transformer classification

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to
correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to
saturate. To fulfill the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfill
the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.

There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are
usually specified and manufactured according to some international or national
standards, which specify different protection classes as well. There are many different
standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are three different types of CTs:

• High remanence type CT

• Low remanence type CT
• Non remanence type CT

The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic
core without any airgaps and a remanent flux might remain almost infinite time. In this
type of transformers the remanence can be up to around 80% of the saturation flux.
Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX, TPX according to IEC,
class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and non gapped class C, K according
to ANSI/IEEE.

The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made
with a small air gap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of the
saturation flux. The small air gap has only very limited influences on the other
properties of the CT. Class PXR, TPY according to IEC are low remanence type CTs.

887
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This
type of CT has relatively big air gaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically
zero level. In the same time, these air gaps reduce the influence of the DC-component
from the primary fault current. The air gaps will also decrease the measuring accuracy
in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non
remanence type CT.

Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is
possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869–2 standard is used to specify
the CT requirements for the IED. The requirements are also specified according to
other standards.

22.1.2 Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator.
The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non
remanence type CTs (TPZ).

The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120
ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

Depending on the protection function phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and three-phase

faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions for example, close in
forward and reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The
dependability and security of the protection was verified by checking for example, time
delays, unwanted operations, directionality, overreach and stability.

The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor
additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not
acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for
the security, for example, faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the
almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to
operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The
requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications.

It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to

avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and
economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (for
example, TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current
transformers of high remanence type (for example, P, PX, TPX) the small probability
of fully asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the

888
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional
margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at
approximately zero voltage (0°). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40° and 90°. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.

22.1.3 Fault current

The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or
single phase-to-ground faults. The current for a single phase-to-ground fault will
exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the
total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the
relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.

22.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current
transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary
wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For ground faults the loop includes the
phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For
three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the
resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral
wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.

The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary
wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-ground faults and the phase
resistance, the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the
calculation for three-phase faults.

As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-to-ground
fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-ground fault can
be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden.

In isolated or high impedance grounded systems the phase-to-ground fault is not the
dimensioning case. Therefore, the resistance of the single secondary wire can always
be used in the calculation for this kind of power systems.

889
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

22.1.5 General current transformer requirements

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data for
example, maximum load and/or maximum fault current. It should be verified that the
current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that
are to be detected with the selected CT ratio. It should also be verified that the
maximum possible fault current is within the limits of the IED.

The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very
sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive
setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer
should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that
is less than ±1% (for example, 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used
it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.

22.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non
remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is
concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore
recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used.

The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard.
Requirements for CTs specified according to other classes and standards are given at
the end of this section.

22.1.6.1 Transformer differential protection

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal
that is larger than the maximum of the required rated equivalent limiting secondary
e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 30 × Int × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1672 V1 EN (Equation 525)

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 2 × Itf × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1673 V1 EN (Equation 526)

890
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

where:
Irt The rated primary current of the power transformer (A)

Itf Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs and
the power transformer (A)
Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop
resistance containing the phase and neutral wires must be used for faults in
solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be
used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1
A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A

In substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement,

the fault current may pass two main CTs for the transformer differential protection
without passing the power transformer. In such cases and if both main CTs have equal
ratios and magnetization characteristics the CTs must satisfy equation 525 and
equation 527.

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = If × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1674 V1 EN (Equation 527)

where:
If Maximum primary fundamental frequency current that passes two main CTs without passing the
power transformer (A)

22.1.6.2 Distance protection

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal
that is larger than the maximum of the required rated equivalent limiting secondary
e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Ik ma x × Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1675 V1 EN (Equation 528)

891
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

Ikzone 1 × Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1676 V1 EN (Equation 529)

where:
Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and
reverse faults (A)
Ikzone1 Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for faults at the end of zone 1
reach (A)
Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). In solidly
grounded systems the loop resistance containing the phase and neutral wires
should be used for phase-to-ground faults and the resistance of the phase wire
should be used for three-phase faults.
In isolated or high impedance grounded systems the resistance of the single
secondary wire can always be used.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1
A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A

a This factor depends on the design of the protection function and can be a
function of the primary DC time constant of the close-in fault current.
k This factor depends on the design of the protection function and can be a
function of the primary DC time constant of the fault current for a fault at the set
reach of zone 1.
The a- and k-factors have the following values for the different types of distance
function:
High speed distance: (ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS)
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 400 ms
k = 3 for primary time constant Tp £ 200 ms
Quadrilateral distance: (ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS and ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS and
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS)
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 100 ms
a = 3 for primary time constant Tp > 100 and £ 400 ms
k = 4 for primary time constant Tp £ 50 ms
k = 5 for primary time constant Tp > 50 and £ 150 ms
Mho distance: (ZMHPDIS)
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 100 ms
a = 3 for primary time constant Tp > 100 and £ 400 ms
k = 4 for primary time constant Tp £ 40 ms
k = 5 for primary time constant Tp > 40 and £ 150 ms

892
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

22.1.6.3 Restricted ground fault protection (low impedance differential)

The requirements are specified separately for solidly grounded and impedance
grounded transformers. For impedance grounded transformers the requirements for the
phase CTs are depending whether it is three individual CTs connected in parallel or it
is a cable CT enclosing all three phases.

Neutral CTs and phase CTs for solidly ground transformers

The neutral CT and the phase CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary
e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the maximum of the required rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = 30 × I rt × × ç Rct + RL + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2237 V2 EN (Equation 530)

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = 2 × I etf × × ç Rct + RL + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2238 V2 EN (Equation 530)

Where:
Irt The rated primary current of the power transformer (A)

Ietf Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-ground fault current that passes the
CTs and the power transformer neutral (A)
Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

Ir The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT ()

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (Ω). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used.
SR The burden of a REx670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA / channel for IR = 1 A
and SR = 0.150 VA / channel for IR = 5 A

In substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-breaker arrangement,

the fault current may pass two main phase CTs for the restricted ground fault
protection without passing the power transformer. In such cases and if both main CTs
have equal ratios and magnetization characteristics the CTs must satisfy Requirement
(12) and the Requirement (14) below:

893
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = I ef × × ç Rct + RL + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2239 V2 EN (Equation 531)

Where:
Ief Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-ground fault current that passes two
main CTs without passing the power transformer neutral (A)

Neutral CTs and phase CTs for impedance grounded transformers

The neutral CT and phase CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
Eal that is larger than or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
Ealreq below:

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = 3 × I etf × × ç Rct + RL + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2240 V2 EN (Equation 532)

Where:
Ietf Maximum primary fundamental frequency phase-to-ground fault current that passes
the CTs and the power transformer neutral (A)
Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

Ir The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (Ω)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (Ω). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used.
SR The burden of a REx670 current input channel (VA). SR = 0.020 VA / channel for Ir =
1 A and SR = 0.150 VA / channel for Ir = 5 A

In case of three individual CTs connected in parallel (Holmgren connection) on the

phase side the following additional requirements must also be fulfilled.

The three individual phase CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
Eal that is larger than or equal to the maximum of the required rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

894
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = 2 × I tf × × ç Rct + RLsw + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2241 V2 EN (Equation 533)

Where:
Itf Maximum primary fundamental frequency three-phase fault current that passes the
CTs and the power transformer (A).
RLsw The resistance of the single secondary wire and additional load (Ω).

In impedance grounded systems the phase-to-ground fault currents often are relatively
small and the requirements might result in small CTs. However, in applications where
the zero sequence current from the phase side of the transformer is a summation of
currents from more than one CT (cable CTs or groups of individual CTs in Holmgren
connection) for example, in substations with breaker-and-a-half or double-busbar double-
breaker arrangement or if the transformer has a T-connection to different busbars, there
is a risk that the CTs can be exposed for higher fault currents than the considered phase-
to-ground fault currents above. Examples of such cases can be cross-country faults or
phase-to-phase faults with high fault currents and unsymmetrical distribution of the
phase currents between the CTs. The zero sequence fault current level can differ much
and is often difficult to calculate or estimate for different cases. To cover these cases,
with summation of zero sequence currents from more than one CT, the phase side CTs
must fulfill the Requirement (17) below:

I sr æ S ö
Eal ³ Ealreq = I f × × ç Rct + RL + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION2242 V2 EN (Equation 534)

Where:
If Maximum primary fundamental frequency three-phase fault current that passes the
CTs (A)
RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (Ω). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires shall be used.

22.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other

standards
All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with the IEDs if they
fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard. From
different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to

895
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By

comparing this with the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is
possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to
some other standards are specified below.

22.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR

A CT according to IEC 61869-2 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. Ealf. The
value of the Ealf is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal. Therefore, the CTs
according to class P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. Ealf that fulfills the
following:

E 2 max > max E alreq

EQUATION1383 V3 EN (Equation 535)

22.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old
IEC 60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X)

CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated
knee point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX and PXR, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting
secondary voltage Val for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding
Eal according to IEC 61869-2. It is not possible to give a general relation between the
Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore,
the CTs according to class PX, PXR, X and TPS must have a rated knee point e.m.f.
Eknee that fulfills the following:

S = TD × SOld + (1 - TD ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1893.ANSI V1 EN (Equation 536)

22.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A

rated secondary terminal voltage VANSI is specified for a CT of class C. VANSI is the
secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated
secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of
standardized VANSI values for example, VANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A
corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as
follows:

896
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

E a lANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + VANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + 20 × IS N × Z bANS I

EQUATION1682 V1 EN (Equation 537)

where:
ZbANSI The impedance (that is, with a complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C
class (W)
VANSI The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfils the following:

E alANSI > maximum of E alreq

EQUATION1384 V2 EN (Equation 538)

A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee point voltage VkneeANSI

that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee point voltage VkneeANSI
normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS.
VkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according
to IEC 61869-2. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/IEEE must have a knee point
voltage VkneeANSI that fulfills the following:

VkneeANSI > 0.75 × (max imum of E alreq )

EQUATION2101 V2 EN (Equation 539)

The following guide may also be referred for some more application aspects of ANSI
class CTs: IEEE C37.110 (2007), IEEE Guide for the Application of Current
Transformers Used for Protective Relaying Purposes.

22.2 Voltage transformer requirements

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
input signal. Transients caused by capacitive Coupled voltage transformers (CCVTs)
can affect some protection functions.

Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

The capacitive voltage transformers (CCVTs) should fulfill the requirements according
to the IEC 61869-5 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferro-
resonance requirements of the CCVTs are specified in chapter 6.502 of the standard.

897
Application Manual
Section 22 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Requirements

The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2
and T3 are specified in chapter 6.503 of the standard. CCVTs according to all classes
can be used.

The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and
correct operation with CCVTs.

22.3 SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

22.4 IEC 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements

The merging units that supply the IED with measured values via the process bus must
fulfill the IEC61850-9-2LE standard.

This part of the IEC61850 is specifying “Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) –

Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802”, in other words – sampled data over Ethernet. The
9-2 part of the IEC61850 protocol uses also definitions from 7-2, “Basic
communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)”. The set of functionality implemented in the
IED (IEC61850-9-2LE) is a subset of the IEC61850-9-2. For example the IED covers
the client part of the standard, not the server part.

The standard does not define the sample rate for data, but in the UCA users group
recommendations there are indicated sample rates that are adopted, by consensus, in
the industry.

There are two sample rates defined: 80 samples/cycle (4000 samples/sec. at 50Hz or
4800 samples/sec. at 60 Hz) for a merging unit “type1” and 256 samples/cycle for a
merging unit “type2”. The IED can receive data rates of 80 samples/cycle.

Note that the IEC 61850-9-2 LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled
values, only the transportation. Thus, the accuracy of the current and voltage inputs to
the merging unit and the inaccuracy added by the merging unit must be coordinated
with the requirement for actual type of protection function.

898
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 22
Requirements

Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are for
example anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D
conversion inaccuracy, time tagging accuracy etc.

In principle the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with the
merging unit, shall have the same quality as direct input of currents and voltages.

899
Application Manual
900
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 23
Glossary

Section 23 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication

901
Application Manual
Section 23 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in
both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in
both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line

902
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 23
Glossary

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up
to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FUN Function type

903
Application Manual
Section 23 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Glossary

G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver
module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GTM GPS Time Module
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements
for protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).

904
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 23
Glossary

IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)

Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of 12.5mm
diameter and greater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40-
Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP54-Dust-protected, protected against splashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode

905
Application Manual
Section 23 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Glossary

LNT LON network tool

LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components

906
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 23
Glossary

PSM Power supply module

PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data
in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault

907
Application Manual
Section 23 1MRK 504 138-UUS -
Glossary

SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de
facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further
signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures

908
Application Manual
1MRK 504 138-UUS - Section 23
Glossary

(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination

of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for
aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes
known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude
zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the ground-fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

909
Application Manual
910
911
Contact us

1MRK 504 138-UUS - © Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation